Q* 


DRILL  REGULATION 

(PROVISIONAL) 

1917 


PREPARED  AND  EDITED  AT  THE 

ARxMY  WAR  COLLEGE 


DECEMBER,  1917 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNSIEXT  PPJNTDJG  OFFICE 

191S 


WaU    DEP.UiTMENT. 

Documeut  No.  723. 
Office  of  The  Adjutnnt  General. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
VwvsHiNGTON,  Dcccmher  10,  W17. 
The  followincr  pamphlet,  entitled  "  Machir.e-Gnn  Drill  lie.s^u- 
lations    (Provisional),  1917,"  is  published  for  the  information 
and  guidance  of  all  concerned. 
[300.7  A.  G.  O.] 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War  : 

JOHN  RIDDLE. 
Major  Goicral,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official  : 

H.  P.  :\rcCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

Ill 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Pago. 

Definitions 11 

Syllabus  of  machine-gun  training 15 

Dudes  of  officers l,") 

Gun  squads IG 

Specialists 18 

Part  I.— Drill. 

Section        I.  Introduction 22 

Training  of  ofllicers 25 

II.  Orders,  commands,  and  signals 26 

Orders 27 

Commands 27 

Bugle  signals 28 

V.Tiistle  signals ' 29 

Arm  signals 29 

Arm  signals  for  controling  fire 31 

Signals" for  control  of  fire 3.3 

in.  General  rules  for  drills  and  formations 33 

IV.  The  school  of  the  soldier 39 

Position  0!  the  soldier 40 

The  rests 40 

Eyes  right  or  left 41 

Facings 41 

Salute  with  the  hand 41 

Steps  and  marchings 42 

Quicktime 42 

To  mark  time 43 

The  half  step 43 

Side  step 43 

Back  step 43 

To  halt 44 

To  march  by  the  flank 44 

To  march  to  the  rear 44 

Change  step 44 

V.  The  squad  (dismounted) 45 

To  form  the  squad 45 

Alignments 40 

To  "take  intervals  and  distances 47 

The  oblique  march 48 

To  turn  on  mo-^ing  pivot -58 

To  turn  on  fixed  pivot 48 

To  follow  the  corporal 50 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers 50 

To  increase  or  diminish  intervals 50 

The  assembly 51 

Kneeling  and  lying  down 51 

1 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS. 


Section      VI.  Company  drill  (dismounted) „ 

Postof officers, noncommissioned oiiicers, etc.  (in line) 

To  form  the  company 

To  dismiss  the  company 

Alignments 

To  open  ranks 

To  close  ranks 

To  form  on  march  in  column  of  squads  from  line 

To  change  direction  while  in  column  of  squads 

To  form  column  of  squads  from  line  and  change  dii-ection. . 

To  form.  Une  from  column  of  squads 

To  form  llanu  column  of  flies  from  line 

VII.  The  gun  squad  (dismounted,  preliminary  exercises) 

Teaching  elementary  drill 

To  form  gun  squad 

To  post  the  gun  squad 

To  examine  the  gun 

To  mount  the  gun 

To  dismount  the  gun 

To  load  the  gun  for  automatic  fire 

To  load  for  single  shots 

To  lay  the  gun 

To  fire  the  gun 

To  suspend  firing 

To  cease  firina; 

VIII.  The  squad  ( mounted) 

Squad  drill " 

To  post  thp  gun  squad 

To  reform  the  gun  squad  in  front  of  the  carts 67 

To  march  to  the  front 67 

To  change  direction 67 

To  march  to  the  rear OS 

To  oblique 68 

To  resume  the  march  to  the  front 6S 

To  halt 68 

To  prepare  for  action 68 

To  reassemble  the  squad 69 

IX.  The  section  (mounted) 69 

To  change  direction 69 

To  form'line  to  the  front 70 

To  form  line  to  a  flank 70 

On  right  into  line 70 

To  form  column  and  change  direction 71 

To  form  close  line 71 

To  re-form.  line 71 

To  form  eiose  line  to  a  flank 72 

To  form  column  of  squads  to  a  Oank 72 

To  prepare  for  action 72 

To  reassemble  the  squads 72 

X.  The  platoon  (mounted) ." 73 

To  change  direction 73 

To  form  line  to  the  xront 73 

To  form  column  of  sections 73 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS.  3 

Section       X.  The  platoon  (mounted)— Continued.  Page. 

To  form  line  to  the  flank "4 

On  Tizht  into  line 74 

To  form  column  and  chan9:e  direction 74 

To  form  line  of  sections 75 

To  form  close  line 75 

To  form  clo?e  line  to  a  flank 76 

To  form  column  of  squads  to  a  flank 76 

To  prepare  for  action 76 

To  reassemble  the  squads 76 

XI.  The  company  (moimtcd) 76 

Posts  of  'officers  and  noncommissioned  officers 77 

To  form  the  company 77 

To  dismiss  the  company 77 

Company  drill  (mounted) 78 

To  chauEce  direction 78 

To  form  line  to  the  front 78 

To  form  line  to  the  flank 79 

On  right  into  line « 79 

To  form  column  and  change  direction 80 

Toformlino  of  subdirisions 80 

To  form  column  of  subdiyisions 80 

To  form  close  line 80 

To  re-form  line 81 

To  form  close  line  to  a  fiank 81 

To  form  column  of  squads  to  a  flank 81 

To  prepare  for  action 81 

To  reassemble  the  squad 82 

XII.  The  battalion  (mounted) 82 

To  form  the  bat  talion 82 

To  dismiss  the  battalion S3 

Part  II.— Tactics. 

Section         I.  Thcuscof  machine  S'-ms  (general) 84 

II.  The  attack 87 

III.  The  defense 92 

IV.  Selection  of  firuig  position 94 

V.  Marches  (general) 96 

Protection  of  the  march 9S 

VI.  Adyance  guard 9!) 

VII.  Rearguard 100 

VIII.  Outposts 100 

IX.  Village  fighting 101 

X.  Ammunition  supply lOt 

Part  III.— Duties  of  the  Personnel,  Precedi.vg  .vnd  During  Combat. 

Section         I.  General  rules 107 

Reconnaissance  officers 103 

Agents 103 

Scouts Ill 


4  TASLE  OF   CONTENTS. 

Page, 

Section      II.  The  major 113 

In  attack 113 

Arranges  for  events  subsequent  to  the  attack 11-1 

During  the  attack 115 

In  defense 115 

Arranges  for  events  subsequent  to  the  enemy's  aUack 116 

During  the  enemy's  attack .' lift 

III.  Battalion  St  at! 117 

Sergeant  major 117 

Supply  sergeant 117 

Stable  sergeant US 

The  signal  corporal US 

Signal  private 118 

IV.  The  captain 118 

In  attack 118 

Arranges  for  events  subsequent  to  the  attack 120 

During  the  attack 121 

In  defense 121 

During  the  enemy's  attack 12'i 

Events  subsequent  to  the  attack 122 

V.  First  lieutenant  and  reconnaissance  officer 123 

VI.  Enlisted  personnel 124 

First  sergeant 124 

The  sergeant  (company  range  taker) 124 

The  corporal  (company  clerk) 124 

Signal  corporal 124 

Signal  private 125 

Company  buglers 125 

VII.  The  platoon  loader 125 

In  attack 125 

During  the  attack 12i) 

Events  subsequent  to  the  attack 120 

In  defei^se  (deUberate  occupation  of  position) 127 

During  the  attack 127 

Events  subsequent  to  the  attack 127 

VIII.  The  section  leader 128 

In  attack 128 

During  the  attack 128 

E  vents  suteequent  to  the  attack 129 

In  defense  (deliberate  occupation  of  position) 129 

During  the  attack 130 

Events  subsequent  to  the  attack 13a 

IX.  The  corporal ISO 

In  attack ISu 

During  the  attack 131 

In  defense 131 

X.  The  private 132 

In  attack  and  in  defense 132 

XL  Thecunners 133 

No.  1 133 

No.  2 134 

No.  3 134 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS.  6 

Section    XI.  The  gunnors— Continued.  ^^®- 

No.  4 134 

No3.  5  and  6 134 

No.  7 134 

No.  S 134 

XII    The  r,er3onnel  with  the  tniins 135 

"second  lieut'enaiit  in  charge  of  trains  (active  operaiion) 135 

Mess  sergeant '. 135 

Supply  aergcant 135 

Stable' sereean!; 135 

in  attack  and  in  deicnse 135 

P.vuT  IV.— Cake  and  II.indi-ing  of  Animals. 

Soctinn         I.  Genera' principlcr. 136 

II .  ( '. onorai  nt  ies  for  the  care  of  anima-s 137 

To  rool  a  heated  animal 138 

TIL  The  stable  personnel 139 

1 V.  S I  able  rules 139 

V.  The  permanent  stable 140 

VI.  The  picket  line 142 

VII.  Field  picket  ;ine3 142 

VIII.  Grooming 143 

IX.  Feeding 148 

X .  Watering 151 

XI.  Shoeing 152 

Inspection  of  shoeing 154 

XII.  Sick  animals 155 

Dress!n.:;s 157 

Instruments 157 

Past  V.— The  Soldier  (Mounted). 

Section         I.  Standard  required 158 

II.  Preliminary  instmction 158 

General  provisions 158 

Horse  equipment 159 

To  fold  the  sadd'e  blanket 159 

To  put  on  the  blaaket  and  surcingle IGO 

To  saddle 160 

McCielJand  saddle 161 

Fitting  the  saddle 162 

To  remove  the  saddle 16-1 

To  put  on  the  double  bridle 165 

Halter  bridle,  model  of  1912 165 

To  lit  the  snaflle  bridle 166 

To  fit  the  double  bridle 167 

To  remove  the  double  bridle 168 

To  roil  the  overcoat 168 

The  blanket  rcll  for  individually  mounted  men 168 

To  pack  the  saddlebags 169 

In  right  pocket 169 

In  left  pocket 169 

To  pav'k  the  saddle 169 

To  stand  to  heel 170 

To  stand  to  horse 170 


6  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

Section       11.  rreliminary  instruction— Continued.  Page. 

To  mrunt 170 

Position  of  the  soldier 171 

Stirrups 171 

To  dismount 172 

Gathering  the  horse 172 

To  move  forward 173 

To  halt 173 

Establishing  confidence 174 

Gaits  of  horses 175 

Analysis  of  gaits 175 

The  walli 175 

The  trot 176 

The  gallop 176 

III.  Leading  the  mule 177 

IV.  Harness 177 

To  harness 178 

To  hitch 178 

To  unhitch 179 

To  unharness 179 

Fitting  harness 180 

Care  of  harness 181 

V.  Care  of  saddle  horses 182 

B  lanl-ct 1S2 

Unsaddling 182 

Bitting .■ 184 

Part  VI.— Managemext  of  Dkaft  Aximals, 

Section         I.  Rules  for  drivers 185 

Rules  of  the  road 185 

Position  of  the  driver 186 

Holding  the  reins 186 

Handling  the  team 187 

To  start 187 

Pulling  up 188 

Rules.. 188 

II.  Care  of  draft  animals 188 

Pakt  VII.— Miscellaxeous. 

Section         I.  Transportation 193 

By  rail 193 

By  water 207 

II.  Camps 2fi8 

Semipermanent  camps  (general) 208 

The  selection  of  camp  sites  in  the  field 210 

Water  supplv 211 

Kitchen ..:.". 212 

Disposal  of  excreta 213 

Daily  routine,  interior  gi;ard,  etc 214 

III.  Ceremonies 21.') 

General  rules 215 

Reviews 216 

General  rules 216 


TABLE  OP   CONTENTS.  7 

Section     III.  Ceremonies— Continired.  Page. 

Reviev/  of  machine-gun  battalion 218 

Parades 220 

General  rules 220 

Machine-gun  cat talion 221 

Ecgimental  parade 222 

IV.  Inspections 223 

Dismounted  inspections 223 

Battalion  inspection 224 

Mounted  inspccticas 224 

Corapany  iiispeciion 224 

Ciun 225 

Battalion  inspection  (mounted) 227 

Inspection  of  shelter-tent  camps 229 

BattaUcu  or  company  muster 229 

V.  Honors  and  salutes 229 

VI.  Bugle  calls 234 

Warning  calls 234 

Formation  calls 234 

Alarm  calls 235 

Service  calli^ 235 

Drill  signals 235 

Bugle  calls 237 

1.  First  call 237 

2.  Guard  mounting 237 

3.  Fulldress 23S 

4.  Overcoats 238 

5.  Drill 238 

6.  Stc.ble 238 

7.  V,  ater 239 

8.  Boots  and  saddles 239 

9.  Assembly 239 

10.  .Adjutant's  call 239 

11.  To  the  colors. , 239 

12.  Fire 240 

13.  To  arms 240 

14.  To  horse 241 

15.  Eeveille 241 

16.  Tletreat... 241 

17.  Tattoo 243 

18.  Call  to  quarters 246 

19.  Taps 246 

20.  Mess 246 

21.  Sick 247 

22.  Church '.  .  247 

23.  Recall 247 

24.  Issue 247 

25.  Officers'  call '....'..'..  248 

26.  Captains' call \,  248 

27.  First  sergeants' call.... 248 

2S.  Fatigue 248 

20.  School 249 

30.  Thegeneral 249 


8  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS. 

Section        VI.  Bugle  calls— Continued.  Page. 

Bugle  signals 250 

'  31.  Assemble— March 250 

32.  Attention 250 

33.  Attention  to  orders 250 

34.  Forward— March 250 

35.  Halt 250 

36.  Double  time— March 250 

37.  To  the  rear— March 251 

3S.  Commence  firing 251 

39.  Ceasefiring \ 251 

40.  Fix  bavonets 251 

41.  Charge 251 

42.  r.oirte  order 252 

43.  Platoons 252 

44.  Squads  right  (bv  the  right  flank)— March 252 

45.  Squads  Ich  (by  the  left  flank)— March 252 

40.  Column  right— Inarch 252 

47.  Column  left— March 253 

48.  r.ish  turn— March 253 

49.  Left  turn— March 253 

50.  TightobUaue 253 

51.  Left  oblique 253 

52.  Ri£ht  front  into  Ime 253 

53.  Left  front  into  line 254 

54.  On  right  Into  line 254 

55.  On  left  into  line 2.54 

5(3.  Eight  into  line 254 

57.  Left  into  line 2.54 

5S.  President's  march 255 

59.  OeneraPs  march 256 

60.  Flourishes  and  re  vie  V,- 256 

61.  Sound  off 257 

62.  Rogue's  march ..  ^ 257 

63.  Funeral  march 253 

64.  Quickstep  No.  1 259 

65.  Quickstep  No.  2 2C0 

66.  Quic>rstop  No.  3 200 

67.  Quickstep  Xo.  4 251 

6S.  Quickstep  Xo.  5 261 

69.  Qtuckstep  Xo.  6 202 

70.  Quickstep  Xo.  7 202 

71.  Quickstep  Xo.  8 263 

72.  Quickstep  Xo.  9 264 

73.  Quickstep  Xo.  10 260 

Section     I.  Manual  of  the  pistol 267 

Nomenclature  and  care 267 

G  eneral  principles 267 

The  manual , 2&S 

Position 270 

The  grip 271 

The  trigger  squeeze 271 

Position  and  aiming  drills 271 

Quick  lire 272 

To  fire 273 


TABLE   or   CONTENTS.  9 

Part  VIII.— Manuals. 

Page. 

Section    II.  ilanual  of  arms  (for  men  armed  vrith  the  rifle) 273 

Rifle  salute 278 

The  bayonet 2/^8 

The  inspection 279 

To  dismiss  the  squad 280 

To  stack  and  take  aiTns 2S0 

Loading  and  firing 281 

To  load 2S2 

To  set  thcsishl 283 

Battle  sight. 283 

To  suspend  firing 2S4 

To  cease  firing 284 

III.  Care  of  the  rifle 284 

IV.  Manual  of  the  saber 285 

V.  Manual  of  tent  pitching 288 

To  make  camD 288 

Shelter  tents 288 

To  pitch  shelter  tents 288 

Double  shelter  tents 289 

Single  sleeping  bag 2S0 

Double  sleeping  bag 200 

To  strike  shelter  tents 290 

To  pitch  heavy  rentage 291 

To  strike  hea\v  tentage 292 

To  fold  tents. .'. 292 

Illustrations,  Plates  I  to  IX 294 


-  fiJU^uJy 


^1 


/^ 


vz 


ki 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY,  1917. 


DEFINITIONS. 

AJignmcnt:  A  straight  line  upon  whicli  several  elements  are 
formed,  or  are  to  be  formed ;  or  the  dressing  of  several  elements 
upon  a  straight  line. 

Band  of  fire:  A  band  of  fire  is  formed  when  the  cone_of  fire^ 
is  directed  at  one  point  and  the  gun  is  so  elevated  that  the 
rnaxHGiun  ordinate  of  the  trajectory  will  not  be  greater  than  the^ 
height  of  a  man.  "  ' ^ 

Base:  Tlie  element  on  which  a  movement  is  regulated. 

Battle  sight:  The  position  of  the  rear  sight,  rifte  or  machine 
gun,  when  the  leaf  is  laid  down. 

Barrage  (curtain  of  fire)  :  A  machine-gun  barrage  is  the  com- 
bined sheaf  of  several  p;i,ii],^  i\\  }nr\^,  rmio-P  It  may  be  em- 
ployed defensively,  but,  normally,  it  is  delivered  over  the  heads 
of  friendly  troops  to  cover  their  advance.  AYhen  it  is  moved 
forv/ard  by  time  table,  or  at  a  stated  distance  in  advance  of  the 
leading  elements  of  the  attack,  it  is  termed  a  creeping  barragr. 

Bursts:  A  term  applied  tt)  a  greater  or  less  number  of  shots  /- 
delivered  automatically_ between  successive  releases  of  the  U 
trigger. 

Carts:  Includes  botli  the  gun  and  ammunition  carts. 

Center:  The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Close  line:  Is  a  formation  in  which  the  squads  are  in  line 
with  an  interval  of  3  paces  between  carts. 

Column:  A  formation  in  which  the  elements  are  placed  one 
behind  another.  •c^t^x-.'  ^v^ 

Combat  train:  Includes  the  two  4-mule  ammunition  wagons,  (I 
the  kitchen  wagon,  and  two  spare  gun  carts.  '^ 

Combined  sights:  Are  used  for  the  same  purpose  as  searching 
fire,  i.  e.,  to  secure  distribution  in  the  direction  of  depth.     For 

11 


12  MACKINE-GTJIT  DEILL  HEGULATIONS,   1917. 

diis  fire  two  or  more  guns  must  be  employed,  and  such  differ- 
ences made  in  the  elevation  of  the  guns  or  each  pair  of  guns 
tliat  their  beaten  zones  will  overlap  and  a  greater  total  depth 
of  beaten  zone  be  thus  secured. 

Combined  sigJits  and  searching  fire:  As  a  means  of  adjustment, 
^  must  not  be  confused  with  tliese  methods  Vviien  used  in  Are  for 
eft'ect.  As  a  method  of  adjustment,  they  are  used  wheix_the 
range  can  not  be  determined  with  suflicient  precision  to  admit 
of  the  use  of  a  single  elevation.  In  fire  for  effect  they  are  used 
on  cleep  targets,  which  would  be  but  partially  covered  by  a  single 
elevatTon. 

Conduct  of  fire:  The  employment  of  the  technical  means  neces- 
sary to  cause  fire  of  the  desired  nature  to  be  brought  to  bear 
upon  the  target. 

Covering  fire:  Fire  delivered  to  facilitate  the  movement  of 
troops  and  minimize  their  losses. 

Depioy:  To  extend  the  front.  In  general  to  change  from  col- 
umn to  line  or  from  close  order  to  extended  order. 

Lcpih:  The  space  from  liead  to  rear  of  any  formation,  includ- 
ing the  lending  and  rear  elements.  The  depth  of  a  man  is  as- 
sumed to  bo  12  inches. 

Distance:  Space  betwecm  elements  in  the  direction  of  depth. 
Distance  is  measured  from  the  back  of  tlie  man  in  front  to  the 
breast  of  the  man  in  rear.  The  distance  between  ranks  is  40 
inches  in  both  line  and  column. 

Distributed  fire,  traversing  fire,  or  trap  traversing:  This 
method  of  fire  is  employed  against  linear  targets  and  is  applied 
by  means  of  a  series  of  short  bursts,  of  from  5  to  10  shots.  The 
object  being  to_cover_as  wide  a  front  as  possible  with  effective 
,^X^  and  v\'ithout  using  more"  mhmunifion  than  is  absolutely 
necessary. 

Element:  A  file,  squad,  platoon,  company,  or  larger  body,  form- 
ing part  of  a  still  larger  body. 

Field  train:  Includes  the  supply  wagon,  the  water  and  ration 
carts. 

File:  Two  men,  the  front-rank  man  and  the  corresponding  man 
of  the  rear  rank.  The  front-rank  man  is  the  file  leader.  A  file 
which  has  no  rear-rank  man  is  a  blank  fde.  The  term  file 
applies  also  to  a  single  man  in  a  single-rank  formation. 


(p 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGULATIONS,   1917.  13 

File  closers:  Such  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  a 
company  as  are  posted  in  rear  of  tlie  line;  for  convenience,  all 
men  posted  in  the  lino  of  file  closers. 

Fire  direction:  The  tactical  direction  of  one  or  more  units 
with  a  view  to  bringing  their  lire  to  bear  on  the  right  place  at 
the  right  time. 

Fire  discipline:  That  condition  resulting  from  training  and 
practice  v.iiich  insures  an  orderly  and  efficient  working  of  the 
personnel  in  the  delivery  of  fire. 

Fire  for  effcci:  Has  for  its  object  the  infliction  of  losses  upon 
the  enemy. 

Firing  company:  Includes  the  guns  and  personnel  necessary 
for  the  conduct  and  control  of  fire. 

Fixed  fire:  Is  that  in  which  the  gun  is  directed  and  fii:e  deliv- 
QVQ0L  at  a  small  target,  or  at  a  single  aiming  point  on  a  large 
target. 

Flank:  The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  in  column; 
also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  rhe  line. 

Fhinkino  fire:  Fire  directed  from  a  position  slightly  in  ad- 
van  'o  of  a  line,  parallel  to  that  line. 

Formation:  Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command.  The 
placing  of  all  fractions  in  their  order  in  line,  in  column,  or  for 
battle. 

Front:  The  space,  in  v,-idth,  occupied  by  an  element,  either  in 
line  or  in  column.  The  front  of  a  man  is  assumed  to  be  22 
inches.     Front  also  denotes  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guide:  An  officer,  noncommissioned  officer,  or  private  upon 
whom  the  command  or  elements  thereof  regulates  its  march. 

Head:  The  leading  element  of  a  column. 

Horse  length:  A  term  of  measurement.  For  convenience  in 
estimating  space  a  horse  length  is  considered  as  3  yards ;  by 
actual  measurement  it  is  about  S  feet.  — — — 

,    Indirect  fire:  There  are  two  kinds  of  indirect  fire: 

First.  When  the  target  is  visible  but  indistinct.  In  this  case 
an  ojaxiliary  aiming  mark  is  selected  and  the  sight  so  corrected 
that  the  cone  ofTTrewIirstrike  the  target. 

Second.  When  the  target  is  masked  from  the  gun  position. 
In  this  case  the  gun  must  be  laid  by  quadrant  elevation. 

Fnfiladc  fire:  Fire  that  is  directed  on  a  trenciror  line  from  a 
position  in  prolongation  of  the  trench  or  line. 


14  MACHINE-GTJN  DUILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Inferral:  Space  between  elements  of  the  same  line.  The 
interval  between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches  and  is  measured  from 
elbow  to  elbow.  Between  companies,  squads,  etc.,  it  is  measured 
from  the  left  elbow  of  the  left  man  or  guide  of  the  group  on  the 
right  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  ris:ht  man  or  guide  of  the  group 
en  the  left. 

Left:  The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 

Line:  A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are  abreast 
of  each  other.  When  the  elements  are  in  column  the  formation 
is  called  a  line  of  columns. 

Machine  guns  (machine  gun,  heavy  type)  :  A-Weap_on._firing 
nfie  ammunition, aiitomatijcajly.  It  is  provided  with  a  stable 
mount,  suitable  mechanism'  for  controlling  the  motion  of  the 
barrel  in  elevating^  and  azimuth,  and  is  capable  of  sustained 
firing.  i^.a  dsi-f'lt'.--ri. 

Mask  (obstruction)  :  At]  obiect,  or  a  feature  of  the  terrain, 
which  prevents  the  rjunner  from  seeing  the  target.  Friendly 
troops  which  prevent  firing  on  a  target. 

Order,  close:  The  formation  in  which  the  units  in  double  rank 
are  arranged  in  line  or  in  column  with  normal  intervals  and 
distances. 

Order,  CTfended:  The  formation  in  which  the  units  are  sepa- 
rated by  intervals  greater  than  in  close  order. 

Overhead  fire:  Fire  that  is  directed  over  the  heads  of  friendljr 
troops.  ■ 

Pace:  Thirty  inches ;  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time. 

Point  of  rest:  The  point  at  which  a  formation  begins.  Speclli- 
cally,  the  point  toward  which  units  are  aligned  in  successive 
movements. 

Position  in  readiness:  In  .attajck,  is  a  position  in  which  the 
troo])s  are  ready  to  move  to  The  "attack  but  are  held  until  more 
accurate  information  of  the  enemy  may  be  secured. 

In  defense,  is  a  position  selected  and  occupied  by  the  defensive 
troops. 

•  Rantfing  -fire:  Has  for  its  obiect  the  determination  of  the  verl- 
ticatioi:  of  the  firing  data  when  no  range-finding  instrument  is 
available:       '"^ 

Rank:  A  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side. 

Right:  Tlio  right  extremity  or  elem.ent  of  a  body  of  troops. 

Searching  fire:  Is  that  in  which  the  fire  of  the  gun  is  distrib- 
uted _iii  the  direction  of  depth. 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  15 

Squad  distance:  The  distance  from  the  head  of  the  gun  mule 
to  the  rear  of  the  ammunition  cart  (10  paces),       '^' '' 

The  squad  or  guii  squad:  The  gun  squad  consists  of  the  qoy- 
j)oraI  and  eight  privates. 

The  squad  mounted:  Consists  of  the  squad  plus  the  gun  and 
annnunition  carts,  mules,  etc. 

SYLLABUS  OF  MACHINE-GUN  TEAINING. 

(Four  weeks,  six  ^Yorking  days  per  week.) 

Tlie  order  in  which  the  daily  work  is  taken  up  can  not  be 
precisely  prescribed.  The  following  is  suggested  as  a  logical 
arrangement.  Variations  will  suggest  th/emselves  to  the  in- 
structor during  the  course  of  instruction.  The  main  point  is  to 
have  the  instruction  progressive  with  as  little  loss  of  time  as 
possible  In  passing  from  one  subject  to  another. 

DUTIES   OF   OFFICEKS. 

Captain — General  supervision  of  all  instruction. 

Senior  lieutenant — Instruction  of  scout  and  agents  of  com- 
munication. 

Next  lieutenant — Instruction  of  gun  squads. 

Next  lieutenant — Instruction  of  signal  men. 

Next  lieutenant — Animals,  stables,  and  transportation.  Range 
taker. 

Junior  lieutenant — Assistant  to  other  officers ;  familiarizes 
himself  thoroughly  v/ith  their  -vs'ork. 

Scliools  for  officers  and  uoncomniisaioncd  officers. — Prepara- 
tion for  succeeding  day's  work. 

SpeciGltsts. — All  men  of  machine-gun  companies  must  thor- 
oughly understand  the  mechanics  and  the  service  of  the  gun. 
so  that  they  may  be  readily  interchanged  and  the  fire  of  the  gun 
may  not  be  interrupted  by  casualties.  To  this  end  all  specialists 
attend,  during  the  first  two  weeks,  the  drills  of  the  gun  squads 
in  the  forenoon,  during  the  second  two  weeks  in  the  afternoon, 
and  during  such  other  hours  as  they  are  not  receiving  instruc- 
tion in  their  special  duties.  The  latter  are  given  in  detail  under 
heading  "  Specialists." 


16 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

GUN  SQUADS. 


Subjects.                                   12 

3|. 

5 

6 



General  description  of  gun !    1 

I 

Stn'pDiDfi  and  assembling  of  c^Ji 

1 

.            

1 

Mechanism ! 

S 

2    1    2    "i" 

Drill— Loading  and  unloading: !    1 

l^ecture-^As'^ignment  of  dut-?3                          i    1 

e 

2 

a 

o     . 

il 

Semaphore  signals 

Visual  training  and  estimating  distances 

Lecture — Charact^ri'^tics  of  the  macMnc  "Tin 

1' 
1 

1 





f 

Spare-part  box — Shown  and  exnlainefi 

1 
1 
1 

1 
2 

1 
1 

Belt  uilmg— By  hand  and  v/ith  belt-fdling  1 

Care  and  preservation  of  machine  gun ' 

.... 

Lecture  on  insnccticn  of  machine  gun. .           i        i 

1 

i  " 

1 

1 

1 
"2" 

2 
i" 

1 

.... 
2 

Packing  barrels ! 

Lecture— Methods  of  fire 

51 

Points  to  be  attended  to  before  leaving  camp. 

Designation  and  recognition  of  targets 

o 

7 

1 

Immediate  action  to  jSe  taken  in  case  oi  stop- 
page   

Drill— Diatronal  traversing 

Stoppages — Probable  causes  and  remedies 

Automatic-'^'Vht  correction 

Overhead  fire                                                  •    ' 

Points  to  be  attended  to  before,  during,  and  1 

Lectiu'e— Ta^^tical  handlin<^  of  machiiie  gun<=  ' 

Range  cards — Vttac"'-"  and  defense                     1 

•■'T"'" 

Mounting  and  dismounting  guns  on  imeven 

Fire  orders 

Concealment  o^  guns  in  po='.itiou 

1 

Tactical  exercises,  follo\^-ed  by  detailed  criti- 
cism, moving  guns  across  country  by  hand 
in  various  formations " 



i 

MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  aEGULATIONS,   1917. 
GUN  SQUADS. 


17 


^ 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

1 
15  1  l(j 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

21 

Hours. 

1 

1 

tc 

o 
"o 

1 

o 

o 
o 

1 

'H  ■ 

3 

o 
o 

fi 

1 

■"r""!'"'" 

« 

1 

.... 

1 

o 

.... 

i 

1 

.... 

.... 

9 
1 

1 

1 

::::;::: 

1 

h  1...- 

i- 

i    h 

.... 

t 

5 
5 
1 

1 



1 

i""i "" 

1 

1 

3 

•'I'"" 

2 

1 

3 

1 

...| 

1 

.... 

1 

......... 

1 

...1.. 

4 

1 

1 

'  1  ■ 

1 

1 

2       1 

1"" 

6 

L... 

i 

1 

I 

... 

Jr     I         h     \      P^ 

1 

3 

1 
>> 

CI 

t 

2' 

1 
1 

2 

.... 

5 

T 

c? 
3 

1 

4 

1 

:^ 

s 

1 

•2' 

h 

....L--- 

1 

1 
1 

1 
1 

0 

1 

^ 

2 

i 

1 

;::::: 

1 

::::::: 

r 

2 

1 
1 
3 

1 

1 

3 

.... 

a. 



1 

2 

i 





1 

G 

4 

4 

■; 

8 

1 

4 

4 

! 

!.... 

2 

2 

2 

3 

o 

11 

18  MACHINE-GUN  BEILL  REGULATIONS,  1317. 

(JUX  SQUADS— Continued. 


Sribji'cts. 

1   i    2   j   3       4       5   16:7       S 

1                       ! 

Lecture— Contents  of  guns  end  ammunition          i 

I 
1 

'. 

Xieht  fi'^rn?                                            ...          '  .     ' 

Indirect  fire  '....' 1 

Lectures — Saturday        1 i L. 

Tests                       ■                                     .               '        1        1 

1    !  1    '  1    i  1       ] 

1 

1 

Schools— Officers 

1    '1       1    !  1 

1        '        i 

1 

1 

1 

SPECIALISTS, 


Signalmen— Visual  training  and  estimating 
distance 

1 
1 
1^ 

1* 

1 
.... 

* 

i 

, 

* 

h 

Selections  of  signal  station— Background 

Signaling — Semaphore                    

1 
i" 

1 
1 

1* 

1 

1 

u 

Signaling— Wigwag,  short  and  long  distance.. 

Signaling— Arm  aud  hand 

Service  buzzer — Description  and  care 

Laving  wire  and  establi'^liin"  stations 

4 
I 

Sending  and  receiving  messages 

Range    taker— Construction    and    care    of 
instrument 

2 

Setting  up  instrument — Methods  of  adjust- 

2 
2 

1 
1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

Practioal  exercises  in  range  finding 

1 
1 

2 
1' 

Preparation  of  ran^e  ca^'ds — \ttack 

2 

Scouts  and  agents— Visual  training  and  esti- 
mating distan  ce 1 

i 

h 

\l 

h 

Selection  of  signal  station— Background 

Signaling— Semaphore T 

t 

i 

h 

Signaling— Wigwag,  short  and  long  distance.. 
Signaling — Arm  and  hand  .  .           ... 

Writing  messages  and  reports 

"i' 

.... 

.... 



Verbal  messages j 

Orderly  and  messenger  duties j  1 

Route  sketches ^  i 

.... 

:* 



i 

i" 
.... 

Lee  I -ore — Principles  of  patrolling 1 

1 

1 

Lecture— Orders  to  and  equiprnent  of  leader.! 

Practical  patrolling— Reports ■ 

Stable  managMnent,  stable  rules,  picket  lines. 

n 

.... 

.... 

MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

GUN  SQUADS— Continued. 


19 


0 

10 

11 

12 

13      H 

15  1  16 

17 

IS 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

Hours. 

i 

1 
3 

1 

::::::::::: 

3 
1 

1 

.... 

4 

10 

1         1 

i 

1 

:::::;;:::::::!:;:: 

:.:::: 

1        i" 

1 

t    i 

■■■•!  ^ 

8 

I    1 

-1 

1.  .■  ..1 

1 

1 

..'.S'... 

12 

1 

1 

............. 

Ill 

^ 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1      1 
1      1 

1      1 
1      1 

:::::: 

20 

20 

SPECIALISTS. 


X 

h 

4 

.... 

1 

.... 

1 

1 

1 

.... 

1 



10 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1^ 

1 
1 


1 

, 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

20 
20 

1 

3 

2 

1- 

1 

1 

? 

1 

.... 

1- 

.... 

8 

.... 

5 

Practical  work  with 
company. 

•) 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 

11 

10 

9 

s 

I 



.... 

\ 



I 



h 

f 

h 
I' 

:::: 

.... 

1 
.... 

h 

1' 

"I' 
.... 



1' 
.... 



1^ 

h 

"l" 

h 

h 
l' 

'i" 

I 

% 

1' 
.... 



10 
10 

J. 

...  . 







2 
3 
2 

3 
0 



1 

1 

1 

If 

.... 

1 

.... 

1 



1> 





1 

.... 

1 

9i 

20  MAGHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

SPECIALISTS— Continued. 


i 

Subjects.                                   1 

2       3    1    4        5 

'• 

' 

^ 

Care  of  animals,  grooming,  feeding,  watering 

Sicl^  animals,  shoeing          .             

1     'l     i....'...J 

....'..-J  1     1  1 

i 


% 

.... 

Saddlin"'  blanket  saddle  cinching  bitting 

1         1         ' 

I 

Drivers- 
Stable  managem^t .  rules .  picket  lines ...    1^ 
Care    of    animals,    grooming,    feeding, 
watering ._ 1 

Sick"^imals  slioein"'                                     1 

■*"!'■   1"  T 

1        1     !  1     !  1 

1    1  i  1  '  1 
1  '  1  '  1    1 

Adjustment  of  harne'ss,  practical  driving .  1    ^ 

1   I  1   i  1   ;  1 



MACHINE- GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

SPECIALISTS-Continued. 


21 


9  10  ;  11 

!     j 

12 

13  1  11  1  15 

i<) 

17 

IS   19 

20 

21   22  23 

24 

Hours. 

■  i 

1 

1 

1    1 

2| 
3 

4 

...:....|  , 



....1.-.. 

.... 



1 
I""" 

.... 

1 

...I  h  t     h 



■■i"i;"";::TT 

..:. 

L 

.... 

i 

3^ 

r  :.;:: 

- 

1 



8 

\          \ 

j  1 

1 

i  i....  i 
..  ■  1  

i 

1 
1 

.... 



1 

1 

1 

11 

1"" 

i 

1 

PART  I. 
DEILL. 


Section  I. — Inteoduction. 

1.  A  Drill  Regulation  prescribes  fixed  movements  and  gives 
the  basic  principles  vrhich  govern  the  instruction  and  training 
necessary  for  the  maneuvering  of  troops  in  peace  and  war.  In- 
struction is  imparted  by  means  of  explanations,  lectures,  fixed 
drills,  or  ceremonies,  and  by  field  and  combat  exercises. 

2.  The  object  of  fixed  movements  (drills  and  ceremonies)  is 
to  teach  a  methodical  and  systematic  nmnner  in  the  perform- 
ance of  duty  and  to  insure  prompt  obedience  to  commands  and 
orders.  Therefore,  all  drills  should  be  cxecuteil  with  great 
attention  to  detail. 

The  personnel  must  be  so  thoroughly  drilled  that  in  the 
excitement  of  action  the  duties  will  be  performed  as  a  matter 
of  second  nature. 

3.  Field  and  combat  exercises  are  for  the  purpose  of  illustrat- 
ing the  application  of.  given  principles  to  concrete  cases  in  the 
field.  In  these  exercises  assumed  situations  are  employed,  each 
exercise  being  conducted  as  it  v\-ould  be  under  the  actual  war 
conditions  assumed,  and  concluded  with  a  discussion  on  the 
ground  of  the  exercises  and  principles  involved.  These  exer- 
cises serve  as  a  guide  as  to  the  best  way  of  dealing  with  the 
usual  problems  M'hich  may  arise.  But  every  problem  which 
arises  has  its  own  best  solution,  and  this  solution  must  be 
evolved  by  the  officer  on  the  spot.  His  success  will  depend  upon 
the  extent  to  whicli  he  has  prepared  himself  by  previous  thought 
and  study  and  by  previous  practice  in  the  solution  of  similar 
problems. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGL-LATIONS    1917.  23 


Practice  by_officers  in  makin^jiropjer  dispositions 
refill IrGnients   nnVT    (fevpToriinonrs   of    tactical    situat 


.to_meet_the 

•eqglrenients  aiul  deveT(Spinents  of  tactical  situations  is  the 
nest  tramiii£jo_r_sei:Yice_in  \v:aE. 

^^^^^^T-'TT^iTructioii  iu  peace  must  tlierefore  be  conducted  with  a 
view,  first,  of  drilling  the  personnel  thoroughly  in  their. habitual 
duties ;  second,  of  affording  otiicers  and  men  practice  and  experi- 
ence in  dealing  with  the  situations  and  difficulties  apt.  to  arise  in 
canipaign. 

In  order  that  this  instruction  will  follow  a  definite  and  logical 
plan  unit  commanders  should  prepare  weekly  or  monthly  pro- 
grams of  instruction  for  their  organization. 

5.  It  is  essential  that  the  machine-gun  officers  possess  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  mechanical  ability,  be  resourceful,  have  plenty  of 
initiative,  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  Infantry  Drill  and 
Field  Service  Regulations,  and  understand  the  application  of 
combat  principles  to  concrete  cases  on  the  battle  field. 

6.  Officers  rshould  be  trained  to  tliink  quickly  and  logically 
and  to  assume  responsibilities  unhesitatingly.  Errors  of  judg- 
ment should  always  be  pointed  out  by  the  proper  commanders, 
but  such  errors  should  not  be  criticized  harshly,  as  such  crit- 
icism causes  timidity  and  consequent  inaction,  which  are  gen- 
erally more  productive  of  harm  than  is  misdirected  zeal. 

7.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  machine-gun  commanders  to  impart 
instruction  in  accordance  with  the  principles  announced  herein. 
The  means  employed  should  conform  to  the  spirit  of  these  regu- 
lations, but  in  the  application  of  given  principles  to  the  solution 
of  practical  problems  the  methods  prescribed  are  to  be  taken  as 
guides  only.  Great  latitude  should  be  allowed  in  adapting  these 
methods  to  the  peculiar  conditions  of  different  cases,  and  sub- 
ordinates should  be  encouraged  in  every  way  possible  to  exer- 
cise their  skill  and  ingenuity  in  solving  the  problems  which  pre- 
sent themselves  in  service. 

On  the  one  hand,  uniformity  of  mechanisms  and  commands  is 
requisite,  in  order  that  the  efficiency  of  instructed  personnel 
may  be  uninterrupted,  due  to  the  differing  opinions  of  changing 
unit  commanders,  and  that  reserves  returning  to  the  ranks  may 
fulfill  important  duties  from  the  beginning  of  their  renewed 
serviceT  i>n  the  other  hand,  no  progress  toward  improved  metli- 
ods^is  possible*\viThout  study  and-tggtTrf-yitg^jestgfl  (^TnTfTgig^'  nntt* 
variations. 


24  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

To  secure  the  ol)jects  first  mentioned  the  methods,  mecha- 
nisms, and  commands  prescribed  herein  will  be  habitually  prac- 
ticed. To  develop  ideas  regarding  improvements  of  materiel 
and  methods  officers  vrill  be  encouraged  to  investigate,  to  develop 
and  to  report  upon  suggestions  from  any  source  for  the  improve- 
ment of  efficiency,  with  a  view  to  iheir  adoption  by  the  proper 
authority.  But  such  investigations  vrill  not  be  permitted  to 
interfere  with  proficiency  in  prescribed  methods. 

8.  A  progressive  order  should  be  followed  in  all  instruction. 
The  annual  course  of  instruction  should  commence  with  the 
smallest  unit  and  proceed  to  the  larger  ones  in  succession,  cul- 
minating in  the  field  maneuvers. 

9.  The  efficiency  of  nn  instructor  is  measured  not  only  by  his 
knowledge  of  his  subject  but  also  by  his  ability  to  hold  the..at- 
tention  of  those  whojn  he  is  endeavoring  to  instruct.  When  the 
men  lo.se  intej-est  and  their  attention  wanders,  continuation  of 
the  exercise  is  useless.  Hence  short  and  frequent  drills  arc 
better  tJian  long  ones,  and  effort  must  he  made  to  vary  the  exer- 
cises so  as  to  avaid  monotony. 

10.  The  instructor  maintains  a  military  bearing  and,  by  a 
quiet,  firm  demeanor,  sets  a  proper  example  to  the  men.  Faults 
are  corrected  gradually,  without  nagging  or  shouting. 

11.  Officers  and  noncoujmissioned  officers  of  each  grade  are 
frequently  practiced  in  the  duties  of  the  next  higher  grade  or 
command. 

12.  Thorough  training  of  the  individual  soldier  is  the  basis 
of  efficiency.  Great  precision  and  attention  to  detail  are  essen- 
tial in  this  instruction  in  order  that  the  soldier  may  acquire  that 
habit  of  implicit  obedience  to  orders  and  of  accurate  perform- 
ance of  his  individual  duties  ivhich  is  indispensable  in  combined 
training. 

13.  If  nil  the  individuals  of  a  company,  including  the  officers, 
are  tliorouglily  trained,  a  comparatively  short  period  of  work 
in  formal  company  drills,  occupation  of  positions,  marches,  etc.. 
v.ith  tlie  company  as  a  vrhole  will  suffice  to  produce  an  efficient 
oi-ganization  for  field  service.  On  the  other  hand,  no  amount  of 
drill  of  ;)  c-ompany  as  a  wholo  is  likely  to  nroduce  an  ethcient 
nruaniziiijcu  if  its  meml)ers  are  not  thoroughly   instructed  aj 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  25 

14.  Iiistructiou  of  the  gun  squad  as  a  whole  will  not  be  taken 
up  to  tlie  exclusion  of  individual  training  until  the  men  are 
thoroughly  proficient  in  the  nomenclature  and  operation  of  all 
those  parts  of  the  guns,  instruments,  and  other  materiel  which 
the  men  are  called  upon  to  handle  in  actual  firing. 

It  will  often  be  the  case  that  sections  and  platoons  will  be 
detached  from  their  companies  and  required  to  act  upon  their 
own  resources.  It  is  therefore  important  that  special  emphasis 
he  laid  vpon  the  instruction  of  sections  and  platoons  as  inde- 
pendent iniits. 

15.  So  far  as  concerns  the  enlisted  personnel,  the  most  im- 
portant element  of  a  company's  efficiency  on  the  battle  field  is 
its  fire  discipline.  The  basis  of  good  fire  discipline,  as  of  all 
other  matters,  is  thorough  individual  instruction,  and  it  can  be 
secured  and  maintained  only  by  constant  and  vigorous  drills 
and  other  exercises.  To  this  end  gam  squads  will  be  given  daily 
such  exercises  as  will  serve  to  fix  their  attention  and  cultivate 
their  dexterity. 

Efficient  gun  squads  can  not  be  improvised.  The  duties  of 
gunners  and  the  manual  dexterity  required  for  their  perform- 
ance are  easily  forgotten. 

16.  Instruction  will  be  so  arranged  that  during  drill  hours 
neither  men  nor  animals  will  be  idle. 

17.  Guns,  carts,  harness,  and  other  materiel  will  be  properly 
cleaned,  put  in  order,  and  inspected  by  an  officer  as  soon  as 
practicable  after  each  drill  or  exercise.  When  stables  are  held 
after  drill,  such  men  as  may  be  needed  vvdll  be  detailed  to  clean 
and  place  the  materiel  in  proper  order. 

18.  Both  morning  and  afternoon  hours  will  be  utilized  for 
instruction,  sufficient  time  being  allowed  for  the  police  of  bar- 
racks, stables,  and  grounds  and  for  the  care  of  the  personal 
equipments  and  effects  of  thr»  men.  All  work  should  normally 
be  done  under  the  immediate  direction  of  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers and  under  the  supervision  of  officers. 

T^AI^'IXG    OF   OFFICERS. 

19.  Responsibyity  for  the  training  cf  oflicers  rests  upon  re^- 
mental  and  battalion  commanders. 

20.  Among  the  requisites  essential  in  the  training  of  a 
machine-gun  officer  are  the  following: 


26  MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

Practical  understanding:  of  the  functions  of  all  parts  of  the 
materiel.  In  addition,  company  officers  must  be  able  to  dis- 
mount and  to  assemble  each  part  of  the  mechanism  without  ref- 
erence to  handbooks  and  without  assistance  other  than  the  nec- 
essary labor,  and  to  perform  with  skill  all  the  duties  required 
in  the  qualitlcation  of  crunners. 

Thorou5i-h  kuowled,cre  of  animals  under  the  saddle  and  in  draft ; 
how  best  to  ride,  control,  and  manage  them  in  order  to  conserve 
their  strength ;  how  to  train,  care  for,  and  condition  them  in 
order  to  secure  obedience,  handiness,  and  endurance. 

Expertness  in  the  reconnaissance,  selection,  and  occupation 
of  positions. 

V.'henever  a  position  is  to  bo  chosen  a  definite,  tactical  situa- 
tion should  be  stated  that  will  invariably  recognize  the  primary 
purpose  of  machine-gun  tire. 

Facility  in  the  direction,  conduct,  and  observation  of  fire. 

Section  II. — Okdees,  Comman^ds,  and  Signals. 

21.  Commands  are  employed  in  drill  at  attention.  Otherwise, 
either  a  command,  sicDiof,  or  order  is  employed,  as  best  suits  the 
occasion,  or  one  may  be  used  in  conjunction  with  another. 

22.  Signals  should  be  freely  used  in  instruction,  in  order  that 
officers  and  men  may  readily  know  them.  In  making  signals  the 
saber,  rifio,  pistol,  or  headdress  may  be  held  in  the  hand. 

23.  r)fiicers  and  men  fix  their  attention  at  the  first  word  of 
command,  the  first  note  of  the  bugle  or  whistle,  or  the  first 
motion  of  the  signal.  A  signal  includes  both  the  preparatory 
command  and  the  command  of  execution ;  the  movement  com- 
mences as  soon  as  the  signal  is  understood,  unless  otherwise 
prescribed. 

24.  Except  in  movements  executed  at  attention,  commanders 
or  leaders  of  subdivisions  repeat  orders,  commands,  or  signals 
whenever  such  repetition  is  <leemed  necessary  to  insure  prompt 
and  correct  execution. 

Officers,  battalion  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  platoon  and 
section  leaders,  guides,  and  buglers  are  equipped  with  whistles. 

The  major  and  his  staff  will  use  a  whistle  of  distinctive  tone : 
the  captain  and  company  buglers,  a  second  whislle  of  distinctive 
tone;  and  platoon  and  section  leaders,  a  third  whistle  of  dis- 
tinctive tone. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  27 

25.  Prescribed  signals  are  limited  to  such  as  are  essential  as 
a  substitute  for  the  voice  under  conditions  which  render  the 
voice  inadequate. 

Before  or  during  an  engagement  special  signals  may  be  agreed 
upon  to  facilitate  the  solution  of  such  special  difficulties  as  the 
particular  situation  is  likely  to  develop,  but  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  simplicity  and  certainty  are  indispensable  qualities 
of  a  signal. 

OEDEKS. 

26.  In  these  regulations  an  order  embraces  instruction  or 
directions  given  orally  or  in  writing  in  terms  suited  to  the  par- 
ticular occasion  and  not  prescribed  herein. 

27.  In  action,  the  preliminary  disposition  of  machine-gun 
units  and  their  subsequent  control  is  by  means  of  orders  or  in- 
structions issued  verbally  on  the  ground. 

If  practicable,  the  subordinate  leaders  may  be  assembled  at  a 
convenient  place  from  vvhich  the  situation  and  plan  can  be  ex- 
plained. Clear  and  concise  instructions  are  given  as  to  the 
part  that  each  unit  is  to  take  in  the  combat. 

28.  Orders  should  be  simple  and  convey  definite  ideas.  Vvhen 
issuing  orders  a  commander  does  not  encroach  upon  the  functions 
of  a  subordinate  by  prescribing  details  of  execution  unless  it  bo 
necessary. 

The  commander  prescribes  what  is  to  be  done,  the  details  of 
execution  being  left  to  the  subordinate.  It  is  only  by  constant 
study  and  practice  that  a  commander  becomes  proficient  in 
issuing  simple  verbal  orders.  Frequently  a  drill  regulation 
command  will  be  the  simplest  means  of  conveying  the  will  of  the 
connnander  to  the  troops.  When  this  is  so,  the  drill  regulation 
command  should  be  used. 

C0MMA]yDS. 

29.  In  these  regulations  a  comraand  is  the  wili  of  the  com- 
mander expressed  in  the  phraseology  prescribed  herein. 

30.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands : 

The  1)  re  par  at  or  1/  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  Maech,  or  Halt,  causes 
the  execution. 


38  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  italics,  those  ollt' 
execution  by  capitals. 

Where  it  is  not  mentioned  in  the  text  who  .crivcs  the  command, 
prescribed,  they  are  to  be  given  by  the  commander  of  the  unit 
concerned. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  interval  oi 
time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit  of  bein^r  prop 
erly  understood ;  the  command  of  execution  should  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  movement  is  to  connnence. 

The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness 
proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  for  whom  it  is  Intended. 

Each  preparatory  command  is  enunciated  distinctlv.  with  a 
rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner  that'  the  com- 
mand of  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

The  command  of  execution  is  firm  in. tone  and  brief. 

31.  Majors  and  commanders  of  units  smaller  than  a  ))attalion 
repeat  such  commands  of  their  superiors  as  are  to  be  executed 
by  their  units,  facing  their  units  for  that  purpose.  The  bat- 
talion is  the  largest  unit  that  executes  a  movement  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution  of  its  commander. 

32.  When  giving  commands  to  troops  it  is  usuallv  best  to  face 
toward  them. 

Indifference  in  giving  commnrds  must  be  avoided,  as  it  leads 
to  laxity  in  execution.  Commands  should  be  given  with  spirit  at 
all  times. 

BUGLE   SIGNALS. 

33.  The  authorized  bugle  signals  are  published  in  P:rt  VII 
of  those  regulations. 

The  follov/ing  bugle  signals  may  be  used  off  the  battle  field, 
wben  not  likely  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy: 

Attention  :  Troops  are  brought  to  attention. 

Attention  to  osders  :  Troops  fix  their  attention. 

Foricard,  March:  (Used  also  to  execute  quick  time  from 
double  time.) 

Double  tiuie,  March. 

To  the  rear,  IMaech. 

Halt. 

Assemble,  March. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  29 

The  following  bugle  signals  are  use<l  in  exceptional  eases  on 
the  battle  field.  Their  principal  uses  are  in  liekl  exercises  and 
practice  firing. 

Cdniuicncc  firing/:  Ofiicers  charged  with  fire  direction  and  con- 
trol open  fire  as  soon  as  practicable.  When  given  to  gun  squads 
the  signal  is  equivalent  to  Fike  at  Will. 

Cease  Fiking  :  All  gun  squads  Cease  Firing  at  once. 

These  signals  are  not  used  by  units  smaller  than  a  regiment, 
except  when  such  unit  is  independent  or  detached  from  its  regi- 
ment. 

WHISTLE    SIGNALS. 

34.  Attention  to  orders:  A  short  blast  of  the  whistle.  This 
signal  is  used  on  the  march  or  in  combat  when  necessary  to  fix 
the  attention  of  troops,  or  their  commanders  or  leaders,  prepara- 
tory to  giving  commands,  orders,  or  signals. 

When  the  guns  are  firing,  each  squad  leader  suspends  firing 
find  fixes  his  attention  at  a  sJiort  blast  of  his  platoon  or  section 
leader's  whistle.  The  subsequent  commands  or  signals  are 
[repeated  and  enforced  by  the  squad  leader.  If  a  squad  leader's 
lattention  is  attracted  by  a  whistle  other  than  that  of  his  platoon 
lor  section  leader,  or  if  there  are  no  orders  or  commands  to 
'Convey  to  his  squail,  his  gun  resumes  firing  at  once. 
I     Suspend  Firing  :  A  long  blast  of  the  v/histle. 

All  other  whistle  signals  are  prohibited. 

I  ARil     SIGNALS. 

'  35.  The  following  arm  signals  are  prescribed.  In  making 
•signals  either  arm  may  be  used.  Officers  who  receive  signals 
jon  the  firing  line  "  repeat  back  "  at  once  to  prevent  misunder- 
'standing. 

•  Forward,  JMarch  :  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder ;  straighte:) 
Jand  hold  the  arm  horizontally,  thrusting  it  in  direction  of 
■march. 

\  This  signal  is  also  used  to  execute  quick  time  from  doubl:^ 
time. 

Halt:  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder  ;  thrust  the  hand  upward 
and  hold  the  arm  vertically. 
33325°— 18 2 


30  MACHINE-GUN  DRIIL  EEGTJLATIONS,   1917. 

DoiiNe  time,  Maech  :  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder ;  rapidly 
thrust  the  hand  upward  the  full  extent  of  the  arm  sevenil 
times. 

Squads  right,  Maech  :  Raise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizon- 
tal ;  carry  it  to  a  vertical  position  above  the  head  and  swing  it 
several  times  between  the  vertical  and  horizontal  pt>sitions. 

Squads  left,  Maech  :  Raise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizontal ; 
carry  it  downward  to  the  side  and  swing  it  several  times  between 
the  downward  and  horizontal  positions. 

Squads  right  ahout.  Maech  (if  dismounted),  or  To  the  rear, 
Maech  (if  mounted)  :  Extend  the  arm  vertically  above  the 
head ;  carry  it  laterally  dowmvard  to  the  side  and  sv/ing  it 
several  times  between  the  vertical  and  downvrard  positions. 

To  change  direction,  or  column  right  (left).  Maech  :  The  hand 
on  the  side  tov/ard  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made 
is  carried  across  the  body  to  the  opposite  shoulder,  forearm 
horizontal ;  then  swing  in  a  horizontal  plane,  arm  extended, 
pointing  in  the  new  direction. 

.46-  skirmishers,  Maech  :  Raise  both  arms  laterally  until  hori- 
zontal. 

^l.s-  skirmishers,  guide  center,  Maech:  Raise  both  arms  later- 
ally until  horizontal ;  swing  both  simultaneously  upward  until 
vertical  and  return  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  times. 

As  skirmishers,  guide  right  {left),  Maech:  Raise  both  arms 
laterally  until  horizontal ;  hold  the  arm  on  the  side  of  the  guide 
steadily  in  the  horizontal  position  ;  sv\'ing  the  other  upward  until 
vertical  and  return  it  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  times. 

Assemble.  Maech:  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent 
and  describe  horizontal  circles.  (If  Action  has  been  given,  at 
this  signal  the  carts  rejoin  the  "Firing  Company.") 

Platoon:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  toward  the  platoon 
leader :  describe  small  circles  vrith  the  hand. 

Section:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  toward  the  platoon 
leader  and  move  the  arm  through  a  small  vertical  arc. 

Squads:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  tovv'ard  .the  platoon 
leader ;  swing  the  hand  up  and  down  from  the  wrist. 

Bight  (left)  by  platoon,  Maech:  Point  at  the  right  (left) 
platoon  leader;  signal  platoon,  then  Foewaed. 

Eight  (left)  by  section.  Maech  :  Point  at  the  right  (left)  sec- 
tion ;  signal  section,  then  Foewaed, 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGULATIONS.   1917.  31 

RiffJif  {left)  hij  ftquad,  :\Iakcpi  :  Point  at  right  (left)  squad; 
signal  nquud,  then  ForvAVAitn. 

Riglit  (left)  front  into  line:  Extend  the  arm  vertically  and 
describe  several  large  vertical  circles  on  the  right  (left)  side. 

On  right  (ieft)  into  line,  ^Lvkch  :  Signal  column  rigid  (left)  ; 
then  left  (right)  front  into  line. 

Riglit  {left)  into  line:  Signal  a  change  of  direction  to  the  right 
(left),  followed  by  describing  small  circles  with  the  hand  while 
the  arm  is  extended  to  the  right  (left). 

Bt/  the  riqht  flank  (being  in  close  line)  :  Signal  squads  right 
(left),  Makch. 

The  signals  jjlafrjon,  section,  and  squad  are  intended  pri- 
marily for  connnunicatiou  between  the  captain,  platoon,  section, 
and  squad  leaders.  The  signal  platoon,  section,  or  squad  indi- 
cates that  the  platoon  commander  is  to  cause  the  signal  shown 
to  be  executed  by  platoon,  section,  or  squad. 

AIIM   SIGNALS   FOR   COISTROLLING  FIEF. 

36.  Action:  Strike  with  closed  fist  in  direction  indicated. 
This  signal  is  used  to  put  guns  into  firing  positions  as  described 
in  par.  6G4. 

Out  of  action:  Strike  the  open  palm  of  one  hand  with  the 
closed  fist  of  the  other  hand.  (Signal  indi(,'ates  gun  is  out  of 
action  or  not  ready  to  fire.) 

Range  or  change  clcration:  To  announce  range  extend  the  arm 
toward  the  leaders  or  men  for  whom  the  signal  is  intended,  fist 
closed ;  by  keeping  the  fist  closed  battle  sight  is  indicated ;  by 
opening  and  closing  the  fist,  expose  thumb  and  fingers  to  a 
number  equal  to  the  hundreds  of  yards ;  to  add  50  yards  describe 
a  short  horizontal  line  with  the  forefinger.  To  change  elevation 
the  fire  controller  indicates  the  new  range.  The  fire  observer 
indicates  the  amount  of  increase  or  decrease  by  pointing  upward 
for  increase,  downward  for  decrease,  and  exposing  the  number 
of  fingers. 

What  range  arc  you  using?  or  What  is  the  range?  Extend  the 
arms  toward  the  person  addressed,  one  hand  open,  palm  to  the 
front,  resting  on  the  other  hand,  fist  closed. 

Are  you  ready?  or  /  am  readii:  Raise  the  hand,  fingers  ex- 
tended and  joined,  palm  toward  the  person  addressed. 


32  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917. 

Commence  firing:  Move  the  arm  extended  in  full  length,  hand 
palm  down,  several  times  through  a  horizontal  arc  in  front  of 
the  body. 

Fire  faster:  Execute  rapidly  the  signal  "  Commence  firing." 

Fire  slower:  Execute  slowly  the  signal  "  Commence  firing." 

Suspend  firing:  Raise  and  hold  the  forearm  steadily  in  a  hori- 
zontal position  in  front  of  the  forehead,  palm  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

Cease  firing:  Raise  the  forearm  as  in  suspend  firing  and  swing 
it  up  and  down  several  times  in  front  of  the  face. 

Distributed  or  traveising  fiire:  Extend  arm  to  the  front,  palm 
to  the  left,  and  wave  the  hand  up  and  down  with  a  chopping  mo- 
tion, at  the  same  time  moving  the  hand  and  arm  from  right  to 
left,  or  left  to  right,  as  it  is  desired  that  the  fire  be  distrii3uted. 

Searching  fire,  mils  up:  Extend  arm  to  the  front,  de- 
scribe a  vertical  circle  in  front  of  the  body  with  the  arm  ex- 
tended.    Indicate  mils  as  in  Up  mils. 

Seair-hing  fire, mils  dotcn:  Extend  arm  to  the  front,  de- 
scribe a  vertical  circle  in  front  of  the  body.     Indicate  mils. 

To  siring  cone  of  fire  to  the  right  or  left:  Extend  the  arm  in 
full  length  to  the  front,  palm  to  the  right  (left)  ;  swing  the  arm 
to  right  (left),  and  point  in  the  direction  of  the  new  target. 

Up  mils:  Extend  the  arm  downward,  with  palm  to  the 

front,  and  wave  upward  with  a  full  swing  of  the  arm.  Indicate 
number  of  mils  by  thrusting  closed  fi.st  to  the  front  once  for 
each  D  mils,  and  upward  once  for  each  single  mil.  Thus,  for 
4  mils  thrust  upv.-ard  four  times ;  for  G  mils  thrftst  to  the  front 
once  and  upward  once. 

Doicn  mils:  Extend  arm  to  the  front,  palm  down,  and 

wave  downward.  Indicate  number  of  mils  by  thrusting  closed 
fist  to  the  front  once  for  each  5  mils,  and  downward  once  for 
each  single  mil. 

To  right mils:  Extend  arm  to  the  front  and  wave  to  the 

right.     Indicate  mils  as  in  Z^p. 

To  left mils:  Same  as  above,  substituting  left  for  right. 

37,  For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve 
or  commander  in  the  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  are  prescribed 
and  should  be  memorized.  In  the  absence  of  signal  flags,  the 
headdress  or  other  substitute  may  be  used.  In  transmission  of 
signals  their  concealment  from  the  enemy's  view  should  be 
insured. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  KEGTILATIONS,   1917. 


33 


Letter 
of  al- 
phabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 

If  signaling  from  the  fijing  line  to 

Ih-iiig  line. 

the  rear. 

AM 

Amnaunition  going  forward. 

-Ammunition  required. 

CVC 

Charge  (mandatory  at  ail  times). 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no  instruc- 
tions to  the  contrary. 

CF 

Cease  firing. 

Cease  firing. 

PT 

Double  time. 

Doable  time,  or  "Rush." 

F 

Commence  firing. 

Commence  firing. 

FL 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

(} 

Move  forward. 

Preparing  to  move  forward. 

niiTT 

Halt. 

Halt. 

K 

Negative. 

Negative. 

LT 

Left. 

Left. 

O 

What  is  the (RN., etc.)?    Interrog- 

What is  the  (RN.,  etc)?    Interrog- 

atory   (Ardois    and    seraanhore 

atory. 

only,  all  others,  .  .  —  ,  .)• ' 

P 

Affirmative. 

Affirmative. 

R 

Acknowledgment. 

Acknowledgm.ent. 

EN 

Range. 

Range. 

RT 

Right. 

Right. 

sss 

Support  going  forward. 

Support  needed. 

SUF 

Suspend  firing. 

Suspend  firing. 

T 

Target. 

Target. 

SIGNALS  FOK   CONTEOL  OF  FIRE. 

C Direction  correct. 

OK Correct  range. 

U Fire  unobserved 

Q Fire  observed,  uncertain. 

UP  (followed  bv  number  of  mils)  as  Fire   observed,    correction    to    the 

(UP  f-o-u-r).'  target  is  UP  mils. 

DN    (followed    by    number    of    mils)  Fire   observed,    correction    to    the 

as  (DN  f-o-u-r).  target  is  DOWN  mils. 

Section  III. — General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations. 


38.  For  convenience  in  designation  herein,  the  terms  dis- 
mounted find  mounted  are  used.  The  organization  is  considered 
mounted  when  tlie  animal  transportation  prescribed  as  part  of 
tlie  equipment  of  the  organization  is  present.  It  is  dismounted 
when  the  individual  mounted  men  are  dismounted  and  none  of 
the  animal  transportation  is  present. 


TWO-ARM  SEMIPKOEE   CODE. 


TWO-ARI/r  SEMIPHORE   CODE. 


36  MACHINE-GirN  DEILL  KEGIILATIONS,  1917. 

When  the  preparatory  command  consists  of  more  than  one 
part,  its  elements  are  arransred  as  follows : 

1.  For  movements  to  be  executed  successively  by  the  subdi- 
visions or  elements  of  an  organization : 

(a)   Description  of  the  movement. 

[1))   How  executed,  or  on  what  element  executed. 

2.  For  movements  to  be  executed  simultaneously  by  the  sub- 
division of  an  organization : 

{a)   The  designation  of  the  subdivisions. 
{h)   The  movement  to  be  executed. 

39.  Cross  references  to  paragraphs  herein  are  shown  thus : 
(ST),  the  number  in  parentheses  calling  attention  to  paragraph 
number  87  of  these  regulations. 

40.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  to  substi- 
tute the  word  '•  left  "  for  "  right,  "  and  the  reverse,  "to  have  the 
explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement  tov\'ard  the  other 
iiank.  The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ments toward  either  flank.  The  substituted  word  of  the  com- 
mand is  placed  within  parentheses. 

41.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching,  unless  otherwise  prescribed.  If  at-  a  halt,  the 
command  for  movements  involving  marching  need  not  be 
prefaced  by  fonrard.  as:  1.  CoUcnni  right    (left).  2.  Maech. 

42.  Any  movement  not  specially  excepted  may  be  executed 
in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command 
double  time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

43.  In  successive  movements  executed  in  double  time  the 
leading  or  base  unit  marches  in  quiel-  time  when  not  otherwise 
prescribed:  the  other  units  march  in  double  time  to  their  places 
in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the  gait  of  the 
leading  or  base  unit.  If  marching  in  double  time,  the  command 
double  time  is  omitted.  The  leading  or  base  unit  marches  in 
quiek  time,  the  other  units  continue  at  double  time  to  their 
places  in  the  formation  ordered,  and  then  conform  to  the  gait 
of  the  leading  or  base  unit. 

44.  To  hasten  the  execution  of  a  movement  begun  in  quick 
time,  the  command  :  1.  Double  time,  2.  Maech.  is  given.  The 
leading  or  base  unit  continues  to  march  in  quick  time,  or  re- 


MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  37 

mains  at  a  halt  if  already  halted ;  the  other  units  complete  the 
execution  of  the  movement  in  double  time  and  then  conform  to 
the  sait  of  the  leading  or  base  unit. 

45.  To  stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  marching, 
for  the  correction  of  errors,  the  command :  1.  In  place.  2.  Halt, 
is  given.  All  halt  and  stand  fast,  v.'ithout  changing  the  position 
of  the  pieces.  To  resume  the  movement  the  command :  1.  Re- 
sume, 2.  Makch,  is  given. 

46.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or,  being  at  a  halt, 
to  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun,  the  command : 
As  You  Weke,  is  given,  at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the 
former  position  is  resumed. 

47.  Unless  othervvise  announced,  the  guide  of  a  company,  or 
subdivision  of  a  company,  in  line  is  right;  of  a  battalion  in  line 
or  line  of  subdivisions  or  of  a  deployed  line,  center;  of  a  rank 
in  column  of  squads,  toward  the  side  of  the  gTiide  of  the  com- 
pany. 

To  march  with  guide  other  than  as  prescribed  above,  or  to 
change  the  guide:  Guide  {right,  left,  or  center). 

In  successive  formations  into  line  the  guide  is  toward  the 
point  of  rest;  in  platoons  or  larger  subdivisions  it  is  so  an- 
nounced. 

The  announcement  of  the  guide,  when  given  in  connection  with 
a  movement,  follows  the  command  of  execution  for  that  move- 
ment. 

48.  The  turn  on  the  moving  pivot  is  used  by  subdivisions  of 
a  column  in  executing  changes  of  direction.  Elements  other 
than  the  base  unit,  vshen  mounted,  move  at  a  double  time. 

49.  Partial  changes  of  direction  may  be  executed : 

By  interpolating  in  the  preparatory  command  the  word  half, 
as  Column  half  right  (left),  or  Right  (left)  half  turn.  A  change 
of  direction  of  45  degrees  is  executed. 

By  the  command:  Incline  to  the  Right  (Left),  the  guide  or 
guiding  element  moves  in  the  indicated  direction  and  the  re- 
mainder of  the  command  conforms.  This  m.ovement  effects 
slight  changes  of  direction. 

50.  The  "designations,  line  of  sections  (line  of  platoons ), 
(line  of  companies),  refer  to  the  formations  in  which  the  sec- 
tions, each  in  column  of  squads,  are  in  line. 


38  I^ACHINE-GUN  DEILL  KEGTJLATIONS,   1917. 

The  line  refers  to  the  formation  in  which  the  squads  are  in 
line  with  an  interval  of  about  10  yards  between  squads. 

In  coluinn  of  subdivisions  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision 
is  charged  with  the  step  and  direction ;  the  guides  in  rear  pre- 
serve the  trace,  step,  and  distance. 

51.  The  squad,  the  section,  the  platoon,  the  company,  and 
the  battalion,  both  mounted  and  dismounted,  execute  the  rests, 
eyes  right  or  left,  the  facings,  the  salutes,  march  in  quick  and 
double  time,  mark  time,  execute  the  half  step,  side  step,  back 
step,  and  change  step  in  the  same  manner  and  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  given  in  the  school  of  the  soldier  (GO).  The  halt  is 
executed  (82)  by  substituting  the  designation  of  the  unit,  as: 
1.  Battalion,  2.  Halt. 

52.  The  battalion,  company,  platoon,  and  section,  all  resume 
attention,  oblique,  resume  the  direct  march,  and  preserve  align- 
ment, and  in  addition  the  battalion  and  the  company  dis- 
mounted take  intervals  and  distances  and  assemble  in  the  some 
manner  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  in  the  com- 
mand the  words  "  section,"'  "  platoon.*'  *'  company. ""  or  "  bat- 
talion "  for  "  squad."  as  given  for  the  squad  dismounted. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  detachments,  details,  etc. 

53.  To  insure  uniformity  of  interval  betv.-een  files  when 
falling  in.  and  in  alignments,  each  man  places  the  palm  of  the 
left  hand  upon  tlie  hip,  fingers  pointing  downward.  In  the  first 
case  the  hand  is  dropped  by  the  side  when  the  next  man  on  the 
left  has  his  interval;  in  the  second  case,  at  the  command  Front. 

54.  The  posts  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  etc..  in 
the  various  formations  of  the  company  and  battalion  are  shown 
in  plates  imder  the  various  headings.  For  the  position  of  the 
machine-gun  company  in  the  Infantry  regiment  see  the  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations. 

In  all  changes  from  one  formation  to  another  involving  a 
change  of  post  on  the  part  of  any  of  these,  posts  are  promptly 
taken  by  the  most  convenient  route  as  soon  as  practicable 
after  the  command  of  execution  for  the  movement ;  oflicers  and 
noncommissioned  ofiicers  who  have  prescribed  duties  in  connec- 
tion with  the  movement  ordered  take  their  new  posts  when  such 
duties  are  completed. 

A^  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go  wher- 
ever their  i^resence  is  necessary.    As  file  closers  it  is  their  duty 


MACHINS-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  39 

to  rectify  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness  and  promptness  in 
the  ranks. 

55.  The  staff  of  an  officer  forms  in  single  rank  3  paces  in 
rear  of  him,  the  right  of  the  rank  extending  1  pace  to  the 
right  of  a  point  directly  in  rear  of  him.  Members  of  the  staff 
are  arranged  in  order  from  right  to  left  as  follows:  General 
staff  officers,  adjutant,  aids,  other  staff  officers,  arranged  in 
each  classification  in  order  of  rank,  the  senior  on  the  right.  The 
Hag  of  a  general  officer  and  the  orderlies  are  3  paces  in  rear 
of  the  staff",  the  Hag  on  the  right.  When  necessary  to  reduce  the 
front  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  each  line  executes  twos  right  or 
fours  right,  and  folio vrs  the  commander. 

When  not  otherwise  prescribed  staff  officers  draw  and  return 
saber  with  their  chief. 

56.  In  making  the  about,  an  officer,  mounted,  habitually  turns 
to  the  left. 

When  the  commander  faces  to  give  commands  the  staff,  flag, 
and  orderlies  do  not  change  position. 

57.  For  ceremonies,  such  of  the  noncommissioned  staff"  offi- 
cers as  are  dismounted  are  formed  5  paces  in  rear  of  the  color, 
in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left.  In  column  of  squads  they 
march  as  file  closers. 

58.  Other  than  for  ceremonies,  noncommissioned  staff  offi- 
cers and  orderlies  accompany  their  immediate  chiefs  unless 
otherwise  directed.  If  mounted,  the  noncommissioned  staff"  offi- 
cers are  ordinarily  posted  on  the  right  or  at  the  head  of  the 
orderlies. 

59.  In  all  formations  and  movements  a  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer commanding  a  platoon  or  company  takes  tlie  same  post  as 
an  officer  in  a  like  situation. 

Section  IY. — School  of  the  Soldier. 

(Dismounted.) 

60.  The  instructor  explains  briefly  each  movement,  first  exe- 
cuting it  himself,  if  practicable.  He  requires  the  recruits  to 
take  the  proper  positions  unassisted  and  does  not  touch  them  for 
the  purpose  of  correcting  them,  except  v/hen  they  are  unable 
to  correct  themselves.    He  avoids  keeping  them  too  long  at  the 


40  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

same  movement,  although  each  should  be  understood  before  pass- 
ing to  another.  He  exacts  by  degrees  the  desired  precision  and 
uniformity. 

61.  In  order  that  all  may  advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abilities 
permit,  the  recruits  are  grouped  according  to  proficiency  as  in- 
struction progresses.  Those  who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness 
are  separated  from  the  others  and  placed  under  experienced 
drill  masters. 

62.  For  preliminary  instruction  a  number  of  recruits,  usually 
not  exceeding  three  or  four,  are  formed  as  a  squad  in  single  rank. 

POSITION  OF  THE    SOLDIEK,   OPv  ATTENTION. 

63.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45 
degrees. 

Knees  straight,  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  dravrn  back  slightly ;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips;  chest  lifted  and  arched;  shoulders  square  and 
falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam  of 
the  trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  dra^^■n  in  so  that  the 
axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical ;  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

AVeight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls  of 
the  feet. 

THE  EESTS. 

64.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are :  Fall  Out  ;  Rest  ; 
At  Ease;  and  1.  Parade,  2.  Rest. 

At  the  command  fall  out  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places  at  attention  at  the  command  Fall  In. 

At  the  command  rest  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but  is 
not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  case  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place  and 
is  required  to  preserve  silence,  but  not  immobility. 

65.  1.  Parade.  2.  Rest.  Carry  the  right  foot  G  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent ;  clasp  the  hands,  without 


MACHIKE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  41 

constraint,  iu  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers  joined,  left 
hand  uppermost,  left  thnmb  ehisped  ])y  the  tliumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  iiand ;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of 
position. 

66.  To  resume  the  attention :  1.  Squad,  2.  Attention.  The 
men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

EYES  RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

67.  1.  Eyes,  2.  Right  (Lf:FT),  3.  Front. 

At  the  command  right  tnrn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique,  eyes 
fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the 
same  rank.  At  the  command  front  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to 
the  front. 

FACINGS. 

68.  To  the  flank:  1.  Rif/M  (Left).  2.  Face. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot ;  place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right. 
Left  face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel  in  the  corresponding 
manner. 

Right  (left)  half  face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45  degrees. 

"  To  face  in  marching  "  and  advance  turn  on  the  ball  of  either 
foot  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  in  the  new  line  of  direc- 
tion ;  to  face  in  marching  without  gaining  ground  in  the  new 
direction  turn  on  the  ball  of  either  foot  and  mark  time. 

69.  To  the  rear:  1.  About,  2.  Face. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half-foot  length  to  the 
rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel,  without  changing 
the  position  of  the  left  foot ;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  place  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left. 

SALUTE     with    THE     HAND. 

70.  1.  Hand.  2.  Salute. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lovv'er  part  of  the  headdress  above  the  right  eye, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  forearm 
inclined  at  about  45  degrees,  hand  and  wrist  straight;  at  the 


42  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGTJLATIONS.   1917. 

same  time  look  toward  the  person  saluted.     (2)   Drop  the  arm 
smartly  by  the  side. 

For  rules  ji'OYerniDS'  salutes,  see  "  Honors  and  salutes,"  para- 
graphs G19-63T. 

STEPS   AND   MARCHINGS. 

71.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

72.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
ineasured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  120 
steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  3G  inches;  the 
cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  ISO  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  the 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left,  rigid,  the  instant  the 
left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

73.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
(louhJc  time,  or  double  time  should  be  added  to  the  command;  in 
the  latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  com- 
mand. Example:  1.  Squad  right,  double  tt)iic,  2.  Makcu. 
(School  of  the  squad.) 

QUICK    TIME, 

74.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time :  1.  Foi'- 
irard.  2.  March. 

At  the  conunand  foncnrd,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg.  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  tlie  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock  ;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 
foot  and  plant  it  as  above ;  continue  the  march.  The  arms  swing 
naturally. 

75.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march  in 
d(>ul)le  time:  1.  Double  time,  2.  March. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command,  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march,  raise  the  fore- 
arms, fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the  waist- 
line: take  up  an  easy  run  witii  the  step  and  cadence  of  double 
time,  allovring  a  natural  swinging  motion  to  the  arms. 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  43 

If  marching  in  quicktime,  at  the  command  march  given  as 
either  foot  strikes  tlie  ground,  tal^e  one  step  in  quick  time  and 
then  step  off  in  double  time. 

76.  To  resume  the  quick  time :  1.  Quick  time,  2.  Maech. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 

advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  doul)le  time;  resume  the 
quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO   M^VRK  TIME, 

77.  Being  in  march :  1.  IJarlc  time,  2.  March, 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot  in  rear  and 
continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each  foot  about  2 
inches  and  planting  it  on  line  v\-ith  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

THE  HALF   STEP. 

78.  1.  Half  step,  2.  Marcpi. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in  double  time. 

79.  Forward,  Half  Step,  Halt,  and  Mark  Time  may  be 
executed  one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time :  1.  jPor- 
tcard,  2.  March. 

SIDE  STEP. 

80.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1,  Right  (Left)  step,  2. 
March, 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right,  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it,  and  continue  the  movement  in  the  cadence 
of  quick  time.  The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only 
and  is  not  executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

BACK   STEP, 

81.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Backward,  2.  March. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 


44  IvIACHINE-GITN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  exe- 
cuted in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

TO   HALT. 

82.  To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marchin.s; ;  raise  and  place  the  tirst 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the  hands 
by  the  sides. 

TO  :.IAI1CH   EY  THE  TLAXK. 

83.  Bein:^;  in  march:  1.  By  the  right   (left)  pani:,  2.  Maech. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right  in 
marching  and  step  oft  in  tlie  new  direction  with  the  right  foot. 

TO  maeck  to  the  eeak. 

84.  Being  in  march:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ;  turn  to  the  right  about 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

change  step. 

85.  Being  in  march:  ].  Change  step,  2.  InIarch. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand march  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  EEGTJLATIONS,  1917.  45 

Section  V. — The  Squad. 
(Dismounted.) 

86.  Soldiers  are  grouped  into  squads  for  purposes  of  instruc- 
tion, discipline,  control,  and  order. 

87.  The  gun  squad  proper  consists  of  a  corporal  and  8  pri- 
vates. However,  for  instructional  purposes  the  men  are  grouped 
into  squads  of  from  3  to  11  men  each. 

The  movements  in  the  school  of  the  squad  are  designed  to 
make  the  squad  a  fixed  unit  and  to  facilitate  the  control  and 
movement  of  the  company.  If  the  number  of  men  grouped  is 
more  than  3  and  less  than  12  they  are  formed  as  a  squad  of  4 
files,  the  excess  above  8  being  posted  as  file  closers.  If  the  num- 
ber grouped  is  greater  than  11,  two  or  more  squads  are  formed 
and  the  group  is  terined  a  section. 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits  these  rules  may  be  modified. 

88.  The  corporal  is  the  squad  leader,  and  when  absent  is 
replaced  by  a  designated  private.  If  no  private  is  designated 
the  senior  in  length  of  service  acts  as  leader. 

The  corporal,  when  in  ranks,  is  posted  as  the  left  man  in  the 
front  rank  of  the  squad,  the  eighth  private  takes  his  place  in 
the  file  closers. 

Vvheu  the  corporal  leaves  the  ranks  to  lead  his  squad,  his 
rear-rank  man  steps  into  the  front  rank,  and  the  file  remains 
blank  until  the  corporal  returns  to  his  place  in  ranks,  when  his 
rear-rank  man  steps  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

89.  The  gun  squad  is  the  basic  unit  of  the  machine-gun  com- 
pany, hence  it  should  be  the  endeavor  of  officers  to  preserve  the 
integrity  of  these  squads. 

Men  are  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  with  the  squad  to 
which  they  l^elong,  and  in  case  it  is  broken  up  or  they  become 
separated  therefrom  to  attach  themselves  to  the  nearest  squad 
and  section  leaders,  whether  these  ])e  of  their  own  or  another 
organization. 

9C.  The  squad  executes  tiie  liali,  rests,  facings,  steps,  and 
marchings  as  explained  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

TO    FORM    THE    SQUAD. 

91.  To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself  3  paces 
in  front  of  v.here  the  center  is  to  be  and  commands :  Fall  in. 


46  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  and  are  arranged  by  the  cor- 
poral in  double  rank,  as  nearly  as  practicable  in  order  of  height 
from  right  to  left,  each  man  dropping  his  left  hand  as  soon  as 
the  man  on  his  left  hfis  his  interval.  The  rear  rank  forms  with 
distance  of  40  inches. 

The  instructor  then  commands  :  Count  off. 

At  this  conmiand  all  except  the  right  file  exeentes  eyes  right, 
and.  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  eacli  rank  count  one, 
tico,  three,  four;  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
as  he  counts. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

92.  To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having  been 
established:  1.  Right  (Left),  2.  Duess,  3.  Fkont. 

At  the  connnand  dress,  all  men  place  the  left  hand  upon  the 
hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ;  each  man.  except 
the  base  file,  when  on  or  near  the  new  line  executes  eyes  right, 
and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches,  places  himself  so  that  his 
riglit  arm  rests  lightly  against  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his 
right,  and  so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  with  those 
of  tlie  men  on  his  right ;  the  rear-rank  men,  in  addition,  cover 
in  file. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks  from  the 
rigiit  fiank  and  orders  up  or  back  sucli  men  as  may  be  in  rear  or 
in  advance  of  the  line;  only  the  men  designated  move. 

At  th.e  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are  aligned, 
each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  drops  his 
left  haiid  hy  his  side. 

In  tlie  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established  on, 
or  parallel  to,  the  front  of  the  squad;  afterwards,  in  oblique 
directions. 

Wh;  iiever  rhe  position  of  tlie  base  file  or  files  necessitates  a 
considej-able  movement  by  the  squad,  such  movement  will  be 
executed  by  marclung  ro  tiie  front  or  oblique,  to  the  flank  or 
backward,  as  the  case  may  be,  without  other  command,  and  at 
the  trail. 

93.  To  preserve  the  alignmont  when  marching;  Guide  right 
(left). 

Tlie  men  pre.serve  Iheir  intervals  from  the  side  of  the  guide, 
yieldiJig  to  pressure  irom  that  side  and  resisting  pressure  from 


MACHn^E-GITN  DEILL  EEGTJLATIONS,  1917.  47 

the  opposite  direction ;  tliey  recover  intervals,  if  lost,  by  .crradu- 
ally  opening  out  or  closing  in ;  they  recover  alignment  by  slightly 
lengthening  or  shortening  the  step  ;  the  rear-rank  men  cover  their 
file  leaders  at  40  inches.  , 

In  double  rank,  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right,  or  designated 
flank,  conducts  the  march  ;  when  marching  faced  to  the  flank, 
the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank  is  the  guide. 

TO  TAKE  INTEKVALS  AND  DISTANCES. 

94.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Take  intervah  2.  To  the  right 
(left),  3.  Maech,  4.  Squad.  5.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command  the  rear-rank  men  march  backward  4 
steps  and  halt ;  at  the  command  march  all  face  to  the  right  and 
the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off ;  the  other  men  step  off 
in  succession,  each  following  the  preceding  man  at  4  paces,  rear- 
rank  men  marching  abreast  of  their  file  leaders. 

At  the  connnand  Juilt,  given  when  all  liave  their  intervals,  all 
halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

95.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  Sviuad :  1.  A-sseinhlc, 
to  the  right  (left),  2.  Maech. 

The  front-rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast,  the  rear-rank 
man  on  the  rigiit  closes  to  40  inches.  The  other  nien  face  to  the 
right,  close  by  the  shortest  line,  and  face  to  the  front. 

9f?.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  having  counted  off:  1.  Take 
distance,  2.  Maech,  3.  Squad,  4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  inarch.  No.  1  of  the  front  rank  moves 
straight  to  the  front ;  Nos.  2,  3.  and  4  of  the  front  rank  and  Xos. 

1.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  rear  rank,  in  the  order  named,  move  straight 
to  the  front,  each  stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding 
man  at  four  paces.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have 
their  distances. 

In  case  more  than  one  squad  is  in  line,  each  squad  executes 
the  movement  as  above.  The  guide  of  each  rank  of  numbers  is 
right. 

97.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  AsscnibJc. 

2.  Maech. 

Xo.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ;  the  other  numbers  move 
forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 


48  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

THE  OBLIQUE   MAECH. 

98.  For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being  in  column 
or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the  squad  to  face 
half  right  or  half  left,  points  out  to  the  men  their  relative  posi- 
tions, and  explains  that  these  are  to  be  maiixtained  in  the 
oblique  march. 

99.  1.  Right  (left)  ohUque,  2.  March. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45  degrees  to  the  right  of 
his  original  front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping 
his  shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide  (the  man  on  the 
right  front  of  the  line  or  column),  and  so  regulates  his  steps 
that  the  ranks  remain  parallel  to  their  original  front. 

At  the  command  halt  the  men  halt  faced  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction :  1.  Foi-icard,  2.  Mabch. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then  move 
straight  to  the  front. 

If  at  a  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique 
march  is  resumed  by  the  commands:  1.  Oblique,  2.  March. 

TO  TURN  ON  MOVING  PROT. 

100.  Being  in  line:  1.  Right  (left)  turn.  2.  March. 

The  movement  is  executed  by  each  rank  successively  and  on 
the  same  ground.  At  the  second  command,  the  pivot  man  of 
the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  takes  the 
half  step :  the  other  men  of  the  front  rank  oblique  to  the  right 
until  opposite  their  places  in  line,  then  execute  a  second  right 
oblique  and  take  the  half  step  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  pivot 
man.  All  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while  at  half  step 
and  take  the  full  step  without  command  as  the  last  man  arrives 
on  the  line. 

Right  (left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner.  The 
pivot  man  makes  a  half  change  of  direction  to  the  right  and  the 
other  men  make  quarter  changes  in  obliquing. 

TO  turn  on  fixed  pivot. 

101.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  1.  Squad  right  {left), 

2.    ZVIARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  right  flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time ;  the  other  front 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  49 

rank  men  oljlique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 
pivot  and  mark  time.  In  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the 
right,  followed  in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight 
to  the  front  until  in  roar  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face  to 
the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time ;  the  other  number  of  the 
rear  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front  four  paces  and  places  him- 
self abreast  of  the  man  on  his  right.  Men  on  the  new  line  glance 
toward  the  marching  flank  wliile  marking  time  and,  as  the  last 
man  arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  foricard,  march, 
without  command. 

102.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right  (left), 
2.  ]\Iaiich,  3.  Squad,  4.  Halt. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 
The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph, 
except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  at  the  new  line,  mark  time 
until  the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth 
command  should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

103.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  march:  1.  Squad  right 
(left)  about,  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  tvs'ice  executes  squad 
right,  initiating  the  second  squad  right  v/hen  the  man  on  the 
marching  Hank  has  arrived  abreast  of  the  rank.  In  the  rear 
rank  the  third  man  from  the  right,  followed  by  the  second  and 
first  in  column,  moves  straight  to  the  front  until  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  rear  rank ;  changes  direc- 
tion to  the  right ;  moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear  of  his 
front-rank  man,  when  all  face  to  the  right  in  marching,  mark 
time,  and  glance  toward  the  marching  flank.  The  fourth  man 
marches  on  the  left  of  the  third  to  his  new  position ;  as  he 
arrives  on  the  line  both  ranks  execute  forward,  march,  Avithout 
command. 

104.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  halt:  1.  Squad  riglit 
(left)   about,  2.  Makch,  3.  Squad,  4.  Halt. 

The  third  conmiand  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 
The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph, 
except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time  until 
the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth  com- 
mand should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 


60  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

TO  FOLLOW  THE  COSPORAL. 

105.  Being  assembled  or  deployed,  to  march  the  squad  with- 
out commands  the  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  it  and  com- 
mands :  Follow  Me. 

If  in  line  or  skirmish  line,  Xo.  2  of  the  front  rank  follows  in 
the  trace  of  the  corporal  at  about  3  paces ;  the  other  men  con- 
form to  the  movements  of  No.  2,  guiding  on  him  and  maintaining 
their  relative  positions. 

If  in  column,  the  head  of  the  column  follov^^s  th.e  corporal. 

TO    DEPLOY    AS     SKIRMISHEES. 

106.  Being  in  any  formation,  assembled:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
2.  March. 

The  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad,  if  not 
already  there.  Moving  at  a  run,  the  men  place  themselves 
abreast  of  the  corporal  at  half-pace  intervals,  Xos.  1  and  2  on 
his  right.  Nos.  3  and  4  on  his  left,  rear-rank  men  on  the  right 
of  their  file  leaders,  extra  men  on  the  left  of  No.  4 ;  all  men  con- 
form to  the  corporal's  gait. 

^Yhen  tlie  squad  is  acting  alone,  skirmish  line  is  similarly 
formed  on  No.  2  of  the  front  rank,  Vvdio  stands  fast  or  continues 
the  march,  as  the  case  may  be ;  the  corporal  places  himself  in 
front  of  the  squad  when  advancing  and  in  rear  when  halted. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers  the  men  march  at  ease,  pieces 
at  the  trail  unless  cthervrise  ordered. 

The  corporal  is  the  guide  when  in  the  line ;  otherwise  No.  2 
front  rank  is  the  guide. 

107.  The  normal  interval  beiveen  skirmishers  is  one-half 
pace,  resulting  practically  in  one  man  per  yard  of  front.  The 
front  of  a  squad  thus  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  about  10  paces. 

TO  INCREASE  OR  DIMINISH  IXTEP.VALS. 

108.  If  assembled,  and  it  is  desired  to  deploy  at  greater  than 
the  normal  interval ;  or  if  deployed,  and  it  is  desired  to  increase 
or  decrease  the  interval:  1.  As  skirmishers  (so  many)  paces,  2. 
March. 


MACHINE-C-TJN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,  1917.  51 

Intervals  are  taken  at  the  indicated  number  of  paces.  If 
already  deployed,  the  men  move  by  the  flank  toward  or  away 
from  the  guide. 

THE   ASSEMBLY. 

109.  Being  deployed :  1.  Assemble,  2.  Maech. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their  proper 
places. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move  in  double 
time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

The  assembly  while  marching  to  the  rear  is  not  executed. 

KXEELING   AND    LYING    D0V7N. 

110.  If  standing:  Kxeel. 

Half  face  to  the  right ;  carry  the  right  toe  about  1  foot  to  the 
left  rear  of  the  left  heel ;  kneel  on  right  knee,  sitting  as  nearly 
as  possible  on  the  right  heel ;  left  forearm  across  the  left  thigh, 
right  hand  resting  on  right  leg. 

111.  If  standing  or  kneeling:  Lie  Down. 

Kneel,  but  v.ith  right  knee  against  left  heel ;  carry  back  the 
left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body  about  35  de- 
grees to  the  right. 

112.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  Rise. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground 
marked  by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  body  on  both  knees ;  stand  up,  faced  to 
the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

113.  If  lying  down:  Kneel. 

liaise  the  body  on  both  knees ;  take  the  position  of  kneel. 

114.  In  double  rank,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying 
down  are  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization  of  cover. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers  a  sitting  position  may  bo  taken 
in  lieu  of  the  position  kneeling. 

Section  VI. — Company  Drill. 
(Dismounted.) 

115.  Company  drills  dismounted  are  limited  to  those  neces- 
sary to  fix  the  attention  of  the  men,  to  teach  habits  of  dib;cipline 


62  MACHINE-GTTK  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

and   prompt  obedience,    and   to   furnish   an  orderly    means  oi 
handling:  the  company. 

116.  The  instruction  described  for  the  company  dismounted 
is  applicable,  with  obvious  modifications,  to  the  instruction  of 
any  number  of  platoons,  sections,  or  squads. 

117.  A  company  dismounted  comprises  the  personnel  shown 
in  detail  in  Tables  of  Organization. 

118.  For  technical  and  tactical  purposes,  the  enlisted  per- 
sonnel of  the  comi^any  is  assigned  to  sections  and  platoons.  The 
sections  are  organized  to  meet  the  special  conditions  of  service 
which  they  are  called  upon  to  perform.  A  gun  section  consists 
of  1  sergeant,  who  is  the  section  leader,  2  section  agents,  and  2 
gun  squads. 

A  platoon  consists  of  a  lieutenant,  a  range  taker,  3  platoon 
agents,  and  2  gun  sections.  One  of  the  company  mechanics  is 
assigned  to  each  platoon  in  the  field. 

119.  The  company  is  divided  into  9  sections,  the  first  6  sec- 
tions being  gun  sections.  The  train,  commanded  by  the  train 
lieutenant,  consists  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  sections.  The 
seventh  section  is  the  combat  train  section  and  consists  of  two 
4-nnile  wagons,  the  kitchen  wagon,  and  two  spare  gun  carts, 
v\-ith  the  stable  sergeant  in  charge  of  the  ammunition  v>agons 
and  the  mess  sergeant  in  charge  of  the  kitchen  wagon ;  the 
eighth  section  consists  of  the  supply  wagon,  the  water  and 
ration  carts,  and  is  commanded  by  the  supply  sergeant.  The 
nintli  section  is  the  company  commander's  detail  and  consists 
of  the  company  agents,  signalmen,  and  scouts  commanded  ])y 
the  signal  corporal.     (See  Pis.  I  to  VI,  inclusive.) 

120.  The  company  dismounted  is  formed  in  double  rank  with 
the  platoons  arranged  from  right  to  left  in  the  order  of  their 
permanent  numbers,  except  that  the  ninth  section,  plus  the 
platoon  and  section  agents,  forms  on  the  right  of  the  first  pla- 
toon and  is  connnanded  by  the  reconnaissance  officer.  The  mem- 
bers of  the  seventh  and  eighth  sections  in  the  order  named 
habitually  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Platoon  and  section  leaders  supervise  the  movements  of  their 
units. 


MACHINE-GUN  DUILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917. 

POSTS  OF  OFFICEKS,   NOXCOMMTSSIONED  OFFICERS,   ETC. 

(In  line.) 

ISl.  The  posts  of  ofncers  and  noncommissioned  officers  are 
as  shown  in  Plate  I.  The  company  range  taker  is  the  right 
guide  of  the  company ;  the  phitoou  range  takers  are  the  phitoon 
guides;  the  platoon  range  taker  of  the  left  platoon  is  also  the 
left  guide  of  the  company. 

In  platoon  movements  the  post  of  the  platoon  guide  is  at  the 
head  of  the  platoon  if  the  platoon  is  in  column,  and  on  the  guide 
flank  if  in  line.  Tlie  guides  of  a  column  of  squads  place  them- 
selves on  the  flank  opj)osite  the  file  chasers. 

To  change  the  guides  and  file  closers  to  the  other  flank,  the 
captain  commands:  1.  File  closers  on  left  (right)  flank,  2. 
Mav.cu. 

The  file  closers  dart  through  the  column ;  the  captain  and 
guides  change. 

In  column  of  squads  each  rank  preserves  the  alignment  to- 
Vi'ard  the  side  of  the  guide. 

122.  In  taking  intervals  and  distances,  unless  otherwise 
directed,  the  right  and  left  guides,  at  the  first  command,  place 
tliemselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  face  to  the  flank,  and  each 
st(^ps  off  with  the  file  nearest  him.  In  asscmblinf/  the  guides 
and  file  closers  resume  tlieir  positions  in  line. 

123.  In  movements  executed  simultaneously  by  platoons  or 
sections  (as  platoons  or  sections  right,  or  platoons  or  sections 
column  rirjM),  platoon  leaders  or  section  leaders  repeat  the 
preparatory  command  {platoon  or  section  right,  etc.)  apjilicable 
to  their  respective  platoons  or  sections.  The  command  of  exe-. 
cution  is  given  by  the  captains  only. 

TO  FOI?M  THE  COMPANY. 

124.  At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly  the  first  sergeant  takes 
position  G  paces  in  front  of  wliere  the  center  of  the  company  is 
to  be.  faces  it,  draws  saber,  and  commands :  Fall  In. 

The  company  range  taker  places  himself,  facing  to  the  front, 
wdiere  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  and  at  such  point  that 


54  MACHrNE-GITN  DUILL  EEGULATIONS,  1917. 

the  center  of  tlie  company  will  be  6  paces  from  and  opposite  the 
first  ser.ueant :  the  squads  and  sections  form  in  thoir  proper  places 
on  the  left  of  the  ri.dit  uuide.  superintended  by  the  section  and 
squad  leaders,  who  then  take  their  posts. 

The  first  serueant  conmiands :  Repoet.  Kernaining  in  position 
at  the  order,  the  section  leaders,  in  succession  from  the  right, 

salute  and  report:  All  i^rcscnt ;  or,  Privatc(s)   ahscnt. 

The  salutes  of  the  section  leaders  is  not  returned  by  the  first  ser- 
geant. The  first  sergeant  notes  the  presence  or  absence  of  the 
men  not  assigned  to  sections,  then  faces  about,  salutes  the  cap- 
tain, and  reports:  Sir,  all  present  or  accounted  for,  or  the  names 
(^f  the  unauthorized  absentees,  and.  without  command,  takes  his 
post.  r>Ien  who  are  known  to  be  absent  by  proper  authority  are 
not  reported  absent  by  the  section  leaders. 

The  captain  places  himself  12  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of 
and  facing  the  company  in  time  to  receive  the  report  of  the  first 
sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns,  and  then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  when  the  first  sergeant  has 
reported  and  draw  saber  with  the  captain. 

TO  DISMISS  THE   COMPANY. 

125.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  captain  directs  the  first  ser- 
geant:  Dismiss  the  companii.  The  ofiicers  fall  out;  the  first 
sergeant  places  himseli'.  faced  to  the  front.  3  paces  to  the  front 
and  2  paces  from  the  nearest  flank  of  the  company,  salutes, 
faces  toward  opposite  flank  of  the  company,  and  commands : 
1.  Inspection,  2.  Akms,  3.  Port,  4.  Aems,  5.  Dismissed. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

126.  The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  squad,  the  guide  being  established  instead  of  the  flank 
file.  The  rear-rank  man  of  the  flank  file  keeps  his  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front  and  covers  nis  h\e  leaders. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  places  himself  in  prolongation 
of  the  line.  2  paces  from  and  facing  the  tlank  toward  which  the 
dress  is  made,  verifies  the  alignment,  and  commands :  Fkont. 

I*latoon  and  section  leaders  take  a  like  position  when  required 
to  verify  alignments. 


MACHINE'GUN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917.  65 

127.  At  dismounted  formations,  if  a  squad  contains  less  than 
6  men,  it  is  increased  to  that  number  by  transfers  from  other 
squads,  or  it  is  broken  up  and  its  members  assigned  to  other 
squads  or  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

TO   OPEN    RANKS.* 

128.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  marcli  the  front  rank  executes  right  dress; 
the  rear  rank  and  the  file  closers  march  backward  four  steps, 
halt,  and  execute  light  dress;  the  lieutenants  pass  around  their 
respective  Hanks  and  take  posts,  facing  to  the  front  3  paces  in 
front  of  their  respective  platoons ;  the  train  lieutenant  takes 
post  1  pace  to  the  left  of  the  reconnaissance  officer.  The  cap- 
tain aligns  the  front  rank,  the  rear  rank,  and  file  closers,  takes 
post  3  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide,  facing  to  the  left,  and 
commands :  Front. 

TO   CLOSE  RANKS. 

129.  Being  at  open  ranks:  1.  Close  ranks,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  lieutenants  resume  their  posts  in 
the  line  of  tile  closers ;  the  rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches,  each 
man  covering  his  file  leader ;  the  file  closers  close  to  2  paces 
from  the  rear  rank ;  the  captain  takes  his  post. 

TO   FORM   OR   MARCH   IN    COLUMN    OF    SQUADS    FROM   LINE. 

130.  Being  in  line:  1.  Squads  right  {left),  2.  March;  or  1, 
Squads  right  (left),  2.  March,  3.  Company.  4.  Halt. 

Each  squad  executes' the  movement  (102).  The  platoon  and 
section  loaders  and  the  file  closers  take  their  places.     (PI.  II.) 

The  guide  of  each  rank  preserves  the  trace  and  step  of  the  pre- 
ceding guide  at  a  distance  of  40  inches. 

to   change  direction   V/HILE   in    COLUMN   OF   SQUADS. 

131.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  change  direction :  1.  Col- 
umn right  (left).  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  squad 
turns  to  the  right  on  a  moving  pivot   (100)  ;  the  other  ranks, 


56  lyiACHINE'GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

without  command,  turn  successively  on  tlie  same  i;:round  and  in 
a  similar  manner. 

Column  lialf  right   (left)  is  similarly  executed. 

TO   FOEM    COLUMN    OF    SQUADS   FE0:M    LINE   AND   CHANGE   DIKECTIONS. 

132.  Being  in  line : '1.  Squads  right  (left),  column  rigid 
{left),  2.  Maech;  or  1.  Right  (left)  hif  squads.  2.  March. 

In  the  first  case  the  ri2:ht  squad  initiates  the  column  right  as 
soon  as  it  has  completed  the  squad  riglit. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march,  the  right  squad 
marches  forward;  the  remainder  of  the  company  executes  the 
squads  right  (101)  column  left  (131)  on  the  same  ground  as 
the  right  squad,  and  1'ollows  the  right  squad.  The  right  squad 
in  moving  olT  takes  four  short  steps  and  then  the  full  step. 

TO   FOEM   LINE  FEOM    COLUMN   OF   SQL^ADS. 

133.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  to  the  flank : 
1.  Squads  right  (left),  2.  Maech,  3.  Guide  eight  (left)  ;  or  1. 
Squads  right  (left),  2.  Maech,  3.  Company,  4.  Halt. 

Executed  by  each  squad  (102).  The  platoon  and  section 
leaders,  file  closers,  etc.,  take  their  posts  (PI.  I)  in  the  most 
convenient  manner. 

134.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  on  right  or 
left:  1.  On  riglit  {left)  into  line,  2.  March,  3.  Company,  4. 
Halt,  5.  Feont. 

At  the  first  command  the  corporal  of  the  leading  squad  com- 
mands:  Right  turn.  The  corporals  of  the  other  squads  com- 
mand :  Forward,  if  at  a  halt.  At  the  second  command  the  lead- 
ing squad  turns  to  the  right  on  a  moving  pivot.  The  command 
hrdt  is  given  when  the  leading  squad  has  advanced  the  desired 
distance  in  the  new  direction;  it  halts;  its  corporal  then  com- 
mands: Right  {left)  dress. 

The  squads  in  rear  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front ; 
ouch,  when  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line  on  the  left 
of  the  preceding  squad  executes  right  turn  at  the  command  of 
its  corporal ;  each  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  command  of  its 
cc.rporal,  who  then  commands:  Right  dress.  All  dress  on  the 
first  squad  in  line. 


MACHIHE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  57 

If  executed  in  double  time,  all  the  squads  march  in  double 
time  until  halted. 

135.  Beincz:  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  to  the  front: 
1.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  Maech,  3.  Company,  4.  Halt, 
5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  corporals  of  the  squads  in  rear  of 
the  leading  one  command:  Right  oblique.  If  at  a  halt,  the  cor- 
poral of  the  leading  squad  commands :  Forward.  At  the  sees 
ond  command  the  leading  squad  moves  straight  forward ;  the 
rear  squads  oblique  as  indicated.  The  command  halt  is  given 
v.^heu  the  leading  squad  has  advanced  the  desired  distance;  it 
halts ;  its  corporal  then  commands :  Left  dress.  Each  of  the 
rear  squads  when  opposite  its  place  in  line  resumes  the  original 
direction  at  the  command  of  its  corporal ;  each  is  halted  on  the 
line  at  the  command  of  its  corporal,  who  then  commands :  Left 
dress.    All  dress  on  the  first  squad  in  line. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  all  the  squads  march  in  double 
time  until  halted. 

TO   rOEM    FLANK    COLUilN    OF   FILES   FROM    LINE. 

136.  Movements  in  flank  column  have  no  disciplinary  value. 
Their  use  should  be  limited  to  the  rare  occasions  necessitating 
a  narrow  front  of  the  column.  They  are  executed  in  quick  time 
only. 

137.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Right  (left),  2.  Face,  3.  For- 
ivard,  4.  March. 

At  the  second  command  all  face  to  the  right.  At  the  fourth 
command  all  take  the  full  step.  Individuals  not  in  the  two 
ranks  move  so  as  to  preserve  the  relative  positions  they  had  in 
line. 

138.  Marching  in  column  of  squads :  1.  Route  order,  2. 
March  ;  or,  1.  At  ease,  2.  March. 

Officers  carry  their  sabers  at  will  or  in  the  scabbard;  the 
men  retain  their  positions  in  ranks,  but  are  not  required  to  keep 
step. 

If  the  command  be  ro^lt€  order,  the  men  are  permitted  to 
1  talk ;  if  the  command  be  at  ease,  silence  is  preserved. 


58  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Section  VII. — The  Gux  Squad. 
(Dismounted,  iDreliminary  exercises.) 

139.  The  .crim  squad  con'=;ists  of  1  corporal  and  8  privates, 
and  is  tlie  l)asic  unit  of  the  niachine-irun  company. 

The  squad  is  equipped  with  two  carts,  one  carrying:  the  jrun 
and  one  the  ammunition.  The  duties  of  the  members  of  the 
gun  squad  are  as  follov\-s : 

The  corporal  commands  the  squad.  Xo.  1  is  the  gunner,  Xo.  2 
is  the  loader,  Xos.  3  and  4  are  ammunition  men,  Xos.  o  and  6 
are  spare  men  and  are  in  charge  of  the  belt-filling  station,  Nos.  7 
and  8  are  drivers. 

140.  The  following  tools  are  carried  by  the  different  mem- 
bers of  the  squad : 

The  corporal  carries  a  wire  cutter  ;  Xo.  3.  a  pick ;  Nos.  4,  5, 
and  G,  shovels ;  and  No.  8.  a  hand  ax. 

141.  The  object  of  the  preliminary  drills  is  to  insure  indi- 
vidual expertness  aud  clean-cut  movements  in  handling  the  gun 
by  night  as  well  as  by  day ;  therefore,  night  drills  or  drills  with 
the  men  blindfolded  must  be  held  until  all  movements  are 
executed  smoothly  and  without  false  motions. 

142.  The  preliminary  drill  consists  of — 

1.  Forming  the  gun  squad. 

2.  Examining  the  gun, 

3.  Mounting  the  gun, 

4.  Dismounting  the  gun. 

5.  Loading  for  automatic  fire. 

6.  Loading  for  single  shots. 

7.  Laying  the  gun, 

8.  Suspending  fire. 

9.  Ceasing  fire, 
10.  Unloading. 

TEACHING  ELEilEXTARY   DEILL. 

143.  1,  Equipment  required  for  each  gun  team:  Gun,  tripod. 
2  belt'.'  and  dummies,  2  ammunition  boxes,  tool  box,  landscape 
targets. 


MACKINE-GTJN  DRILL  IlE(JTJLATIONS,   1917.  59 

2.  The  gun  and  tripod  will  be  placed  in  line  on  the  ground 
about  3  paces  apart  and  about  30  yards  from  the  landscape 
target. 

3.  Tripod  on  the  left,  clamps  tight,  strap  around  trail  and 
buckled,  traversing  clamp  sufficiently  tight  to  prevent  the  tripod 
head  from  coming  out  of  the  socket  and  to  prevent  it  from 
swinging  around  when  the  tripod  is  being  carried,  legs  to  the 
rear,  tripod  head  over  trail. 

4.  Gun  on  the  right,  muzzle  pointing  to  the  front,  stem  in, 
bottom  plate  slide  closed,  covers  locked,  handle  block  pin  screwed 
in.  T  head  pointing  straight  up  and  down,  rear  sight  leaf  low- 
ered with  slide  set  at  600,  barrel  disk  tight  and  sleeve  secured 
with  locking  pin.  trigger  pushed  and  mainspring  released,  heads 
in  traversing  handles  screwed  home,  water  jacket  filled  (see 
note  below),  oil  reservoirs  filled. 

5.  Tool  box  or  gunner's  pouch  (If  issued)  beside  the  gun. 

6.  Ammunition  boxes  about  3  paces  in  rear  of  the  interval 
between  gun  and  tripod. 

Note. — In  elementary  drill,  water  will  not  be  placed  in  the 
water  jacket  until  the  stage  of  combined  drill  has  been  reached. 

TO  FORM  THE  GUN   SQUAD. 

144.  The  instructor  indicates  the  place  of  formation,  about 
8  paces  in  rear  of  the  gun,  and  commands :  Fall  In.  At  this 
command  the  squad  assembles  as  in  "  The  school  of  the  squad  " 
(91).  The  instructor  then  commands:  Call  Off.  Commencing 
on  the  right  the  men  call  off  alternately,  front  and  rear  rank, 
"  One,"  "  Two,"  "  Three,"  "  Four,"  and  so  on. 

TO    POST    THE    GUN    SQUAD. 

145.  Posts.  At  the  command  Posts,  No,  1  wi-11  repeat  the 
order ;  and  all  men  move  at  double  time  to  positions  as  folhjws : 
No.  1  will  pass  behind  the  gun  and  fall  in  on  the  left  of  the 
tripod;  No.  2  will  fall  in  on  the  right  of  the  gun;  No.  3  will  fall 
in  on  the  left  of  the  ammunition  box ;  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6  will  fall 
in  about  5  paces  in  rear  of  No.  3,  No.  4  being  on  the  right. 

As  soon  as  No.  1  gets  to  his  position,  he  will  attend  to  the 
point  mentioned  in  paragraph  143,  section  3,  and,  in  addition, 


60  MACHINE-GUI^   DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

%Yill  see  that  the  elevating  and  trunnion  pins  are  properly  in 
position,  and  that  both  the  elevating  screws  are  equally  ex- 
posed. 

No.  2  vrill  attend  to  the  points  mentioned  in  paragraph  143. 
section  4,  and  will  inspect  the  tool  box,  making  certain  that  the 
contents  are  complete.  (The  inspection  of  the  tool  box  is  done 
twice  only  during  the  drill :  once  by  the  first  Xo.  2  and  once  by 
the  last  No.  2. ) 

No.  3  will  examine  the  belt  and  see  that  the  dummies  are  cor- 
rectly placed  in  the  box,  and  v^ill  then  lock  the  box.  The  catch 
on  the  ammunition  box  will  be  toward  the  front.  He  will  th.en 
report  "  Correct "  to  Xo.  2,  who  will  report  "  Gun  and  am- 
uumition  correct "  to  No.  1,  who  in  turn  will  report  '"AH  cor- 
rect "  (or  otherwise)  to  the  instructor. 

TO  EXAMINE  THE  GUX. 

146.  Before  commencing  the  drill  the  instructor  commands : 
ExAiiixE  THE  Gl'x.  Eacli  number  then  examines  the  gun  and 
equipment  as  follows: 

No.  2  examines  the  gun  and  sees  that — 

1.  The  follower  is  screwed  down  tight. 

2.  The  barrel  disk  is  tight. 

3.  The  stem  and  drain  plug  are  in. 

4.  The  feed  box  is  seated  and  the  front  cover  catch  turned 

down. 
.5,  The  sight  is  in  working  order. 

6.  The  lock  is  seated  and  the  mainspring  is  released. 

7.  The  bottom  plate  slide  is  closed. 

8.  The  oil  reservoirs  are  full. 

No.  1  examines  the  tripod  and  sees  that — 

1.  The  legs  are  closely  folded,  strap  around  trail. 

2.  The  traversing  clamp  is  tight,  tripod  head  over  trail, 

3.  The  pins  are  in  and  turned  down. 

4.  The  elevating  screws  are  exposed  the  same  amount. 
No.  3  examines  the  belt  and  sees  that — 

1.  The  cartridges  are  correctly  placed  and  alignetl. 

2.  The  belt  is  packed   correctly   in  the  box  and  the  lid 

fastened. 
As  each  man  finishes  his  examination  he  reports  to  the  corporal. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  61 

TO   MOUNT  THE  GUN. 

147.  Note. — The  instructor  will  now  bring  the  team  to  the 
left  of  the  spot  where  the  gun  is  to  be  mounted,  so  that  they 
may  see  all  movements  clearly  and  listen  to  explanations.  He 
will  then  act  as  No.  1,  himself,  giving  and  repeating  the  order 
Mount  Gun,  and  will  point  out  a  spot  which  will  be  about  30 
yards  from  the  target  where  the  gun  is  to  be  mounted. 

On  the  command  Mount  Gun,  No.  1  picks  up  the  tripod  with 
his  right  hand  at  the  balance,  steadies  it  with  the  left  hand, 
and  moves  forward  at  a  run  to  the  designated  position.  He 
then  places  the  tripod  on  the  ground,  unclamps  the  legs,  swings 
legs  to  the  front  and  clamps  them  in  such  position  that  the  socket 
will  be  upright  and  at  a  convenient  elevation.  He  then  sits  down 
behind  the  tripod  and  withdraws  elevating  pin  with  the  right 
hand  and  the  trunnion  pin  with  the  left  hand.  While  adjusting 
the  tripod,  the  following  points  must  be  attended  to :  The  left 
forearm  must  be  supported  by  the  left  thigh  and  the  clamping 
handles  should,  if  possible,  both  be  manipulated  with  the  right 
hand. 

As  soon  as  the  tripod  is  nearly  in  position.  No.  2  pushes  the 
bottom  plate  slide  to  the  rear,  grasps  the  right  handle  block 
with  the  left  hand,  passes  the  right  hand  over  the  water  jacket 
and  lifts  the  gun  so  that  the  barrel  will  be  pointing  to  his  right, 
under  his  right  arm,  moves  forward  at  a  run,  and  takes  position 
at  the  right  of  the  tripod  and  facing  it. 

He  must  reach  the  position  at  the  moment  No.  1  is  removing 
the  elevating  and  trunnion  pins.  He  places  his  right  foot  be- 
tween the  front  legs  of  the  tripod,  kneels  on  the  left  knee,  sup- 
porting the  weight  of  the  gun  on  the  right  knee.  With  the 
assistance  of  No.  1  he  puts  the  gun  in  position,  inserts  the 
trunnion  pin,  and  turns  it  down.  He  then  removes  the  stem 
and  lies  down  opposite  the  feed  box  of  the  gun,  placing  the  belt 
box  in  position  in  line  with  the  feed  box. 

No.  1  assists  No.  2  in  adjusting  the  gun  to  the  tripod  and  in- 
serts the  elevating  pin.  After  putting  in  the  elevating  pin  No.  1 
will  at  once  level  the  gun,  adjust  the  traversing  clamp  to  see 
that  it  is  moderately  tight,  and  take  the  correct  hold ;  eyes  must 
be  directed  toward  the  target. 
33325°— IS — —3 


62  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

No.  3  takes  two  ammunition  boxes  and  places  them  in  reach 
of  No.  2,  then  returns  to  his  original  position.  The  catches 
should  be  to  the  front  and  the  boxes  must  not  be  placed  in  such 
a  position  that  No.  2  is  likely  to  knock  them  over  as  he  lies  down. 
The  ammunition'  must  be  at  hand  by  the  time  No.  2  is  ready 
for  it.  •'  ...   .> 

When  the  men  have  made  sufficient  progi'ess  in  the  foregoing 
lessons,  they  will  be  exercised  in  combining  them  and  coming 
into  action.  Three  aiming  marks  will  be  pointed  out  on  the 
landscape  target  by  the  instructor,  one  of  which  should  be  in 
the  foreground,  one  in  the  middle  distance,  and  one  in  the  back- 
ground. 

The  instructor  will  name  the  range  and  target  and  at  the  com- 
mand or  signal  Action  the  gun  will  be  mounted,  loaded,  and 
laid.  As  soon  as  No.  2  puts  up  his  hand,  the  aim  and  sight  set- 
ting will  be  checked,  and  then  the  various  points  taught  in  the 
earlier  lessons  will  be  criticized.  No.  2  must  not  be  allowed  to 
adjust  the  sights.  Each  number  must  perform  the  duties  laid 
down  for  him  in  the  earlier  lessons  and  the  aiming  marks  given 
by  the  instructor  must  be  service  targets  and  not  haystacks, 
windmills,  or  steeples. 

148.  When  the  gun  is  mounted  and  the  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  are 
In  position,  the  following  points  should  be  criticized  by  the  in- 
structor : 

1.  Actions  of  Nos.  1,  2.  and  3  until  the  gun  is  mounted. 

2.  Trail  tov\-ard  the  target. 

3.  Feet  and  legs  on  ground  (necessary  for  rough  ground  drill). 

4.  Clamps  of  legs  tight. 

5.  Socket  upright. 

6.  Traversing  clamp  tight  (this  must  be  tested  by  the  in- 
structor in  the  same  way  that  the  No.  1  tests  it). 

7.  Pins  in  properly  and  turned  down. 

8.  Elevating  screws  equally  exposed. 

9.  Tripod  a  suitable  height  for  the  firer. 

10.  Gun  level. 

11.  Stem  out. 

12.  Front  cover  locked. 

13.  Bottom  plate  slide  open. 

14.  Rear  sight  leaf  down,  slide  at  600  yards. 

15.  No.  1  siting  and  holding  the  gun  correctly. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  63 

IG.  No.  2  lying  down  with  head  below  the  level  of  the  gun, 
gunner's  pouch  (if  issued)  slung  across  his  shoulders. 

IT.  Ammunition  box  in  correct  position. 

18.  No.  3  lying  down  in  rear  and  to  u  flank. 

Note. — When  the  instructor  criticizes,  faults  should  be  pointed 
out  in  such  a  manner  that  all  the  team  benefits  from  the 
criticism. 

TO   DISMOUNT   THE    GUN. 

149.  xVt  the  command  Dismount  Gun,  Xo.  1  removes  both 
pins  and  carries  the  tripod  back  to  its  original  position,  clamps 
the  legs  and  lays  the  tripod  on  the  ground  on  the  left  of  the 
gun.  In  folding  the  legs  he  first  loosens  the  clamps,  allowing 
the  tripod  to  collapse,  next  seizes  the  tripod  head  with  both 
hands,  and  with  a  sharp  upward,  forward,  and  downward  move- 
ment folds  up  the  legs.  He  then  tightens  the  clamps,  and,  if 
necessary,  aligns  the  tripod  head  over  the  trail  and  lies  down 
on  the  left  of  the  tripod. 

No.  2  passes  the  ammunition  box  to  No.  3,  lifts  the  gun  from 
the  tripod,  replaces  the  stem  before  leaving  the  gun  position, 
and  then  double  times  l)ack  to  the  original  position.  Before 
placing  the  gun  on  the  ground  he  ^ill  close  the  bottom  plate 
slide  and  reset  the  sight  at  600  yards. 

No.  3  goes  forward  at  double  time  to  the  gun  position  and 
brings  back  both  ammunition  boxes  to  the  original  position. 

Note. — At  the  beginning  of  this  exercise  it  is  well  to  divide 
the  action  of  dismounting  the  gun  into  two  parts,  the  dismount- 
ing of  the  tripod  being  mastered  first  by  all  members  of  the 
team,  after  the  instructor  has  shown  how  the  tripod  is  dis- 
mounted. When  all  of  the  numbers  have  made  reasonable 
progress  with  the  tripod,  the  instructor  will  then  continue  the 
instruction  in  mounting  the  gun  and  dismounting  the  gun. 

150.  Efliciency  having  been  attained  under  the  preceding 
paragraphs,  with  the  tripod  in  its  highest  position,  the  gun  squad 
is  then  instructed  in  mounting  the  gun  on  hillsides,  uneven 
trround.  and  in  the  several  positions  of  the  tripod.  (Pis.  30  to 
40.  inclusive.  :\l.  G.  F.  M.) 

151.  The  gun  .'^quad  is  instructed  in  mounting  the  gun  fror.i 
the  prone  position  and  in  firing  from  the  prone,  knoolinir.  and 
sitting  positions. 


64  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

TO  LOAD  THE  GUN   FOE  AXTTOMATIC  FIEE. 

152.  1.  Automatic  fire,  2.  Load. 

Note. — The  instructor  first  demonstrates  the  duties  of  Xo.  1 
and  No.  2. 

At  the  command  Load,  No.  1  holds  the  roller  handle  in  its 
rearmost  position  with  the  right  hand  and  advances  his  left 
hand  to  the  left  of  the  feed  box,  ready  to  grip  the  tag  of  the 
belt. 

No.  2  opens  the  ammunition  box.  holds  the  end  of  the  belt 
with  his  forefinger  (right  hand  recommended)  on  the  brass  tag 
at  the  point  where  it  joins  the  fabric,  and  pushes  the  tag  of 
the  belt  through  the  feed^box  as  far  as  possible. 

No.  1  grips  the  tag.  then  pulls  the  belt  through  the  feed  box 
as  far  as  possible,  and  releases  the  roller  handle.  He  again 
pulls  the  roller  handle  to  the  rear,  pulling  the  belt  to  the  left 
a  second  time  as  far  as  it  will  go,  and  again  releases  the  roller 
handle.  The  gun  is  now  loaded  for  automatic  fire  and  No.  1 
resumes  his  hold  on  the  gun. 

TO  load  for  single  shots. 

153.  1.  Single  shots,  2.  Load.  At  the  command  Load,  No,  1 
pulls  the  roller  handle  to  its  rearmost  position ;  No.  2  passes  the 
tag  of  the  belt  through  the  feed  box ;  No.  1  holds  the  roller 
handle  in  its  rearmost  position  with  the  right  hand,  grasps  the 
tag  of  the  belt  with  the  left  hand  and  pulls  it  straight  through 
the  feed  box  as  far  as  it  will  come.  He  then  releases  the  roller 
handle  and  without  pulling  on  the  belt  he  again  pulls  the  roller 
handle  to  its  rearmost  position  and  releases  it.  The  gun  is  now 
loaded  for  single  shots :  by  bringing  the  roller  handle  to  the  rear 
after  each  shot  without  pulling  the  belt,  the  gun  will  fire  single 
shots.  To  change  from  single  shots  to  automatic  fire  at  any  time, 
it  is  necessary  to  pull  the  roller  handle  to  its  rearmost  position, 
pull  the  belt  to  the  left,  and  release  the  roller  handle.  The  gun 
being  loaded  for  automatic  fire,  single  shots  may  be  fired  by 
first  operating  roller  handle  once  without  pulling  belt. 

TO  lay  the  gux. 

154.  Note. — It  is  an  advantage  to  combine  the  adjustment  of 
sights  with  laying  the  gun;  therefore,  instruction  in  aiming 
should  be  given  prior  to  instruction  in  laying  the  gun. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  6t 

The  tar.cret  being  indicated  l>y  tr.e  instructor,  the  C(.unmand  is 
iriven:  1.  'Ran^'c  i.SOO  yanJr;)  rUjlit  {left)  (2)  (this  being  tlie 
deflection  in  points  of  windage  to  the  right  (left),  2.  At  (such 
AN  object).  At  the  first  command.  Ivo.  1  raises  tlie  rear  sight 
leaf  (unless  the  range  announced  is  less  than  500  yards,  when 
the  battle  sight  will  be  used)  and  moves  the  slide  until  the  line 
of  sight  coincides  with  the  line  on  the  leaf  corresponding  to  the 
range  ordinate.  He  then  taps  the  gun  over  until  the  correct 
direction  is  obtained  and  elevates  or  depresses  until  the  aim  i' 
correct.  Should  a  fairly  large  change  in  direction  be  nocessar\-. 
No.  1  will  order  No.  2  to  loosen  the  clamp,  swing  roughly  on  the 
target,  order  No.  2  to  tighten,  and  then  lay  accurately  by  tap- 
ping. It  is  most  important  that  while  tapping  the  gun  or  ma- 
nipulating the  elevating  wheel,  the  correct  hold  should  be  main- 
tained with  the  other  hand.  As  soon  as  the  aim  is  correct,  he 
then  grasps  both  handles,  places  the  thumbs  on  the  trigger, 
releases  the  safety  catch,  and  by  calling  Ready,  orders  No.  2 
to  put  up  his  hand.  Care  must  be  exercised  when  checking  the 
aim  to  prevent  the  gun  being  moved  as  No.  1  moves  his  head  to 
one  side  to  allow  the  aim  to  be  viewed  by  the  instructor. 

TO   FIEE  THE   GUX. 

155.  The  gun  being  mounted  and  loaded,  or  assumed  to  be 
loaded:  1.  Range  {800)  right  {left)  (2),  (this  being  the  deflec- 
tion in  points  of  windage  to  the  right  or  left),  2.  At  (such  an 
ob.ject),  3.  Fixed  {distrihiited,  searching,  ranging)  fire,  4.  {So 
manij)  rounds  {as  1  belt,  etc.),  5.  Commence  Firing. 

The  details  and  methods  to  be  used  in  teaching  the  different 
kinds  of  fire  are  given  in  the  Machine-Gun  Firing  ?.I;inual. 
For  definitions  of  the  different  kinds  of  fire  see  "  Definitions." 

At  tlie  first  and  second  commands  the  operations  prescribed 
in  the  previous  paragraph  are  performed.  The  third  and  fourth 
connnands  are  preparatory  and  indicate  the  class  of  fire  and  th(^ 
number  of  rounds  to  be  fired.  These  commands  are  given  when 
necessary. 

At  the  conunand  Co>[^rENCE  Firing,  No.  1  instantly  presses 
the  trigger  without  deranging  his  aim  and  at  the  same  time 
maintains  a  steady  hold  on  the  handles. 


66  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

TO   SUSPEND   FIBIXG. 

156.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  on  his  whistle,  and 
repeats  same  if  necessary,  and  commands  Suspend  Firing.  Fir- 
ing stops ;  No.  1  releases  the  pressure  on  the  trigger.  The  gun 
is  left  loaded  and  in  a  position  of  readiness  for  an  instant  re- 
sumption of  firing.  The  corporal  and  No.  1  continue  their 
observations  of  the  target,  the  aiming  point,  or  the  place  at 
which  the  target  disappeared  or  at  which  it  is  expected  to  reap- 
pear. 

TO    CEASE   FIKING. 

157.  At  the  command  Cease  Firing,  No.  1  releases  the  pres- 
sure on  the  trigger,  grasps  the  roller  handle  with  right  hand, 
and  brings  it  to  its  rearmost  position  not  less  than  three  times, 
pulls  the  trigger,  and  lays  down  the  rear  sight.  No.  2  grasps 
the  upper  and  lower  feed-box  pawls  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  left  hand,  presses  them  together,  and  with  the 
right  hand  withdraws  the  belt  from  the  feed  box,  replacing  it 
in  the  ammunition  box. 

TO   UNLOAD. 

158.  At  the  command  Unload,  No.  1  will  lower  the  sight  leaf, 
if  it  be  raised,  with  the  left  hand ;  at  the  same  time  he  will  pull 
the  roller  handle  to  its  rearmost  position  and  immediately  allow 
it  to  fly  forward,  repeating  this  motion  at  least  three  times. 
He  will  then  press  the  upper  and  bottom  pawls  of  the  feed  box 
with  the  right  hand,  the  upper  pawls  being  pressed  with  the 
thumb  and  the  l)ottom  pawls  with  the  finger,  taking  care  to  keep 
the  hand  clear  of  the  entrance  to  the  feed  box.  No.  2  will  with- 
draw the  belt  and  pack  it  carefully  in  the  box ;  No.  1  will  then 
release  the  mainspring  by  pressing  the  trigger. 

Section  YIII.— The  Squad. 

(Mounted.) 

159.  The  gun  squad  is  habitually  formed  for  drill  as  shown 
in  Phite  IV. 

The  carts  habitually  turn  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius 
is  2  yards. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  67 

In  all  ciianges  of  direction,  turns,  and  abouts  the  carts  main- 
tain their  relative  positions,  the  gun  cart  leading. 

In  all  changes  of  direction  tlie  members  of  the  gun  squad  con- 
form to  the  movement  of  the  carts. 

T'le  gun  cart  i.--  the  guide  for  the  squad  in  all  formations,  the 
other  elements  maintaining  their  relative  positions  with  respect 
to  it, 

SQUAD    DltlLL, 

160.  The  gun  mule  and  ammunition  mule  being  hitched,  as 
described  on  page  ITS,  the  drivers  take  their  positions  at  the 
head  of  the  mules  and  remain  at  attention.  The  gun  squad 
-falls  in,  facing  to  the  front,  with  the  center  of  the  rear  rank 
3  paces  to  the  front  of  the  gun  mule,  the  squad  leader  taking 
post  as  in  the  Squad  Dismounted. 

TO   POST   THE   GUN    SQUAD. 

161.  The  squad  leader  commands:  Posts. 

At  this  command  members  of  the  gun  squad  take  their  posts 
as  in  Plate  IV. 

to  re-fokm  the  gun  squad  in  front  of  the  caets. 

162.  The  squad  leader  commands:  Fall  In,  placing  himself 
so  that  the  center  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  squad  will  be  .3  paces 
to  the  front  of  the  gun  mule.  Members  of  the  gun  squad  fall  in 
at  a  run. 

TO    MARCH    TO    THE    FRONT. 

163.  1.  Foncard,  2.  March.  At  the  preparatory  command 
the  drivers  collect  their  animals  (440)  and  the  men  prepare  to 
march  (74). 

At  the  command  of  execution  all  move  to  the  front. 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION. 

164.  1.  Sqnads  right,  2.  March.  At  the  command  marcli  the 
gun  cart  turns  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  2  yards. 


68  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.  1917. 

The  ammunition  cart  follows  in  trace  and  turns  on  the  same 
ground  as  the  gun  cart,  the  members  of  the  squad  conforming 
to  the  movement. 

TO    MARCH    TO   THE   KEAE. 

165.  1.  To  the  rear.  2.  Makch.  At  the  command  march  the 
gun  cart  turns  to  the  left  about  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose 
radius  is  2  yards,  followed  in  trace  by  the  ammunition  cart. 

166.  To  march  to  the  rear  for  a  few  paces:  1.  Backward,  2. 
March.  At  the  command  march,  the  drivers  rein  back^  the 
mules,  and  the  men  execute  backward  march  as  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier. 

TO  OBLIQUE. 

167.  1.  Right  oblique.  2.  March.  At  the  command  march  the 
gun  and  ammunition  carts,  respectively,  execute  a  half  turn  to 
the  right  and  move  off  in  the  oblique  direction. 

TO  RESUME  the  MARCH  TO  THE  FRONT. 

168.  1.  Forward,  2.  March.  At  this  command  the  gun  and 
ammunition  carts  execute  a  half  turn  to  the  left  and  continue 
their  march  to  the  front. 

TO   HALT. 

169.  1.  Squad,  2.  Halt.  At  the  command  halt  the  drivers 
rein  in  their  mules  and  the  men  halt. 

TO  PREPARE   rOR    ACTION, 

170.  The  command  is:  Action.  At  this  command  the  carts, 
if  moving,  halt.  The  squad  leader  marks  the  place  at  which  the 
gun  is  to  be  set  up.  No.  1  secures  the  gun :  No.  2  the  tripod ; 
No.  3  the  water  box  and  one  ammunition  box ;  No.  4  the  tool 
box.  condensing  device,  and  one  ammunition  box ;  Nos.  5  and 
G  secure  the  belt-filling  machine  and  loose  ammunition. 

The  Nos.  1.  2,  3,  and  4,  as  soon  as  they  have  secured  their 
equipment,  move  forward  as  described  in  paragraph  147,  and, 
under  the  direction  of  the  corporal,  mount  the  gim. 


MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  69 

The  senior  driver  takes  command  of  tlie  carts,  moves  tliem  on 
the  run  to  tlie  flank,  or  to  the  rear,  to  a  position  under  cover.^ 

Nos.  5  and  6  establish  a  belt-filling  station  as  directed  by  the 
corporal. 

TO  REASSEMBLE  THE  SQUAD. 

171.  The  command  is :  Assemble.  At  this  command  the  gun 
is  dismounted,  the  carts  move  up  at  a  run  to  their  original  posi- 
tions, and  halt ;  the  squad  resumes  its  original  formation. 

In  reassembling,  the  men  move  at  a  run. 

Section  IX — The  Section. 
(Mounted.) 

172.  The  section  is  habitually  formed  in  line  or  close  line  as 
in  Plates  III  and  IV  or  in  column  of  squads  as  in  Plate  II. 

The  post  of  the  section  leader  when  the  section  is  in  line  is 
3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  interval  between  squads. 
When  the  section  is  in  column  of  squads  his  post  is  on  the  left  of 
the  driver  of  the  leading  mule. 

The  section  in  column  of  squads  marches  to  the  front,  to  the 
rear,  obliques,  and  halts  in  the  same  manner  and  by  the  same 
commands  as  prescribed  for  the  squad,  substituting  "  section  " 
for  "  squad." 

TO  CHANGE  DIEECTION. 

•  173.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1,  Column  right  (left),  2. 
March.  At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  squad 
commands :  Right  turn.  The  leader  of  the  rear  squad  com- 
mands. Foru-ard,  if  at  a  halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  leading  squad  turns  to  the  right 
as  prescribed  (164).  The  rear  squad  marches  squarely  up  to 
the  turning  point  and  turns  on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  similar 
manner  to  the  leading  squad. 

174.   Being  in  line:  1.  Right  (left)  turn,  2.  March. 

1  For  purposes  of  drill  the  carts  will  form  20  paces  to  the  rear  of  the 
gun  position,  facing  to  the  front. 


ro  MACHINE-GITN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

At  tlie  first  command  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  commands : 
Right  turn,  the  leader  of  the  left  squad  commands,  Ri<iht  half 
turn,  double  time. 

At  the  second  command  the  right  squad  executes  a  change 
of  direction  as  described  in  paragraph  164;  the  left  squad  exe- 
cutes right  half  turn  and.  when  opposite  its  position  in  the  new 
line,  it  again  executes  right  haif  turn,  and  comes  up  abreast  of 
the  right  squad  with  an  interval  of  10  yards  and  takes  up  the 
quick  time. 

TO  FOEil  LINE  TO  THE  TEOXT. 

175.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Right  (left)  front  into 
line,  2.  Makch,  3.  Seetion.  4.  Halt,  5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  squad  com- 
mands:  Foncard :  if  at  a  halt,  the  leader  of  the  squad  in  rear 
commands :  Right  oblique.  The  command  liait  is  given  when 
the  leading  squad  has  advanced  the  desired  distance.  It  halts 
and  its  leader  connnands :  Left  dress. 

The  rear  squad,  when  opposite  its  place  in  line,  resumes  the 
original  direction  and  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  command  of 
its  leader,  who  then  commands :  Left  dress. 

The  command  front  is  given  when  the  squads  are  in  line  and 
dressed. 

If  executed  at  double  time,  the  leading  squad  moves  in  quicJ<: 
time. 

TO   FOKM   LINE  TO  A  FLANK. 

176.  Being  in  column  of  .squads:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2. 
March. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  paragraph  164. 

ON    RIGHT    INTO    LINE. 

177.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  On  right  into  line.  2. 
March,  3.  Seetion,  4.  Halt.  5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  squad  com- 
mands Squads  right;  the  leader  of  the  second  squad  commands, 
Forward. 

At  the  second  command  the  leading  squad  turns  to  the  right, 
the  rear  squad  moves  forward,  passes  in  rear  of  the  leading 


MACHINE-GirN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  71 

squad,  and,  when  opposite  its  place  in  line,  changes  direction 
to  the  right. 

The  leading  squad  is  halted  at  the  fourth  command,  and 
dressed  to  the  right  bj'  the  squad  leader.  The  rear  squad,  when 
on  the  new  line,  halts  and  dresses  to  the  right.  When  all  are 
dressed  the  command  front  is  given.    • 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  squad  takes  the  double 
time  until  halted. 

TO  rOKM   COLITMN   AND   CHANGE   DIEECTION. 

178.  Being  in  line:  1.  f^quads  right  (left),  cohimn  right,  2. 
March;  or,  1.  Right  (left)  by  squadfi,  2.  Maech. 

In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  cohimn  right  as  soon 
as  it  has  completed  the  squads  right. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march  the  right  squad 
marches  forward;  the  remaining  squad  executes  squads  right 
and  then  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  squad. 

TO  FOEM   CLOSE  LINE. 

179.  Being  in  line:  1.  On  right  squad,  2.  Close,  3.  Front. 
At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  commands : 

Forward.  The  leader  of  the  left  squad  commands:  Squads 
right. 

At  the  second  command  the  right  squad  moves  forward  twice 
squad  distance,  is  halted  and  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  squad 
leader.  The  left  squad  executes  squads  right,  and  when  oppo- 
site its  place  in  the  new  line  executes  squads  left,  placing  itself 
abreast  of  the  right  squad  with  3  pace  interval  between  carts. 
The  command  front  is  given  by  the  section  leader  when  the 
alignment  is  verified. 

TO   EE-FOEM    LINE. 

180.  Being  in  close  line:  1.  Extend  on  right  squad,  2.  Maech, 
3.  Section,  4.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  connnands : 
Forward.  The  leader  of  the  left  squad  commands:  Left 
oblique. 


r2  MACHINE-GIJN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

At  the  command  march  all  move  off.  the  left  squad  upon 
gaining  its  interval  marches  to  the  front.  The  base  squad  halts 
at  the  fourth  command.  The  left  squad  when  abreast  of  the 
new  line  is  halted  and  dressed.  The  command  front  is  given 
by  the  section  leader  when  the  alignment  is  verified. 

TO  FOr.M   CLOSE  LI^^E  TO  A  FLA^:K. 

181.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Left  {right)  into  line, 
2.  March,  3.  Froiit. 

At  the  command  march  the  leading  squad  executes  left  turn. 
advances  squad  distance,  and  halts.  The  remaining  squads,  if 
at  a  halt,  move  forward  and,  in  succession,  execute  squads  left, 
coming  up  abreast  of  the  leading  squad,  and  halt,  with  an  inter- 
val of  3  paces  between  carts. 

This  movement  is  for  parking  the  carts,  ceremonies,  and  in- 
spection. 

TO  romi  COLUMN  of  squads  to  a  flank. 

182.  Being  in  close  line  :  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  March. 
At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  commands : 

Squads  right, "•  the  leader  of  the  remaining  squads  commands: 
Stand  fast. 

At  the  command  of  execution  the  right  squad  executes  squads 
right.  The  remaining  squads,  in  succession  from  the  right,  exe- 
cute squads  right  when  uncovered  by  the  squad  on  their  right. 

This  movement  is  for  leaving  the  park,  ceremonies,  and  in- 
spection only. 

Right  hy  squads  (platoons)  (sections),  or  (platoons)  sections 
rinht  turn,  can  not  be  executed  from  close  line. 


183.  Action.     Executed  as  described  in  paragraph  147. 

TO   REASSEMBLE   THE    SQUADS. 

184.  Assemble.     Executed  as  described  in  paragraph  149. 
1  If  executed  from  cJosc   line  the  cjirts  do  not  move. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  73 

Section  X. — The  Platoon. 
(Mounted.) 

185.  The  platoon  marches  to  the  front,  to  the  rear,  obliques, 
and  halts  in  the  same  manner,  and  by  the  same  commands  as 
prescribed  for  the  squad  mounted,  substituting  "platoon"  for 
"  squad." 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION. 

186.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Column  rkilit  (left),  2. 
March.  Executed  as  described  for  the  section  in  column  of 
squads  (173), 

Being  in  column  of  sections :  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands :  Right  twn.  If  at  a  halt,  other  section  leaders  command : 
Forward. 

At  the  command  march  the  leading  section  turns  to  the  right ; 
the  rear  sections  march  squarely  up  to  the  turning  point  of  the 
leading  section  and  turn  at  the  command  of  their  leaders. 

TO   FORM   LINE   TO  THE   FRONT. 

187.  Being  in  column  of  sections  or  squads:  1.  Right  (left) 
front  into  line,  2.  March,  3.  Platoon,  4.  Halt,  5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leaders  of  the  units  in  rear  of  the 
leading  one  command :  Right  oblique.  If  at  a  halt,  the  leader 
of  the  leading  unit  commands:  Foricarcl.  At  the  second  com- 
mand the  leading  unit  moves  straight  forward ;  the  rear  units 
oblique  as  indicated.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  lead- 
ing unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance ;  it  halts ;  its  leader 
then  commands :  Left  dress.  Each  of  the  rear  units  when  oppo- 
site its  place  in  line  resumes  the  original  direction  at  the  com- 
mand of  its  leader ;  each  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  command  of 
its  leader,  who  then  commands :  Left  dress.  All  dress  on  the 
first  unit  in  line. 

to  form  column  of  "sections. 

188.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or,  being  in  line  of  sections,  to 
form  the  platoon  in  line:  1.  Seetions  right  (left)  front  into  line, 

I     2.  Macrh,  3.  Platoon,  4,  Halt,  5.  Front. 


74  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS..   1917. 

Executed  by  each  section  as  described  in  the  section  mounted 
(175).  In  forming  tlie  platoon  in  line,  it  dresses  on  the  left 
squad  of  the  left  section.  In  forming  column  of  sections,  sec- 
tion leaders  verify  the  alignment  before  taking  their  posts.  The 
platoon  leader  commands:  Front,  when  the  alignments  have 
been  verified. 

When  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time,  the  commands 
for  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted,  and  the  guide  is  toward 
the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 

TO  for:si  line  to  the  flank. 

189.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2. 
March. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  paragraph  164. 

190.  Being  in  column  of  sections:  1.  Sections  right  (left) 
tvrn,   2.  March. 

Executed  by  each  section  as  in  paragraph  174. 

ON  right  into  line. 

191.  Being  in  column  of  sections:  1.  On  right  (left)  into  line, 
2.  March.  3.  Platoon,  4.  Halt.  5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  commands: 
Right  turn.  The  leaders  of  the  other  units  command  :  Foricard, 
if  at  a  halt. 

At  the  second  command  the  leading  unit  turns  to  the  right. 
The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  unit  has  advanced 
the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direction.  When  halted,  its 
leader  commands:  Right  dress. 

The  units  in  rear  march  straight  to  the  front ;  each,  when  oppo- 
site the  right  of  its  place  in  line,  executes  right  turn  at  the 
command  of  its  leader.  Each  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  com- 
mand of  its  leader,  who  then  .commands:  Right  dress.  All 
dress  on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  unit  marches  in  double 
time  until  halted. 

to  form  column  and  change  direction. 

192.  Being  in  line:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  column  right, 
2.  :\Iarch;  or,  1.  Right  by  squads,  2.  March. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  75 

..In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  the  column  right,  as 
soon  as  it  has  completed  the  squads  right. 

In  the  second  case  at  the  command  march,  the  right  squad 
marches  forward ;  the  remainder  of  tlie  platoon  executes  squads 
right  and  then  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  squad. 

.;  .  .  TO   FORM    LINE    OF    SECTIONS. 

193.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Sections  column  right 
(left),  2.  March.  Executed  by  each  section  as  described  in 
paragraph  173. 

194.  Being  in  line:  1.  Sections  right  by  squads,  2.  March. 
Executed  by  each  section  as  prescribed  for  the  section  in  para- 
graph 178. 

TO   FORM   CLOSE  LINE. 

195.  Being  in  line:  1.  On  right  squad,  2.  Close,  3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  com- 
mands :  Forward.  The  leaders  of  the  left  squads  command : 
Squads  right.  At  the  second  command  the  right  squad  moves 
forward  twice  squad  distance  (20  yards)  and  halts.  The  re- 
maining squads  execute  squads  right  and,  in  succession,  when 
opposite  their  place  in  the  new  line,  squads  left,  placing  them- 
selves abreast  of  the  right  squad  with  3-pace  intervals  between 
carts. 

TO    RE-FORM    LINE. 

196.  Being  in  close  line :  1.  Extend  on  right  squad,  2,  March, 
3.  Platoon,  4.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  all  squad  leaders,  except  the  leader 
of  the  base  squad,  command :  Left  oblique.  The  leader  of  the 
base  squad  commands  :  Forioard.  At  the  command  of  execution, 
all  move  off  and  the  squads,  in  succession  from  the  right,  upon 
gaining  their  interval,  march  to  the  front.  Only  the  base  squad 
halts  at  the  fourth  command.  The  remaining  squads,  when 
abreast  of  the  new  line,  halt. 


76  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

TO    rOKM    CLOSE    LINE    TO    A    FLANK. 

197.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Left  (right)  into  line, 
2.  Maech,  Z.  Front. 

Executed  as  prescribed  for  the  section  (ISl). 

TO  rOEM  COLUMN  OF  SQUADS  TO  A  FLANK. 

198.  Being  in  close  line:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2. 
Maech. 

Executed  as  prescribed  for  the  section  (1S2). 

TO  pkepaee  foe  action.    • 

199.  Action.     Executed  as  prescribed  for  the  squad  (147). 

to  eeassemble  the  squads. 

200.  Assemble.     Executed  as  prescribed  for  the  squad  (149). 

Section  XI. — The  Company. 
(:\Iounted.) 

201.  The  company  dismounted  is  formed  on  the  company 
parade  by  tlie  first  sergeant,  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  120. 

After  the  company  is  formed,  the  first  sergeant  conunands : 
Stable  Details  Fall  Out.  At  this  command  all  section  leaders 
and  drivers  fall  out.  Tlie  senior  section  leader  takes  command, 
marches  the  details  to  the  stables,  and  commands:  Haeness.  At 
this  command,  all  drivers  and  section  leaders  fall  out,  and  under 
the  supervision  of  the  respective  section  leaders  the  mules  are 
harnessed. 

When  all  mules  are  harnessed  the  senior  section  leader  com- 
mands :  Hitch.  At  the  command  the  mules  are  led  to  the  carts 
and  hitched,  and  the  drivers  take  their  posts. 

When  the  drivers  and  section  leaders  have  fallen  out,  the 
first  sergeant  marches  the  company  to  the  gun  sheds  .and 
commands  :  Equipment.  At  this  command  squad  leaders  take 
charge  of  their  squads,  secure  all  ecpiipmeiit  that  is  to  be  placed 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  77 

on  the  carts,  and  without  further  command  load  this  equipment 
on  the  carts  and  take  posts  as  in  Plate  III. 

POSTS   OF   OFFICEES   AND    NONCOMMISSIONED    OFFICEES. 

202.  The  post  of  the  company  commander  is  10  paces  to  the 
front  of  the  center  of  the  company.  The  post  of  the  platoon 
leader  is  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  platoon.  The  post 
of  the  section  leader  is  1  pace  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
interval  between  squads. 

TO  FORM  THE  COMPANY. 

203.  The  first  sergeant  takes  post  5  paces  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  company  and  commands:  Fall  In — Report.  At 
the  first  command,  the  section  leaders  and  squads  fall  in,  as  in 
Plate  III.  At  the  second  command,  the  section  leaders  verify 
tlieir  sections,  salute,  and  report,  as  in  paragraph  124.  When 
all  have  reported  the  first  sergeant  faces  about,  salutes  the  cap- 
tain, and  reports  (124). 

204.  The  captain  places  himself  10  paces  in  front  of  the  center 
of  and  facing  the  company  in  time  to  receive  the  report  of  the 
first  sergeanf,  whose  salute  he  returns,  and  then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  post  when  the  first  sergeant  has  reported 
and  draw  saber  with  the  captain. 

The  captain  commands :  Posts.  At  this  command  the  mem- 
bers of  the  gun  squad  move  at  a  run  and  take  posts  as  shown  in 
Plato  IV. 

to  dismiss  the  company. 

205.  The  captain  directs  the  first  sergeant:  Dismiss  the  corn- 
pan]).  The  officers  fall  out,  the  first  sergeant  conducts  the  com- 
pany to  the  park,  whei-e  it  is  halted  in  close  line,  as  shown  in 
Plate  III,  and  commands :  Equipment.  At  this  command  the 
squad  leaders  take  command  of  the  gun  squads  and  supervise 
the  cleaning  and  replacing  of  all  equipment. 

The  gun  squads  then  fall  in  at  a  place  designated  by  the  first 
sergeant,  and  are  marched  by  him  to  the  company  parade  and 
dismissed. 


78  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

When  the  equipment  is  removed  from  the  carts  the  senior 
section  leader  commands :  Uxhitch.  At  tliis  command  the 
mules  are  unhitched,  under  the  supervision  of  the  section  lead- 
ers. The  senior  section  leader  then  commands:  Unharness. 
The  mules  are  led  to  the  sta])les  and  the  harness  removed.  The 
commands  unhitch  ajid.  unharness  may  be  given  at  the  same 
time,  in  which  case  the  two  duties  will  be  performed  in  suc- 
cession. 

The  harness  is  cleaned  and  the  mules  cared  for  as  in  para- 
graphs 38.S-44S.  The  senior  section  leader  then  forms  the  de- 
tails, marches  them  to  the  company  parade,  and  dismisses  them. 

COMPANY    DKILL. 

(Mounted.) 

206.  The  company  marches  to  the  front,  to  the  rear,  obliques, 
and  halts,  in  the  same  manner  and  by  the  same  commands  as 
prescribed  for  the  squad  mounted,  substituting  "  company  "  for 
"  squad." 

TO  CHANGE  DIRECTION. 

207.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  sections,  or  squads :  1.  Col- 
umn right  (left),  2.  March. 

The  leading  unit  turr,^-  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  paragraphs 
164  and  174,  The  rear  units  march  squarely  up  to  the  turning 
point,  and  turn  on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  manner  similar  to 
the  leading  unit. 

TO    FORM    LINE    TO    THE    FRONT. 

208.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  sections,  or  squads  :  1.  Right 
(left)  front  into  line,  2.  March,  3.  Company,  4:.  Halt,  5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leaders  of  the  units  in  rear  of  the 
leading  one  command :  Right  oblique.  If  at  a  halt,  the  leader 
of  the  leading  unit  commands :  Forward.  At  the  second  com- 
mand the  leading  unit  moves  straight  forward.  The  rear  units 
oblique  as  indicated.  The  command  Halt  is  given  when  the 
leading  unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance.  It  halts,  and 
its   leader   commands:  Left  Dress.     Each  of   the  rear   units, 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  79 

when  opposite  its  place  in  line,  resumes  tlie  original  direction 
at  the  command  of  its  leader ;  each  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the 
connnand  of  its  leader,  who  then  commands :  Left  Dkess.  All 
dress  on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

209.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  column  of  platoons 
or  sections ;  or,  being  in  line  of  platoons  or  sections,  to  form  the 
company  in  line:  1.  Platoons  (sections)  right  (left)  front  into 
line,  2.  March,  3.  Company,  4.  Halt,  5.  Feont. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  or  section  as  described  in  paragraphs 
175  and  188,  the  necessary  commands  being  substituted. 

In  forming  the  company  in  line  the  dress  is  on  the  left  squad 
of  the  left  platoon ;  if  forming  in  column  of  platoons,  platoon 
leaders  verify  the  alignment  before  taking  their  posts. 

The  captain  commands :  Front  when  the  alignments  have 
been  verified. 

When  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time,  the  commands 
for  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted,  and  the  guide  is  toward 
the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 

TO   FORM   LINE   TO   THE   FLANK. 

210.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  sections,  or  squads:  1.  Pla- 
toons (sections,  squads),  right  turn,  2.  March. 

If  in  column  of  platoons  or  sections,  executed  as  in  para- 
graphs 1G4  and  174. 

ox    right    INTO    LINE. 

211.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  sections,  or  squads:  1.  On 
right  (left)  into  line,  2.  Maech,  3.  Company,  4.  Halt,  5. 
Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  com- 
mands: Right  turn.  The  leaders  of  the  other  units  command: 
Forward,  if  at  a  halt.  At  the  second  command  the  leading  unit 
turns  to  the  right.  The  command,  halt,  is  given  when  the  lead- 
ing unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direc- 
tion.    It  halts,  and  its  leader  commands:  Right  Dress. 

The  units  in  the  rear  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front, 
each  when  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line,  executes  right 
turn,  at  the  command  of  its  leader,  and  is  halted  on  the  line  at 


80  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

the  command  of  its  leader  who  then  commands :  Right  Dress. 
All  dress  on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  squad  marches  in 
tlouble  time  until  halted. 

TO  FORM  COLUMN  AND  CHANGE  DIRECTION. 

212.  Being  in  line:  1.  Squads  right  {left),  column  right  (left), 
2.  INIarch  ;  or  1.  Right  (left)   by  squads,  2.  March. 

In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  the  column  right 
as  soon  as  it  has  completed  the  squads  right. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march,  the  right  squad 
marches  forward.  The  remainder  of  the  company  executes 
'squads  right  and  then  column  left  and  follows  the  right  squad. 

TO  FORM   LINE  OF   SUBDIVISIONS. 

213.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  of  platoons,  sec- 
tions, or  the  reverse:  1.  Platoons  (sections),  column  right 
[left).  2.  March. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  or  section  as  described  in  para- 
graph 173. 

214.  Being  in  line:  1.  Platoons  (sections),  right  (left)  by 
squads,  2.  March. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  or  section  as  described  in  para- 
graph 178. 

TO  FORM  COLUMN  OF  SUBDIVISIONS. 

215.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Column  of  platoons  (sec- 
tions), first  platoon  (section),  squads  light  (left),  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  com- 
mands, squads  right.  At  the  second  command  the  leading  unit 
executes,  squads  right,  and  moves  off  in  the  new  direction. 
The  units  in  rear  march  up,  and,  when  opposite  their  place  in 
the  new  column,  execute  squads  right. 

TO  FORM   CLOSE  LINE. 

216.  Being  in  line:  1.  On  right  squad,  2.  Close,  3.  Front. 
At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  first  squad,  if  at  a 

halt,  commands :  Forward.     The  leaders  of  the  left  squads  com- 
mand :  Squads  right. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  81 

At  the  second  command  the  right  squad  moves  forward  twice 
squad  distance  (20  yards)  and  halts.  The  remaining  squads 
execute  squads  right,  and,  in  succession,  when  opposite  their 
place  in  the  new  line,  left  turn,  placing  themselves  abreast  of 
the  right  squad  with  3-pace  intervals  between  carts. 

TO    EE-FOEM    LINE. 

217.  Being  in  close  line:  1.  Extend  on  right  squad,  2.  Maech, 
3.  Company,  4.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  all  squad  leaders,  except  the  leader  of 
the  base  squad,  command :  Left  ohliqne.  The  leader  of  the  base 
squad  commands :  Foewaed. 

At  the  command^of  execution  all  move  off  and  the  squads,  in 
succession  from  the  right,  upon  gaining  their  proper  interval, 
march  to  the  front.  Only  the  base  squad  halts  at  the  fourth 
command.  The  remaining  squads  halt  when  abreast  of  the 
new  line. 

TO  FOEM   CLOSE  LINE  TO  A  LLANK. 

218.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Eight  (left)  into  line, 
2.  Maech. 

Executed  as  described  for  the  section  in  paragraph  181,  sub- 
stituting the  necessary  commands. 

TO  FOEM  COLUMN  OF  SQUADS  TO  A  FLANK. 

219.  Being  in  close  line:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flanJc,  2. 
Maech. 

Executed  as  described  for  the  section  in  paragraph  182,  sub- 
stituting the  necessary  commands. 

TO  PEEPAEE  FOE  ACTION. 

220.  Action.  Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  para- 
graph 147. 

The  first  sergeant  commands  the  carts. 


82  MACHINE-GUN   DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

TO  EEASSEMBLE  THE   SQUAD. 

221.  Assemble.     Executed  as  described  for  the  squad  (149). 

Section  XII. — The  Battalion. 
(Mounted.) 

222.  Captains  repeat  such  preparatory  commands  as  are  to  be 
immediately  executed  by  their  company.  In  movements  exe- 
cuted in  route  step,  or  at  ease,  the  captains  repeat  the  com- 
mands of  execution  if  necessary. 

In  g:iving  commands  or  cautions  captains  may  prefix  the 
proper  letter  designating  their  companies. 

At  the  command  guide  center  (right  or  l&tt)  captains  com- 
mand: Guide  Right  (or  Left),  according  to  the  positions  of 
their  companies. 

223.  When  the  companies  are  to  be  dressed,  captains  place 
themselves  on  that  flank  toward  which  the  dress  is  to  be  made, 
6  paces  from  the  nearest  gun  cart. 

In  dressing  the  companies  the  gun  carts  are  first  aligned  and 
then  the  ammunition  carts. 

Each  captain,  after  dressing  his  company,  commands:  Front, 
and  takes  his  post. 

The  battalion  executes  halt,  rest,  marcMng  squads  right,  to 
the  rear,  route  .^tep,  at  ease,  obliques  and  resumes  the  direct 
march,  as  explained  for  the  squad. 

When  the  formation  of  the  battalion  admits  of  the  simul- 
taneous execution  by  companies,  platoons,  or  sections  of  move- 
ments, the  major  may  cause  such  movements  to  be  executed 
by  prefixing,  when  necessary,  coinpanies,  platoons  {sections) 
to  the  commands  prescribed,  or  platoons  right  by  squads. 

to  FORil   the  battalion. 

224.  For  purposes  other  than  ceremonies :  The  battalion  is 
formed  in  column  of  squads.  The  companies  having  been  formed, 
the  adjutant  posts  himself  so  as  to  be  facing  the  column,  when 
formed,  and  6  paces  in  front  of  the  place  to  be  occupied  by 
the  leading  squad  of  the  battalion;  he  draws  saber;  adjutant's 
call  is  sounded  or  tlie  adjutant  signals :  Assemble. 


MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  83 

The  companies  are  formed,  at  attention,  in  column  of  squads 
in  their  proper  order.  Each  captain,  after  halting  his  com- 
pany, salutes  the  adjutant ;  the  adjutant  returns  the  salute, 
and  when  the  last  captain  has  saluted,  turns  about  and  re- 
ports. "  Sir.  the  battalion  is  formed."    He  then  joins  the  major. 

225.  For  ceremonies  or  when  directed :  The  battalion  is 
formed  in  line  or  in  line  of  sections. 

The  companies  having  been  formed,  the  adjutant  posts  him- 
self so  as  to  be  six  paces  to  the  right  of  the  right  company  when 
line  is  formed,  and  faces  in  the  direction  in  which  the  line  is  to 
extend.     He  draws  saber  and  adjutanVs  call  is  sounded.^ 

When  about  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  line,  each  company  is 
halted  and  dressed  to  the  right. 

When  the  left  company  is  on  the  line,  tlie  adjutant,  moving 
by  the  shortest  route,  takes  post,  facing  the  battalion,  midway 
between  the  post  of  the  major  and  the  center  of  the  battalion. 

The  major,  staff,  noncommissioned  staff,  and  orderlies  take 
their  posts. 

AVhen  all  parts  of  the  line  have  been  dressed  and  officers  and 
others  have  reached  their  posts,  the  adjutant  turns  about  and 
reports  to  the  major :  "  Sir,  the  battalion  is  formed ;  "  the  major 
directs  the  adjutant :  "  Take  Youk  Post.  Sir,"  and  draws  saber. 
The  adjutant  takes  his  post,  passing  to  the  right  of  the  major. 

to  dismiss  the  battalion. 

226.  Dismiss  Your  Compaxies. 

Staff  and  noncommissioned  staff  officers  fall  out;  each  cap- 
tain marches  his  company  off  and  dismisses  it. 

227.  The  commands  given  in  company  drill  are  equally  appli- 
cable to  battalion  drill,  making  the  necessary  substitution, 
"  battalion  "  for  "  company."  "  company  "  for  "  platoon,"  etc. 

As  the  battalion  will  rarely  be  drilled  as  a  unit,  movements  of 
the  battalion  are  omitted. 

1  When  the  band  is  present  the  ceremony  is  conducted  in  conformity 
with  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations. 


PAET  II. 
TACTICS. 


Section  I. — The  Use  of  Machine  Guns. 
(General.) 

228.  Machine-gun  principles  are  divided  into  two  classes — 
fundameiital  and  .special.  The  fundamental  principles  apply 
generally  w'liile  the  special  principles  apply  to  the  use  of  the 
guns  in  particular  forms  of  combat,  such  as  attack,  defense,  ad- 
vance guards,  rear  guard,  village  fighting,  and  outposts. 

The  principles  governing  marches  and  ammunition  supply 
must  also  be  considered. 

229.  The  maximum  effective  use  of  machine-gun  organizations 
may  be  expected  only  when  its  personnel  is  thoroughly  con- 
versant with  the  powers  and  limitations  of  the  gun.  well  grounded 
in  the  principles  of  its  use.  thoroughly  drilled  in  the  mechanical 
operation  of  the  gim.  and  trained  by  practical  exercises  to  apply 
principles  to  concrete  cases. 

230.  Machine-fiun  fire  is  concentrated  infantry  fire.  From 
this  statement  are  deduced  the  tactical  principles  governing  its 
employment.  A  machine  gun  has  special  characteristics.  Its 
fire  may  be  concentrated  on  a  single  objective  or  it  may  be 
traversed  to  cover  a  wide  front. 

231.  Due  to  the  fixed  mount  from  which  the  gun  is  fired,  and 
the  mechanical  control  of  elevation  and  direction,  the  human 
element — nerves  and  excitement,  so  productive  of  errors  in  in- 
fantry fire — is  to  a  large  extent  eliminated. 

232.  The  machine  gun  aimed  and  fired  by  one  man  delivers  an 
ideally  controlled  fire.  It  presents  an  infinitesimal  target  and 
is  of  such  small  height  that  it  can  generally  be  moved  under 
cover. 

84 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  85 

It  is  comparatively  easy  to  conceal  from  view  and  to  secure 
for  it  effective  cover  against  fire.  The  machine  gun  properly 
mounted  and  in  the  hands  of  properly  trained  men  is  for  all 
practical  purposes  as  mobile  as  infantry  in  the  actual  fire  fight. 

A  machine  gun,  properly  handled,  is  at  work  in  most  cases  for 
a  few  minutes  at  a  time.  The  machine  gun  is  fired  to  kill  and 
is  not  to  be  used  as  a  mere  means  of  wasting  ammunition.  The 
consumption  of  ammunition  will  at  times  be  very  great,  and 
adequate  provision  must  be  made  for  a  plentiful  supply. 

The  machine  gun  must  be  amply  supplied  with  ammunition 
when  it  goes  into  position,  and  proper  means  must  be  assured 
for  replenishing  this  supply.  This  can  only  be  effected  by 
methodical  training  of  the  personnel  and  by  previous  arrange- 
ments. 

233.  A  machine  gun,  being  a  piece  of  machinery  and  working 
at  a  high  rate  of  speed,  subject  to  a  rapid  succession  of  shocks, 
parts  will  break,  and  stoppages  will  occur.  However,  the 
mechanism  of  a  machine  gun  is  not  much  more  complicated  than 
that  of  the  modern  magazine  rifle.  With  properly  trained  men, 
stoppages  and  breakages  may  be  corrected  within  a  few  seconds. 

The  tactical  rule  for  working  machine  guns  in  pairs  arises 
from  the  fact  that  these  stoppages  occur.  This  rule  is  not  to  be 
construed  that  guns  .ire  to  be  posted  at  regular  intervals  and 
that  adjacent  guns  should  necessarily  be  posted  in  such  man- 
ner to  fire  on  the  same  objective.  It  does  mean  that  in  the 
distribution  of  .guns  two  guns  should  be  covering  any  given 
objective. 

234.  Machine  guns  on  the  march  are  extremely  vulnerable  and 
are  for  tlie  time  out  of  action!  However,  in  well-trained  liands, 
they  may  be  brought  into  action  in  a  few  seconds.  Hence  the 
principle  that  machine  guns  once  located  in  a  suitable  fire  posi- 
tion should  noTlJe  moved~ without  good  and  sufficient  reason^, 
and  when  moved  the  new  position  should  be  selected  before  thg 
guns  are  to  be  moved,  and  the  movement  "macTe  flS  rapidly  "af 
possible. 

235.  It  is  a  cardinal  principle  that  the  machine  gunner  does. 
not  hesitate  to  risk  tbp  loss  pf  his  gun,,.  He  must  also  be  pre- 
pared  to  disable  it  at  the  last  moment  in  such  a  manner  that 
if  captured  it  can  not  be  turned  upon  his  own  force.  If  it  is  a 
question  of  leaving  the  position  or  staying,  the  machine  gunner 


86  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

stay.^.     A  few  deteriinned  .dinners  may  have  a  decided  effect 
upon  the  final  outcome  of  the  combat. 

236.  The  introUiictiuii  of  a  machine-gun  organization  into  the 
regiment  and  the  bnttalion  organization  into  the  brigade  and 
division,  while  facilitating  the  collective  employment  of  ma- 
chine guns,  it  does  not  necessarily  follow  that  the  guns  should 
always  be  so  employed.  It  will  often  be  advisable  to  detail 
sections  and  platoons  to  work  under  the  orders  of  battalion 
commanders.  The  organization  of  the  company  into  three 
platoons  facilitates  this  division,  and  when  the  tactical  situa- 
tion is  such  that  it  is  necessary  to  make  tliis  distribution,  it 
should  be  made  without  hesitation. 

237.  The  battalion  ^ omnianUor  under  whom  the  guns  are  to 
operate  should  understand  the  mission  of  the  guns  and  the  rea- 
sons which  prompted  their  assignment  to  his  battalion. 

The  battalion  commander  gives  definite  instructions  to  the 
machine-gun  ofiicer  as  to  what  is  required  of  him. 

The  machine-gun  commander  is  given  the  greatest  possible 
freedom  in  the  execution  of  the  details  of  his  task. 

238.  The  various  missions  which  may  be  assigned  to  the  ma- 
chine-gun organization  demand  the  most  careful  preparation 
and  organization  on  the  part  of  machine-gun  commanders  of  all 
grades. 

The  battalion  and  company  commanders  must  have  a  definite 
gTasp  of  the  situation  and  fully  tmderstand  the  part  they  may 
be  called  upon  to  act.  Guns  temporarily  detached  should  be 
returned  to  the  control  of  the  company  commander  the  moment 
the  I'easun  for  detaching  them  has  ceased  to  exist. 

239.  During  the  action  machine-gun  commanders  maintain,  by 
means  of  agents,  the  closest  possible  touch  with  the  next  hirrher 
machine-gtm  commander,  the  commander  of  the  troops  under 
whose  orders  they  are  operating,  and  also  with  adjoining  troops. 
It  is  most  important  that  subordinate  commanders  keep  in  close 
touch  with  the  commanders  of  units  to  which  they  may  be  at- 
tached and  under  whose  command  they  come. 

240.  Telephones  and  buzzers  can  not  be  relied  upon  always 
for  purposes  of  communication.  Steps  should  therefore  be  taken 
to  maintain  communication  by  visual  signaling  and  by  agents 
or  runners.  •_; 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  87 

241.  Cooperation  is  the  ke.vuote  of  macliine-gun  tactics,  not 
only  between  tlie  machine  guns  and  tlie  troops  witn  wliich  they 
are  worlcing,  but  also  between  the  guns  themselves.  The  group- 
ing oi'  machine  guns*  into  companies  and  battalions,  thus  cen- 
tralizing control,  has  facilitated  the  execution  of  comprehensive 
schemes  of  macliine-gun  cooperation. 

242.  The  machine-gun  commander  should  take  every  possible 
precaution  to  insure  cooperation  not  only  between  the  guns  of 
his  company,  but  also  between  his  company  and  the  machine 
guns  on  either  flank. 

243.  To  insure  concealment  when  on  the  jnflXfe  machine  gun- 
ners disguise  their  identity  as  such  by  adopting  the  formation 
of  neighboring  troops.  Other  means  of  escaping  detection 
should  be  devised  and  constantly  practiced.  When  machine 
guns  are  moving  they  should  w^atch  and  avoid  areas  that  may 
be  swept  by  shell  fire. 

244.  To  obtain  concealment  while  in  position,  the  fewest  pos- 
sible number  of  men  should  he  near  the  guns — two  will  usually 
be  sufficient.  When  time,  tools,  etc.,  are  available,  machine-gun 
emplacements  should  be  dug ;  but  if  it  is  not  possible  to  con- 
struct a  satisfactory  emplacement,  it  is  considered  better  to 
merely  seek  cover  from  view,  as  a  hastily-made  emplacement 
merely  serves  to  draw  the  attention  of  the  enemy. 

245.  Masks  and  gloves  will  facilitate  concealment  when  facing 
strong  sunlight.  Special  precautions  must  be  taken  to  prevent 
the  location  of  machine-gun  positions  by  the  artillery.  The 
action  of  machine  guns  shelled  by  artillery  is  largely  dependent 
upon  the  tactical  situation. 

A  change  of  position  of  50  yards  or  so,  or  the  temporary 
cessation  of  fire,  the  guns  and  detachments  getting  under  cover, 
may  mislead  the  enemy  and  enable  the  guns,  later,  to  obtain  a 
good  target  readily. 

A  careful  distribution  of  the  members  of  the  gun  squad  mini- 
mizes casualties. 

246.  The  use  of  machine  guns  in  trench  warfare  is  covered  by 
special  regulations. 

Section  II. — The  Attack. 

247.  Machine  guns  with  the  infantry  firing  lines  are  of  little 
use  unless  the  ground  is  exceptionally  favorable. 


88  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGITLATIONS,  1917. 

The  progress  of  the  firing  line  must  therefore  be  watched  cnre- 
fully  with  a  view  to  pusliing  on  a  certain  number  of  macliine 
guns  to  closely  support  it  whenever  possible. 

248.  The  usual  methods  of  supporting  an^ufantry  attack  are: 

1.  Fire  from  the  flanks. 

2.  Overhead  fire. 

3.  Long-range  indirect  fire. 

4.  Fire  from  a  forward  position. 

249.  Every  opportunity  for  the  use  of  overhead  fire  should  be 
seized.  All  suitable  ground,  buildings,  etc.,  should  be  utilized 
for  this  purpose  when  possible. 

250.  ^Machine  guns  may  often  be  usefully  employed  to  sys- 
tematically search  all  places  in  the  area  of  the  attack  likely  to 
be  held  by  the  enemy. 

This  searching  fire  has  a  bad  moral  effect  on  the  troops  sub- 
jected to  it.  which  assists  the  subsequent  advance. 

251.  Often  it  may  be  possible  to  push  machine  guns  forward 
where  the  ground  is  favorable,  so  that  they  can  assist  the  ad- 
vance of  troops  on  their  right  and  left. 

Opportunities  of  this  kind  should  not  be  neglected.  It  is  possi- 
ble for  machine  guns  thus  employed  to  remain  undetectefl,  al- 
though well  in  front,  provided  the  preliminary  reconnaissance  is 
properly  conducted. 

252.  Enemy  machine  guns,  are  the  weapons  most  likely  to  stop 
an  attac-lc!  Every  effort  should  be  made  to  locate  them  with  field 
glasses  or  telescopes,  with  a  view  to  concentrating  the  fire  of 
machine  guns  on  them,  and  also  to  indicate  their  position  to  rhe 
artillery. 

253.  The  machine-gun  conunander  must  be  fully  informed  of 
the  plan  of  operation  at  the  earliest  possible  moment.  He 
should  make  a  careful  reconnaissance  of  the  ground  prior  to 
the  attack.  The  machine-gun  commander  is  informed  of  the 
intended  action  of  the  automatic  rifles.  Having  made  the  re- 
connaissance and  received  his  orders,  the  machine-gun  com- 
mander assigns  definite  tasks  to  his  companies,  platoons,  or  sec- 
tions. The  guns  may  be  divided  into  groups,  some  to  go  for- 
ward with  the  infantry,  some  to  cover  their  advance,  and  others 
to  act  as  a  reserve. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  89 

.  254.  In  this  manner  each  machine  gun,  or  group  of  machine 
guns,  is  given  a  definite  tasli.  Before  action  commences  every 
gun  squad  sliould  thorouglily  understand  what  is  expected  of  it. 
It  must  be  clearly  understood  by  all  officers  that  the  machine 
guns  have  definite  tasks,  that  they  are  under  the  orders  of  the 
machine-gun  commander, 

255.  The  machine  guns  in  the  attack  are  separated  into  three 
classes:  (1)  Guns  going  forward  with  the  attacking  infantry, 
(2)  guns  that  are  to  cover  the  infantry  advance,  and  (3)  guns 
in  reserve. 

1.  The  guns  to  go  forward  with  the  attacking  infantry, 

(a)  The  number  of  machine  guns  to  go  forward  depends 
upon  the  tactical  situation,  the  front  to  be  at- 
tacked, the  nature  of  the  ground,  the  number  of 
guns  available,  etc. 
(&)  The  time  of  their  advance  is  determined  by  the  ter- 
rain and  the  success  of  the  firing  line.  They 
should  very  rarely  advance  with  the  leading  line 
of  riflemen.  This  is  the  duty  of  the  automatic 
rifles,  the  fire  of  which  should  suffice  to  hold  the 
position  won  until  it  can  finally  be  consolidated  _by 
the  machme^guns.  '  "^ 

~TTTel3rogress  of  the  firing  line  must  be  carefully 
watched,  so  that  the  guns  may  be  brought  forward 
at  the  earliest  possible  moment. 

(c)  They  should  conceal  their  identitv   as  machine-gun 

squads  as  much  as  possible  by  mixing  with  the 
riflemen  and  carrying  their  guns  in  the  least  con- 
spicuous manner. 

(d)  The  approximate  locality  in  which  the  machine  guns 

will  be  mounted  in  the  captured  lines  should  be 
settled  before  the  advance. 

(e)  The  machine  guns  as  a  rule  should  not  open  fire  be- 

fore the  infantry  advance  takes  place.    All  should 

be  in  readiness  for  them  to  be  rushed  forward  at 

a  moment's  notice. 
(/)  Their  role,  then,  is  to  make  good  the  ground  gained 

by  the  infantry  against  a  counter  attacE  * 

(g)  They  should  not  go  forward  until  it  is  certain  that 

the  firing  line  has  captured  the  enemy  positions. 


90 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917. 


(/i)   The  mission  of  these  guns  is  to- 


/L  (1)   Help  the  riflemeu  gain  fire  superiority. 
■'■    (2)    ?!lp.ko  good  positions  v/on. 

(3)  Pursue  the  enemy  with  fire. 

(4)  Repel  counter  attacks. 

(5)  Cover  a  reorganization  of  the  riflemen. 
(G)  Cover  a  retirement. 

NdxE. — When  machine  guns  are  advancing  under  shell 
fire,  the  areas  l)eing  swept  should  be  watched  and  avoided 
and  detours  made  if  necessary. 
2.  The  [inns  to  cover  the  infantry  advance. — These  machine 
juns  will : 

(a)   Provide  covering  fire  for  the  firing  line  up  to  the 

last  moment. 
(h)   Search  all  ground  likely  to  be  held  by  the  enemy  and 
over  which  he  might  counter  attack. 

(c)  Sweep  ground  behind  the  enemy's  position  over  which 

his  reserves  might  advance. 

(d)  Prevent  the  crossfire  by  rifles  and  machine  guns  from 

the  enemy  position  situated  on  the  flanks  of  the 
attack, 
(c)   Bring  oblique  or  enfilade  fire  on  the  portion  of  the 
enemy  position  being  attacked. 

Some  will  be  pushed  out  in  front  of  the  line  to  keep 
down  enemy  fire  while  the  infantry  are  getting 
out  of  their  trenches  and  througli  their  obstacles. 
These  may  be  in  saps,  crops,  folds  in  the  ground, 
etc. 

When  the  attacking  firing  line  masks  the  fire  of  the 
machine  guns,  the  machine  guns  should,  if  pos- 
sible, direct  their  fire  past  the  flanks  of  the  at- 
tacking troops  so  as  to  keep  down  flanking  fire 
and  prevent  flank  attacks. 

If  attacking  troops  are  forced  to  lie  down  between 
the  enemy's  position  and  the  guns,  the  machine 
guns  must  keep  down  the  fire  of  the  enemy's  rifles 
and  machine  guns. 

Wlien  tlieir  role  of  covering  fire  is  completed,  they 
should  automatically  come  again  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  machine-gun  commander. 


MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  91 

Orders  to  the  machine  guns  detailed  for  this 
task  may,  if  necessary,  include  general  instructions 
to  govern  their  action  after  the  task  has  been 
completed,  pending  receipt  of  further  orders  from 
the  machine-gun  commander.  It  must,  however, 
be  remembered  that  it  is  usually  dangerous  to 
prescribe  to  a  subordinate  at  a  distance  anything 
that  he  should  be  better  able  to  decide  on  the  spot 
with  a  fuller  knowledge  of  local  conditions,  for  any 
attempt  to  do  so  may  cramp  his  initiative  in  deal- 
ing with  unforeseen  developments. 
3.  Tlie  guns  as  reserve. 

Guns  kept  as  a  reserve  will  be  under  the  control  of  the 
machine-gun  battalion  or  company  commander,  acting 
under  the  instructions  of  the  regimental,  brigade,  or 
division  commander.  Owing  to  their  characteristics, 
machine  guns  are  valuable  as  a  reserve  of  fire  power, 
and  when  kept  in  reserve  in  the  hands  of  the  command- 
ing officer  may  prove  of  the  utmost  value  at  the  critical 
moment.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  a  great 
development  of  fire  power  is  most  useful  in  thp  oppiiin^ 
gtnges  of  m^  nttnHc,  to  povpr  th^  advnnce  of  tbft  jji- 
fantry,  nnd  it  is  a  mistake  to  keep  guns  in  reserve  if 
they  can  be  usefully  employed  in  supporting  the  ad- 
vance. These  guns  may  be  used  for  long-range  search- 
ing fire  on  ground  behind  the  enemy's  line,  which  is 
likely  to  hold  supports  or  reserves,  but  must  be  avail- 
able to  move  forward  at  once  when  required. 

256.  The  great  fire  power  of  machine  guns  relative  to  the 
space  they  occupy,  the  rapidity  with  which  they  may  be  brought 
into  or  out  of  action,  and  the  ease  with  which  they  can  change 
the  direction  of  their  fire  render  them  especially  suitable  for  the 
protection  of  threatened  Jianks  and  for  filling  gaps  w^hich  may 
appear  laterally  or  in'depthr*^ny  of  the  guns  mentioned  in  the 
Ijrevious  paragraphs  may  at  times  be  employed  in  this  manner. 

257.  During  an  attack  it  may  be  advisable  to  continue  to  hold 
certain  tactical  points  which  have  been  captured  until  the  attack- 
ing troops  have  made  good  their  next  objective.  The  character- 
istics of  machine  guns  fit  them  for  this  duty ;  their  use  will 


92  MACHINE-GTIN  DRIIL  HEGULATIONS,   1917. 

avoid  diminishing  the  strengtli  and  dash  of  the  attacking  in- 
fantry. 

258.  Arrangements  for  ammunition  supply,  belt  filling,  am- 
munition depots,  etc..  mast  be  made  before  the  action  connnences. 
An  officer  may  be  placed  in  charge  of  these  arrangements. 

259.  The  machine-gun  commander  should,  as  a  rule,  remain 
with  the  commanding  officer. 

260.  As  far  as  possible,  the  guns  of  a  company  should  be  kept 
together.  If  this  can  not  be  arranged,  in  no  case  should_  an  iso- 
Inted  junc1-i1rip£TniJjp  ]>rony]it  into  nr-tio]].  for  a  siHgle^un  may 
I)e"TemporarrTy  disabled  by  a  jam  or  a  breakdown  of  its  mecha- 
nism at  the  decisive  moment. 

261.  An  officer  commanding  a  group  of  machine  gims  should 
avoid  becoming  involved  in  a  duel  with  the  enemy's  machine 
guns,  but  should  use  his  fire  against  important  targets — the 
enemy's  batteries,  reserves,  and  supports. 

Section  III. — The  Defense. 

262.  In  occupying  a  defensive  position  a  special  reconnais- 
sance should  be  made.  Not  only  the  position  itself,  but  the 
ground  in  front,  in  rear,  and  on  the  flanks  must  be  thoroughly 
reconnoitere<l.  The  distribution  of  all  the  guns,  regimental, 
brigade,  and  division,  is  made  under  the  direction  of  one  officer, 
the  senior  machine-gun  officer  of  the  command,  In  this  man- 
ner, and  in  this  manner  only,  is  it  possible  to  employ  a  number 
of  guns  properly  coordinated  in  a  comprehensive  scheme. 

In  placing  machine  guns  to  defend  a  position,  the  ideal  is 
the  location  of  a  complete  "  belt  "  of  machine-gun  fire  across  the 
front  of  the  position  to  be  defended. 

263.  In  the  occupati(m  of  a  defensive  position  the  duties  of 
the  automatic  rifles  must  be  carefully  considered  and  coordina- 
tion established  between  the  two  weapons  to  insure  mutual 
support. 

1.  ^\11  machine  guns  nre  nrrnnged  under  tlie  direr-tion  of  one 
officer^'  who  must  be  thorougfiiv  acouaintetl  with'tlie~Dlan  of 
operations. 

2.  All  machine  guns  are  placed  so  that  the  whole  front  to  be 
defended  is  swept  by  flanking  fire,  and  a  "  belt  of  tire  '  thus 
created.     *■"** " 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  93 

3.  Machine  guns  are  placed  to  command  covered  anproaches^ 
and  the  firoiind  where  the  enemy  migiit  concentrate  prior  to  an 
attack.    """^  ■  ~~ 

4.  A  proportion  of  the  guns  are  kept  in  reserve.  When  the 
ground  is  suitahle,  these  may  be  used  for  indirect  or  overhead 
fire  if  the  results  are  likely  to  justify  the  expenditure  of  am- 
munition, and  the  readiness  of  the  guns  to  take  up  other  tasks  is 
not  impaired.  It  will  often  be  found  advisable  to  prepare 
macliine-gun  emplacements  at  important  tactical  points  in  rear 
of  the  front  line,  and  to  detail  guns  for  their  occupation  if 
necessary.  Preparation  in  this  respect  will  facilitate  a  rapid 
readjustment  of  the  fire  upon  any  point. 

.">.  ^>econdary^  positions  and  lines  of  re^iTf^i^ipTit  are  recon- 
I'loiterelHi  "and  "steos  are  taken  to  insure  that  the  (lerachmenrs 
are  familiar  with  them.  In  case  of  a  withdrawal  becoming 
necessary,  machine  guns  in  supporting  positions  cover  the  retire- 
ment of  the  infantry  and  guns  in  the  front  line. 

When  the  latter  have  occupied  their  secondary  positions,  they, 
in  turn,  will  cover  the  movement  of  the  guns  originally  in  sup- 
port. 

(3.  Cooperation  is  aiTanged  with  the  automatic  rifles  of  the 
companies,  which  can  c"ov?r  tne  less  important  approaches  or 
small  depressions  or  hollows  which  the  machine  guns  can  not 
sweep. 

7.  Positions  of  carts  and  supply  ammunition  arranged. 

5.  Intercon i munica t i on  ))etv.-een  machine-gun  commander  and 
his  subordinates  and  l)etwee:i  .subordinates  and  their  machine 
guns  arranged. 

9.  Definite  orders  givei^:  to  all  machine-gun  officers. 

10.  -A  o-pnor?^l  plan.oF  action  nTrnni-od^  sn  that  all  can  cooper- 
ate in  the  event  ot  unfore:--eeii  circumstances. 

264.  Each  machine-gun  team  should  k-^.ow  the  line  of  retire- 
ment, and  the  positions  of  the  guns  on  its  riglit  and  le^l.  A 
range  card  is  made  for  each,  gun  position. 

265.  Guns  should  be  concealed  in  the  least  obvious  position:: 
and  as  uTuch  cover  as  time  permits  provided  for  the  men. 

266.  Firing  at  the  longer  ranges  reduces  the  effect  and  be- 
trays one's  strength  and  position  prematurely  to  the  enemy.  In 
the  defense  it  is  advisable  to  let  the  enemy  approach  to  vrithiu 
short  range,  and  then  open  fire,  especially  when  the  dei'ender 
is  in  a  strong  position. 

33825°— 18 4 


94  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

267.  It  will  often  be  a  gain  to  keep  the  guns  silent  at  the 
beginning  of  the  hostile  advance,  while  only  the  point  of  the 
enemy's  advance  guard  or  a  thin  liiie  of  skirmishers  is  in  sight, 
and  to  wait  until  fire  can  be  opened  upon  the  main  advance. 
Ranges  are  measured  beforehand,  and,  if  possible,  marked.  In 
all  cases,  the  sudden  and  unexpected  opening  of  heavy  fire  will 
produce  more  effect  than  the  expediture  of  the  same  amount  of 
ammunition  when  the  tire  gi-adualiy  develops  and  does  not  come 
as  a  surjin^  to  the  attacking  force. 

26 §^  IirnlT  cases  the  machine  guns  should,  if  possible,  be  pro- 
tected from  fire  from  the  front.  At  the  same  time  they  should 
be  able  to  flank  the  front  of  tlie  position  with  fire.  Thus, 
although  each  machine  gim  may  be  fired  to  the  flank,  its  front 
is  swept  by  the  fire  of  another  machine  gun. 

Arrangements  can  be  made  so  that  the  ma^^hine  gun  so  placed 
may  be  able  to  fire  to  their  front  should  an  emergency  make  this 
desirable. 

This  can  be  done  by — 

1.  Constructing  loopholes  and  blocking  them  with  sand- 

bags which  can  be  removed. 

2.  {a)   However,  if  the  sandbags  are  left  in  place  for  a 

considerable  time  without  being  removed,  they  can 
not  be  moved.  (  h)  Loopholes  filled  with  single  sacks 
will  not  be  bullet  proof. 

3.  By  training  the  gimner  to:    (a)   Quickly  remove  the 

machine  gun  from  the  tripod  and  fire  from  the  top 
of  the  parapet,  (b)  Lift  the  machine  (r\m  and  tripod 
out  of  the  trench  and  fire  it  from  some  previously 
selected  sjjot. 

269.  Arrangements  for  firing  at  night  should  be  made.  The 
day  and  night  gun  positions  will  probably  be  different ;  the 
changes  from  the  one  to  the  other  should  be  made  just  after  dark 
and  just  before  dawn. 

270.  Comnmni cation  between  the  machine-gim  units  must  be 
arranged  v>ith  care.  JMachine-giui  officers  must  keep  in  touch 
with  neighboring  guns  and  with  the  firing  line. 

Section  IV. — Selection  of  Firing  Position. 

271.  Machine  guns  may  be  hidden  in  almost  any  position,  but 
it  is  advisable  to  avoid  places  which  are  either  obvious  or  easy 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  UEGTJLATIONS,   1917.  9S 

to  recognize,  such  as  crcssrouds  or  single  objects,  or  places 
v/hicli  can  easily  be  located  on  the  map.  It  is  important  that 
gnns  sIiouUl  merge  into  the  surroundings,  and  straight  edges  or 
distinct  shadows  should  not  be  m.ade. 

272.  Banks  of  rivers,  canals,  and  railway  ditches,  fold  ;  in  the 
ground,  hedges,  palings,  or  walls,  also  mounds  of  earth,  may 
be  used  either  to  afford  a  covered  line  of  approach  and  supply 
to  a  gun  position  or  else  a  gun  position  itself.  V\lien  firing 
over  the  top  of  the  cover  greater  protection  is  given  if  hollows 
are  scooped  out  for  the  front  legs  of  the  tripod. 

273.  Houses  may  be  employed  in  the  follo'ving  manner: 
The  guns  may  be  placed  in  rear,  firing  t^.i'ough  windows  or 

doors  in  line  or  past  the  sides  of  the  house.  When  firing  from 
a  window,  door,  or  hole  in  the  roof,  the  gun  should  be  placed 
well  back  for  concealment.  A  damp  piece  of  cloth  hung  in 
front  of  the  gun  helps  to  conceal  the  fiash.  When  firing  from 
a  cellar  care  should  be  taken  not  to  cause  a  cloud  of  dust  to  rise 
and  give  away  the  ]iositioii.  A  means  of  retirement  and  nlt^i'- 
native  emplaceiuents  should  lie  arranged.  Overhead  fire  and 
observation  mayoften  be  obtained  from  high  buildings. 

274.  Woods  and  crops  provide  cover  from  view,  facilities  for 
communication,  and  good  lines  of  approach  or  supply.  In 
neither  should  guns  be  placed  too  near  to  the  front  edge.  In 
woods  it  will  often  be  possible  to  construct  hasty  overhead 
cover. 

275.  If  a  barricade  has  been  constructed  across  a  road,  ma- 
chine guns  should  not  be  put  on  the  barricade  itself,  but,  if 
possible,  in  a  concealed  position  to  a  flank  from  which  they 
can  sweep  the  road. 

276.  Haystacks  do  not  as  a  rule  afford  a  very  satisfactory 
position,  but  guns  may  be  placed  in  a  hollow  in  front  or  behind, 
firing  past  the  side,  or  else  in  a  hollow  on  top,  firing  through 
the  front  face  of  the  stack.  A  machine  gun  concealed  in  a  field 
which  is  covered  with  cornstalks,  manure  heaps,  or  mounds  of 
roots  is  difficult  to  locate. 

277.  Wood  stacks,  planks,  logs  of  trees,  and  farm  inmlen-.entt; 
may  be  used  to  conceal  guns ;  cover  from  fire  can  often  be 
obtained  by  the  additioiT'of  bricks  or  sand  bags. 

278.  Trees  generally  provide  better  observation  posts  than 
machine-gun  positions. 


9S  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

Section  V. — Maeches. 

(Geueral.) 

(See  the  Field  Service  Regulations.) 

279.  Marching  constitutes  the  principal  occupation  of  troops 
in  campaign  and  is  one  of  the  heaviest  causes  of  loss.  This  loss 
may  be  materially  reduced  by  proper  training  and  by  the  proper 
conduct  of  the  march. 

280.  The  training  of  machine-gun  organizations  should  consist 
of  systematic  physical  exercises  to  develop  the  general  pl:ysique 
and  of  actual  marching  to  accustom  men  to  the  fatigue  and 
hardship  incident  thereto. 

Before  mobilization  troops  should  be  kept  in  good  physical 
condition  and  so  practiced  as  to  teach  them  thoroughly  the 
principles  of  marching.  At  the  tirst  opportunity  after  mobili- 
zation the  men  should  be  hardened  to  cover  long  distances 
without  loss. 

281.  With  new  or  untrained  troops,  the  process  of  hardening 
the  men  to  this  work  must  be  gradual.  Immediately  after  being 
mustered  into  the  service  the  physical  exercises  and  marching 
should  be  begun.  Ten-minute  periods  of  vigorous  setting-Tjp 
exercises  should  be  given  three  times  a  day  to  loosen  and 
develop  the  muscles.  One  march  should  be  made  each  day  with 
full  equipment,  beginning  with  a  distance  of  2  or  3  miles  and 
increasing  the  distance  daily  as  the  troops  become  hardened, 
until  a  full  day's  march  under  full  equipment  may  be  made 
without  exhaustion. 

282.  A  long  march  should  not  be  made  with  untrained  troops. 
If  a  long  distance  must  be  covered  in  a  fevr  days,  the  first 
march  should  be  short,  the  length  being  increased  each  suc- 
ceeding day. 

283.  Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  fitting  of  the 
shoes  and  the  care  of  the  feet.  Shoes  should  not  be  too  wide  or 
too  short.  Sores  and  blisters  on  the  feet  should  be  promptly 
dressed  during  halts.  At  the  end  of  the  march  feet  should  be 
bathed  and  dressed ;  the  socks  and,  if  practicable,  the  shoes 
should  be  changed. 

284.  The  drinking  of  water  on  the  march  should  be  avoided. 
The  thirst  should  be  thoroughly  quenched  before  starting  on  the 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  97 

march  and  after  arrival  in  camp.  On  the  march  the  "use  of 
water  should,  in  general,  be  confined  to  garglin.cr  the  mouth  and 
throx'it  or  to  an  occasional  small  drink  at  the  most. 

285.  Except  for  urgent  reasons,  marches  should  not  begin 
before  an  hour  after  daylight,  but  if  the  distance  to  be  covered 
necessitates  either  breaking  camp  before  daylight  or  making 
camp  after  dark,  it  is  better  to  do  the  former. 

Night  marching  should  l)e  avoided  when  possible. 

286.  A  halt  of  15  minutes  should  be  made  after  the  first  half 
or  three-quarters  of  an  liour  marching;  thereafter  a  halt  of  10 
minutes  is  made  in  each  hour.     The  number  and  length  of  halts 

'  may  be  varied,  according  to  the  weather,  the  condition  of  the 
roads,  and  tiie  equipment  carried  by  the  men.     When  the  day's 
'.  march  is  long  a  halt  of  an  hour  should  be  made  at  nooa  and  the 
,  men  allovred  to  eat. 

287.  The  rate  of  march  is  regulated  by  the  commander  of  the 
leading  company  of  each  regiment,  or,  if  the  battalions 'bo 
separated  by  greater  than  normal  distances,  by  the  commander 
of  the  leading  company  of  each  battalion.     He  should  maintain 

I  a  uniform  rate,  uuuilluenced  by  the  movement  of  troops  or 
[  mounted  men  in  front  of  him. 

j  The  position  of  companies  in  the  battalion  and  of  battalions 
I  in  the  regiment  is  ordinarily  changed  daily  so  that  each  in  turn 
I  leads. 

288.  The  marclung  efficiency  of  an  organization  is  judged  by 
^  the  amount  of  straggling  and  elongation  and  the  condition  of 
I  the  men  at  the  end  of  the  march. 

I      An  officer  of  each  company  marches  in  its  rear  to  prevent  un- 

j  due  elongation  and  straggling. 

•      When  necessary  for  a  man  to  fall  out  on  account  of  sickness, 

i  he  should  be  given  a  permit  to  do  so.     This  is  presented  to  the 

\  surgeon,  who  will  admit  him  to  the  ambulance,  have  him  wait 

j  for  the  trains,  or  follow  and  rejoin  his  company  at  the  first  halt. 

I      289.  Special-  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  rate  of  march. 

'It  is  greater  for  trained  than  for  untrained  troops;  for  small 

I  connnands  than  for  large  ones;   for  lightly  burdened  than  for 

'  heavily  burdened  troops.     It  is  greater  during  cool  than  during 

'  hot  weather.     V\'ith  trained  troops,  in  commands  of  a  regiment 

i 

t 

f 

) 


98  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

or  less,  marching  over  average  roads,  the  rate  should  be  from 
2f  to  3  miles  per  hour. 

290.  The  marching  capacity  of  trained  infantry  in  small  com- 
mands is  from  20  to  25  miles  per  day.  This  distance  will  de- 
crease as  the  size  of  the  command  increases.  For  a  complete 
division  the  distance  can  seldom  exceed  12^  miles  per  day 
unless  the  division  camps  in  colunm. 

291.  In  large  commands  the  marching  capacity  of  troops  is 
greatly  reduced  by  faulty  march  orders  and  poor  march  disci- 
pline. 

The  march  order  should  contain  such  instructions  as  will 
enable  the  troops  to  take  their  proper  places  in  column  promptly. 
Delay  or  confusion  in  doing  so  should  be  investigated.  On  the 
other  hand,  organization  commaudei-s  should  be  required  to 
time  their  movements  so  that  the  troops  will  not  be  formed 
sooner  than  necessary. 

The  halts  and  starts  of  t]i<^  nnifg;  ^f  j]  pojumn  should  be  regu- 
lated by  the  watehjinTl  Ixe^imultanemi^. 

Closing  up  during  a  halt^  or  changjiig.  gait  to  gain  or  lose  dis- 
tance snrmid  be  pi-oTTibited. 

^  The  nttrseshoer,  the  saddler,  the  company  clerk,  the  cooks, 
and  two  privates  march  with  the  field  train,  under  command 
of  tlie  officer  in  charge  of  the  train. 

292.  The  machine-gun  commander  habitually  accompanies  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  unit  to  which  he  is  attached.  A 
machine-gun  reconnaissance  party  marches  with  the  advance 
element  of  the  command 

PROTECTION   OF  THE   MARCH. 

293.  A  column  on  the  march  in  the  vicinity  of  the  enemy  is 
covered  by  detachments  called  advance  guards,  rear  guards,  or 
flank  guards.  The  object  of  these  covering  detachments  is  to 
facilitate  the  advance  of  the  main  body  and  to  protect  it  from 
surprise  or  observation. 

They  facilitate  the  advance  of  the  main  body  by  promptly 
driving  off  small  bodies  of  the  enemy  who  seek  to  harass  or  delay 
it ;  by  removing  obstacles  from  the  line  of  advance,  by  repairing 
roads,  bridges,  etc.,  thus  enabling  the  main  body  to  advance 
uninterruptedly  in  convenient  marching  formations. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  99 

They  protect  the  main  body  by  preventing  tbe  enemy  from 
firini?  into  it  when  in  close  formation ;  by  holding  the  enemy  and 
enabling  the  main  body  to  deploy  before  coming  under  efl'ective 
fire ;  by  preventing  its  size  and  condition  from  being  observed  by 
the  enemy  and  in  retreat  by  gaining  time  for  it  to  make  its 
escape  or  to  reorganize  its  forces. 

Section  VI. — Advance  Guaed. 

294.  The  duties  of  an  advance  guard  make  it  necessary  that 
great  lire  powej  should  bo  rn-.^ilnb^  when  required. 

A  large  proportion  of  machine  guns  should,  therefore,  be 
assigned  to  advance  guards. 

295.  Thf^^  nin.chine  guns  should  be  well  forward  in  the  col- 
unm.  so  that  they  may  be  able  to  get  quickly  into  action. 

296.  The  principal  duties  of  machine  guns  v/ith  the  advance 
guard  are: 

1.  Assist  in  driving  back  enemy  forces  by  rapid  production 
of  great  fire  povcer  at  any  required  point. 

2.  Assist  in  holding  any  position  gained  until  the  arrival  of 
the  infantry. 

3.  Cover  the  deployment  of  the  main  body  by  holding  the 
enemy  on  a  wide  front. 

297.  With  advance  guards  the  machine  gun  will  supply  a  use- 
ful stiffening  which  will  often  make  it  possible  to  use  a  smaller 
number  of  men,  or,  again,  by  increasing  the  number  of  machine 
guns  the  advance  guard  may  be  given  a  striking  force  that  will 
enable  it  to  take  a  more  strongly  aggressive  tone  toward  the 
enemy. 

298.  As  the  preliminary  action  of  the  advance  guard  draws  to 
a  close  and  the  main  body  deploys  into  line  and  begins  the  more 
serious  engagement,  it  will  generally  be  well  to  withdraw  the 
machine  guns  from  the  position  which  they  have  occupied  to 
meet  the  first  emergency,  in  order  to  assign  them  to  the  work 
they  are  to  do  in  the  actual  battle. 

299.  The  characteristics  of  machine  guns  render  them,  as  a 
rule,  more  suitable  for  employment  with  the  reserve  than  with 
the  support,  but  the  size  of  the  support  may  necessitate  machine 
guns  being  attached  to  it. 


100  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

Section  VII. — Rear  Guard. 

300.  As  a  rear  guard  will  usually  be  required  to  hold  positions 
uith  the  minimum  of  men,  a  laru:e  proportion  of  m;ichine  guns 
shoujd  he  assigned  to  it. 

'■"^l.  li::xperience  of  war  has  shown  that  well-placed  machine 
guns,  only  supported  by  a  few  infantry,  will  frequently  hold  up 
an  advance  for  long  periods. 

302.  In  occupying  a  rear-guard  position  with  machine  guns 
the  ordinary  principles  of  the  defense  apply,  but  the  following 
points  should  be  specially  noted : 

1.  As  wide  a  held  of  fire  as  possible  should  be  selected. 

2.  Guns  must  Itej-onc^ed  in  the  least  obvious  places. 

3.  (^ovei^d  lines  of  \'<^^^rement  must  be  reconnoitered. 

4.  Cartslshduld  be  close  xrp  To  facilitate  a  lia st y  re ti reui ent 

5.  Posityns  in  rear  must  be  chosen  before~the  machme  ft5ns 
ret i re'froDi  their  forward  positions. 

6.  A  proportion  of  the  machine  guns  should  occupy  the  posi- 
tions in  rear,  before  all  the  machine  guns  retire  from  the  for- 
ward position.  Thus  the  retirement  of  the  last  gun  can  be 
covered. 

303.  With  a  rear  guard  covering  a  retreat,  the  machine  guns 
can  render  valuable  services.  Rear-guard  fighting  is  particu- 
larly well  adapted  to  their  power  of  suddenly  opening  a  heavy 
fire,  and  the  business  of  the  machine-gun  commander  will  be  to 
choose,  if  possible,  a  position  from  which  this  fire  will  come  as  a 
sui-prise  to  the  pursuing  troops.  Having  accomplished  his  ob- 
ject of  checking  the  enemy's  movement  and  forcing  him  to  de- 
ploy for  the  attack,  he  will  fall  back  to  another  position  where 
he  can  repeat  the  same  maneuver. 

Section  VIII. — Outposts. 

304.  The  ease  with  which  a  machine  gun  can  be  concealed, 
its  mobility,  its  adaptability  to  night  firing,  and  its  concentra- 
tion of  fire  on  a  narrow  frontage  makes  it  the  ideal  resisting 
weapon  for  use  wth  an  outpost  for  the  purpose  of  covering 
roads,  bridges,  defiles,  or  other  marked  lines  of  approach. 

305.  A  judicious  use  of  machine  gims  stiffens  the  line  of 
resistance  and  permits  the  employment  of  the  minimum  number 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  101 

of  riflemen.  However,  the  maeliine  gun  is  solely  for  the  pur- 
pose of  increasing  the  stopping  power  of  the  outpost,  and  in 
return  it  must  have  the  protection  of  the  outpost. 

303.  Aside  from  the  use  of  machine  guns  in  covering  defiles, 
advantage  may  be  taken  of  their  characteristics  of  concentrated- 
flre  power  to  place  them  in  salients  and  reentrants  and  at  other 
points  where  the  establishment  of  a  heavy  firing  line  is  not 
feasible. 

307.  The  size  and  disposition  of  the  outpost  with  the  number 
of  guns  assigned  to  the  different  subdivisions  thereof  depends 
upon  many  circumstances,  such  as  the  size  of  the  whole  camp, 
the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  and  the  situation  with  respect  to 
him.  the  nature  of  the  terrain,  etc. 

308.  The  guns  attached  to  the  outpost,  if  sufficient  in  number, 
may  be  placed  at  or  near  the  line  of  resistance,  with  a  section 
covering  each  of  the  main  avenues  of  approach,  or  if  too  few 
in  number  to  admit  of  such  a  distribution,  emplacements  should 
be  prepared  or  firing  positions  reconuoitered  and  located  cov- 
ering the  line  of  approach,  the  guns  being  held  in  reserve  at  a 
central  point  in  rear  from  which  tliey  may  be  moved  easily  and 
quickly  to  that  portion  of  the  line  v.iiere  they  are  needed. 

309.  Unless  an  attack  is  imminent,  machine  guns  assigned  to 
the  outi30st  do  not  occupy  their  fire  position  during  the  day,  but 
are  held  as  reserves  in  their  sector.  However,  emplacements 
or  firing  positions  are  prepared,  routes  marked,  range  cards 
made,  and  all  preparations  for  immediate  action  completed. 

310.  The  night  position  for  each  gun  is  very  carefully  selected 
and  arrangements  made  for  night  firing,  and  the  gun  placed 
in  position  before  dark.  The  guns  are  so  located  that  an 
enemy  in  advancing  must  pass  over  or  occupy  ground  swept  by 
their  fire. 

311.  The  avenues  of  approach  to  be  covered  must  be  con- 
sidered in  the  order  of  their  importance  and  an  endeavor  made 
to  leave  unprotected  no  approach  by  which  an  enemy  might 
advance. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  to  conceal  the  guns  from  observation 
when  bringing  them  into  position  or  withdrawing  them. 

312.  The  orders  given  by  the  platoon  commander  to  the  leader 
of  a  raacliine-gun  squad  or  section  detailed  for  duty. with  any 


102  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

fraction  of  an  outpost  must  be  clear  and  definite  and  should 
include : 

1.  InfornuUion  as  to  the  situation  sufficiently  complete  to  en- 
able him  to  act  intelligently  upon  his  own  initiative  should  the 
necessity  arise. 

2.  The  exact  mission  of  the  guns. 

3.  The  location  of  adjoining?  guns. 

4.  The  disposition  to  be  made  of  his  carts. 

313.  The  machine-gun  commander  upon  arriving  at  the  desig- 
nated subdivision  of  the  outpost  to  which  he  is  assigned  is  given 
the  location  of  the  infantry  sentinel  or  sentinels.    He  then — 

1.  Arranges  a  system  of  signals  between  this  sentinel  or  senti- 
nels and  the  sentinel  at  the  gun, 

2.  Selects  firing  positions  for  each  gun. 

3.  Obtains  ranges  and  prepares  range  cards. 

4.  Arranges  for  the  concealment  of  the  gun  by  means  of 
natural  or  artificial  cover. 

5.  Notes  the  field  of  fire. 

6.  Marks  the  limits  of  the  traverse. 

7.  Locates  neighboring  guns, 

8.  Arranges  for  mutual  fire  support. 

9.  Completes  preparation  for  night  firing. 

10.  Sees  to  the  necessary  ammunition  supply. 

11.  Posts  his  sentinels  at  the  gun  (one  by  day  and  two  by 
night). 

12.  Holds  the  other  members  of  each  gun  squad  in  convenient 
supporting  distance  of  the  gun. 

13.  Sends  the  carts  to  the  designated  assembly  point. 

14.  Assures  himself  that  every  man  of  his  command  is  familiar 
with  the  arrangements  indicated  in  so  far  as  it  pertains  to  the 
gun  to  which  the  man  belongs, 

1").  Arranges  for  communication  with  his  next  higher  com- 
mander. 

IG,  In  case  of  a  gas  attack  sees  that  machine  gun  5s  cleaned 
immediately  after. 

In  general,  takes  every  possible  means  to  coordinate  his  work 
with  the  unit  to  which  he  is  attached. 

314.  Sentinels  over  machine  guns  as  part  of  an  outpost  are, 
at  night,  'posted  in  pairs,  two  men  to  each  gun  in  position. 
Usually  one  sentinel  will  be  sufficient  during  the  day. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  103 

The  sentinel's  orders  must  be  clear  and  definite. 
He— 

1.  Keeps  the  gun  loaded  and  at  the  safe  while  it  is  la 

position. 

2.  Maintains  observation  constantly  to  the  front. 

3.  Is  responsible  that  the  water  does  not  freeze  in  the 

jacket,  and  that  the  ^n  is  protected  from  dust  and 
sand. 

4.  Operates  the  mechanism  frequently'  to  insure  that  it  is 

in  working  order. 

5.  Keeps  himself  concealed,  but  does  not  sacrifice  observa- 

tion to  concealment. 

6.  Must  know — 

(a)  The  exact  mission  of  the  gun. 

(b)  The  limits  of  the  traverse. 

(c)  The  points  marked  on  the  range  card. 

(d)  The  arrangements  for  night  firing. 

(e)  The  position  of  the  rifle  sentinels. 

(/)   The  arrangements  for  communication  with  the 
sentinel. 

(g)   The  avenues  of  communication  to  the  rear. 

(h)   The  location  of  neighboring  guns. 

(i)   The  arrangements  for  supporting  fire. 

0)   The  location  of  the  remainder  of  the  gun  squad. 

(k)  Any  special  orders  for  his  gun  position,  such  as 
action  of  patrols,  etc. 

(?)   What  the  signal  is  for-  opening  fire,  and  whether 
or  not  he  is  to  open  fire  on  his  own  iniiiative. 
I      In  case  of  an  attack  at  night,  No.  2  sentinel  catls  the  other 
I  men  of  the  gun  squad. 

j  Upon  relief  of  sentinels,  the  firing  mechanism  will  be  operated 
I'  in  the  presence  of  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  of  the 
'  party. 

Relieving  gun  detachments  and  sentinels  will  assure  them- 
!  selves  that  they  are  fully  conversant  with  the  instructions  for 
i  the  gun  squad  and  the  sentinel  as  described  in  this  and  the  pre- 
:  ceding  paragraph.  In  addition,  relieving  sentinels  should  be 
,  Informed  whether  or  not  the  gun  has  been  fired  during  the  pre- 
'  vious  relief;  and  if  so,  at  what  target  and  from  what  gun 
[  position. 


104  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Section  IX. — Village  Fighting. 

315.  As  soon  as  the  ritlemeu  have  made  good  one  edcje  of  a 
viUage,  machine  guns  are  brought  up  in  close  support.  They 
then  searcli  windows,  doorways,  roofs,  etc.,  liliely  to  be  held  by 
the  enemy. 

316.  Machine  guns  are  used  to  command  cross  streets,  etc..  in 
order  to  guard  against  attack  on  the  Hanks  or  rear  of  the  in- 
fantry. 

317.  Guns  are  posted  on  the  edges  of  villages  to  prevent  flank 
attacks. 

318.  When  possible,  nuichine  guns  are  pushed  forvrard  on  the 
flanks,  so  as  to  command  ihe  exits  of  the  village. 

310.  During  village  fighting  every  use  is  made  of  windov/s, 
doors,  etc.,  as  machine-gun  positions. 

Section  X. — Aaimunition  Supply. 

(Plate  VII.) 

320.  Ammunition  supply  is  of  vital  imp(»rtance  in  any  engage- 
ment and  must  be  given  very  careful  consideration  and  fore- 
thought. It  is  a  subject  that  is  very  much  neglected  in  our  Army. 
The  duties  of  the  various  commanders  with  respect  to  ihe  supply 
of  ammunition  are  outlined  in  the  chapter  on  the  "  r>uties  of 
the  personnel,  before  and  during  combat." 

In  working  out  the  problems  before  him,  the  lire  controller 
must  V.ear  in  mind — 

1.  The  amount  of  ammunition  needed  immediately. 

2.  The  amount  needed  from  time  to  time. 

3.  The  distance  to  be  carried  by  hand. 

4.  Character  of  ground  to  be  crossed. 

5.  ^Method  to  be  used  in  carrying  the  ammunition  for\;nrd. 

6.  The  number  of  men  required.^ 

321.  The  minimum  requirements  are: 

With  each  gun,  1,500  rounds  loaded  in  belts,  tool  box,  and 
water  box. 

In  each  ammunition  cart,  3,500  rounds  loaded  in  belts. 

1  If  he  has  not  enough  niei),  then  he  must  call  on  neighboring  troops 
for  assistance. 


MACHINE- GXTIT  DRILL  HEGITLATIONS,   1917.  105 

In  each  ammunition  cart,  2  water  boxes,  full,  and  belt-filling 
machine. 

The  1,500  rounds.  1  water  box,  and  1  tool  box  must  be  kept 
with  the  gun  at  all  times. 

The  belt-filling  station  must  be  established  as  near  the  gun 
position  as  the  terrain  and  the  enemy's  fire  will  perrair.  At  this 
station  will  l)e  the  3,500  rounds,  2  water  boxes,  and  the  belt- 
filling  machine. 

322.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  fire  controller  (section  leader, 
platoon  leader,  or  company  com.mander)  to  mark  the  place  for 
the  belt-filling  station  and  establish  it  with  Nos.  5  and  6  as 
loaders. 

After  establishing  this  station  the  fire  controller  next  causes 
the  ammunition  on  the  ammunition  cart  to  be  unloaded,  provid- 
ing he  expects  to  remain  in  his  position,  and  immediately  sends 
the  ammunition  cart  to  the  combat  train  to  refill. 

323.  During  the  time  the  position  is  being  occupied  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  commander  of  the  combat  trains  to  communicate 
with  the  fire  controller  and  inform  him  of  the  best  meeting 
place  for  the  ammunition  carts  and  the  combat  train.  As  soon 
as  the  ammunition  carts  are  refilled  from  rhe  combat  train  the 
combat  train  must  refill  from  the  ammunition  train.  The  suc- 
ceeding paragraph  may  apply  at  times  during  the  offense. 

324.  In  defensive  operations  it  will  be  advisable  for  the  com- 
bat trains  to  unload  their  ammunition  at  some  place  convenient 

I  and  accessible  to  the  ammunition  carts.  The  ammunition  carts 
I  can  then  refill,  carry  anmnmition  forward  as  far  as  permissible, 
I  and  also  unload.  From  that  point  forward  the  ammunition 
i  must  be  carried  by  hand  to  the  belt-filling  station,  and  from 
'  the  belt-filling  station  to  the  gun  positions.  If  ammunition 
j  must  be  carried  over  fi.re-swept  ground  froui  the  amnuuiition 
,  carts  to  the  belt-filling  station,  the  cases  may  be  dragged  or 
;  opened  and  the  bandoleers  carried  by  the  men.  If  the  men  are 
I  required  to  crawl  forwarJi,  then  five  bandoleers  is  a  good  load 
I  per  man. 

I      325.  The  machine-gun  officer's  duties  are  not  over  wlien  the 
above  requirements  have  been  fulfilled.     He  must  insure  com- 
!  muuication  between — 


106  MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917. 

1.  The  firing  line  and  tiie  belt-filling  .station. 

2.  The  b^lt-filling  station  and  the  ainnnmition  carts. 

3.  Tiie  ammunition  carts  and  the  annnunition  train. 
He  must  also  see  tliat — 

1.  In  wet  weather  the  amraunilion  and  belts  are  kept  dry. 

2.  All  the  annnunition  is  not  in  one  place. 

3.  A  careful  insi)eciion  of  each  belt  is  made  before  it  is  sent 
to  the  gun  positions. 

4.  Sullicient  amnmnltion  is  on  iuind  for  the  crisis. 


PART  III. 

DUTIES  OF  THE  PEESOIOEL,  PRECEDING  AND 
DTJEING  COMBAT. 


Section  I. — General  Rtles. 

326.  General  reconnaissance  is  the  function  of  the  infantry 
and  cavalry.  Machine-gun  commanders  should  be  kept  sufli- 
ciently  well  informed  of  the  situation  to  enable  them  to  use 
their  guns  effectively. 

The  machine-gun  commander  makes  such  special  reconnais- 
sance as  is  necessary  to  insure  the  proper  posting  and  the 
effective  employment  of  the  gitns  in  the  execution  of  the 
assigned  tasks.  For  this  purpose  the  machine-gun  commander 
is  assisted  by  reconnaissance  officers  and  scouts. 

1.  The  effectiveness  of  machine-gun  fire  is  inlluenced  by — 

(a)   The  positions. 

(h)  The  preliminary  dispositions,  such  as  securing  firing 
data  and  organizing  suitable  information  and  com- 
munication services. 

(c)  Concealment  and  protective  cover. 

(d)  Posting  the  guns  without  the  knowledge  of  the  enemy, 
(c)    Opening  at  the  proper  time  a  sudden,  unexpected, 

and  overpowering  fire  upon  the  designated  objec- 
tives. 

2.  AVhen  necessary  that  guns  be  brought  into  action  quickly, 
promptness  in  opening  fire  is  the  main  consideration.  No  time 
should  be  wasted  in  selecting  positions,  for  in  such  a  case  con- 
cealment will  be  out  of  the  question.  The  machine-gun  com- 
mander with  an  eye  for  groun.d  may,  however,  make  use  of  the 
cover  afforded  in  his  immediate  front  and  thereby  gain  some 
little  advantage. 

107 


108  MACHINE-GUN  DRIII  REGULATIONS    1917. 

8.  All  machine-gun  commanders  invariably  precede  their 
commands  to  the  position  to  be  occupied.  Every  effort  should 
be  made  to  conclude  all  preliminary  arrangements  for  action 
prior  to  the  arrival  of  the  guns.  Delay  in  opening  fire  must 
not  be  caused  by  lack  of  timely  reconnaissance  and  preparation. 

4.  The  machine-gun  connnander  should  accompany  the  com- 
mander of  the  troops  on  the  preliminary  reconnaissance,  should 
be  kept  constantly  informed  as  to  the  tactical  situation  and  the 
plan  of  action,  and  should  receive  early  instructions  as  to  the 
special  tasks  to  be  performed  by  the  machine  guns. 

5.  At  the  earliest  opportunity  the  machine-gun  officer  recon- 
noiters  and  selects  the  positions  for  the  companies,  or  sections, 
in  accordance  with  the  instructions  he  has  received  and  the 
tactical  requirements  of  the  situation.  He  informs  his  subordi- 
nate commanders  when  and  where  they  are  to  report  to  receive 
instructions  and  undertake  their  own  reconnaissance.  It  Is 
important  that  the  subordinate  commanders  be  given  concise 
and  detailed  instructions. 

6.  ^^'hen  the  machine-gun  commander  rides  forward  on  recon- 
naissance, he  instructs  the  officer  left  in  command  on  the  fol- 
lowing points : 

( (/ )   The  tactical  situation. 

(b)  Whether  or  not  the  command  is  to  follow  at  once. 

(c)  The  time  and  place  for  subdivision,  if  this  has  not 

already  been  covered. 

id)   The  route  to  be  followed. 

(c)  The  rate  of  march. 

(/)  The  time  for  quitting  transportation  should  1)0  speci- 
fied at  this  time.  if. determined,  otherwise  this  in- 
formation should  be  sent  back  later  on. 

7.  As  soon  as  positions  are  selected  and  routes  determined, 
agents  or  scouts  may  be  sent  to  meet  the  machine-gun  organiza- 
tions and  guide  them  by  the  best  routes  to  their  positions. 

S.  Reconnaissance  oflicers  accompany  advanced  troops  in 
order  that  they  may  secure  early  information  as  to  the  enemy 
and  give  the  machine-gun  commander  detailed  information  as 
lo  the  ground,  favorable  positions,  and  routes.  A  reconnais- 
sance officer  operating  in  this  manner,  as  well  as  one  arriving 
with  his  commander,  examines  the  neighborhood  of  the  position, 
locates  his  own  troops  and  those  of  the  enemy ;  prepares  firing 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  KEGTJLATIOK:?,   1917.  109 

da:a ;  and  in  general  secures  the  necessary  information  for  his 
commanding  ofticer  and  relieves  the  latter  of  details. 

9.  Company  reconnaissance  oflicers  are  habitually  under  the 
orders  of  the  machine-gun  commander  on  marches  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  enemy.  Scouts  may  be  employed  to  assist  recon- 
naissance officers  and  supplement  the  information  secured  by 
them. 

RECONXAISSAXCE  OFFICEES. 

327.  A  reconnaissance  officer  attached  to  advanced  troops 
sliould,  as  soon  as  possible  a^ter  the  determination  of  the  en- 
emy's location,  submit  to  the  machine-gun  commander  a  report, 
giving  all  obtainable  information  as  to  the  enemy  and  describ- 
ing the  most  suitable  positions  for  the  machine  guns.  This  re- 
port should  be  accompanied  by  a  sketch,  showing  the  enemy's 
position,  the  selected  gun  positions,  the  characteristics  of  the 
country  intervening  between  the  two,  and  such  other  important 
information  as  may  be  readily  set  forth.  The  report  should 
embrace  information  as  to — 

1.  The  routes  of  approach  and  their  practicability. 

2.  The  possibility  of  approach  under  cover. 

3.  Whether  or  not  the  gun  positions  are  masked. 

4.  Cover  afforded  for  the  guns. 

5.  The  need  of  providing  artificial  cover. 

6.  Number  of  guns  that  may  be  used  to  advantage  in  each 
locality. 

7.  I'rotection  for  carts. 

8.  Facility  for  resupply  of  ammunition. 

9.  The  most  important  and  immediate  targets. 

10.  Location  and  strength  of  the  various  hostile  bodies, 

11.  Location,  or  probable  location,  of  the  hostile  machine 
guns. 

AGENTS. 

328.  1.  L'ntil  all  elements  of  the  command  are  in  position, 
agents  are  especially  careful,  even  without  instruction,  to 
watch  for  and  render  information  to  the  captains,  officers,  men 
of  the  various  details,  and  others  entitled  to  it. 


110  MACHINE-GTJIT  DRILL  REGTJLATIOJSIS.  .1917. 

2.  Under  the  direction  of  the  machine-gun  commander,  main- 
tain communication  between  the  various  elements  of  the  com- 
mand. 

3.  Each  agent  must — 

(a)  Keep  himself  informed  as  to  the  location  of  the  ele- 
ments of  the  command,  so  tliat  he  can  furnish  tiiis 
information  to  others. 

(&)  Seek  the  best  routes  of  approach  and  study  ihe 
ground  in  and  around  the  pojiition.  to  enable  hira 
to  guide  elements  into  new  positions  and  to  trans- 
mit information  bet^^'een  the  major  and  neighbor- 
ing troops. 

4.  Agents  must  keep  in  mind  the  following : 

(a)   Before  starting  with  a  message  they  ask  the  follow- 
ing questions,  if  their  information  is  not  clear : 
(*L)   What  is  the  official  designation  of  the  one 
to  whom  the  message  is  to  be  delivered? 

(2)  Where  is  the  person  to  whom  it  is  to  be 

delivered? 

(3)  What  is  the  best  and  shortest  way  there,  or 

can  I  be  given  a  map  of  the  route? 

(4)  Am  I  to  report  back  as  soon  as  the  mes- 

sage is  delivered ;  if  not,  to  whom  shall 

I  report? 
(h)   Important  messages  in  writing  should  have  their  pur- 
port understood  by  the  bearer,  so  that,  if  neces- 
sary, they  may  be  destroyed  to  prevent  their  fell- 
ing into  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

(c)  On   the   envelope   containing   a   written   message   is 

written : 

(1)  Name  of  messenger. 

(2)  Date  and  hour  of  departure,  as:  February 

15,  9.40  a.  m. 

(3)  Rate  of  speed.     (F.  S.  R..  par.  3G.) 

(d)  Agents  must  understand  how  to  ride  at  the  different 

rates  of  speed, 
(c)   If  mounted  and  ordered  to  deliver  a  message,  and  the 

hour  of  departure  and  rate  are  not  indicated,  they 

ask  for  them. 
(/)  At  all  times  they  keep  informed  as  to  the  location  of 

their  own  units. 


MACHINE- GUN  DRILL  REGTJLATIONS,   1917.  Ill 

ii/)   Note  carefully  tlie  country  traversed. 

(h)  Move  promptly  \vhen  on  an  errand.  All  military  per- 
sons are  required  to  render  assistance  in  expedit- 
ing movements  of  agents. 

(i)  On  reaching  destination,  call  out  designation  of  per- 
son sought. 

(;■)   Having  delivered  message: 

(1)  Ask  if  ther-e  is  any  reply. 

(2)  If  receiver  forgets  to  do  so,  ask  that  he  initial 

the    envelope    and    record    hour    and    date 
thereon. 
(7j)   If  avrare  of  the  na^i;ure  of  the  message  carried,  after 
delivering   it,   report  any  circumstances   affecting 
the  situation  which  have  arisen  since  leaving  the 
sender. 
(l)   Always  repeat  a  verbal  message,  word  for  word,  in 
the  presence  of  the  sender,  making  certain  they 
understand  the  meaning  of  the  message. 
(711)   After  diligent  search,  if  the  person  to  whom  the  mes- 
sage is  sent  can  not  be  found,  endeavor  to  lind 
some  other  person  who  can  take  advantage  of  the 
information  conveyed.     Whether  this  can  be  done 
or  not.  always  report  back  to  the  sender  with  full 
statement  of  facts  in  the  case. 
(n)   Unless  otherwise  directed,  always  report  back  to  the 
sender  whether  or  not  the  message  was  delivered, 
(o)   When  a  messenger  carries  a  message  unsealed  or  not 
marked  "  Confidential  "  he  will  permit  commanders 
along  the  route  to  read  it. 
He  sees  that  they  initial  the  envelope  and  record  the  hour 
and  date  wiien  they  read  the  contents. 

Wlien  it  is  desirable  that  neighboring  troops  get  information 
from  a  message  sent  to  a  superior  that  fact  is  noted  on  the 
envelope,  and  it  is  the  duty  of  the  messenger  to  see  that  they 
get  it.  He  must  see  that  they  initial  the  envelope  and  record 
the  hour  and  date  thereon. 

SCOUTS. 

329.  Under  the  direction  of  the  major  or  company  com- 
mander— 


112  MACHINE-GXm  i)EILL  REGULATIONS,   l&l 7. 

1.  Act  as  markers  at  crossroads,  etc.,  where  doubt  may  arise 
as  to  the  correct  route. 

2.  Usually  operate  in  pairs,  under  the  supervision  of  a  recon- 
naissance officer. 

3.  Understand '  the  duties  of  carrvins;  messages  as  outlined 
under  "Agents"  (328). 

4.  liegarding  reports,  scouts  must  keep  in  mind  the  following : 

(a)   Word  a  report  like  a  telegram,  brief  and  clear,  but 

omit  nothing  that  is  Important. 
(h)   Write  legibly. 

(c)  Names    of   persons   and    places   .should   be   in   block 

letters. 

(d)  Report  facts  and  avoid  vagueness. 

(e)  Report   hearsay   information  as   such  and   state  its 

source. 

(/)  Always  give  the  reason  for  surmises. 

{[/)  A  report  about  the  enemy  should  answer  the  follow- 
ing questions : 

(1)  By  whom  seen? 

(2)  How  many? 

(3)  What  arm? 

(4)  Where? 

(5)  What  doing? 

(6)  At  what  time  seen? 

(h)   A  report  is  of  no  value  unless  it  give.s — 

(1)  Designation  of  sender  or  .sending  detachment. 

(2)  Place. 

(3)  Date  and  hour. 

(4)  Signature  and  rank. 

(0   When  more  than  one  report  is  sent  from  a  scout  to 

the  same  person,  the  reports  should  be  numbered 

consecutively. 
(;■)   Copies  should  be  kept  of  all  messages. 
(/:)   "Negative"    reports   are   of   great   value   at   times. 

They  show  where  the  enemy  is  not  and  what  the 

scout  or  patrol  is  doing:. 
(?)   Always  use  compass  bearings  in  reports — never  right 

or  left,  except  when  referring  to  river  banks. 
(m)  A  message  should  state  what  the  scout  or  patrol  is 

going  to  do  next. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  113 

(?i)  In  making  a  verbal  report,  think  out  beforehand 
wliat  is  to  l)e  said ;  give  the  report  coolly  and  be 
certain  that  it  is  understood. 

Section  II. — The  Major. 

330.  The  duties  described  and  enumerated  for  the  major  apply 
equally  as  well  to  any  machine-gun  oflicer  commanding  machine 
guns  attached  to  a  command. 

IN  ATTACK. 

1.  Advancing  to  the  battle  field,  ha  marches  with  the  com- 
manding officer  In  order  that  he  may — 

(a)   Receive  information  and  orders  personally  from  the 

commander. 
( h )   Personally  reconnoiter  the  ground. 

2.  After  hiiving  received  his  orders  the  major  makes  a  special 
reconnaissance,  assisted  by  reconnaissance  officers  and  scouts, 
in  order  to  obtain  information  concerning — 

(a)  Exact  location  and  disposition  of  the  enemy. 

(b)  Location  and  disposition  of  troops  he  is  supporting. 

(c)  Favorable  location  for  machine-gun  companies. 
id)  The  best  routes  of  advance. 

(c)   And  such  other  information  as  the  situation  requires. 

3.  Orders  company  commandei's  to  report  to  him,  designating 
the  rendezvous. 

4.  Orders  machine-gun  companies  forward,  specifying — 

(a)  The  formation  they  take  while  advancing. 

(b)  Where  they  will  halt. 

5.  Assembles  company  commanders. 

6.  In  his  orders  to  them  he  covers — 

(a)  Information  of  the  enemy. 

(b)  Position  of  supporting  troops,  neighboring  troops,  and 

guns. 

(c)  The  general  object  to  be  obtained. 

id)  The  special  problem  for  each  unit,  including — 

(1)  The  number  of  guns  placed  in  action. 

(2)  The  number  of  guns  placed  in  reserve. 

(3)  Designation  and  apportionment  of  the  target. 


114  MACHINE-GXJJJ  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917, 

(e)   The  point,  or  time,  if  possible,  at  which  lire  is  to  be 
opened, 

(/)   Orders  for  flanli  protection  and  reconnaissance,  un- 
les  covered  by  orders  froni  higher  authoritj". 
7,  Orders  comnumicatlon  witli — 

(a)   Giins  going  forward. 

(&)   Guns  in  reserve. 

(c)   Firing  line. 

id)   The  commander. 
S.  Arranges  the  supply  of  ammunition.         ; 
9.  Announces  his  position  and  that  of  the  higher  commander. 

ARRANGES    FOR   EVENTS    SUBSEQLT:NT    TO   THE   ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  attack  is  successful : 

(a)  Designates  units  that  are  to — 

(1)  Continue  firing  on  the  retreating  enemy. 

(2)  Watch  for,  and  hinder,  any  re-forming  of  the 

enemy. 

(3)  Place  curtain  of  fire  in  front  of  captured  posi- 

tion. 

(b)  Designates  units  that  are  to  move  forward  as  soon 

as  rlie  captured  position  is  secured. 

(c)  Gives  those  units  the  following  instructions: 

(1)  When  they  shall  advance. 

(2)  By  v%-hat  route. 

(3)  Approximate  positions  they  must  take. 

(4)  Approximate  sectors  they  must  cover. 

(5)  Whetlier  or  not  they  sacrifice  their   guns  if 

necessary  to  hold  the  captured  ground. 

(6)  What  communications  to  establish. 

(d)  Arranges   for   ammunition  supply   for  guns   moving 

forward. 

2.  When  attack  is  unsuccessful — 

(a)   Designates  the  guns  that  are  to  cover  the  retirement 
of  the  firing  line  by — 

(1)  Covering  the  enemy's  fire  position. 

(2)  Phicing  a  curtain  of  fire  in  front  of  retreat- 

ing troops. 
(&)   Gives  explicit  orders  that  these  guns  will  not  retreat 
until  ordered. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  116 

(c)   Selects  successive  positions  in  rear,  fn  case  he  is 
forced  to  retire. 

DURING   THE  ATTACK. 

1.  Watches  closely  the  progress  of  events  by  maintaining  com- 
munication with — 

(a)  Tlie  commanding  officer. 

(b)  The  guns  in  action, 

(c)  Forward  observers, 
id)   The  guns  in  reserve, 

2.  In  the  absence  of  instructions  from  the  commanding  officer, 
makes  such  changes  as  he  considers  necessary  to  meet  the  chang- 
ing tactical  situation, 

3.  Supervises  ammunition  supply, 

IN    DEFENSE, 

331.  1.  Receives  orders  from  the  commanding  officer  cover- 
ing— 

(a)   Information  of  the  enemy. 
(&)   Information  of  friendly  troops. 

(c)  The  general  plan  of  the  commr.nder. 

(d)  The  tasks  assigned  the  machi:ie  gun, 

(c)   Arrangements  for  supplying  ammunition  to  combat 

trains, 
(/)   Arrangements  for  supplying  rations  and  forage. 

2,  The  major  then  thoroughly  recounolters,  with  the  assist- 
ance of  reconnaissance  officers  and  scouts,  the  sector  his  bat- 
talion is  to  cover. 

3,  This  reconnaissance  should  cover — 

(a)  Location  of  the  firing  line, 

(&)  The  terrain  in  front  and  rear, 

(c)  All  avenues  of  approach, 

(fZ)  All  dead  space. 

(c)  Favorable  positions  for  machine  guns. 

(/)  Communication  laterally  and  to  the  rear. 

4,  Arranges  for  establishing  communication— 

(a)   Within  his  command. 

(6)   With  the  firing  line. 

(c)  With  the  commanding  officer. 


116  MACHINE-GTJN  DRIIL  HEGTJLATIONS    1917. 

5.  Specifies  place  for  caits  aud  animals. 

6.  Assisted  by  the  captains,  plans  and  orders  constructed  the 
*  necessary — 

(a)   Cover  for  gun  crews. 
(&)   Obstacles. 

(c)  Commnnicating:  trenches. 

(d)  Splinter  and  bomb  proofs. 

(e)  Ammunitation  depots. 

7.  Arranges  for  mutual  supporting  fire — 

(a)  AVithin  his  sector. 

(b)  Wirh  adjacent  machine-gun  commanders. 

8.  Sees  that  observers  are  stationed  with  the  firing  line. 

ARRANGES   FOR   EMENTS    SI'BSEQUENT   TO   THE   ENEMY'S    ATTACK. 

1.  When  assault  by  the  enem.y  is  unf?uccessful — 

(«)   Directs  that  all  available  fire  power  be  brought  to 
bear  upon  the  retreating  enemy. 

2.  When  assault  by  the  enemy  is  successful — 

(a)   Designates;  the  guns  to  cover  the  retreat  by — 

(1)  Enfilading,  fire,  and  communicating  trenches. 

(2)  Placing  curtains  of  fire  across  the  position. 

(3)  Preventing  the  bringing  up  of  machine  guns 

and  supports. 
(?))   Gives  explicit  orders  that  guns  will  not  retire  unless 
ordered. 

DVEING  THE  enemy's  ATTACK. 

1.  Watches  closely  the  progress  of  events  by  maintaining  com- 
munication with — 

(a)  The  commanding  oflScer. 

(b)  The  guns  in  action. 

(c)  Forward  observers, 
(f?)   The  guns  in  reserve. 

2.  In  absence  of  instructions  from  the  commanding  officer, 
makes  such  changes  as  he  considei's  necessary  to  meet  the 
changing  tactical  situation. 

3.  Supervises  ammunition  supply. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  117 

Section   III. — Battalion   Staff. 

332.  Battalion  adjutant,  battalion  sergeant  major,  and  supply 
sergeant  accompany  the  major. 

For  the  duties  of  signalmen  and  agents,  see  paragraph  328. 
They  assist  the  major  as  directed,  by — 

1.  Reconnaissance. 

2.  Maintaining  contact  with  brigade  or  division  headquarters. 

3.  Maintaining  contact  with  supporting  guns. 

4.  Receiving  and  sending  visual  signals. 

5.  Carrying  messages. 

6.  Observing  the  course  of  events. 

7.  Keeping  copies  of  all  orders,  messages,  and  other  data 
necessaiy  for  his  war  diary. 

seegeant  major. 

333.  Under  the  direction  of  the  major — 

1.  Marks  the  route  to  he  followed  by  the  battalion. 

2.  Ascertains  from  the  adjutant  or  major — 

(a)  The  rendezvous  at  which  to  assemble  the  captains, 
and  instructs  a  signalman  to  watch  for  and  guide 
them  to  it. 

3.  Superintends  the  work  of  the  signal  corporal  and  signal 
private  in  establishing  communication  with  the  various  gun 
positions.  It  is  a  general  rule  that  the  buzzer  wire  should  be 
laid  from  reay-  to  front.  The  hand  reel  will  then  be  in  front, 
and  if  a  forward  movement  is  made  the  length  of  the  wire  can 
easily  be  extended. 

4.  In  general  charge  of  all  messages  received  or  sent  by  flag 
or  messenger. 

(a)  Keeps  a  chronological  record  of  all  important  mes- 
sages received  or  sent. 

(J))  Supervises  the  sending  of  messages  to  reconnoitering 
parties  and  observers  sent  to  the  front. 

SUPPLY  SEKGEANT. 

334.  Under  the  direction  of  the  major — 

1.  Is  responsible  for  the  battalion  headquarters  property. 

2.  Commands  the  battalion  headquarters,  ration  and  baggage 
wagon,  and  ration  cart. 


118  MACHINE-GTJN  DEILL  EEGTJLATIONS,  1917. 

STABLE  SERGEANT. 

335.  Under  the  direction  of  the  senior  train  lieutenant — 

1.  Acts  as  wagonmaster  for  the  train. 

2.  Takes  prompt  measures  to  avoid  delays  due  to  breakages, 
etc. 

3.  Is  responsible  to  the  train  lieutenant  for  the  care  of  the 
animals. 

THE    SIGNAL    CORPORAL. 

336.  1.  Under  general  supervision  of  the  battalion  sergeant 
major,  has  charge  of,  and  is  responsible  for.  all  signal  equipment 
of  the  battalion,  makes  such  tests  and  repairs  as  he  ma.v  be 
authorized  to  make,  and  at  the  first  opportunity  reports  to  the 
adjutant  all  trouble  which  he  can  not  remedy. 

2.  Commands  the  battalion  signalmen  on  the  march. 
.3.  Learns  from  the  leading  company  commander  when  com- 
munication is  to  be  estal)lished  and  at  once  reports  to  the  major. 

4.  Under  the  direction  of  the  sergeant  major,  establishes  com- 
munication. 

5.  Acts  as  signalman  at  the  battalion  station,  reporting  to  the 
adjutant  or  major  when  communication  with  the  various  units  is 
established  or  broken. 

G.  Learns  from  the  adjutant  or  major  what  artificial  cover  is 
required  for  the  station,  and,  assisted  by  signalmen  and  agents, 
constructs  it  at  the  first  opportunity. 

SIGNAL  PBR^ATE. 

337.  1.  Assists  the  signal  corporal  in  establishing  communi- 
tion. 

2.  Assists  in  constructing  artificial  cover  for  the  station. 

3.  Assists,  or  records,  for  the  signal  corporal. 

Section  IV. — The  Captain. 
IN  attack. 

338.  1.  AVhen  the  machine-gun  company  is  not  a  part  of  a 
machine-gun  battalion  the  duties  prescribed  for  tha  major  apply. 


I 


.     MACHINE-GTJW  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,  1917.  119 

When  the  company  is  part  of  the  machine-gun  battalion,  the 
position  of  the  captain  is  with  his  company,  and  is  such  that— 
(«)   He  can  best  control  his  company. 
{b)  He  can  keep  in  easy  communication  with  battalion 
headquarters. 

2.  Conducts  his  company  on  the  march  to  the  point  where 
carts  must  be  left  behind. 

3.  Receives  orders  from  the  major  covering  the  following: 

(a)  Information  of  the  enemy, 

( b )  Position  of  supporting  troops,  neighboring  troops,  and 

guns. 

(c)  Tlie  general  object  to  be  obtained. 

id)  The  •special  mission  for  his  company  and  the  sector 
to  be  covered. 

(e)  The  point  or  time  at  which  fire  is  to  be  opened. 

(/)  Orders  for  flank  protection  and  reconnaissance,  un- 
less covered  by  orders  from  higher  authority. 

(g)  The  major's  position  and  that  of  the  next  higher 
commander. 

4.  Selects  position  for  combat  trains. 

5.  Arranges  for  ammunition  supply  by — 

(a)  Notifying  his  platoon  commanders  to  keep  him  in- 

formed as  to  the  position  of  their  belt-tilling  sta- 
tions. 

(b)  Causing  first  sergeant  to  establish,  with  the  ammuni- 

tion carts,  communication  between  the  belt-filling 
stations  and  the  combat  train.     (PI.  YII.) 
(c)   Giving  instruction  to  the   train   lieutenant   to   keep 
ammunition  carts   replenished   with  ammunition. 

6.  Reconnoiters,  with  the  assistance  of  his  reconnoissance  offi- 
cer and  scouts,  the  sector  assigned  him  in  order  to  obtain  de- 
tailed information  as  to  the — 

(a)  Exact  location  and  disposition  of  the  enemy, 

(b)  Location  and  disposition  of  troops  he  is  supporting. 

(c)  Favorable  positions  for  machine  guns, 
(tZ)  The  best  routes  of  advance, 

7.  Selects  gun  positions  with  a  view  to  using  cross  and  flank- 
ing fire.     These  oositions  should  have — 

(a)  Clear  Afield  of  fire. 


120  MACHrNE-GUN  DRILL  HEGTJLATIONS,.   1917. 

(h)  Sufficient  height  above,  or  distance  from  the  flanli  of 
the  firing  line,  so  as  not  to  endanger  the  attacking 
troops. 

(c)  Cover  to  the  front  and  protection  from  the  llantLS. 

(d)  Communication  laterally  and  to  the  renr. 

8.  Determines  the  number  of  i2:uns  to  be  placed  in  the  sector 
and  the  number  to  be  kept  in  support. 

9.  Assigns  tasks  to  the  platoon  or  sections,  being  careful  that 
neighboring  guns  afford  mutual  supporting  fire  (not  necessarily 
adjacent  guns). 

10.  Gives  instructions  covering: 

(a)  Where  the  guns  are  to  be  held  under  cover. 

(h)  AVhen  the  positions  selected  are  to  be  occupied. 

(c)  When  fire  is  to  be  opened, 

id)  What  cover,  if  any.  is  to  be  constructed. 

(c)  The  communication  to  be  established.     (PI.  VIII.) 

(/)  The  position  of  the  captain  and  the  major. 

ARRANGES  FOR  EVE^'TS  SUBSEQUENT  TO  TUE  ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  attack  is  successful : 

(o)   Designates  guns  that  are  to — 

(1)   Continue  firing  on  the  retreating  enemy. 

(2)  Watch  for,  and  hinder,  any  re-forming  of  the 

enemy. 

(3)  Place  a  curtain  of  fire  in  front  of  captured 

position. 
(h)   Designates  guns  that  are  to  move  forward  as  soon 

as  the  captured  position  is  secured, 
(c)   Gives  these  units  the  following  instructions: 

(1)  When  they  shall  advance. 

(2)  By  wliat  route  they  shall  advance. 

(3)  Approximate  positions  they  must  take. 

(4)  Api:)roximate  sectors  they  must  cover. 

(5)  Whether  or  not  the\-  sacrifice  their  guns  if 

necessary  to  hold  the  captured  ground. 

(6)  What  comnnini cations  to  establish. 

(7)  What    arrangements    to    make   for    supplying 

ammunition  to  guns  moving  forward. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  121 

2.  When  the  attack  is  unsuccessful : 

(a)  Desiiiuates  the  guns  that  are  to  cover  the  retirement 
of  the  firing  by — 

(1)  Covering  the  enemy's  fire  position. 

(2)  Placing  curtain  of  fire  in  front  of  retreating 

troops. 
(h)   Gives  explicit  orders  that  these  guns  will  not  retreat 

until  ordered, 
(c)   Selects  successive  positions  in  rear  for  use  in  case 

the  line  continues  to  retire. 

DUEING  THE  ATTACK. 

1.  Observes  fire  effect. 

2.  In  the  absence  of  instructions  from  the  major  makes  such 
changes  as  he  considers  necessary  to  meet  the  changing  tactical 
situation. 

3.  Is  responsible  for  the  supply  of  ammunition.     (PI.  VII.) 

4.  Maintains  communication  with  (see  PI.  VIII)  — 

(a)   The  firing  line. 
(&)   The  major, 
(c)   The  guns. 

IN   DEFENSE. 

339.  Deliberate  occupation  of  position. 

1.  Receives  orders  from  major.    See  paragraph  330. 

2.  Thoroughly  reconnoiters  the  terrain  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  position. 

3.  Selects  gun  positions  v.iiich  fulfill  as  nearly  as  possible 
the  following  requirements : 

(a)  Open  field  of  fire  in  the  direction  in  which  the  fire  is 
to  be  used  (to  the  front,  or  flank,  or  parallel  to 
the  firing  line). 

(&)   Concealment  from  the  front,  flank,  and  overhead. 

(c)  Guns  can  be  escheloned. 

(d)  Guns  at  least  30  yards  apart. 

(e)  Fire  not  masked  by  our  troops,  if  position  is  in  rear 

of  firing  line. 


122  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

(/)   Fire  from  them  can  he  hrought  to  bear  on — 

(1)  All  avenues  of  approach  by  the  enemy. 

(2)  Places  wlK^re  enemy   is  apt  to  assemble  for 

the  attack, 

(3)  Such  points  as  will  cover  the  v\ith(lrav\'al  of 

our  troops  if  defeated. 

(4)  All  dead  spaces  in  front  of  the  firin.t;  line. 

4.  Selects  alternate  ?un  positions. 

5.  Notifies  the  firing  line  if  overhead  fire  is  to  be  used. 

6.  Assigns  sectors  and  fronts  to  be  covered. 

7.  Sends  observer,  or  observers,  forward  with  the  firing  lino. 

8.  Directs  the  preparation  of  range  cards. 

9.  Specifies  the  kind  of  cover  to  be  constructed. 

10.  Arranges  for  conmnmication  with  (see  PI.  VIII)  — 

(ff)   The  gun  positions. 

(&)   The  firing  line. 

(c)   The  machine-gun  commander. 

11.  Arranges  for  ammunition  supply  by  establishing  supply 
service  between  the  combat  train  and  the  gun  positions  (.PI. 
VII). 

DUKING   THE   ENEMY's    ATTACK. 

1.  Determines  when  and  by  what  gims  fire  is  to  be  opened. 

2.  :Makes  necessary  changes  to  meet  the  tactical  situation, 
unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  major. 

'A.  Puts   his  reserve  guns  into   action  if  the  situation  war- 
rants it. 
4.  Keeps  in  constant  communication  with — 
(«)   The  firing  line. 

(b)  The  major. 

(c)  His  guns.  \ 
.5.  Insures  a  continuous  supply  of  ammunition. 

G.  Arranges  for  the  necessary  care  of  the  wounded. 
7.  Provides  for  replacing  casualties. 

E\'ENTS  SmJSEQUENT  TO  THE  ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  unsuccessful : 

(a)  Directs  all  available  fire  power  upon  the  retreating 
enemy. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  123 

2.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  successful. 

{a)  Directs  his  guns  to  cover  the  retreat  of  the  firing 
line  by — 

(1)  Infilading  communicating  and  fire  trenches. 

(2)  Placing  curtains  of  fire  across  the  position. 

(3)  Preventing  the  bringing  up  of  machine  guns 

and  supports. 
Note. — Arrangements  must  be  made  previous  to  the  attack 
and  each  gun  given  explicit  instructions  as  to  its  duty.  The 
captain  will  rarely  be  able  to  command  his  guns  in  this  situa- 
tion, but  will  rely  upon  the  platoons,  sections,  and  gun  squads 
carrying  out  the  preconceived  plan  of  action. 

Sectiox  V. — First  Lieutenant  and  Reconnaissance  Officer. 

340.  His  duties,  when  the  captain  is  absent  on  reconnaissance, 
are  to — 

{a)   Command  the  company. 

(&)   Conduct  the  company  to  the  position  selected. 

(c)   Make  all  necessary  preparation  previous  to  taking  up 

the  position. 
id)   Verify  the  systems  of  communication  and  supply. 
(e)    Supervise  the  construction  of  cover,  obstacles,  etc. 

341.  As  reconnaissance  officer,  he  is  charged  with — 

{a)  Securing  by  personal  reconnaissance  and  the  assist- 
ance of  scouts  such  information  of  the  enemy,  our 
own  troops,  or  the  terrain  as  is  desirable  or 
ordered. 

{!))   Supervising  the  work  of  scouts,  observers,  etc. 

(c)  Securing  firing  data,  sketches,  and  other  information 
required  for  the  direction  and  conduct  of  fire. 

(cZ)   Observing   the  field   of   action,   watching  for   move- 
ments of  the  enemy  and  our  troops  fiat  may  affect 
the  situation,  and  keeping  his  commanding  officer 
informed  as  to  changes  in  the  situation. 
Note. — For    detailed    duties    of    reconnaissance    officers    and 
scouts,  see  paragraphs  327-329. 


124  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

Sectiox  VI. — Enlisted  Personnel. 

FIRST    SERGEANT. 

342.  Under  direction  of  the  captain — 
in)   Selects  position  for  the  carts. 

(h)   Conducts  carts  to  position  .selected. 

(c)  Establishes  comnnmication  with  belt-tilling  stations 

established  in  rear  of  gun  positions. 

(d)  Insures   continuous   supply   of   ammunition    to   belt- 

lilling  .stations  from  combat  train.     (PI.  YII.) 

(e)  Places  animals  and  carts  under  cover. 

(/)   Supervises  construction  of  necessary  cover  for  carts 
and  drivers. 

THE   SERGEANT. 

(Company  range  taker.) 

343.  1.  Assists  reconnaissance  officer  in  preparing — 
(a)   Reports. 

ib)   Sketches. 
(r)   liange  cards. 
(d)   Firing  data. 

2.  Conunands  company  agents  and  scouts. 

3.  Is  responsible  for  the  care  sind  adjustment  of  the  range 
finder. 

4.  Obtains   rimges   required    l)y   the  captain   and    reconnais- 
sance oflicer. 

THE    CORPORAL. 

(Company  clerk.) 

344.  Under  the  direction  of  the  captain,  attends  to  the  details 
of  company  administration. 

THE  SIGNAL  CORPORAL. 

345.  Under  the  captain's  direction — 
(a)   Is  responsible  for  all  signal  property. 
(&)  Makes  such  repairs  as  he  may  be  authorized  to  make. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATION?,   1917.  125 

(c)   Reports  to  the  captain  all  trouble  that  he  can  not 

remedy. 
(cl)   Comir.ands  the  company  signalmen. 
(c)   Carries  the  two  buzzers. 
(/)   Establishes  buzzer  stations. 
iff)   Assisted  by  the  signal  private — 

(1)  Lays  and  takes  up  buzzer  lines. 

(2)  Seuds  and  receives  messages. 

(3)  Keeps  record  of  important  messages  sent  and 

received. 

SIGNAL  PEIVATE. 

346.  Detailed  from  the  company  signalmen  to  assist  the  signal 
corporal — 

(a)  In  caring  for  the  signal  property. 

(b)  By  carrying  the  hand  reel. 

(c)  By  laying  buzzer  wire. 

(d)  In  establishing  buzzer  station. 

(e)  In  receiving  and  sending  messages. 

(/)   In  recording  messages  sent  and  received. 

COMPANY    BUGLEES. 

347.  They  accompany  the  captain  and — 

(a)   Give  commands  ordered  by  the  captain. 
(&)   One  acts  as  horse  holder  for  the  captain, 
(c)  Act  as  messengers  when  directed. 

Section  ^'II. — The  Platoon  Leadee. 

in  attack. 

348.  1.  The  platoon  leader  takes  a  position  from  which  he  can 
control  his  platoon  and  watch  the  captain  for  signals. 

2.  Advancing  to  the  battle  field,  marches  at  the  head  of  his 
platoons. 

3.  Receives  orders  from  the  company  commanders  covering  the 
points  enumerated  in  paragraphs  338  and  339. 

33325"— IS o 


126  MACHINE-GUN  DKILL  EEGULATIONS    1917. 

4.  If  time  is  available,  turns  the  platoon  over  to  the  senior 
leader,  and.  with  the  platoon  range  taker,  advances  to  the  posi- 
tion selected  for  his  guns/ 

5.  Selects  the  exact  positions  for  his  guns  and  alternate  posi- 
tions. 

6.  Assisted  by  range  taker,  obtains  ranges  and  prepares  range 
cards. 

7.  Makes  any  necessary  reconnaissance. 

8.  Inionus  section  leaders  of  the — 

(a)  Situation. 

{b)  Task  assigned  the  platoons. 

(c)  Tasks  assigned  the  sections. 

(d)  The  positions  to  be  taken. 

(e)  The  cover  to  be  constructed. 

(/)   Arrangements  for  signal  conmuinication.     (PI.  VIII.) 
(p)   Arrangements  for  ammunition  supply.     (PI.  VII.) 

9.  At  the  proper  time  conducts  the  platoon  to  positions. 

10.  Supervises  th.e  construction  of  cover. 
13.  Verifies  targets  and  sectors  assigned. 

12.  Si)ecifies  the  kind  of  fire  to  be  used. 

13.  Gives  command  for  opening  fire. 

DURING  THE  ATTACK. 

1.  Observes  fire  effect. 

2.  Make'--  changes  in  ranges  and  kinds  of  fire  where  necessary. 

3.  Keeps  the  company  conunander  informed  as  to  the  progress 
of  th.e  action  in  his  front. 

4.  Insures  annnunition  supply. 

KVKXTS    Sl-nSEQUENT    TO    THE    ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  attack  is  5-.uccessful.  he  carries  out  the  plan  given 
him  by  the  company  commander  (338). 

2.  When  the  jittack  is  unsuccessful,  he  carries  out  the  plan 
(,uti:red  by  the  company  commander   (338). 

^  He  may  require  the  section  leaders  to  accompany  him. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  127 

IN    DEFENSE. 

(Deliberate  occupation  of  position.) 

349.  1.  Receives  orders  from  company  connnander. 

2.  Assists  tlie  company  commander — 

(a)   Reconnoiter  tiie  position. 
(  h )   Select  gun  positions. 

3.  Under  the  direction  of  the  company  commander — . 

(a)    Supervises  construction  of — 

(1)  Emplacements. 

(2)  Obstacles. 

(3)  Communicating  trenches. 

(4)  Caves  for  ammunition  :-ear  emplacements. 
(h)   Prepares — 

(1)  Range  cards. 

(2)  Data  for  night  firing. 

(3)  Data  for  overhead  fire. 

(4)  Data  for  indirect  fire. 

(c)  Sends  observer  forward. 

(d)  Arranges   for   communication   between   platoon    and 

observer  and  platoon  and  captain.     (PI.  VIII.) 
(c)    Specifies  the  kind  and  rate  of  fire. 
(/)   Gives  commands  for  opening  fire. 

DL~RING   THE   ATTACK. 

1.  Observes  fire  effect. 

2.  Notifies  the  company  commander  immediately  of  any  new 
targets  in  his  front. 

3.  Shifts  the  fire  icifliin   his  sector  in  accordance  with  the 
changing  situation. 

4.  Insures  ammunition  sup])ly.     (PI.  VII.) 

5.  Replaces  casualties. 

G.  Provides  for  the  care  of  the  wounded. 

E\'ENTS    SUBSEQUENT    TO    THE    ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  unsuccessful,  carries  out  the 
plan  of  action  previously  arranged   (339). 


128  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

2.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  successful,  carries  out  the  plan 
arranged  to  cover  that  contingency  (339). 

Section  VIII. — The  Section  Leader. 

IN    ATTACK. 

350.    ].  T.-ikes  a  position  from  which  he  can — 

(o)   Control  the  squads  constituting  his  section. 

(b)  (^lisorve  the  target  and  tire  effect. 

(c)  Observe  the  platoon  leader  for  signals. 

2.  Receives  orders  from  platoon  leader. 

3.  Conducts    his    section    to    the    position    indicated    by    the 
platoon  leader. 

4.  Establishes  belt-tilling  stjition  or  stations  with  Xos.  5  and 
6  of  the  squads. 

5.  Carries  out  the  platoon  leader's  orders  by  providing  for — 

(a)  Conceal naent. 

(b)  Cover. 

(r)   Connnuiucation. 

6.  Obtains  data  for  kind  of  fire  used. 

7.  Selects    aiming    marks    when    targets    are    indistinct    or 
masked. 

8.  Announces  sight  settings  (range  and  windage)  and  assigns 
sectors  to  the  gun  squads. 

9.  Specifies  the  kind  of  fire  (1.")). 

10.  Checks  laying  of  tlie  guns  when  overliead  fire  is  used. 

11.  When  Ids  squad  leader  signals  "  Ready,"  he  signals  the 
platoon  leader  "  Ready." 

12.  When  the  platoon  leader  signals  "  Commence  firing,"  re- 
peats the  signal  to  the  corporals. 

nriUNG    THE    ATTACK. 

1.  Observes  fire  effect. 

2.  When    the   section    is    not    firing,    insures    that    the   front 
assigned  is  kept  under  constant  observation. 

3.  Changes  sight  settings  when  necessary. 

4.  Changes  method  of  firing  when  necessary  or  ordered. 

5.  Assures  himself  that   the   signalman   constantly   observes 
the  platoon  leader  for  signals. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  PwEGTJLATIONS.    1917.  129 

6.  Permits  no  members  of  liis  section,  other  than  Nos.  3  and 
4,  to  ffo  to  the  rear  for  ammunition. 

7.  When    casualties   occur    in    Iiis    section,    ijignals    the   belt- 
filling:  stations  for  extra  men. 

8.  Carries  out  such  advances  as  are  necessary. 

9.  When  he  reaches  a  new  position,  immediately  upon  open- 
ing fire,  estai)l:shes  contact  with  units  to  his  right  and  left. 

10.  If  on  a  flank,  insures  that  he  will  receive  timely  informa- 
tion of  any  changes  in  that  direction. 

EVENTS  SL'BSEQUEN'T  TO  THE  ATTACK. 

1.  When   the   attack   is   successful,   carries   out   the   plan   of 
action  previously  arranged. 

2.  When  the  attack  is  unsuccessful,  carries  out  plan  provided 
for  that  contingency. 

IX    DEFENSE. 

(Deliberate  occupation  of  position.) 

351.  1.  Receives  orders  from  the  platoon  l(?ader. 

2.  Directs  the  construction  of: 

(a)  Emplacements. 

(b)  Obstacles. 

(c)  Communicating  trenches. 

(d)  Caves  for  ammunition  near  emplacements. 

3.  Assists  the  platoon  leader  in  preparing: 

(a)   Range  cards. 
(h)   Data  for  night  firing, 
(c)   Data  for  overhead  tire. 
(fZ)   Data  for  indirect  fire. 

4.  Arranges  for  communication  with  platoon  leader. 

5.  If  necessary,  sends  observer  forward. 

6.  Orders  the  rate  of  fire. 

7.  When  the  squads  signal  "Ready,"  repeats  the  signal  .j  the 
platoon  leader. 

8.  Gives  command  for  opening  fire. 


130  MACKINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

DURING   THE  ATTACK. 

1.  Observes  fire  effect. 

2.  Imuiediatoly.  upon  the  appearance  of  a  new  target  in  his 
sector,  notifies  the  phitoon  leader 

.*i.  Shifts  the  fire  within  his  sector  in  accordance  with  the 
changing  situation. 

4.  "WjiK'hes  carefully  the  ammunition  supply, 
f).  Replaces  casualties. 

0.  Provides  for  the  care  of  the  wounded. 

EVENTS    SrnSEQUEXT    TO    THE    ATTACK. 

1.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  unsuccessful,  carries  out  the 
plan  previously  arranged. 

2.  When  the  enemy's  attack  is  successful,  carries  out  the  plan 
arranged  for  that  contingency. 

Section    IX — The   Coupoual. 

IN    ATTACK. 

o52.  l.  The  corjioral  of  the  gun  squad  is  in  direct  charge  of 
the  s(|nad  in  enforcing  tire  discipline,  and  assists  in  fire  control. 

2.  When  the  gun  is  in  action,  the  corporal  takes  a  position 
from  which  he  can  observe  the  fire  of  the  gun  and  communicate 
with  his  section  leader. 

o.  Receives  ordeis  from  the  platoon  or  section  leader. 

4.  Constructs  such  cover  as  time  will  permit. 

5.  Sees  that  communication  is  established  with  the  section 
leader. 

6.  Issues  fire  order. 

(a)  Announces  range  and  deflection. 

(b)  Takes  the  target  assigned,  or  that  portion  of  the  sec- 

tion's target  which  corresponds  to  the  position  of 
the  squad  in  the  section. 

(c)  Designates  the  target,  or  aiming  mark,  to  his  gun- 

ners. 

(d)  Verifies  sight  setting. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  131 

(e)  Announces  kind  of  fire. 

(/)  AVhen  his  squad  is  ready,  signals  Ready.  At  the 
platoon  or  section  leader's  order,  or  signal,  to  com- 
mence firing  he  gives  the  proper  command  for  his 
gunners  to  open  fire. 

(g)   If  a  time  has  b^eu  set  for  opening  fire,  he  opens  fire 
at  the  specified  time  without  command. 
7.  Carefully  instructs  his  squad  covering — 

(a)   The  passing  of  orders  and  signals. 

(h)   The  plan  of  action  to  be  followed  during  the  attack. 

(c)  The  plans  of  action  covering  the  period  subsequent 
to  the  attack. 

DUKING    THE    ATTACK. 

1.  Insures  that  the  gunner  fires  at  the  designated  target. 

2.  Prevents  slighting  of  indistinct  or  invisible  portions  of  the 
target. 

3.  Prevents  changing  fire  to  unauthorized  targets. 

4.  Maintains  constant  observation  to  the  front  for  appearance 
of  the  enemy  and  to  observe  effect  of  fire. 

5.  Enforces  prompt  obedience  to  orders  to  suspend  or  cease 
firing. 

6.  Makes  men  use  the  ground  to  full  extent  for  concealment. 

7.  Must  know  thoroughly  the  drill  regulation  signals  and  have 
a  practical  knowledge  of  handling  machine-gun  fire. 

8.  Checks  every  breach  of  fire  discipline,  abates  excitement, 
and  prevents  any  man  from  leaving  the  squad. 

9.  When  necessary,  takes  command  of  the  section,  notifying 
the  gunner  to  take  command  of  the  squad. 

IN    DEFENSE. 

353.  1.  Receives  orders  from  the  section  leader. 

2.  Requires  his  squad  to  construct — 
[  (a)   Emplacements. 

'  (&)   Obstacles. 

(c)  Communicating  trenches. 

(d)  Caves  for  ammunition  near  emplacements. 


132  MACHINE-GITN  DRILL  EEC-TJLATIONS,   1817. 

3.  Inspects — 

(«)   His  machine  gun  and  tripod. 

(b)  Tlie  tool  box. 

(c)  The  belt-til lin'4  nuichine. 

(d)  All  bolts. 
(c)   Water  box. 

4.  Establislips  belt-filling  station  nt»ar  c;un  emplacement. 

5.  Carefully  instructs  his  squad  as  to — 

in)   The  squad  sector  or  .^cctors. 

(b)  The  kinds  of  fire  to  be  used. 

(c)  The  time  for  opening:  fire. 

{(1)   The  passing:  of  orders  and  sijrnals. 
(c)   The  rules  to  be  observed  by  the  sentinel  or  sentinels 
at  the  ;run. 

6.  Establishes  aiming  marks  for  indirect  fire  and  night  firing. 

7.  Outlines  the  plans  of  action  covering  the  period  subsequent 
to  the  assault. 

5.  During  the  enemy's  attack  carries  nut  the  duties  described 
for  him  "  During  the  attack." 

SEc■TI0^'  X. — The  Private. 

IX    ATTACK    AXn    IX    DEFEXSE. 

354.  The  private  must  be  trained — 

1.  To  re<'()g]n'ze  targets  from  description. 

2.  To  designate  targebs. 

3.  To  count  distant  groups  of  objects  or  beings. 

4.  To  use  rear  sight  in  designating  targets. 

o.  To  use  horizontal  clock  system,  singly  or  in  combination 
with  vertical  clock  or  rectangular  systems,  in  designating  tar- 
gets. 

6.  To  set  sights  quickly  and  accurately  as  ordered. 

7.  To  aim  carefully  and  deliberately  from  habit,  and  to  main- 
tain the  correct  hold. 

5.  To  fire  at  the  rate  ordered. 

9.  To  fire  at  the  designated  target. 

10.  To  continue  firing  on  the  designated  target  and  to  change 
therefrom  only  when  ordered. 

11.  Not  to  slight  invisible  or  indistinct  parts  of  the  target. 


MACHmE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS:    1917.  133 

12.  To  inainliiiii  constant  ohsorvation  to  the  front. 

13.  To  utilize  I'oids  of  j^i-ound  for  concealment. 

14.  To  select  firinji:  positioiLS. 

15.  To  understand  effect  of  various  backgrounds  with  respect 
to  vi^-ibility  of  targets  presented  by  the  enemy  or  by  himself. 

10.  To  fire  the  gun  from  all  poyitions;  behind  hillocks,  trees, 
heaps  of  earth,  rocks,  depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways, 
windows,  etc. 

17.  To  obey  promptly  orders  from  Iiis  corporal  to  suspend  or 
cease  firinr/. 

IS.  To  watch  closely  for  tlie  expected  target  after  having 
suspended  firing. 

19.  To  obey  promptly  all  orders  from  hi«  squad  leader. 

20.  To  transmit  firing  data  rapidly  and  accurately. 

21.  To  have  confidence  in  his  own  ability  to  hit. 

22.  To  maintain  silence  except  when  transmitting  or  receiving 
firing  data. 

23.  To  retain  presence  of  mind. 

24.  Not  to  waste  ammunition. 

25.  Never  to  care  for  dead  or  wounded  during  action. 

2G.  That  the  first  rule  of  every  machine  gunner  should  be  to 
remain  at  his  post  and  never  quit  his  gun. 

27.  To  know  how  to  disable  liis  gun  quickly  and  effectively 
when  necessary. 

28.  Never  to  fire  until  he  understands  what  the  taryet  is,  at 
ichat  imrt  he  is  to  fire,  and  with  what  sight  setting. 

Section  XI. — The  Gu^'xkks. 

NO.    1. 

355.  1.  Carries  the  gun. 

2.  Personally  cleans  and  looks  after  the  gun,  insures  that  the 
I  mechanism  is  working  smoothly  and  that  water  jacket  is  full. 
I      3.  Observes  his  own  fire  when  possible. 

4.  Is  responsible  for  the  operation  of  the  gun  and  takes  such 
steps  as  are  necessary  to  insure  proper  functioning  of  the  mech- 
anism at  all  times. 

5.  Sets  sight  as  directed  by  the  corporal. 

6.  Directs  kind  of  fire  ordered. 


134  MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917. 

7.  Corrects  stoppages. 

8.  Sees  that  the  tool  and  spare  part  boxes  are  couveuiently 
within  his  reach. 

NO.    2. 

356.  1.  Carries  tripod. 

2.  Loads  the  gun. 

3.  Sees  that  the  belts  being  fed  into  the  gun  are  clean  and 
that  the  cartridges  are  properly  loaded  in  belt. 

4.  Watches  roller  handle  in  order  to  diagnose  stoppages. 

5.  In  case  of  a  stoppage,  assists  No.  1  in  reducing  it. 

6.  Sees  that  ammunition  is  supplied  in  the  necessary  quanti- 
ties by  Nos.  3  and  4. 

NO.    3. 

357.  1.  Carries  two  ammunition  boxes. 
2.  Supplies  ammunition  to  No.  2. 


358.   1.  Carries  tool  box,  condensing  device,  and  one  ammuni- 
tion box. 

2.  Returns  emptied  belts  to  belt-filling  station. 

3.  Assists  No.  3  in  supplying  No.  2  with  ammunition. 


359.  1.  Establish  belt-fdling  station. 
2.  Supply  filled  belts  to  Nos.  3  and  4, 

NO.    7. 

360.  1.  Is  responsible  for  the  gun  mule,  cart,  and  equipment. 

NO.  s. 

361.  1.  Is  responsible  for  the  care  of  the  ammunition  mule, 
cart,  and  ammunition. 

2.  Supplies  ammunition  to  the  belt-filling  station. 

3.  Refills  his  cart  from  the  combat  train. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS-   1917.  135 

Section  XII. — The  Person xei.  with  the  Trains. 

SECOND    lieutenant    IN    CIIAltGE    OF    TRAINS. 

(Active  operation.) 

36S.  1.  Under  the  direction  of  the  captMin  lie  is  responsible 
for  the  supply  of — 

( a )   Ammunition. 

(&)   Rations  and  forage. 

(c)   Equipment. 

2.  Commands  the  combat  train. 

3.  During  action  maintains  ammunition  supply  betv/oen  the 
field  trains  and  ammunition  carts. 

4.  Sees  that  the  personnel  and  materiel  of  the  combat  train 
are  cared  for, 

5.  Reports  to  the' captain  any  break  in  the  line  of  supply. 

MESS  sergea>;t. 

383.  Under  the  direction  of  the  train  lieutenant  he  commauds 
th(^  kitchen  wagon  while  in  the  held  and  is  responsible  for  the 
preparation  and  delivery  of  meals  to  the  men  while  on  the 
march  and  during  engagements. 

SUPPLY    SERGEANT. 

384.  Under  the  direction  of  the  train  lieutenant — 

1.  Commands  the  ration  and  water  carts. 

2.  Is  responsible  for  the  care  of  animals. 

3.  On  the  march  and  during  engagements,  maintains  supply 
of  rations  and  v/ater. 

BTARLE    SERGEANT. 

365.  Under  the  direction  of  the  train  lieutenant — . 

1.  Conmiands  the  combat  train. 

2.  Is  responsible  for  the  care  and  preservation  of  ammunition 
in  the  combat  wagon, 

IN  ATTACK  AND  IN  DEFENSE. 

366.  1.  Establishes  communication  with  ammunition  carts. 

2.  Maintains  a  service  of  supply  between  the  ammunition 
trains  and  the  ammunition  carts. 


PAET  IV. 

CARE   AND  EANDLIIvTG   OF  AMMAIS. 


Section  I. — General  Principles. 

367.  It  is  essential  that  a  iiuichino-gim  ofRccr  have  a  thorou?:li 
and  practical  knowledge  of  ho^Y  to  care  for,  condition,  and  tralQ 
the  animals  under  his  charcre.  Deficiency  in  this  knowledge 
will  result  in  material  and  avoidable  wastage  of  animals  in 
time  of  war.  The  animal  requires  intelligent  care  in  order  that 
his  health  and  strength  may  be  preserved ;  he  must  be  in  hard 
and  physically  tit  condition,  else  the  amount  of  useful  work  he  is 
able  to'perform  will  be  greatly  reduced  and  his  power  of  resist- 
ance to  injury  and  disease  lowered ;  and  he  requires  careful 
training  in  ordei*  that  he  may  work  intelligently  and  obediently 
and  with  the  minimum  expenditure  of  muscular  and  nervous 
energy.  Oflicers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly  acquainted 
with  the  physiology-  of  the  animals  under  their  charge  and  with 
the  effects  of  different  m.ethods  of  treatment,  changes  of  diet, 
etc..  upon  the  systems  and  power  of  endurance  of  these  ani- 
mals. In  addition,  they  should  have  a  familiar  knowledge  of 
the  symptoms  and  treatment  of  the  diseases  that  are  common  to 
horses  and  mules,  what  to  do  in  emergencies,  and  a  good  knowl- 
edge of  the  effects  of  medicines  issued.  They  should  also  pos- 
sess a  practical  understanding  of  the  principles  of  horseshoe- 
ing. The  ofhcer  in  charge  of  horses  and  mules  must  carefully 
instruct  his  men  in  the  treatment,  stabling,  watering,  feedinL-. 
grooming,  and  exercising  of  the  horses,  and  by  continuous  super- 
vision and  in.«?truction  insure  himself  that  his  instructions  are 
thoroughly  understood  and  fully  caiTied  out. 
13G 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  137 

Section  II. — Genebal  Rules  foe  the  Care  of  Animals. 

368.  All  men  who  are  required  to  work  with  horses  <and  mules 

must  thoroughly  understand  the  following  rules  for  their  care: 

Bt.^fore  entering  an  aniinars  stall  tind  in  coming  up  behind 

him.   speak   to  him  gently   and   approach  quietly   and  without 

sudden  or  abrupt  movement. 

An  animal  must  never  be  struck  or  threatened  about  the  head. 
Such  treatment  quickly  makes  him  head  shy  and  renders  his 
proper  control  difficult  and  exasperating. 

Never  kick,  strike,  or  otherwise  abuse  an  animal.  On  rare 
occasions  punishment  may  be  necessary,  but  it  must  be  admin- 
istered immediately  after  the  offense  has  been  committed,  and 
tlien  only  in  a  proper  manner  with  whip  or  spur  and  never  in 
the  heat  of  anger. 

Before   taking   an   animal    out,   carefully   examine  him   and 
make  sure  that  he  is  tit  for  work.    In  particular — 
Has  he  eaten  his  food,  especially  his  grain? 
Is  his  breathing  normal? 
Are  his  droppings  normal? 

Are  there  any  sores,  lumps,  or  injuries  on  his  back  or 
shoulders  that  might  be  irritated  by  harness  or  sad- 
dlery? 
Look  to  his  feet: 

1.  Are  they  clean?    See  that  there  are  no  stones  or  nails 

in  them. 

2.  Are  the  shoes  tight?     A  loose  shoe  greatly  increases 

the  concussion  on  the  foot.  Does  he  act  lame  when 
taken  from  the  stable? 

G4ve  him  an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving  his  picket 
line  or  stable  and  before  putting  the  bit  in  his  mouth. 

In  cold  vveather  warm  the  bit  by  blowing  and  rubbing  it 
before  putting  it  in  the  animal's  mouth. 

After  taking  the  animal  out,  always  vralk  him  the  first  mile 
to  start  the  circulation  in  his  legs.  Habitual  disregard  of  this 
rule  leads  to  foot  and  leg  trouble  that  will  render  him  unserv- 
iceable before  his  time. 

Always  walk  the  last  mile  or  check  up  sufRciently  to  bring 
your  animal  in  cool  and  breathing  naturally. 


138  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917. 

TO   COOL  A    HEATED   ANIMAL. 

369.  To  be  certain  of  no  ill  effects,  an  animal  brought  to  the 
stable  in  a  heated  coudifioii  must  be  cooled  out  and  dried  before 
he  is  left  tied  up  in  his  stall.  To  cool  the  animal,  walk  him 
about  slowly  under  a  blanket  if  the  air  is  chilly.  Occasionally 
interrupt  the  walking  by  giving  him  a  good  brisk  rub  down  and 
two  or  three  swallows  of  water.  Walking  is  especially  valuable, 
because  this  gentle  exercise  keeps  the  nuLscles  uKning  slowly  and 
so  assists  in  working  any  excess  of  blood  out  of  them  and  out  of 
his  vital  organs.  The  brisk  rub'oing  dries  him  and  assists  in 
bringing  the  blood  back  to  the  skin,  and  so  aids  in  restoring 
the  circulation  to  the  normal.  If  tlie  surface  of  the  body  be- 
comes chilled,  or  if  the  cooling  out  is  too  sudden,  the  congestion 
existing  in  the  lungs  or  in  the  feet  may  not  be  relieved,  and 
pneumonia,  lamiuitis.  or  other  troubles  will  then  result.  A  sud- 
den stoppage  of  hard  work  is  always  bad  for  the  feet  and  is 
very  liable  to  result  in  laminitis.  The  water  given  in  small 
quantities  slowly  cools  the  horse  internally  and  so  aids  in  send- 
ing the  blood  back  to  the  surface  and  restoring  the  normal  cir- 
culation and  temperature.  The  cooling-oiit  process  must  aUcatjs 
he  a  [irudual  one.  To  throw  water  on  any  part  of  a  heated  horse 
is  particularly  dangerous. 

It  is  very  refreshing  to  the  animal  to  have  his  eyes,  nostrils, 
hock,  and  inside  of  his  hind  quarters  sponged  with  cool  water. 

When  he  comes  in  wet  with  rain  lie  should  be  scraped,  then 
blanketed,  and  his  head.  neck,  loins,  and  legs  rubbed.  If  the 
weather  is  cold,  an  extra  blanket  should  be  put  on  for  20  min- 
utes.    The  wet  blanket  should  bo  changed  when  he  dries. 

Never  wash  the  legs.  This  practice  is  one  of  the  surest  means 
of  causing  scratches.  The  legs  should  be  rubbed  dry  and  band- 
aged loosely  with  thick  bandages.  Scraps  of  gunny  sacks  are 
satisfactory  for  this  purpose.  It  is  far  more  important  to  have 
the  legy  warm  and  dry  than  clean.  The  best  method  of  treating 
nuuldy  legs  in  order  to  avoid  scratches  is  to  bandage  them ;  this 
liceps  ihem  warm  until  they  are  dry.  and  then  lirush  them  clean. 

Xev'jr  leave  the  animal  for  the  night  until  he  is  clean,  espe- 
cially around  his  legs,  pasturns,  and  feet. 


i 


MACHINE-QITN  DRILL  REGUL.\TION\.   1917.  139 

Section  III. — The  Stable  Peiisonnel. 

370.  The  stable  personnel  includes  the  stable  sergeant,  the 
liorseshoer,  the  farrier,  the  saddler,  the  drivers  of  field  and 
combat  vehicles,  and  the  stable  detail. 

371.  The  lieutenant  in  command  of  the  train  is  responsible  to 
the  captain  for  all  duties  in  connection  with  the  care  of  the 
horses  and  mules,  the  stables  and  stable  mana.wment.  He  is 
assisted  by  the  stable  sergeant,  v\iio  has  Immediate  charge  of 
the  stable  personnel,  of  tlie  jx^lico  and  sanitar.v  condition  of  the 
stable,  corral  and  picket  line,  and  is  the  custodian  of  the  forage 
and  the  stable  property.  He  will  keep  records  of  forage,  of  the 
property  in  his  charge,  and  of  the  animals. 

^\'henever  the  stable  sergeant  is  absent,  the  next  ranking 
member  of  the  stable  personnel  will  assume  his  duties. 

Sufficient  men  are  detailed  as  stable  police  to  perform  the 
general  police  and  to  remove  all  manure  as  it  is  dropped,  either 
in  stables,  on  the  prcket  line,  or  in  the  paddocks,  during  the 
day.  The  stable  police  also  assist  in  the  feeding,  watering,  and 
bedding  of  the  horses. 

Section  IY. — Staiile  Rules. 

372.  A  bulletin  board  will  be  kept  at  the  stable  showing  the 
total  number  of  animals  on  hand,  the  number  of  sick,  and  the 
number  for  duty. 

A  record  will  be  kept  of  the  departure  and  return  of  all  ani- 
mals, except  those  participating  in  habitual  formations  or 
duties,  and  the  stable  sergeant  will  satisfy  himself  that  persons 
taking  out  animals  have  proper  authority  to  do  so. 

Individual  men  returning  from  mounted  duty  or  pass  will  re- 
port to  the  stable  sergeant,  who  will  see  that  the  animal  Is 
properly  cared  for. 

In  the  morning  stalls  are  cleaned  and  the  stables  policed  ua- 
der  the  direction  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

The  beddin.g  is  taken  up,  carefully  shaken  out,  and  assorted. 
All  parts  of  the  bedding  which  can  be  used  again  are  taken  to 
the  bedding  racks  and  spread  thereon  for  a  thorough  drying; 
parts  which  can  not  be  used  again  are  sent  to  the  manure  heap. 


140  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

Special  attention  is  necessary  in  this  matter,  as  the  allow- 
ance of  straw.  100  pounds  per  month  per  animal,  is  Insufficient 
under  most  favorable  conditions.  In  the  evening  the  dried 
bedding,  mixed  with  such  fresh  bedding  as  may  be  necessary, 
is  laid  down.  The  bed  must  be  soft  and  even  with  the  thickest 
part  toward  the  manger. 

Manure  and  other  refuse  must  not  be  allowed  to  accumulate 
in  or  near  the  stable.  It  will  be  disposed  of  daily  in  the  man- 
ner prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

Stables  will  be  policed  daily. 

Except  at  night,  when  horses  are  bedded  down,  manure  and 
urine  vrill  be  removed  at  once  and  not  allowed  to  accummulate. 

Smoking  in  or  near  stables  will  be  prohibited,  and  signs  to 
that  effect  posted. 

One  or  more  lights  will  be  kept  burning  during  the  night  in 
each  stable. 

Animals  will  be  assigned  permanent  stalls,  by  section,  in  the 
usual  order  of  their  formation.  They  will  be  placed  on  the 
picket  line  in  the  same  order.  Over  each  stall  will  be  placed 
the  name  and  number  of  the  animal  and  the  name  of  the  man  to 
whom  assigned. 

Tlie  presence  of  unauthorized  persons  about  the  stables  at  any 
time  is  prohibited.  This  applies  to  men  of  the  organization 
who  have  no  duties  to  perform  as  well  as  to  strangers.  The 
stable  sergeant  is  charged  with  enforcing  this  rule. 

Sfxtion  y. — The  Permanent  Stable. 

373.  In  a  stable  with  a  loft,  ventilation  from  the  top  is 
always  insufficient,  and  the  openings  in  the  sides,  above  the 
liorses,  should  be  kept  open  except  when  it  is  necessary  to  close 
those  on  the  windward  side  to  keep  out  rain  or  snow. 

Doors  should  be  kept  open  whenever  practicable  and  every 
precaution  taken  to  have  good  ventilation. 

374.  Foul  air  and  dami)ness  are  the  causes  of  many  diseases 
of  the  horse;  hence  the  importance  and  economy  of  spacious, 
clean,  dry,  and  well-ventilated  stables. 

It  is  impossible  to  give  the  horse  too  much  fresh  air,  even  in 
the  coldest  weather.  The  stables  should  be  considered  as  merely 
a  shelter  from  storms.  The  more  nearly  the  air  of  the  stables 
approaches  the  purity  and  temperature  of  the  outside  air  the 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGTJLATIONS,   1917.  141 

more  nearly  are  the  stables  adapted  to  the  health  and  .comfort 
of  the  animals. 

xV  practical  and  satisfactory  test  that  a  stable  is  properly 
cleanwl  and  ventilated  is  that  on  entering  it  the  sense  of  smell 
detects  no  apparent  change  from  the  air  outside. 

Entrances  to  the  stable  should  be  protected  by  bars  or  lines 
to  prevent  the  escape  of  animals. 

375.  Stall  floors  should  be  kept  in  thorough  repair  at  all  times. 
If  of  wood,  broken  planks  must  be  immediately  replaced  and 
spikes  kept  driven  well  into  the  wood.  If  of  dirt,  only  clay 
should  be  used.    Gravel,  ashes,  or  sandy  earth  is  not  suitable. 

The  sloping  of  the  stall  floor  from  the  manger  is  injurious 
and  uncomfortable  for  the  animal,  causing  him  to  stand  in 
an  unnatural  position,  with  the  forelegs  higher  than  the  hind 
ones.  It  is  natural  for  a  horse  to  paw  a  hollow  for  his  front 
feet,  so  that  he  can  stand  with  his  hind  quarters  elevated. 

Fresh  clay  will  be  kept  on  hand  and  all  holes  in  the  floor 
promptly  filled  and  tamped. 

376.  Saddle  and  harness  rooms  will  be  kept  clean  and  their 
contents  assigned  to  places  and  kept  in  order. 

If  practicable,  all  woodwork  within  reach  of  the  horses  should 
be  protected  with  sheet  metal  or  painted  with  a  thin  coat  of 
gas  tar ;  other  woodwork  and  brick  should  be  painted  a  light 
shade  and  then  kept  clean  and  free  from  dust. 

Feed  boxes  must  be  kept  clean ;  they  should  be  washed  from 
time  to  time  with  dilute  vinegar  and  always  after  feeding  bran 
mash  or  other  soft  food. 

During  the  day,  except  in  very  cold  or  stormy  weather,  the 
animals,  when  not  being  used  or  fed,  should  stand  at  the  picket 
line  or  in  the  paddocks.  In  hot  climates,  however,  if  there  is 
not  sufficient  shade  on  the  picket  line  or  in  the  paddocks,  it  is 
better  to  keep  them  in  the  stables  during  the  heat  of  the  day. 

377.  In  permanent  or  semipermanent  camps  cantonment 
stables  are  built  when  practicable.  They  are  usually  sheds  with- 
out sides,  wide  enough  for  a  double  row  of  stalls.  The  double 
stalls  should  not  be  less  than  9  feet  wide  by  10  feet  deep. 

Ample  ditches  should  be  dug  back  of  the  stalls.  All  rules  for 
the  management  of  the  permanent  stable  that  are  applicable 
apply  equally  for  the  cantonment  stable. 


142  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Section  VI. — The  Picket  Line. 

378.  Permanent  picket  lines  of  l^-inch  manila  rope  or  of 
f-inch  steel  wire  cable  are  erected  near  every  stable,  to  which 
animals  are  tied  for  fresh  air,  for  grooming,  and  to  permit  the 
stable  to  be  cleaned. 

The  picket-line  supports  should  be  posts  not  less  than  6  by  S 
inches  by  9  feet  long,  spaced  50  feet  apart,  the  end  posts  securely 
guyed.  The  line  is  run  through  the  posts.  One  end  of  the  line 
should  be  provided  witii  a  means  of  taking  up  slack  in  the  line. 

379.  Shallow  trenches  should  run  along  each  side  of  the  line 
beliind  the  animals  to  carry  off  the  rain  and  the  ground  upon 
which  the  animals  stand  filled  and  graded  with  a  slight  slope 
from  the  Hue. 

380.  The  picket  line  ground  is  cleaned  and  swept  daily  and 
kept  smooth,  In  the  manner  indicated  for  stall  floors. 

381.  Troops  in  camp  may  have  no  stable,  in  which  case  ani- 
nuils  are  cared  for  entirely  on  the  picket  line  and  in  the  corral. 
If  space  of  ground  permits,  a  corral  may  be  built  adjoining  the 
picket  lines.  The  corral  fence  is  built  from  such  materials  as 
can  be  secured. 

382.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  build  a  corral  fence  around  and 
inclosing  the  picket  lines  of  new  organizations.  This  is  also  true 
of  organizations  having  a  nevr  lot  of  animals  or  camped  close 
to  other  mounted  commands,  thus  avoiding  the  often  serious 
annoyance  of  lost  animals.  Such  a  corral  also  assists  in  the 
pi  went  ion  of  the  spread  of  contagious  diseases  among  the 
animals. 

Section  VII. — Field  Picket  Lines. 

383.  Field  picket  lines  should  be  carried  by  all  organizations 
]i:',ving  animal  transportation  while  in  the  field,  and  are  used 
wlienev  J  the  troops  go  into  temporary  camps. 

This  field  picket  line  may  be  stretched  between  the  wagons  or 
ustH.l  as  a  ground  line.  If  used  as  a  ground  line,  it  should  consist 
of  1-inch  manila  rope  45  feet  long,  into  iron  rings  at  each  end, 
20  feet  of  ^-inch  rope  for  a  reeve  rope,  two  end  pins,  and  a  center 
pin. 

The  line  should  be  kept  taut  and  the  pins  driven  flush  with  the 
ground  v.iien  possible. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  143 

384.  The  auimals  are  tied  on  the  line  so  tliose  in  eacli  section 
stand  togetlier.  Precautions  sliould  be  talcen  to  tie  animals  of 
mean  disposition  where  they  can  not  injure  their  neighbors  by 
ticking  or  biting.  In  cold,  wet,  or  windy  weather  animals  like 
to  stand  with  their  tails  to  the  wind,  and  effort  should  be  made 
to  place  the  lines  so  that  this  will  be  possible.  In  hot  weather 
endeavor  should  be  made  to  get  as  much  shade  as  possible;  if 
the  camp  be  permanent,  shade  for  the  lines  nuist  be  extemporized. 
Continued  standing  in  the  hot  sun  will  seriously  debilitate  the 
animals. 

385.  The  sanitation  of  the  picket  lines  in  a  permanent  or 
semipermanent  camp  demands  constant  attention.  Ditches 
should  be  cut  to  allow  them  to  drain  easily,  and  manure  and 
foul  litter  must  be  removed  daily.  During  the  fly  season  the 
lines  should  be  sprinkled  once  a  week  with  crude  oil  or  other 
inflammable  material  and  burned  off. 

If  the  ground  becomes  sodden  with  rain  or  otherwise  broken 
up,  the  position  of  the  lines  should  be  changed. 

If  there  be  an  extreme  range  of  daily  temperature,  horse 
covers  are  of  value.  The  use  of  covers,  however,  is  liable  to 
abuse.  A  horse  can  stand  great  cold  when  properly  acclimated. 
A  cover  saves  feed,  but  its  use  makes  the  animal  dependent  upon 
it  and  renders  him  much  more  liable  to  colds  and  chills  than  if 
his  coat  had  been  entirely  relied  upon  to  afford  him  proper  pro- 
tection. Cold  rains  will  tell  on  the  condition  of  uncovered  horses 
unless  they  get  extra  food. 

Section  VIII. — Groo:\iixg. 

386.  Drill  or  work  requiring  the  use  of  the  animals  of  the 
command  is  followed  immediately  by  stables:  the  horses  and 
mules  are  then  thoroughly  groomed  and  the  harness  and  equip- 
ment cared  for  and  put  away  in  good  order.  The  lieutenant  in 
charge  of  the  train  is  pi'osent  and  in  immediate  supervision  of 
this  work.     He  is  assisted  by  the  stable  sergeant. 

On  Sinidays  or  holidays  the  animals  are  thoroughly  groomed 
once  during  the  day.  This  is  usually  done  at  morning  stables. 
The  lieutenant  in  charge  of  the  train  or  some  other  officer  of  the 
company  is  present  at  this  time. 


144  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917. 

On  A\-ork  days  mornincr  stables  Jire  held  for  the  animals  be- 
fore they  go  out.  At  that  time  each  section  leader  superintends 
the  removal  of  manure  and  foul  litter  from  his  stalls  or  picket 
lino,  seeing'  that  it  is  placed  in  piles  convenient  for  carting 
away :  he  causes  the  men  of  his  section,  after  cleanin;r  their 
stalls,  to  look  over  and  carefully  examine  the  animals  t©  see 
that  they  ai-e  fit  for  work  (oG8).  and  he  causes  each  to  be 
l)rushed  clean  of  dirt  or  manure.  The  lieutenant  in  charge  in- 
spects the  general  condition  of  the  animals  and  stables  at  this 
time. 

On  returning:  from  a  drill  or  exercise  and  after  a  march  the 
animals  are  unbridled,  their  collars  and  traces  removed,  and 
the  irirths  loosened.  The  men  then  put  on  stable  clothes,  re- 
lieve themselves,  and  prepare  for  the  work  of  caring  for  the 
equipment  and  grooming.  After  the  bits  and  collars  are  cleaned, 
the  remainder  of  the  harness  is  removed  from  the  horses  and 
disposed  of  deliberately,  the  necessary  cleaninu'  being  done  at 
the  same  time  and  in  the  most  convenient  manner.  After  the 
allotted  lime  has  been  given  for  the  care  and  disposal  of  the 
harness  and  equipment,  the  animals  are  groomed  and  cared  for. 

Grooming  is  habitually  done  at  the  picket  line. 

Moutited  men  groom  tlioir  own  horses.  The  train  animals  are 
groomed  by  their  riders  or  drivers  or  detailed  privates. 

The  animals  of  each  section  are  groomed  by  their  drivers  or 
riders  or  detailed  men.  An  absent  section  leader  is  replaced  by 
a  gun-squad  leader. 

Th.e  horses  of  officers  are  groomed  by  specially  detailed  men. 

The  men  are  marched  to  the  picker  line,  take  the  position  of 
stand  to  heel  at  the  direction  of  the  senior  sergeant  present,  and 
then  begin  work  as  soon  as  the  senior  sergeant  commands: 
Co m  r. I enve  f/ro om i na. 

387.  Grooming  is  essential  to  the  general  health  and  condi- 
tion of  the  domesticated  animal.  Horses  and  mules  improperly 
groomed,  with  ragged  manes,  unkempt  pasterns,  feet  improperly 
looked  after,  forms  an  indication  of  an  inefficient  organization. 
Clean  animals,  properly  harnessed  and  smartly  turned  out.  add 
to  the  esprit  of  an  organization  and  give  a  fair  indication  of  its 
discipline  and  efficiency. 


MACHINE- GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  145 

The  principal  use  of  the  currycumb  is  to  clean  the  brush.  For 
this  purpose  a  piece  of  hardwood  with  channels  along  its  sur- 
face answers  equally  well. 

The  currycomb  should  never  be  used  on  the  legs  from  the 
knees  and  hocks  downward  nor  about  the  head,  and  when  occa- 
sionally required  to  loosen  dried  mud  or  matted  hair  on  the 
fleshy  parts  of  the  body  it  must  be  applied  gently. 

To  groom  the  horse  proceed  as  follows : 

First  clean  the  front  legs,  then  the  hind  legs.  They  will  thus 
have  time  to  dry  while  the  rest  of  the  grooming  is  being  done. 
Next,  on  the  near  side,  with  the  currycomb  in  the  right  hand, 
fingers  over  back  of  comb,  and  the  brush  in  the  left  hand,  begin 
brushing  at  the  upper  part  of  the  neck,  the  mane  being  thrown 
to  the  other  side  out  of  the  way ;  thence  proceed  to  the  chest, 
shoulders,  back,  belly,  flanks,  loins,  and  rump.  In  using  the 
brush  the  man  should  stand  well  away  from  the  horse,  keep 
his  arm  stiff,  and  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  against  the  brush. 
The  principal  work  of  the  brush  should  follow  the  direction  of 
the  hair,  but  in  places  difficult  to  clean  it  may  be  necessary  to 
brush  against  it,  finishing  by  leaving  th(^  hair  smooth.  After 
every  few  strokes  clean  the  brush  from  dust  with  the  currycomb. 

Having  finished  the  near  side,  take  the  brush  in  the  right 
hand,  the  currycomb  in  the  left,  and  groom  the  offside  in  the 
same  order. 

Having  done  with  the  brush,  rub  or  dust  off  the  horse  with 
the  grooming  cloth,  wipe  about  the  face,  eyes,  and  nostrils, 
arrange  the  mane  and  tail,  and  clean  the  dock.  Finally  go 
over  the  legs  once  more  and  clean  out  the  hoofs.  In  cleaning 
the  mane  and  the  tail  begin  brushing  at  the  end  of  the  hair 
and  gradually  work  up  to  the  roots,  separating  the  locks  with 
the  fingers  so  as  to  get  out  all  scurf  and  dirt.  Tails  require 
frequent  washing  with  warm  water  and  soap.  The  skin  under 
the  flank  and  between  the  hind  quarters  must  be  soft,  clean,  and 
free  from  dust.  Currycombs,  cords,  or  common  combs  nmst 
never  be  applied  to  the  mane  or  tail ;  the  brush,  fingers,  and 
cloth  are  freely  used  on  both. 

The  wisp  is  used  when  the  horse  comes  in  wet,  and  also  for 
stimulating  the  coat.     It  is  made  by  twisting  or  plaiting  straw 


146  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

into  a  rope.  The  ends  are  then  bent  together,  cut  off  square 
and  rubbed  on  a  board  until  they  form  a  soft,  even  straw  brush. 
The  wisp  should  be  workerl  forward  and  backward  well  into 
the  coat,  so  that  full  advantage  may  be  obtained  from  the  fric- 
tion.   After  finishing  with  the  wisp  the  coat  should  be  laid  flat. 

Hand  rul)bing  is  beneficial.  Wlien  an  animal  has  had  very 
hard,  exhausting  work  his  legs  should  be  hand  rubbed  and 
afterwards  ])andaged,  taking  care  that  the  bandages  are  not 
tight.  An  exhausted  animal  should  also  be  given  stimulants 
and  warm  gruel. 

The  value  of  grooming  is  dependent  upon  the  force  with  which 
the  brush  is  used  and  the  thoroughness  of  tlie  other  work. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  should,  by  continuous 
personal  supervision,  see  that  the  grooming  is  properly  done. 

No  horse  or  mule  should  be  considered  in  order  until  he  is 
thoroughly  clean,  his  mane  and  tail  brushed  out  and  laid  flat, 
his  eyes  and  nostrils  wijied  or  washed,  and  hoofs  put  in  order. 

The  pasterns  and  that  part  of  the  mane  wliere  the  crown- 
piece  of  the  bridle  rests  should  be  neatly  trimmed  and  the  mane 
and  tail  plucked.         » 

At  each  stable  the  feet  and  shoes  are  carefully  examined. 
Aninuiis  requiring  shoeing  are  reported  to  the  chief  of  section, 
who  notifies  the  stable  sergeant. 

Horses"  sheaths  are  kept  clean  by  washing,  when  necessary, 
with  warm  water  and  castile  soap. 

Teasing  in  grooming  should  not  be  permitted.  It  is  a  bad 
practice  to  attempt  to  make  an  animal  submit  to  rough  or  harsh 
grooming.  To  do  so  means  that  he  will  be  provoked  into  kicking, 
striking,  or  biting,  and  perhaps  confirmed  in  these  bad  habits. 
If  he  objects  to  the  use  of  the  brush  or  currycomb,  the  hand  or 
cloth  should  be  gently  used  instead.  Careful  work  will  usually 
win  the  animal  into  submitting  to  the  proper  use  of  the  groom- 
ing tools. 

The  object  of  grooming  is  not  merely  to  clean  the  coat.  The 
skin  nuist  be  rubbed  and  massaged  to  keep  the  animal  healthy 
and  in  condition.  An  abundance  of  friction  applied  to  the  skin 
when  the  horse  returns  from  his  work  is  of  special  value  in 
keeping  him  healthy  and  fit. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  147 

Quick  grooming  is  to  be  encouraged.  Under  ordinary  condi- 
tions a  horse  or  mule  should  be  thoroughly  groomed  in  20  min- 
utes. On  the  other  hand,  at  least  that  much  time  should  be 
devoted  to  him.  Each  section  leader,  after  the  necessary  time 
has  been  devoted  to  grooming  and  after  he  has  made  a  thorough 
inspection  of  every  animal  in  his  section  and  finds  them  all 
satisfactorily  groomed, 'reports  to  the  officer  in  charge:  First 
{such)  section  in  order.  The  officer,  after  making  an  inspection, 
may,  if  the  grooming  is  satisfactory,  permit  the  section  leader  to 
dismiss  the  men. 

388.  To  confirm  recruits  in  a  thorough  and  systematic  method 
of  grooming  and  to  impress  upon  them  the  amount  of  time  to 
be  ordinarily  devoted  to  the  different  parts  of  the  animal  they 
are  required  to  groom  by  detail  during  their  instruction. 

To  groom  by  detail  the  instructor  causes  the  men  to  stand 
to  heel  and  commands:  1.  By  detail,  2.  Commence  Geooming. 
Clean  and  brush  front  legs  from  the  knees  down,  rubbing  luider 
the  fetlocks  and  around  the  coronets  with  the  brush  and  hand ; 
time,  2  minutes.  3.  Chaxge.  Same  as  at  second  command,  the 
hind  legs  from  the  hocks  down ;  lime,  2  minutes.  4.  Change, 
On  the  near  side,  with  currycomb  and  brush,  groom  neck,  shoul- 
ders, arm,  elbow,  back,  side,  flank,  loins,  croup,  and  the  hind  leg 
to  the  hock ;  time,  4  minutes.  5.  Change.  First  on  the  near 
side,  after  finishing  upon  the  offside,  groom  chest  between  the 
forelegs,  the  belly,  and  between  the  hind  legs ;  time,  3  minutes. 
6.  Change.  Same  as  4,  on  the  offside ;  time.  4  minutes.  7 
Change.  Brush  head,  ears,  and  throat ;  with  the  hand  rub  the 
throat  and  between  the  forks  of  the  lower  jaw ;  time,  1  minute. 

8.  Change.    Brush  and  lay  forelock  and  mane ;  tiule,  2  minutes. 

9.  Change.  Brush  out  the  tail ;  time,  2  minutes.  10.  Change. 
With  the  grooming  cloth,  or  with  a  damp  cloth  or  sponge,  if  the 
parts  are  foul,  wipe  out  the  eyes  and  nostrils ;  wipe  the  muzzle, 
dock,  sheath,  and  up  between  the  hind  legs ;  time,  2  minutes. 
11.  Change.  Clean  out  the  feet ;  time,  2  minutes.  12.  Change. 
Complete  any  unfinished  work.  13.  Cease  Grooming.  14. 
Stand  to  Heel. 

Total  time  required  at  least  24  minutes. 

To  facilitate  supervision  the  men  must  be  required  to  change 
promptly  at  the  command. 


148  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

389.  To  judge  the  cleanliness  of  an  animal,  the  hand  may  he 
passed  the  reverse  way  of  tlie  liair  to  cret  a  view  of  the  skin. 
When  the  points  of  th.e  tinG:ers  are  run  firmly  against  the  set  of 
tho  coat  lines  of  j?ray  are  left  on  the  coat  of  a  dirty  skin  and 
tlie  points  of  the  finwrs  are  covered  with  scurf.  Between  the 
branches  of  tlie  under  jaw.  under  the  crovrnpiece  of  the  halter, 
at  the  bends  of  the  kness  and  hocks,  "under  the  belly  and  lie- 
tween  the  forelegs  and  thig:hs  are  the  places  usually  nes'lected 
wlien  the  v/ork  is  not  tlwrough  and  which  should  be  looked  at 
in  the  inspection. 

390.  Animals  should  never  be  hurried  in  turning  around  in 
their  stalls.  Should  the  stalls  or  driveways  be  covered  with  ice 
or  be  otherwise  slippery,  sand  or  litter  should  be  sprinkled  on 
them. 

391.  Horses  are  particularly  terrified  by  fire.  Should  a  fire 
occur  in  the  stables  tliey  must  i>e  led.  backed,  or  ridden  out  of 
tlie  stable.  If  they  are  unwilling,  a  coat  or  gunny  sack  should 
be  thrown  over  their  eyes.  Care  should  be  taken  that  they  do 
not  break  back  into  the  stables. 

392.  The  lieutenant  in  charge  should  make  it  a  point  to  visit 
the  stables  occasionally  at  odd  times  of  the  day.  The  habits 
and  peculiarities  of  animals  may  be  rauch  better  studied  when 
the  men  are  away  than  when  grooming  is  going  on. 

Section  IX. — PYeuing. 

393.  Three  principles  should  be  adhered  to  in  feeding : 

1.  Water  a  thirsty  animal  before  feedfng  him. 

2.  Feed  in  small  quantities  and  often. 

8.  Do  not  work  an  anin}al  hard  immediately  after  a  full  feed. 

All  animals  should  be  fed  three  times  a  day — at  reveille,  in 
the  middle  of  the  day.  and  at  night.  This  rule  must  be  rigidly 
enforced  on  the  march,  the  noon  grain  being  carried  on  the  ani- 
mal or  in  the  Magon. 

The  forage  ration  for  a  horse  is  14  pounds  of  hay  and  12 
pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley.  For  a  mule  it  is  14  ]>ounds  of 
hay  and  9  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley.  To  each  animal  3 
pounds  of  bran  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  that  quantity  of  grain. 
A  dpsirnble  (usrribution  of  the  grain  ration  is,  for  a  horse  which 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  149 

is  getting  12  pounds  per  day,  3  pounds  in  the  morning,  3  or  4 
pounds  at  noon,  and  the  rest  at  night.  Hay,  as  a  rule,  is  not 
fed  in  the  morning :  about  one-third  of  the  ration  should  be  fed 
at  noon,  except  on  the  march,  and  the  remainder  at  night, 

394.  A  bran  m.ash  acts  as  a  mild  laxative  anrl  should  be  fed 
once  or  twice  a  week  to  stabled  animals,  A  little  dry  bran 
mixed  with  the  oats  is  of  value  in  compelling  more  thorough 
mastication  and  prevents  greedy  animals  from  bolting  their 
grain.  In  spring  or  early  summer  the  animals  should  be  grazed 
daily  when  practicable.  A  lump  of  salt  should  be  kept  in  each 
manger. 

Before  feeding  hay  it  should  be  thoroughly  shaken  out  with 
a  fork  so  as  to  get  rid  of  dust  and  seed :  it  is  also  advisable  to 
moisten  the  hay  before  feeding  it.  The  grain,  if  possible, 
should  be  run  over  wire  screens  or  allowed  to  fall  through  the 
air  to  remove  dust. 

It  is  advisable  to  feed  at  least  a  portion  of  the  allov\-ance  of 
ha,y  before  feeding  the  grain. 

Grain  should  never  be  fed  or  placed  in  the  mangers  until  it 
is  certain  that  the  animals  are  thoroughly  cool. 

Never  feed  grain  to  a  horse  when  heated  or  fatigued.  Grain 
is  a  highly  concentrated  food  that  requires  high  digestive  power. 
Abnorn.al  temperature  impairs  the  power  of  the  digestive  or- 
gans. If  the  animal  has  been  worked  to  the  point  of  fatigue, 
all  bodily  functions  are  for  a  time  injuriously  affected.  For 
that  reason  he  must  be  rested  and  his  normal  digestive  power 
restored  before  concentrated  food  of  any  kind  's  given  to  him. 
( >a  the  other  hand,  hay,  being  a  bulky  food,  will  not  hurt  a 
ii')]'se,  however  heated  or  fatigued  he  may  be. 

In  the  morning  feed  is  usually  placed  in  the  manger  at  or 
herore  reveille.  The  noon  feed  of  hay  is  tisually  placed  in  the 
nmnger  while  the  organization  is  at  drill,  but  the  grain  is  not 
fod  until  the  animals  are  thoroughly  cool.  Tlie  evening  feed  is 
placed  in  the  mangers  after  the  stables  have  been  thoroughly 
policed  for  the  night. 

395.  Immediately  after  a  full  feed  the  stomach  and  bowels 
are  distended.  If  hard  work  is  given  at  once,  they  press  against 
tlio  lungs  and  impede  their  power  of  expansion,  thus  leading  to 
lildwing  and  distress.  Fast  work  should  therefore  be  avoided 
alter  a  full  feed.     Moreover,  though  such  work  rarely  results 


150  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,.   1917. 

in  colic,  it  interferes  with  digestion  to  such  an  extent  that  loose- 
ness of  the  bowels  occurs  and  the  food  passes  through  undigested 
and  is  wasted.  Food  remains  in  the  stomach  about  one  and  one- 
half  hours.  Fast  or  heavy  work  should  therefore  be  deferred 
from  one  and  one-half  to  two  hours  after  a  full  feed. 

396.  All  animals  do  not  require  the  same  amount  of  forage; 
the  amount  given  each  nmst  be  l)ased,  therefore,  upon  his  indi- 
vidual requirements,  which  should  be  closely  watched  by  the 
stable  sergeant.  AVhen  a  horse  or  mule  leaves  some  of  his  grain 
his  ration  should  be  reduced  that  amount.  The  amount  to  be  fed 
each  animal  each  meal  should  be  chalked  up  on  a  small  black- 
board placed  so  as  to  be  easily  seen  by  the  men  distributing  the 
grain.  A  convenient  arrangement  is  a  board  about  12  inches 
high  by  4  inches  wide  divided  by  two  horizontal  lines  into  three 
4-inch  squares.  In  the  uppermost  square  should  be  marked  in 
pounds  tlie  morning  feed  of  grain,  in  the  center  square  the  noon 
feed,  and  in  the  bottom  square  the  night  feed.  "When  an  animal 
is  sick  or  injured,  his  grain  ration  should  be  reduced,  depending 
upon  the  animal. 

When  forage  can  n(^t  he  obtained  grazing  should  be  required 
at  every  spare  moment,  especially  early  in  the  morning  when 
the  dew  is  on  the  grass,  but  not  if  it  is  covered  with  frost. 

All  forage  should  be  inspected  by  the  lieutenant  in  charge  to 
see  that  ir  is  up  to  weight  and  contract  specification,'::.  A  forage 
book  showing  daily  entries  of  all  forage  drawn,  fed.  and  remain- 
ing on  hand,  together  with  the  number  of  the  public  and  private 
animals  fed,  will  be  kept  by  the  stable  sergeant  and  checked 
daily  by  the  lieutenant  in  charge.  All  ofiicers  should  be  familiar 
with  the  characteristics  of  good  forage  and  the  manner  in  which 
it  is  commercially  graded  for  contract  specifications.  To  obtain 
this  knowledge  olhcers  should  be  encouraged  to  visit  large  com- 
mercial stables. 

Barley  possesses  a  husk  so  tough  and  indigestible  that  it 
should  always  be  crushed  before  being  fed,  else  a  very  great 
part  of  its  nutrient  value  is  lost. 

Sudden  changes  in  food  are  to  be  avoided.  The  digestive 
organs  are  frequently  unable  to  accommodate  themselves  to  a 
sudden  change  and  scouring,  constipation,  or  colic  may  result. 
If  sudden  changes  become  necessary  the  ration  of  the  new  feed 


MACHIITE-GUN  DUILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  161 

sliOTilcl  be  greatly  reduced  and  then  increased  gradually  to  the 
full  requirements. 

Good  oats  weight  about  40  pounds  to  the  bushel,  barley  about 
48  pounds,  corn  about  56  pounds.  Pressed  hay  weighs  about  11 
pounds  per  cubic  foot. 

Tlie  standard  bushel  in  the  United  States  contains  2,150.4 
cubic  inches.  A  cubic  yard  contains  21.69  bushels.  A  box  16  by 
16.8  by  8  inches  holds  1  bushel ;  a  ])ox  12  by  11.2  by  8  inches 
holds  half  a  bushel ;  a  box  8  by  8  by  8.4  inches  holds  1  peck ;  a 
box  8  by  8  by  4.2  inches  holds  one-half  peck  or  4  quarts. 

Section  X. — Watering. 

397.  Give  the  animal  an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving 
the  picket  line  or  stable  and  before  putting  the  bit  in  his  mouth. 
Animals  must  be  watered  quietly  and  without  confusion :  the 
manner  in  which  this  duty  is  performed  is  an  indication  of  the 
discipline  of  a  command. 

They  are  to  be  led  to  and  from  water  at  a  walk.  At  the 
j  drinking  place  none  should  be  hurried  or  have  his  head  jerked 
.  up  from  the  water.  All  animals  should  be  allowed  ample  time 
!  to  drink  their  fill  and  not  be  led  away  the  first  time  they  raise 
'  their  heads  from  the  water.  This  must  be  carefully  explained 
j  to  the  untrained  man  who  thinks,  because  an  animal  puts  up 
i  his  head  to  get  his  wind  after  his  first  fill,  that  he  is  fi.nished. 
i  In  the  field  or  on  the  march  the  watering  is  from  the  most 
j  convenient  running  water  ;  in  garrison  it  is  usually  from  troughs, 

!  which  should  be  cleaned  each  day.  In  warm  weather  water 
drawn  from  a  cold  well  or  spring  should  stand  long  enough  for 
the  chill  to  pass  off. 
Watering  is  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  stable  ser- 
I  geant  in  garrison  and  the  section  leader  in  the  field,  but  if  they 
,  are  liable  to  meet  those  of  other  commands  at  the  watering 
;  place  a  commissioned  officer  should  supervise 'this  duty. 

All  animals  should  be  watered  before  feeding  or  not  until 
two  hours  after  feeding.  Ordinarily  they  should  be  watered 
twice  a  day;  in  hot  weather  three  times  a  day.  In  very  cold 
w^eather  once  a  day.  about  noon,  is  sufficient.  A  horse  will 
rarely  drink  freely  very  early  in  the  morning. 


162  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.    1917. 

If  a  mounted  command  is  to  march  a  long  distance  without 
water,  so  that  it  will  bo  necessary  to  camp  on  route,  the  ani- 
mals are  fed  and  denied  water  until  ,1ust  before  starting,  when 
they  are  permitted  to  drink  freely.  The  command  marches  in 
the  afternoon  and  does  not  encamp  until  it  has  accomplished 
at  least  half  of  the  distance  and  moves  early  next  morning  to 
reach  water. 

Watering  the  horses  on  the  march  depends  in  a  great  meas- 
ure upon  the  facilities  to  be  had.  If  nothing  is  known  as  to 
the  country  over  which  the  day's  march  is  to  be  made,  water 
call  should  be  sounded  shortly  before  leaving  the  camp  and 
every  horse  given  an  opportunity  to  drink.  As  many  animals, 
however,  will  not  drink  at  an  early  hour,  or  until  after  exer- 
cising, the  horses  should  be  watered  at  the  first  opportunity. 
On  severe  marches  frequent  watering  is  of  great  benefit. 

Except  as  directed  in  paragraph  369,  never  water  a  horse 
when  heated  unless  the  exercise  or  march  is  to  be  resumed  im- 
mediately ;  if  the  exercise  or  march  is  to  be  resumed  at  once, 
water  will  be  of  the  greatest  benefit  to  the  horse,  no  matter 
how  heated  he  may  be,  but  a  horse  should  not  be  called  upon 
to  do  fast  work  for  at  least  half  an  hour  after  a  big  drink. 

A  horse  requires  from  5  to  15  gallons  of  water  daily,  depend- 
ing upon  the  temperature  and  upon  the  work  he  is  doing. 

SiiCTioN  XI. — Shoeing. 

398.  Shoeing  is  done  according  to  the  principles  outlined  in 
(he  authorized  manual. 

All  officers  must  understand  the  principles  of  proper  shoeing 
and  must  supervise  the  work  of  the  horseshoers,  being  espe- 
cially careful  to  see  that  the  knife  is  not  used  improperly. 

All  mounted  men  should  know  how  to  put  on  a  shoe  in  an 
emergency.  The  following  paragraphs  are  therefore  here  in- 
corporated : 

The  foot  should  be  prepared  so  that  it  will  approximate  as 
nearly  as  possible  to  a  state  of  nature,  and  only  such  trimming 
is  allowed  as  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  purpose  of  fitting 
and  securing  the  shoe. 

The  knife  must  never  be  used  on  the  hars  or  on  the  frog.  The 
bars  strengthen  the  hoof  and  assist  in  its  expansion.     Cutting, 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  163 

therefore,  weakens  them  and  prevents  them  from  performing 
their  function.  The  practice  of  using  the  Icnife  to  trim  the  bars 
or  to  cut  a  notcli  at  the  junction  of  tlie  frog  and  bar  at  the 
heel  (called  "  opening  the  heel  "  in  civilian  shops)  always  tends 
to  produce  contracted  feet. 

Never  use  the  knife  on  liat  feet  or  on  the  hoof  of  an  animal 
that  has  been  running  barefoot. 

liagged  parts  of  the  frog  may  be  cut  away  by  careful  use  of 
the  nipper.s. 

^^■ith  a  Hat  foot  it  is  frequently  necessary  to  remove  a  part 
of  the  outer  ed^e  of  the  wall  in  order  that  the  nails  may  be 
driven  in  the  vdiite  line,  where  they  belong.  This  is  the  only 
case  v.-here  it  is  permitted  to  rasp  the  outside  wall.  The  outer 
coating  of  the  wall  and  the  layers  of  dead  horn  on  the  sole  and 
frog  serve  to  retain  the  moisture  in  the  hoof. 

The  hot  shoe  must  never  be  applied  to  the  foot  under  any 
circumstances. 

V,'hen  shoes  are  left  on  the  feet  too  long,  corns  and  other  ail- 
ments are  the  result.  Ordinarily  a  shoe  should  be  replaced  at 
least  once  a  montii.  The  lightest  shoe  that  will  last  for  this 
time  is  the  best  shoe.  It  should  carefully  follow  the  form  of 
the  foot,  or,  if  the  foot  is  broken,  the  shoe  follows  the  original 
form  of  the  foot.    Its  length  is  regulated  by  the  bulb  of  the  frog. 

The  ground  surface  of  the  shoe  sliould  be  level  and  smooth, 
except  for  use  in  snow,  v\heu  the  ground  surface  should  be  con- 
caved to  prevent  balling.  That  portion  of  the  upper  surface 
which  presses  against  the  bearing  surface  of  the  foot  must  be 
level,  smooth,  and  accurately  shaped  to  support  it.  and  when 
the  upper  shoe  surface  is  wider  than  the  bearing  surface  the 
inner  edge  must  be  concaved  to  avoid  excessive  sole  pressure. 
This  is  one  of  the  most  important  requisites  of  correct  horse- 
shoeing. Concussion  of  the  sole  against  the  inner  edge  of  the 
upper  shoe  surface  invariably  produces  soreness. 

399.  One  side  of  the  shank  of  a  horseshoe  nail  is  flat.  The 
other  side  is  concave  and  also  has  a  bevel  near  the  point.  This 
bevel,  as  it  enters  into  the  horn,  forces  the  point  of  the  nail  in 
the  direction  of  the  other,  the  flat,  side.  Therefore  in  driving 
a  nail  always  hold  it  with  the  Hat  side  toward  the  outside  edge 
of  the  shoe. 


154  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Nails  should  come  out  at  a  height  of  not  more  than  1  inch 
from  the  bottom  of  the  hoof. 

400.  In  garrison,  at  the  discretion  of  the  colonel  or  of  the 
commanding  officer.  th(>  animals  may  be  left  unshod,  but  shoes 
will  bo  kept  ready  for  each  animal. 

INSPECTION    OF    SHOEING. 

401.  The  following  examination  should  be  made  while  the 
animal  is  standing  on  a  level  floor  with  the  foot  on  the  ground: 

1.  Are  the  axes  correct  when  viewed  from  the  front  and  from 
the  side? 

2.  l)oes  the  shoe  follow  the  outer  line  of  the  wall  to  the  last 
nail  hole  and  from  there  extend  outward,  allowing  about  one- 

root         ><^-"-*sr"'^'' 

prepdrecf  ^or/*  y^--'-'*^^^^^ ^usrUP 

the  shoe     /'iX        7V\_/^^,>,^^ 


d€drm§.  -V  V^^  i  ^^^1 Frog- 
surface     \W  I  \hd- - ^^^^^^ 
for  the       V5*«^^*^^  "^^^^  cffro^ 
shoe 

eighth  of  an   inch  at  the  heel  for  expansion?    Has  the  rule 
against  rasping  the  hoof  to  tit  the  shoe  been  violated? 

3.  Is  the  toe  clip  in  the  center  properly  made  and  properly 
seated? 

4.  Are  the  nails  driven  at  the  proper  height  and  proper  dis- 
tance apart?     Have  an;    old  stubs  been  left  in  the  wall? 

.').  Ai-e  the  clinches  well  turned  and  set  in,  of  the  proper  size, 
and  have  they  been  smoothed  off  but  not  rasped  sufficiently  to 
weaken  them? 

The  foot  should  be  raised  and  the  examination  continued: 

1.  Is  the  shoe  of  the  proper  size  and  weight;  the  last  nail 
hole  back  of  the  bend  of  the  quarter? 

2.  Has  enough  horn  been  removed?  Has  too  much  been  re- 
moved?    Is  the  foot  level? 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  165 

3.  Does  the  shoe  rest  evenly  on  the  wall,  covering  the  hut- 
tresses,  and  showing  no  air  space  at  any  point? 

4.  Is  the  shoe  properly  concaved  so  as  to  avoid  pressure  on 
the  sole? 

5.  Has  the  knife  been  used  on  the  bars,  sole,  or  frog? 

6.  Are  the  nails  well  seated  and  of  the  proper  size? 

7.  Arc  the  heels  of  the  shoe  correct  in  width  and  thickness 
and  are  they  properly  rounded,  without  sharp  edges  or  points? 
Is  their  length  even  with  the  bulb  of  the  frog? 

Section  XII. — Sick  Animals. 

402.  The  animals  on  sick  report  are  in  charge  of  the  stable 
sergeant,  who  reports  daily  to  the  captain  for  instructions  as  to 
their  treatment. 

TJie  sick  animals  are  inspected  daily.  The  names  of  the  ani- 
mals on  sick  report,  and  the  treatment  they  receive,  are  re- 
corded daily  in  the  sick  book. 

In  treating  sick  animals,  it  is  to  be  observed  that  very  little 
medicine  is  ordinarily  required,  and  that  unnecessary  doses  do 
a  great  deal  of  harm. 

If  an  animal  sustains  an  injury,  neglects  his  feed,  refuses  to 
drink,  or  gives  any  evidence  of  sickness,  it  will  be  at  once 
reported. 

No  animal  on  sick  report  will  be  taken  from  the  stable  or 
picket  line  for  exercise  or  work  without  permission  from  proper 
authority. 

403.  If  there  be  at  any  time  a  suspicious  discharge  from  one 
or  both  nostrils  of  an  animal  it  must  be  immediately  reported. 

To  prevent  contagion  to  man  or  beast,  an  animal  that  shows 
any  decided  symptom  of  glanders  is  to  be  isolated  at  once  and 
confined  or  tied  up  in  some  locality  where  no  other  animal  can 
approach  him. 

!  404.  A  glandered  animal  should  be  killed  as  soon  as  possible. 
I  The  stall  in  which  he  stood  is  torn  down  and  all  the  woodwork 
I  burned  and  the  ironwork  disinfected,  or  otherwise  it  is  closed, 
'  and  must  remain  empty  until  the  rack,  manger,  and  every 
f  p;irt  of  the  iron  and  v/oodwork,  as  also  the  vessels  used  in 
I  watering  and  feeding  and  his  saddle  antl  bit,  have  been  three 
I  or  four  times  thoroughly  washed  with  a  5  per  cent  solution  of 


166  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

carbolic  acid  or  a  1  to  1.000  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate; 
all  parts  to  which  the  latter  has  been  applied  should  be  thor- 
oughly scrubbed  with  hot  water  to  remove  all  traces  of  tlio 
poisonous  salt.  The  application  of  a  lime  wash  to  all  the  stalls, 
after  complete  disinfection,  will  be  desirable.  Small  articles, 
such  as  bits,  etc..  can  be  disinfected  by  keeping  them  immersed 
for  a  half  hour  in  boiling  water.  All  articles  of  little  value  that 
have  been  used  with  a  glandered  horse,  such  as  halters,  bridles, 
horse  cloths,  saddle  cloths,  blankets,  nose  bags,  currycombs, 
brushes,  etc.,  should  be  destroyed. 

Stables  occupied  by  infected  or  suspected  horses  should  be 
disinfected  daily  by  washing  exposed  surfaces  with  a  5  per 
cent  solution  of  carbolic  acid,  and  nose  bags,  halters,  buckets 
used  for  drinking  water,  etc..  should  be  carefully  washed  with 
the  same  solution  or  with  boiling  water. 

405.  Drugs  and  dressings  sufficient,  under  ordinary  conditions 
for  field  service^  for  100  animals  for  one  month  : 

Boracic  acid :  4  ounces,  saturated  solution,  for  disinfection 
of  wounds  of  eye  and  vicinity. 

Carbolic  acid :  16  ounces.  A  solution  of  1  ounce  to  1  quart 
of  water  to  disinfect  wounds  of  body. 

Alcohol :  1  quart ;  2  ounces  in  pint  of  water  as  a  quick 
stimulant. 

Aloes :  20  ounces ;  1  ounce  as  a  cathartic ;  i  ounce  to  pint  of 
water  stinuUates  wounds. 

Alum :  4  ounces :  ^  ounce  to  pint  of  water  acts  as  a  nice 
stimulant  to  wounds. 

Ammonia,  aromatic  spirits  of:  IG  ounces;  2  ounces  in  pint 
of  water  a  quick  stimulant. 

Ammonia,  solution  of:  S  ounces;  use<l  to  make  liniments. 

Cannabis  Indica  :  16  ounces ;  ^  ounce  to  the  dose  in  cases  of 
colic  to  relieve  pain. 

Charcoal :  8  ounces ;  used  to  du'--t  on  exposed  wounds. 

Cosmoline :  2  pounds ;  used  to  make  ointments. 

Creolin :  1  pound ;  1  ounce  to  quart  of  water  as  a  disinfectant 
for  wounds. 

Ether,  nitrous:  16  ounces;  2  ounces  in  pint  of  water  as  a 
stimulant. 

Iodine  crystals:  2  o«nces.  with  wliich  to  make  a  saturated 
solution  or  tincture  for  application  to  sprains. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  167 

Copper  sulphate :  1  ounce,  to  cut  dowu  granulations  (proud 
flesh ) . 

Mercury,  bichloride  tablets:  1  ounce;  1  tablet  in  piut  of  water, 
as  a  disinfectant  for  wounds. 

Olive  oil :  1  pint,  with  which  to  make  liniments. 

Turpentine :  1  pint,  to  make  liniments. 

Tar,  oil  of :  4  ounces,  with  which  to  make  ointments. 

DRESSINGS. 

Absorbent  cotton:  i  pound,  for  eye  pads. 
Antiseptic  gauze :  1  package,  for  dressing  of  wounds. 
Oakum :  3  pounds,  to  be  used  in  dressing  wounds. 
Red  flannel  bandages:  1  dozen. 
White  cotton  bandages:  2  dozen. 
Silk  thread :  i  ounce. 
Soap,  castile:  1  pound. 
Sponges:  4  small. 
Adhesive  plaster :  1  roll. 

INSTBUMENTS. 

1  farrier's  case. 

1  thermometer. 

1  twitch. 

1  drenching  bottle. 

4  small  bottles  and  corks. 

1  tin  basin. 

2  quart  bottles  and  corks. 
30  sheets  tissue  paper. 

A  liniment :  Olive  oil,  3  ounces ;  turpentine,  2  ounces ;  am- 
monia (solution  of),  2  ounces.  Mix  well.  Apply  with  slight 
friction. 

A  stimulant :  Aromatic  spirits  ammonia,  2  ounces ;  alcohol,  1 
ounce ;  water,  16  ounces.    Mix.    Give  as  a  draught. 

A  good  dusting  powder  for  wounds:  Air-slaked  lime,  16 
ounces;  powdered  charcoal,  2  ounces.  Mix.  Dust  on  open 
wounds. 

An  ointment:  Oil  of  tar,  1  ounce;  creolin,  ^  ounce;  cosmoline, 
6  ounces.     Mix. 

33325°— 18 6 


PART  V. 

THE  SOLDIER. 

(Mounted.) 


Section  I. — Standard  Reqtjibed. 

406.  The  qualifications  of  a  good  horseman,  in  the  military 
service,  are  as  follows : 

1.  He  should  have  a  strong  seat  quite  independent  of  the 
reins. 

2.  He  should  be  able  to  correctly  apply  the  aids  by  which  a 
horse  is  controlled. 

3.  He  should  be  capable  of  covering  long  distances  on  horse- 
back with  the  least  possible  fatigue  to  himself  and  to  his  horse. 

4.  Under  proper  directions  he  should  be  able  to  train  an  un- 
trained horse  and  to  improve  a  badly  trained  one. 

5.  He  should  have  a  practical  knowledge  of  the  care  of  horses, 
both  iu  garrison  and  in  the  field ;  he  should  understand  how  to 
detect  and  treat  the  minor  ailments  to  which  they  are  liable; 
and  he  should  be  a  good  groom. 

6.  His  attention  to  the  care  and  adjustment  of  his  equipment 
should  be  unremitting. 

Section  II. — Preliminary  Instruction. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

407.  For  the  preliminary  exercises  the  horses  are  saddled  and 
equipped  with  the  snaffle  bit  only,  saddles  stripped.  Spurs  are 
not  worn.  These  exercises  are  conducted  at  first  in  a  riding 
hall  or  on  an  inclosed  course  out  of  doors. 

158 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  159 

The  instructor  will  confine  himself  to  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  as  soon  as  the  instruction  has  advanced  suflS- 
c'iently  to  permit  it. 

HORSE   EQUIPMENT. 

408.  The  instructor  indicates  the  different  articles  of  horse 
equipment,  instructs  the  men  in  the  nomenclature  of  the  various 
parts,  and  explains  the  use  of  these  parts. 

TO    FOLD    THE    SADDLE   BLANKET. 

409.  The  blanket,  after  being  well  shaken,  will  be  folded  into 
six  thicknesses,  as  follows:  Hold  it  well  up  by  two  adjacent 
corners,  the  longer  edges  vertical ;  double  it  lengthwise,  so  the 
fold  will  come  between  the  "  U  "  and  "  S,"  the  folded  corner 
in  the  left  hand ;  take  the  folded  corner  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  thumb  pointing  to  the  left;  slip 
the  left  hand  down  the  folded  edge  two-thirds  of  its  length  and 
seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  second  finger;  raise  the  hands  to 
the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the  blanket  extended  between  them ; 
bring  the  hands  together,  the  double  fold  falling  outward ;  pass 
the  folded  corner  from  the  right  hand  into  the  left  hand,  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  the  second  finger  of  the 
right  hand  between  the  folds,  seize  the  double  folded  corner; 
turn  the  left  disengaged  corner  in  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the  second  finger  of  the  right 

I  hand  stretching  and  evening  the  folds ;  after  evening  the  folds, 
i  grasp  the  corners  and  shake  the  blanket  well  in  order  to 
i  smooth  the  folds ;  raise  the  blanket  and  hold  the  upper  edge 
'  between  the  chin  and  breast ;  slip  the  hands  down  halfway,  the 

first  two  fingers  outside,  the  other  fingers  and  thumb  of  each 
.hand  inside;  seize  the  blanket  with  the  thumbs  and  first  two 
'  fingers,  let  the  part  under  the  chin  fall  forward ;  hold  the 
*  blanket  up,  arms  extended,  even  the  lower  edges;  retake  the 

middle  points  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  and  flirt  the 

autside  part  over  the  right  arm. 
The  blanket  is  thus  held  before  placing  it  on  the  horse. 


160  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

TO   PLTT   ON    THE   BLANKET    AND    SmCINGIJ]. 

410.  The  instructor  commands:  Blanket. 

Approach  the  horse  on  the  left  side,  with  the  blanket  folded 
and  held  as  just  described ;  place  it  well  forward  on  his  back 
by  tossing  the  part  of  the  blanket  over  the  right  arm  to  the 
right  side  of  the  horse,  still  keeping  hold  of  the  middle  points ; 
slide  the  blanket  once  or  twice  from  front  to  rear  to  smooth 
hair,  being  careful  to  raise  the  bhmket  in  bringing  it  forward; 
place  the  blanket  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  on  the 
withers  and  the  forertnger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  backbone, 
the  blanket  smooth ;  it  should  then  be  well  forward  with  the 
edges  on  the  left  side;  remove  the  locks  of  mane  that  may  be 
under  it ;  pass  the  buckle  end  of  the  surcingle  over  the  middle 
of  the  blanket  and  buckle  it  on  the  near  siile  a  little  below  the 
edge  of  the  blanket. 

411.  The  saddle  now  issued  is  the  McClellan  saddle,  as  shown 
on  page  161. 

412.  The  bridle  now  Issued  is  the  double  bridle,  model  1912, 
as  shown  on  page  105. 

TO    SADDLE. 

413.  For  instruction,  the  saddle  may  be  placed  4  yards  in 
rear  or  in  front  of  the  horse.  The  stirrups  ai'e  crossed  over  the 
seat,  the  right  stirrup  uppermost ;  the  cincha  and  cincha  strap 
are  crossed  above  the  stirrups,  the  strap  uppermost. 

The  blanket,  without  the  surcingle,  having  been  placed  as  pre- 
viously explained,  the  instructor  commands:  Saddle. 

Seize  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  left  hand  and  the 
cantle  with  the  right ;  approach  the  horse  on  the  left  side  from 
the  direction  of  the  croup  and  place  the  center  of  the  saddle  on 
the  middle  of  the  horse's  back,  the  front  end  of  the  side  bars 
about  three  fingers'  width  behind  the  points  of  the  shoulder 
blades ;  let  down  the  cincha  strap  and  cincha ;  pass  to  the 
right  side,  adjust  the  cincha  and  straps  and  see  that  the  blanket 
is  smooth ;  return  to  the  left  side,  run  the  left  hand,  back  up, 
down  the  withers  so  as  to  raise  the  blanket  slightly  under  the 
pommel  arch,  in  order  that  the  withers  may  not  be  pinched  or 
jtressed  upon;  take  the  cincha  strap  in  the  right  hand,  rem  U 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 


161 


under  the  horse  and  seize  the  cincha  ring  with  the  left  hand, 
pass  the  end  of  the  strap  between  the  ring  and  safe  and  through 
the  ring,  then  up  through  the  upper  ring  from  tlie  outside;  if 
necessary,  make  anotlier  fold  in  the  same  manner. 


COAT  ST/fAJ^fOnntL 
aJMJ£fiSWAf^ 

POnnCL 
FOOT  STAPLLJ....^^^- 


f cor  STAPLE  M  /  A'^r,.:-'y  ■. 
ceiorcificiJLm^  I  \x^  '^'y 

HALURSQU.'JiU       /'^^~- 
CHJAHTER  STfiAd(si££.         i 


STmUP  HSOC- 


imaup: 


-COAT  ■ST/fAP,CA/jn£. 

— SAOOL£  BAG  SWO. 

-FOOT  STAPLE,LOH 

p'^^'^LZS-W  BRASS  PINC. 


•FOOT  JTAPLl,HI6H 
QUARTER  5TRN>CANnE. 

^MALT£RSaU/fR£:. 
'3UDINGU0B 
QUfi/iTERSTRAPSAFL 

-fiiNs  chape: 

QUARTFR  STRAP  RWff 
■OSCHA  STRAP 
CISCHA  SAFE, 
yi  CWCHA  RINe. 

\^  CWCWl  COVER. 

■ HOR^^  HMR  CINCHA. 


McClelland  saddle. 

The  strap  is  fastened  as  follows:  Pass  the  end  through  the 
upper  ring  to  the  front  and  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  ;  place 
the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  between  the  outside  folds  of  the 
strap ;  pull  slQwly  from  the  horse  with  the  right  hand  and  take 
up  the  slack  with  the  left ;  cross  the  strap  over  the  folds,  pass 
the  end  of  it,  with  the  right  hand,  underneath  and  through  the 


162  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

upper  ring  back  to  the  folds ;  theu  down  aud  under  the  loop  that 
crosses  the  fold  aud  draw  it  tijrhtly  ;  secure  the  end  of  the  strap. 

Another  method  of  fasteuing  the  cincha  strap  is  as  follows: 
Pass  the  end  through  the  upper  ring  to  the  rear;  seize  it  with 
the  right  hand,  place  the  fingers  of  the  left  between  the  outer 
folds  of  the  strap;  pull  slowly  from  the  horse  with  the  left 
hand  and  take  up  the  slack  with  the  right ;  pass  the  end  of 
the  strap  underneath  and  draw  it  through  the  upper  ring  until 
a  loop  is  formed  ;  double  the  loose  end  of  the  strap  and  push 
it  through  the  loop  and  draw  the  loop  taut.  The  free  end  should 
then  be  long  enough  conveniently  to  seize  with  the  hand. 

Having  fastened  the  cincha  strap,  let  down  the  right  stirrup, 
then  the  left. 

The  surcingle,  if  used,  is  then  buckled  over  the  saddle,  and 
should  be  a  little  looser  tlian  the  cincha. 

In  saddling  the  horse  the  cincha  must  be  tightened  gradually, 
and  not  with  violence,  a  practice  that  if  persisted  in  renders  a 
horse  ill  tempered  and  mean  in  saddling. 

FITTING  THE  SADDLE. 

414.  Great  care  must  be  taken  in  the  fitting  and  adjustment 
of  saddles  to  prevent  sore  backs. 
There  are  six  axioms  in  saddle  fitting: 

1.  The  withers  must  not  be  pinched  nor  pressed  upon. 

2.  The  central  line  of  the  back  must  have  no  pressure  put 
upon  it. 

3.  The  shoulder  blades  must  have  full,  nnhampered  move- 
ment. 

4.  The  loins  must  not  carry  weight. 

5.  The  weight  must  be  put  upon  the  ribs  through  the  medium 
of  the  muscles  covering  them. 

G.  The  weight  nmst  be  evenly  distributed  over  a  surface 
which  extends  from  the  play  of  the  shoulders  to  the  last  true 
rib. 

To  fit  the  saddle:  1.  The  saddle,  without  blanket,  is  placed  In 
its  proper  position  on  the  back.  It  should  be  noted  whether  the 
upper  or  lower  edges  or  the  front  or  rear  of  the  5?ide  bars  gouge 
into  the  back  at  any  place.  If  this  occurs,  or  if  the  saddle 
when  lifted  from  the  back  a  distance  corresponding  to  the  thick- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  163 

ness  of  the  blanket  otherwise  fails  perceptiblj'  to  conform  to 
the  outlines  of  the  back,  the  test  and  remedy  described  below 
(5)  should  be  made  and  applied. 

2.  The  existence  of  wither  pressure  is  determined  by  blanket- 
ing and  saddling  the  horse  and  placing  an  assistant  in  the  sad- 
dle. The  hand  is  run  over  the  top  and  along  both  sides  of  the 
withers  beneath  the  blanket.  To  make  the  test  effective  the 
man  in  the  saddle  should  lean  forward,  and  the  examiner 
should  not  be  satisfied  with  anything  less  than  the  introduction 
of  his  entire  hand. 

3.  It  is  noted  that  the  central  line  of  the  back  and  also  that 
the  loins  bear  no  weight  even  when  the  assistant  in  the  saddle 
leans  to  the  front,  rear,  or  either  side. 

4.  To  determine  if  the  blade  bones  have  unhampered  move- 
ment, the  hand  is  passed  underneath  the  blanket  from  the 
front  until  the  play  of  the  shoulder  blade  can  be  felt.  The 
fore  leg  is  raised  and  advanced  to  its  full  extent  to  the  front 
by  an  assistant  while  the  hand  is  in  this  position.  If  this  can 
be  done  while  the  man  in  the  saddle  is  leaning  forward  without 
pinching  the  fingers  between  the  side  bars  and  the  shoulder 
blade,  the  fit  in  this  respect  is  satisfactory.  The  test  should  be 
made  on  both  shoulders.  If  the  fingers  are  pinched,  the  blade 
bones  will  also  be  pinched  and  the  action  of  the  horse  restricted. 
To  correct  the  diflaculty  the  saddle  must  be  raised,  assuming 
that  it  is  at  the  proper  place  on  the  back,  by  placing  under  it  a 
greater  thickness  of  blanket  or  by  attaching  pieces  of  felt  under 
the  side  bars. 

5.  To  ascertain  whether  the  pressure  of  the  side  bars  is  evenly 
distributed  the  saddle  is  ridden  for  half  an  hour  or  more.  On 
completion  of  the  ride  the  saddle  is  carefully  un girthed  and 
lifted  from  the  blanket  without  disturbing  the  latter  in  any 
way.  The  blanket  will  be  found  to  bear  the  imprint  of  the 
side  bars,  and  an  examination  of  this  depression  will  show  at 
a  glance  whether  the  bars  press  evenly  from  top  to  bottom  and 
from  front  to  rear.  This  examination  must  be  made  quickly, 
as  the  elasticity  of  the  blanket  soon  causes  it  to  lose  the  im- 
pression of  the^  side  bars.  Any  irregularity  in  the  fit  of  the 
side  bars  may  be  remedied  by  the  introduction  of  pieces  of  felt 
to  fill  up  the  spaces  between  the  side  bars  and  the  blanket. 
With  very  little  practice  these  pieces  of  felt  may  be  cut  to  the 


164  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

required  shape  and  thickness  with  a  very  shai-p  knife.  Some 
edges  will  need  to  be  as  thin  as  a  knife  edge ;  other  parts  may 
require  the  addition  of  more  than  one  thickness.  After  deter- 
mining where  these  pieces  of  felt  are  to  rest,  they  are  attached 
to  the  side  bars  with  glue  and  bound  in  place*  by  sheepskin 
tacked  to  the  side  bars.  The  most  radical  alterations  in  the 
fit  of  the  side  bars  can  be  effected  in  this  manner.  The  method 
is  simple  and  quick  and  can  easily  be  performed  by  the  average 
saddler. 

6.  The  cincha  should  be  sufficiently  tight  to  keep  the  saddle 
in  its  place  and  no  tighter.  Generally  speaking,  correct  cinch- 
ing has  been  obtained  when  the  flat  of  the  hand  is  easily  admitted 
under  the  quarter  ring  safe.  With  most  horses,  after  exercising 
for  a  while  the  cincha  will  be  found  too  loose  and  should  be 
taken  up. 

A  tight  cincha  restricts  the  animal's  breathing,  and  also 
brings  too  much  pressure  upon  and  strangles  the  tissues.  Espe- 
cially is  this  apt  to  be  the  case  under  the  quarter  and  cincha 
ring  safes,  when  strangulation  soon  causes  lumps,  puffs,  and 
sores, 

7.  Care  is  taken  that  the  quarter  straps  are  so  adjusted  and 
the  cincha  so  selected  that  the  cincha  ring  safe  will  be  a  suffi- 
cient distance  from  the  quarter  ring  safe  to  avoid  pinching 
and  galling  the  skin  between  them. 

TO  REMOVE  THE  SADDLE. 

415.  The  instructor  commands:  Unsaddle, 

Stand  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse ;  unbuckle  and  remove  the 
surcingle,  if  in  use;  cross  the  left  stirrup  over  the  saddle; 
loosen  the  cincha  strap  and  let  down  the  cincha;  pass  to  the 
right  side,  cross  the  right  stirrup,  then  the  cincha  over  the 
saddle;  pass  to  the  left  side,  cross  the  cincha  strap  over  the 
saddle ;  gi-asp  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand,  the  cantel  with  the 
right,  and  remove  the  saddle  over  the  croup  and  place  it  in  front 
or  rear  of  the  horse  as  may  be  directed,  pommel  to  the  front ; 
grasp  the  blanket  at  the  withers  with  the  left  hand  and  at  the 
loin  with  the  right,  remove  it  in  the  direction  of  the  croup,  the 
edges  falling  together,  wet  side  in,  and  place  it  across  the  saddle, 
folded  edge  on  the  pommel,  marked  side  of  the  blanket  upper- 


MACHINE. QTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 


166 


most ;  if  in  tlie  stable,  place  the  saddle  on  its  peg  wtien  taken  otf 
the  horse. 

TO   PUT   ON    THE  DOUBLE    BRIDLE. 

416.  The  instructor  commands:  Bridle. 

Take  the  double  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  crownpiece  in  the 
left ;  approach  the  horse  on  the  left  side ;  slip  the  reins  over  his 


Halter   briciie,   model   ol    lyli 


head,  letting  them  rest  on  his  neck ;  take  the  crownpiece  in  the 
right  hand  and  the  lower  left  branch  of  the  curb  bit  in  the  left, 
the  forefinger  against  the  mouthpiece ;  bring  the  crownpiece  in 
front  of  and  slightly  below  its  proper  position ;  insert  the  left 
thumb  into  the  left  side  of  the  mouth  above  the  tush;  press 


166  MACHINE-GTTN  DRIII  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

upon  the  lower  jaw,  insert  both  bits  by  raising  the  crownpiece, 
then  with  tlie  left  hand  draw  the  ears  gently  under  the  crown- 
piece,  beginning  with  the  left  ear;  arrange  the  forelock,  secure 
the  throat  latch  and  the  curb  chain,  take  care  to  adjust  them 
properly. 

The  bridle  with  snaffle  bit  only  is  put  on  in  a  similar  manner. 
A  bridle  with  curb  bit  only  is  not  permitted  to  be  used  on  the 
horses  of  individually  mounted  men.  The  curb  when  used 
alone  is  a  powerful  instrument  requiring  such  dexterity  in  its 
use  that  only  an  expert  horseman  on  a  perfectly  trained  horse 
is  capable  of  using  it  with  sufficient  delicacy  and  discretion  to 
obtain  perfect  control  without  injuring  the  horse. 

A  horse  quickly  resents  and  is  easily  frightened  by  abrupt 
or  sudden  movements  about  his  head.  Bridling  should,  there- 
fore, be  done  in  a  most  deliberate  and  careful  manner.  The  ears 
are  especially  sensitive,  and  extreme  care  nuist  be  used  in  draw- 
ing them  under  the  crownpiece  and  into  their  place.  A  reliable 
test  that  a  horse  has  not  been  mistreated  in  bridling  is  that  he 
permits,  without  sign  of  fear  or  resentment,  the  gentle  stroking 
of  his  ears. 

417.  Except  in  the  field,  or  when  equipped  for  field  service  or 
when  the  duty  is  such  as  to  make  it  necessary  to  tie  up  a  horse, 
the  halter  is  taken  off  before  bridling,  the  reins  being  first  passed 
over  the  neck. 

If  the  halter  is  not  taken  off,  the  halter  strap  is  tied  in  the 
left  pommel  ring,  or,  if  the  horse  be  not  saddled,  around  his 
neck.  AVhen  the  halter  is  to  remain  on,  care  should  be  taken 
that  the  halter  rope  is  untied  from  the  manger  before  attempt- 
ing to  bridle  a  horse  that  is  liable  to  pull  back. 

TO  FIT  THE  SNAFFLE  BRIDU:. 

418.  1.  The  cheek  straps  are  adjusted  so  that  they  are  of  even 
length  and  so  that  the  snafTle  rests  easily  in,  but  does  not  draw 
itp  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  A  mouthpiece  that  is  too  low 
strikes  the  tushes  and  makes  them  sore ;  one  that  it  too  high 
causes  the  horse  discomfort  and  makes  the  corners  of  his 
mouth  sore. 

2.  The  brow  band  is  examined.  If  it  is  too  short,  it  causes 
the  sensitive  skin  at  the  base  and  back  of  the  ears  to  be  galled 


f 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  167 

or  cut  by  the  crownpiece.     If  it  is  too  Iiigti  on  tlie  crownpiece, 
it  causes  the  same  trouble  at  the  base  and  sides  of  the  ear. 

3.  The  throat  latcli  is  bucliled  loosely,  being  only  sufficiently 
tight  to  prevent  the  crownpiece  from  slipping  over  the  horse's 
ears.  Generally  speaking,  it  should  permit  the  entire  flat  of 
the  hand  to  be  inserted  between  it  and  the  throat  when  the 
horse's  head  is  reined  in.  A  tight  throatlatch  interferes  with 
the  large  blood  vessels  of  the  neck,  with  the  gullet,  and  also 
with  the  windpipe. 

4.  The  mane  and  forelock  are  carefully  smoothed  out  under 
the  crownpiece  to  avoid  causing  a  sore  at  the  poll  and  also  to 
present  a  neat  and  tidy  appearance. 

TO  FIT  THE  DOUBLE  BEIDLE. 

419.  1.  The  snaffle  is  fitted  as  described  in  the  preceding 
paragraph. 

2.  A  curb  bit  is  selected  with  a  mouthpiece  of  such  length  that 
the  branches  bear  easily  against  the  horse's  lips.  A  narrow  bit 
pinches  the  lips,  while  a  wide  one  works  about  and  bruises 
the  lips  and  the  bars.  The  mouthpiece  is  best  examined  for 
width  by  inspecting  it  from  the  underside  of  the  lower  jaw. 

3.  The  cheek  straps  are  adjusted  so  that  the  mouthpiece  of  the 
bit  rests  as  near  as  possible  opposite  the  chin  groove,  but  touch- 
ing neither  the  tushes  nor  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  Generally 
speaking,  the  bit  should  rest  about  1  inch  above  the  tushes  of 
horses  and  about  2  inches  above  the  corner  teeth  of  mares.  It 
rides  below  the  snaffle. 

4.  The  curb  chain  is  fastened  outside  and  below  the  snaffle.  It 
must  be  twisted  to  the  right  until  it  lies  flat,  and  it  should  rest 
in  the  chin  groove  opposite  the  mouthpiece  of  the  bit.  If  not 
properly  adjusted  it  will  have  a  tendency  to  ride  up  and  press 
upon  the  sharp  bones  of  the  lower  jaw.  The  curb  chain  should 
be  loose  enough  to  admit  the  flat  of  two  fingers  between  it  and 
the  chin  groove  when  the  branches  of  the  bit  are  in  line  with  the 
cheek  straps.  When  brought  to  bear,  the  branches  of  the  curb 
bit  should  make  an  angle  of  about  45°  with  the  line  of  the  horse's 
mouth. 

When  horses  are  restive  it  is  often  due  to  faulty  adjustmeat 
of  the  bits  and  curb  chain. 


168  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGTJLATIONS,   1917. 

5.  The  tliroatlatch  and  brow  band  are  fitted  as  directed  in 
paragraph  41S. 

TO  REMOVE  THE  DOUBLE  BRIDLE. 

420.  The  instructor  commands :  Unbridle. 

Stand  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse;  pass  the  reins  over  the 
horse's  head,  placing  them  on  the  bend  of  the  left  arm ;  unbuckle 
the  throatlatch,  grasp  the  crownpiece  with  the  right  and  assisting 
with  the  left  hand,  gently  disengage  the  ears ;  grasp  the  bit  with 
the  left  hand,  and  gently  disengage  it  from  the  horse-s  mouth  by 
lowering  the  crownpiece  ;  place  the  crownpiece  in  the  palm  of  the 
left  hand,  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  pass  them  together 
over  the  crownpiece,  make  two  (u-  three  turns  around  the  bridle, 
then  pass  the  bight  between  the  brow  band  and  crownpiece  and 
draw  it  snug. 

The  bridle  is  hung  up  by  the  reins  or  placed  across  the  saddle 
on  the  blanket. 

If  the  horse  has  no  halter,  unbridle  and  push  the  bridle  back 
so  that  the  crownpiece  will  rest  on  the  ufck  behind  the  poll  until 
the  halter  is  replaceil. 

TO  ROLL  THE  OVERCOAT. 

421.  Spread  the  overcoat  on  the  ground,  inside  down,  skirt 
buttoned  throughout,  sleeves  parallel  to  the  middle  seam,  collar 
turned  over  on  the  shoulders. 

Turn  the  tails  of  the  coat  under  about  9  inches,  the  folded  edge 
perpendicular  to  the  back  seam.  Fold  over  the  sides  to  form  a 
rectangle  not  more  than  34  inches  across,  according  to  the  size 
of  the  coat.  Roll  tightly  from  the  collar  with  the  hands  and 
knees  and  bring  over  the  whole  roll  that  part  of  the  skirt  which 
was  turned  under,  thus  binding  the  roll. 

THE  BLANKET  ROLL  FOR  INDIVIDL"^ALLY  MOUNTED  MEN. 

422.  Spread  the  shelter  half  on  the  ground,  roll  straps  under- 
neath, and  fold  over  the  triangular  part  on  the  rectangular 
part.  Turn  under  the  roll  strap  edge  of  the  shelter  half  so  that 
the  width  of  the  fold  will  be  8  inches.     Fold  the  blanket  once 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  169 

across  the  longer  edges  and  lay  the  blanket  on  the  shelter  half, 
folded  edge  within  1  inch  of  the  roll  strap  edge  of  the  shelter 
half.  Fold  the  sides  of  the  blanket  and  of  the  shelter  half  in- 
ward, width  of  folds  about  11  inches.  The  shelter  tent  pole 
and  pins  are  now  laid  on  the  blanket  at  the  edge  farthest  from 
the  roll  strap  edge,  pole  on  one  si<le  of  the  center  line,  pins  on 
the  other,  so  as  to  allow  the  roll  when  completed,  to  bend  at  the 
center.  Place  the  underclothing  on  the  blanket.  If  the  coat  is 
to  go  in  the  roll,  spread  it  smoothly  over  the  blanket. 

Roll  tightly  toward  the  roll  strap  edge,  using  hands  and  knees, 
and  bring  over  the  entire  roll  the  part  of  the  shelter  half  which 
was  turned  under,  thus  binding  the  roll.  Buckle  the  two  avail- 
able roll  straps  about  the  roll,  passing  them  around  twice.  The 
roll  thus  formed  should  be  about  44  inches  long. 

TO  PACK  THE   SADDLEBAGS. 

423.  Saddlebags  are  packed  as  follows  : 

/?i  right  pocket. 

Inside  of  lining :  Outside  of  lining,  toilet  articles : 
1  currycomb.  1  cake  soap. 

1  horse  brush.  1  comb. 

1  grooming  cloth.  1  toothbrush. 

2  fitted  horseshoes  (with  1  tooth  paste. 

nailrf).  1  towel. 

In  left  pocket. 

1  meat  can.  1  cup  ( if  old  mod.  equipment ) . 

1  knife.  1  bacon  can. 

1  fork.  1  condiment  can. 

1  spoon.  2  days'  reserve  rations. 

TO   PACK    THE    SADDLE. 

424.  The  overcoat,  when  carried,  is  rolled  as  prescribed,  and 
strapped  on  the  pommel. 


170  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

When  the  slicker  is  carried,  either  with  or  without  the  over- 
coat, it  is  suspended  vertically  from  the  collar,  folded  two  or 
three  times  across  its  short  dimension  so  as  to  leave  the  outside 
of  the  slicker  out,  and  then  thrown  across  the  horse's  withers, 
collar  to  the  left  and  coat  hanging  evenly  on  the  two  sides. 
The  slicker  is  then  secured  in  the  middle,  with  center  pommel 
coat  strap  only. 

425.  The  saddlebags,  packed  as  prescribed,  are  attached  to 
rear  of  saddle  by  saddlebag  stud  and  staples  and  to  cincha  rings 
by  saddlebag  straps. 

The  blanket  roll,  made  as  prescribed,  is  strapped  to  cantle 
with  one  short  strap  and  to  the  saddlebag  rings  with  two  long 
(60-inch)  straps;  short  strap  drawn  tightly. 

The  feed  bag,  folded  neatly,  with  marking  displayed,  is  se- 
cured under  straps  of  left  saddlebag. 

The  canteen  is  snapped  to  right  cantle  ring. 

The  lariat,  attached  to  the  picket  pin  by  lariat  strap,  is  neatly 
and  tightly  wound  about  the  picket  pin  and  secured.  The  picket 
pin  is  then  snapped  to  left  cantle  ring. 

TO    STAND  TO   HEEL. 

426.  The  instructor  commands:  Stand  to  Heel.  Each  man 
stands  at  attention  1  yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  heel  post. 
At  the  picket  line  he  is  1  yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  horse. 

TO  stand  to  horse. 

427.  The  instructor  commands :  Stand  to  Horse.  Each  man 
places  himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on  the  left  side  of  his  horse, 
eyes  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  horse's  head,  so  that  he  can 
see  along  the  front,  and  takes  the  position  of  attention,  except 
that  the  right  hand,  back  uppermost,  grasps  both  reins,  fore- 
finger between  them,  about  6  inches  from  the  bit.  The  reins  are 
on  the  horse's  neck. 

TO    MOUNT. 

428.  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  Mount. 

At  the  first  command  drop  the  right  rein,  take  two  back  steps, 
stepping  off  with  the  left  foot,  at  the  same  time  sliding  the  right 
hand  along  the  left  rein;  half  face  to  the  right;  this  should 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  171 

place  the  man  about  opposite  the  girth;  with  the  aid  of  the 
left  hand  take  both  reins  in  the  right,  forefinger  between  the 
reins,  and  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel,  the  reins  com- 
ing into  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  forefinger  and  held  so  as 
to  feel  lightly  the  horse's  mount,  the  bight  falling  on  the  right 
side.  Place  a  third  of  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  with  the 
assistance  of  the  left  hand  if  necessary ;  rest  upon  the  ball  of 
the  right  foot ;  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  coming  out  iDetween  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

At  the  command  mount,  spring  from  the  right  foot,  holding 
firmly  to  the  mane  and  keeping  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel ; 
pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  of  the  horse  with- 
out touching  him;  sit  down  gently  in  the  saddle;  let  go  the 
mane,  insert  the  right  food  in  the  stirrup,  pass  the  reins  into 
the  left  hand  and  adjust  them. 

POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

429.  The  body  should  be  balanced  on  the  middle  of  the 
saddle,  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  chin  slightly  drawn 
in.  Buttocks  should  bear  equally,  and  as  flat  as  possible,  upon 
the  middle  of  the  saddle.  Reins  come  into  the  left  hand  on  the 
side  of  the  little  finger  and  leave  it  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger;  little  finger  between  the  reins,  right  rein  above  it; 
the  other  fingers  are  closed,  thumb  pointing  to  the  right  front 
in  prolongation  of  the  forearm  and  pressing  the  reins  firmly  on 
second  joint  of  the  forefinger.    The  end  of  the  reins  fall  to  the 

!  front  and  outside  of  the  right  rein.  The  left  forearm  is  held 
I  close  to  the  body  without  pressure,  the  back  of  the  hand  nearly 
I  vertical ;  the  left  hand  in  front  of  the  pommel  of  the  saddle 
I  and  as  close  to  the  top  of  the  horse's  withers  as  possible,  with- 
'  out  resting  on  the  pommel.  The  right  hand  rests  behind  the 
I  thigh,  arm  hanging  naturally.  The  feet  are  inserted  in  the 
!  stirrup  so  that  the  ball  of  foot  rests  on  the  tread  of  the  stirrup, 
\  heel  slightly  lower  than  the  tread. 

STIRRUPS. 

430.  The  stirrups  should  support  the  feet  and  the  weight  of 
1  the  legs  only,  and  be  of  such  length  that  when  the  legs  are  in 


172  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

proper  position,  the  feet  out  of  the  stirrups,  the  treads  will  be 
on  a  level  with  the  lower  part  of  the  inner  ankle  bone. 

The  length  depends  somewhat  on  the  formation  of  the  man ;  a 
man  with  a  thick,  heavy  thigh  requires  a  shorter  stirrup  than 
a  man  with  a  thin,  flat  one.  For  long  distances  at  the  gallop 
and  trot,  a  shorter  stirrup  is  required  than  at  a  walk. 

When  riding,  the  stirrups  take  up,  in  a  measure,  the  weight 
of  the  body  in  its  descent  to  the  saddle,  by  yielding  of  the  ankles 
to  prevent  shock.  This  action  is  an  easy,  quick  stiffening  of  the 
muscles,  which  distributes  the  downward  motion  between  the 
feet,  thighs,  and  seat. 

If.  after  the  man  has  exercised  a  shoi-t  time  at  the  slow  trot, 
he  has  a  close  seat,  his  leg  in  proper  position,  with  his  heel 
down,  but  does  not  easily  keep  his  stirrup,  then  Wie  stirrup  re- 
quires shortening. 

TO   DISMOUNT. 

431.  1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command  seize  the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  in 
front  of  and  near  the  left,  forefinger  between  the  reins  so  that 
they  come  in  on  the  side  of  the  forefinger ;  place  the  right  hand 
on  the  pommel ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  grasp  a  lock  of  the 
mane,  the  lock  coming  out  between  the  thuml)  and  forefinger ; 
take  the  right  foot  out  of  the  stirrup;  partly  disengage  the  left 
foot,  body  erect. 

At  the  command  di.wiount,  rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the 
right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  of  the  horse  without  touch- 
ing him ;  descend  lightly  to  the  ground,  remove  the  left  foot 
from  the  stirrup  and  place  it  by  the  side  of  the  right,  body 
erect ;  let  go  the  mane ;  place  the  end  of  the  reins  on  the  neck 
near  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  right  hand,  which  then 
seizes  the  left  rein ;  face  to  the  left,  take  two  short  steps,  left 
foot  first.  Slip  the  right  hand  along  the  left  rein,  and  take  the 
position  of  stand  to  horse, 

GATHERING    THE     HORSE. 

432.  Before  the  horse  is  required  to  execute  any  movement 
be  should  be  given  a  preparatory  signal.  This  signal  should 
be  given  at  the  time  of  the  preparatory  command  or  signal. 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIOhS.    1917.  173 

Whatever  the  nioveinent  to  be  executed,  the  sij^nal  is  ahxays 
the  same.  Its  oliject  is  to  attract  his  attention  and  to  prepare 
liini  for  a  movement.     This  is  called  gathei^infj  the  horse. 

Ha  vine:  a  light  pressure  of  the  bit  airainst  the  horse's  mouth 
and  a  liaiit  feel  of  the  lov/or  legs  against  his  sides,  the  rider, 
in  order  to  gather  him.  increases  the  pressure  of  the  lower 
legs,  with  heels  well  shoved  down,  and  slightly  increases  the 
tension  of  the  reins.  These  pressures  are  increased  intermit- 
tently until  the  elastic  movement  of  the  horse  under  the  rider 
indicates  that  the  former  has  observed  the  signal. 

If  when  at  a  halt  the  horse  backs  or  when  marching  de- 
creases the  gait,  the  tension  applied  to  the  reins  has  been  too 
great.  If  when  at  a  Iialt  the  horse  moves  forward  or  when 
marching  he  increases  the  pace  or  gait,  the  impulse  given  him 
with  the  legs  has  not  been  met  or  controlled  by  the  reins. 

Each  force  should  exactly  balance  the  other  and  the  horse, 
held  l)etween  the  two,  should  feel  responsive  to  the  indications 
and  aids  of  the  rider. 

TO    ]Sr0VE    rORWAED. 

433.  Being  at  a  halt :  1.  Foncard,  2.  March.  At  the  first 
command  the  rider  gathers  the  horse ;  at  the  second  he  simul- 
taneously (1)  pushes  his  buttocks  to  the  front,  (2)  acts  with 
both  legs  according  to  the  temperament  of  the  horse,  (3)  eases 
the  reins  by  slightly  relaxing  the  fingers,  giving  the  wrist, 
without  losing  contact.  The  aids  cease  to  be  active  as  soon 
as  obedience  is  obtained. 

TO   HALT. 

434.  Being  at  the  walk:  Halt.  The  rider  sits  well  (ToAvn  in 
the  saddle  and  gathers  the  horse;  he  then  simultaneously  (1) 
closes  the  fingers  on  the  reins,  bending  the  wrist  and  if  neces- 
sary moving  the  hands  in  and  back  with  the  body;  (2)  slightly 
increases  the  pressure  of  the  legs;  (3)  imposes  the  weight  of 
his  body  against  the  horse's  back  by  convexing  his  loins  back- 
ward. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  slackens  the  gait  ever  so  little  th.e  pres- 
sure of  the  fingers  and  legs  is  slightly  relaxed  to  reward  him 
.33325"— 18 7 


174  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

for  his  obedience.     It  is  then  reapplied  and  again  relaxed  until 
the  horse  has  completed  the  movement  desired. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  horse  from  halting  entirely  on  the 
forelegs,  the  rider  must  increase  the  pressure  of  his  legs  to 
induce  the  horse  to  engage  his  hind  legs  farther  under  the  mass. 
By  convexing  his  loins  and  imposing  his  weight  against  the 
muscular  activity  of  the  horse's  back  the  rider  limits  the 
functionizing  of  the  muscles  whicli  control  impulsion  and  thus 
permits  the  hind  legs  to  participate  in  stopping  or  in  reducing 
the  gait.  It  is  faulty  to  lean  back  in  an  exaggerated  position, 
because  of  the  tendency  to  permit  the  legs  and  thighs  to  go 
forward  and  to  act  with  a  dead  pull  of  the  reins  on  the  horse's 
mouth  :  if  done  abruptly,  it  is  painful  to  a  horse  and  may  cause 
him  to  halt  in  a  hard  and  jolty  manner. 

ESTABLISHING  CONFIDENCE. 

435.  The  first  object  to  be  attained  in  elementary  instruction 
in  equitation  is  to  establish  the  confidence  of  the  rider.  Many 
recruits,  especially  those  who  have  never  before  had  any  experi- 
ence with  horses,  entertain  an  instinctive  and  unreasoning 
timidity,  which  can  be  overcome  only  by  slow,  careful,  and  quiet 
instruction,  involving  judgment  and  tact  on  the  part  of  the 
instructor. 

Only  quiet,  gentle,  and  well-trained  horses  are  used  in  the 
instruction  of  recruits.  Effort  must  be  made  to  avoid  falls  or 
other  accidents  which  might  spoil  the  beginner's  nerve  and  so 
retnrd  his  progress. 

AVith  this  object  in  view  the  beginner  is  permitted  to  use 
the  same  horse  for  the  fir.st  few  mounted  lessons.  "When  it  is 
Seen  that  he  is  beginning  to  understand  his  mount,  horses  and 
riders  are  changed,  usually  with  each  lesson,  and  the  training 
of  a  soldier  should  be  considered  incomplete  and  unsatisfactory 
until  the  average  animal  goes  quietly  and  pleasantly  with  him 
at  any  gait. 

For  the  first  few  lessons,  both  as  a  measure  of  security  and 
to  avoid  weariness,  stirrups  should  be  used.  In  some  cases 
greater  security  is  also  afforded  if  the  stirrups  are  connected  by 
a  strap  passing  under  the  horse's  belly  and  of  such  length  thai 
the  man's  knees  are  not  drawn  away  from   the  saddle.     The 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  175 

strap  saves  falls,  because  it  prevents  the  rider's  legs  from  flying 
out  in  any  direction  ;  and  the  contidence  it  instills  enables  him 
to  acquire  balance  more  quickly. 

Later  lessons,  ])oth  for  the  purpose  of  acquiring  confidence 
and  learning  balance,  must  include  riding  without  s:.irrups. 
Confidence  is  also  imparted  through  riding  without  reins.  This 
is  one  of  the  best  ways  for  a  beginner  to  acquire  a  good  strong 
seat,  which  is  independent  of  the  reins.  Fixity  of  the  seat 
helps  1o  produce  good  Imnds. 

The  early  mounted  lessons  are  conducted  at  a  walk.  The  trot 
and  then  later  the  gallop  are  taken  up  as  soon  as  practicable, 
but  not  until  the  instructor  judges  that  the  confidence  acquired 
justifies  proceeding  to  the  faster  gaits. 

GAITS    OF    HOESES. 

436.  The  gaits  are  the  walk,  trot,  canter,  and  gallop. 

The  icalk  is  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour,  or  1  mile  in  15 
minutes,  or  117J  yards  in  a  minute. 

The  maneuvering  trot  is  at  a  rate  of  8  miles  an  hour,  or  1 
mile  in  7|  minutes,  or  234 J  yards  a  minute.  For  purposes  of  in- 
dividual instruction  the  rate  of  the  trot  may  be  diminished  to 
the  rate  of  G  or  6^  miles  an  hour  by  the  command  slow  trot.  At 
the  command  trot  out,  the  rate  is  8  miles  an  hour. 

The  eanter  is  at  the  rate  of  8  miles  an  hour  and  is  generally 
used  for  individual  instruction. 

The  maneuvering  gallop  is  at  the  rate  of  12  miles  an  hour,  or 
1  mile  in  5  minutes,  or  352  yards  a  minute. 

The  length  of  the  stride  is  about  10  feet. 

The  full  or  extended  gallop  is  at  the  rate  of  IG  miles  an  hour. 

ANALYSIS    OF   GAITS. 
THE    WALK. 

437.  The  walk  is  a  gait  in  which  the  feet  are  lifted  in  succes- 
sion and  put  down  in  the  order  of  their  lifting.  If  the  right 
front  foot  begins  the  gait,  the  other  feet  are  lifted  in  the  fol- 
lowing order :  Left  hind,  left  front,  right  hind.  The  walk  should 
be  free,  easy,  and  elastic. 


176  MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

THE  TROT. 

438.  The  trot  is  a  gait  at  which  the  horse  springs  from  one 
diagonally  disposed  pair  of  feet  to  the  otlier ;  between  tlie  beats 
all  the  feet  are  in  the  air.  The  right  front  and  the  left  hind 
are  called  the  right  diagonal,  the  left  front  and  the  right  hind 
the  left  diagonal. 

THE    GALLOP. 

439.  The  gallop  is  the  most  rapid  of  gaits.  It  must  not  be 
used  unnecessarily  over  long  distances,  particularly  on  hard 
roads,  where  the  concussion  on  the  feet  is  severe,  nor  when  the 
saddle  is  packed.  However,  when  the  rapidity  of  the  normal 
trot  is  not  sufricient  the  rider,  when  out  alone,  would  take  the 
gallop  in  preferenr-e  to  increasing  the  speed  of  the  trot. 

The  horse  is  said  to  lend  right  when  the  feet  on  the  right 
side  are  more  advanced  than  the  corresponding  feet  on  the  left 
side.  AMien  the  feet  are  advanced  in  the  inverse  order  the  horse 
is  said  to  lead  left. 

The  gallop  is  marked  by  three  beats  and  a  period  of  suspen- 
sion. 

If  the  horse  be  leading  right,  the  first  beat  is  marked  by 
the  left  hind  foot,  the  second  by  the  nearly  simultaneous  plac- 
ing of  the  right  hind  and  left  front  feet,  and  the  third  by  the 
placing  of  the  right  front  foot.  The  horse  then  leaps  into  the 
air  from,  and  advances,  the  right  front  foot.  In  leading  left 
the  beats  are  right  hind,  left  hind,  and  right  front,  left  front. 

A  horso  gjillops  true  when  he  leads  right  in  turning  to  the 
right,  and  leads  left  in  turning  to  the  left. 

He  gallops  false  when  he  leads  left  in  turning  to  the  right, 
or  conversely.  A  horse  is  united  when  he  gallops  right  (left) 
in  front  and  right  (left)  beliind.  He  is  disunited  when  he 
gallops  right  in  front  and  left  behind,  or  conversely. 

The  gallop  should  be  begun  on  the  circle,  because  the  feet 
are  then  favorably  placed  for  taking  and  maintaining  the 
proper  lead.  The  horses  thus  start  off  more  calmly,  and  the 
rider  is  enable  to  regulate  the  pace  by  describing  a  circle  of 
greater  or  less  circumference. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  breaks  into  the  gallop,  the  rider  should 
move  in  cadence  with  his  horse.     The  back  and  legs  unite  in 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  177 

the  rythm  of  tlie  gait,  the  hands  accompany  gently  and  icithoiit 
exaggeration  the  movements  of  the  head  and  neck.  ■ 

Dnring  the  gallop  the  command  at  case  is  frequently  given. 
The  riders  execute  the  suppling  exercises  which  htivo  been 
indicated  as  necessary  in  each  case;  they  abandon  themselves 
completely  to  the  motion  of  tlie  horse,  and  thus  acquire  ease 
and  flexibility.  Prolonged  periods  at  the  gallop  on  calm  and 
free-moving  horses  are  most  favorable  for  easily  obtaining  this 
result. 

The  canter  is  tlie  collected  or  school  gallop. 

Section  III. — Leading  the  ^NIule. 

440.  The  mule  when  hitched  is  led  and  maneuvered  by  means 
of  the  Inidle.  \Vhen  leading  the  mule,  the  soldier  takes  posi- 
tion on  his  near  side,  holding  the  reins  near  the  bit  in  the  right 
hand  and  the  loose  end  of  the  reins  in  the  left  hand. 

To  gather  the  mule,  the  riglit  hand  is  raised  slightly  until  it 
touches  his  lower  jaw.  The  mule  must  always  be  gathered  be- 
fore moving,  l^efore  halting,  and  before  changing  gait  or  direc- 
tion. 

The  mule  must  never  be  faced  or  threatened  by  the  man  lead- 
ing him.  He  must  l)e  taught  by  quiet  and  gentle  treatment  to 
effect  all  changes  of  gait  and  direction  evenly.  He  should  not 
be  turned  short,  but  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  of  2  yards'  radius. 
He  should  be  led  with  a  loose  rein  and  urged  on,  if  he  lags, 
from  the  rear. 

Section  IV. — Harness. 

441.  Brackets  will  be  placed  on  the  heelposts  of  each  stall 
as  follows : 

On  the  right-hand  heelpost  the  bracket  will  be  placed  to  re- 
ceive the  reins,  bridle,  breast  strap,  and  traces.  On  tlie  left- 
hand  heelpost  the  bracket  will  be  placed  to  receive  the  breeching 
and  saddle. 

442.  In  the  field  the  harness  will  be  laid  on  top  of  the  carts 
and  covered  with  a  paulin. 


178  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

TO    HARNESS. 

443.  The  instructor  causes  a  mule  to  be  harnessed;  points 
out  and  names  the  various  parts  of  the  harness  and  explains 
their  use.  He  then  has  the  harness  taken  off  and  replaced  on 
the  brackets. 

The  harness  being  on  the  heelposts,  the  instructor  causes  the 
men  to  stand  to  heel  and  commands:  Hakness.  At  this  com- 
mand each  driver  places  the  harness  upon  the  mule  in  the  fol- 
io v.ing  order : 

Saddle  and  hrcecMng. — The  driver  grasps  the  saddle  in  his 
left  hand,  slips  his  left  forearm  under  saddle,  grasps  the 
breeching  in  his  right  hand,  and  approaches  the  mule  on  the 
near  side ;  places  the  breeching  on  the  mule  gently  and  lifts  the 
saddle  into  position  on  the  mule's  back,  being  careful  that  the 
turnback  is  tight.     He  then  tightens  the  belly  band. 

Breast  fit  rap  and  traees. — The  driver  grasps  the  neckband 
with  the  left  hand,  the  two  traces  being  folded  over  and  held 
in  the  left  hand.  He  then  releases  the  halter  shank  from  the 
manger  and  passes  it  through  the  opening  between  the  breast 
strap  and  the  neckband.  The  neckband  is  then  passed  over 
the  mule's  head  and  placed  in  position  with  shoulder  straps  so 
adjusted  that  the  breast  strap  will  remain  horizontal. 

The  trace  on  the  near  side  is  then  passed  through  the  loin 
loop  and  laid  across  the  mule's  back.  The  trace  on  the  off  side 
is  similarly  placed. 

Bridle  and  eheck  rein. — The  driver  will  place  the  check  rein 
over  the  mule's  head ;  put  the  bridle  on,  adjust  it,  and  fasten 
the  check  rein  to  the  saddle. 

If  the  halter  has  not  been  removed,  the  halter  shank  should 
be  passed  around  the  mule's  neck  and  fastened.  The  driver  then 
takes  post  on  the  near  side  of  the  mule,  grasping  the  lead  rein 
6  or  S  inches  from  the  bit  and  holding  the  shank  of  the  lead 
rein  in  his  left  hand. 

TO  HITCH. 

444.  The  instructor  commands :  Hitch. 

P^ach  driver  leads  his  mule  to  the  front  of  the  shafts  and 
backs  him  into  position.  The  shafts  are  raised  and  inserted  in 
the  shaft  loops.     He  then  buckles  the  shaft-loop  straps  suffi- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGULATION   .   1917.  179 

ciently  tight  to  hold  the  sliafts  in  position.  In  fastening  the 
shaft-loop  strap  care  should  he  t-aken  that  this  strap  passes  on 
the  outside  of  the  trace. 

Traces.— The  trace  on  the  near  side  is  next  fastened  to  the 
singletree  by  means  of  the  trace  chains.  The  one  on  tlie  off 
side  is  similarly  fastened. 

Quarter  straps. — The  n.ear-side  quarter  strap  is  passed  under 
the  trace,  between  the  shaft  and  the  quarter-strap  loop,  around 
the  shaft,  and  buckled.  The  off-side  quarter  strap  is  similarly 
fastened. 

Tlie  driver  then  takes  post  on  the  near  side  of  the  mule  and 
near  his  head,  grasping  the  lead  rein  in  his  right  hand,  with  the 
loose  eu'l  in  his  left  hand,  and  remains  at  attention. 

TO   UNHITCH. 

445.  Quarter  straps. — Quarter  straps  are  unfastened  and  the 
loose  ends  passed  down  through  the  quarter-strap  loops. 

Traces. — Trace  chains  are  unfastened  and  the  traces  laid  over 
the  mule's  back. 

The  shaft-loop  strap. — The  shaft-loop  strap  is  released  and 
the  shafts  lowered  gently  to  the  ground. 

TO   UNHAENESS. 

446.  The  mule  being  harnessed  the  instructor  commands  :  Un- 
HAKXEss.  At  this  command  the  harness  will  be  removed  as 
follows : 

Bridle  and  checlcrein. — The  driver  unsnaps  the  checkrein  from 
the  saddle,  takes  off  the  bridle ;  unties  the  halter  shank  from 
around  the  nude's  neck  and  holds  it  in  his  left  hand. 

Breast  strap  and  traces. — The  trace  on  the  near  side  is  pulled 
forward  out  of  the  loin  loop  and  is  passed  over  the  breast  strap 
between  the  two  shoulder  straps.  The  trace  on  the  offside  is- 
arranged  in  a  similar  manner.  The  breast  strap  is  raised  with 
the  left  hand  and  the  neck  band  passed  over  the  mule's  ears. 
The  left  forearm  is  passed  under  the  neck  band  and  the  mule  is 
then  tied  to- the  manger. 

The  bridle  and  breast  strap  are  replaced  on  the  bracket  on 
the  heelpost. 


180  MACHINE-GTTN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

Saddle  and  hreeching. — The  bellyband  is  loosened.  With  the 
left  hand  under  the  forward  edge  of  the  saddle  and  the  right 
hand  grasping  the  hip  straps  the  harness  is  lifted  upward  and 
to  the  rear  clear  of  the  mule.  The  left  forearm  is  slipped 
under  the  saddle,  and  the  breeching  is  brought  forward  so  that 
the  back  strap  can  be  grasped  by  the  left  hand.  The  harness  is 
nov/  replaced  ou  the  bracket. 

FITTT>-G    HABNES3. 

447.  The  cart  harness  consists  of  a  breast  strap  and  traces,  or 
Dutch  collar,  saddle,  and  breeching. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  familiar  with  harnessing  and 
unharnessing  he  should  be  thoroughly  instructed  in  the  fitting 
of  harness.  Tliis  subject  should  be  given  proper  attention, 
everything  being  done  to  impres's  upon  the  soldier  its  im- 
portance. 

Bridle. — The  bridle  is  fitted  as  described  in  the  soldier 
mounted. 

Chcckrcin. — The  checkreiu  should  be  so  fitted  that  it  will  not 
exert  pressure  on  the  bit  unless  the  mule  lowers  his  head  from 
its  normal  position. 

A  checkreiu  that  is  too  tight  puts  the  animal  at  a  disad- 
vantage when  he  is  required  to  pull  a  heavy  load ;  in  addition, 
it  wili  cause  him  to  fret  and  is  apt  to  make  him  vicious. 

Breast  strap. — The  breast  strap  should  be  so  fitted  by  means 
of  the  shoulder  straps  that  it  will  remain  horizontal  and  Uear  on 
the  fleshy  part  of  the  mule's  breast.  Care  should  be  taken  that 
it  is  not  adjusted  high  enough  to  come  in  contact  with  the 
windpipe.  If  the  breast  strap  is  too  low  it  will  make  the 
animal  awkward  in  movement. 

Saddle. — The  saddle  should  be  placed  in  rear  of  the  withers 
approximately  4  fingers'  breadth  from  the  shoulder  blade.  In 
no  case  should  it  be  placed  so  that  it  will  come  in  contact  with 
the  backbone  or  withers. 

Breeeh  strap. — The  breech  strap  should  be  so  adjusted  that 
it  will  bear  quickly  when  the  mule  is  required  to  check  the 
movement  of  the  cart,  but  will  not  impede  his  movement  while 
pulling.  This  adjustment  is  very  important.  It  can  best  be 
made  by  watching  the  mule  while  pulling  and  tightening  the 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIZONS,   1917.  181 

straps  as  much  as  can  be  done  without  impeding  the  free  move- 
ment of  the  animal. 

Hip  straps. — The  liip  straps  sliould  be  of  such  length  that  the 
breech  will  bear  Just  below  the  point  of  the  buttocks.  The 
lower  the  breech  strap  is  adjusted,  the  less  does  it  assist  the 
mule  in  checking  the  movement  of  the  cart. 

Loin  straps. — The  loin  straps  should  be  so  fitted  that  the 
traces,  when  taut,  will  be  straight  and  witiiout  a  down-pull  on 
the  loops. 

Traces. — The  length  of  the  traces  must  depend  in  great 
measure  on  the  size  of  the  animal,  and  for  this  reason  no  set 
rule  can  be  given.  Care  must  always  be  taken,  however,  to 
place  the  mule  as  near  his  load  as  possible  and  to  see  that  the 
traces  form  a  straight  line  from  the  breast  strap  to  the  single- 
tree. 

The  loose  ends  of  the  trace  chains  are  fastened  to  the  hooks 
provided  on  the  front  part  of  the  cart  frame. 

CARE    OF    HAKXESS. 

448.  Breaks  and  rips  in  harness  should  be  repaired  without 
delay.  Temporary  repairs  may  be  made  by  the  driver,  but  he 
should  take  the  harness  to  the  saddler  for  permanent  repairs 
as  soon  as  possible. 

Harness  must  be  kept  clean  and  in  good  condition  no  matter 
how  often  the  conditions  of  weather  require  it  to  be  \yorked  on. 
At  least  once  each  week  every  harness  should  be  given  a  general 
overhauling,  parts  separated,  buckles  and  fastenings  disen- 
gaged, and  all  leather  and  metal  parts  cleaned  with  harness 
soap  and  rubbed. 

Wlien  leather  shows  signs  of  drying  out  it  should  be  given  a 
light  coat  of  neat's-foot  oil.  The  oil  can  be  rubbed  in  on  the 
rough  side  of  the  leather  so  as  to  discolor  tan  leather  but 
slightly. 

Leather  must  not  be  soaked  with  water.  Just  enough  water 
is  used  with  saddle  soap  to  produce  a  lather.  Leather  may  be 
cleaned  with  castile  soap  and  then  coated  with  the  lather  of 
saddle  soap.  Saddle-soap  lather  should  be  left  on,  and  after 
about  15  minutes  the  leather  rubbed  with  a  dry  cloth. 


182  MACHINE-GTTN  DUILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

Section  V. — Cap.e  of  Saddle  Hokses. 

449.  Ill  order  to  keep  saddle  horses  in  condition  tiiey  must  be 
fed  and  worked  properly  and  the  greatest  care  exercised  in 
preventing  sore  backs. 

They  must  be  well  groomed  and  their  feet  kept  in  good  con- 
dition. 

BLANKET. 

450.  The  blanlcet  should,  if  possible,  be  kept  dry  and  free 
from  sand,  caked  dandruff,  and  hairs.  It  should  be  frequently 
shaken  out  and  well  switched,  if  necessary,  to  restore  its  plia- 
bilit.\-  and  remove  dust  and  hair.  In  warm  weather,  when  the 
animal  sweats  freely,  a  fresh,  clean  bearing  surface  on  the 
blanket  should  be  placed  next  to  the  back. 

It  is  not  a  good  plan  to  dry  the  sweat-soaked  surface  of  a 
folded  blanket  in  the  sun  and  put  this  dried  surface  next  the 
back  the  following  morning.  Sucli  drying  hardens  the  dandruff 
mixed  with  sweat  and  dust  that  is  always  present,  and  makes 
this  part  of  the  blanket  rough  and  hard.  It  is  preferable  to 
double  the  sweat-soaked  folded  blanket  on  itself,  so  it  will 
remain  moist  and  soft. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  tlie  blanket  is  free  fi-om  sand  and 
dust  and  that  the  mane  lies  properly.  The  blanket  is  placed, 
with  no  wrinkles  in  any  of  its  folds,  in  position  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  will  not  disturb  the  mane  or  ruffle  the  hair  of  sad- 
dle bed. 

UN  SADDLING. 

451.  On  arriving  in  camp  and  having  dismounted,  the  cincha 
is  eased  off  about  3  inches  and  the  bearing  of  the  saddle  changed 
l)y  moving  it  to  rear  or  front  at  least  an  inch.  The  saddle  is 
left  on  the  back  for  10  minutes  to  enable  the  almost  bloodless 
skin  beneath  (caused  by  weight  of  rider  and  pack)  and  the  tired 
saddle  muscles  to  regain  to  some  extent  their  lost  tone,  while 
the  rider  attends  to  the  bridle  and  halter  and  the  religious  duty 
of  closely  examining  the  feet  for  loose  shoes,  rocks,  nails,  bruises, 
thrush,  and  interfering  sores.  The  saddle  is  then  removed,  the 
blanket  turned  over,  and  let  so  remain  In  place  until  the  back 
has  dried. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGTJLATIONS,   1917.  183 

Never  remove  the  saddle  and  blanket  in  such  a  way  as  to  ex- 
pose a  wet  back  either  to  the  hot  rays  of  the  sun  or  to  a  sudden 
cooling-.  The  pressure  of  the  saddle  restricts  the  blood  supply 
and  so  weakens  the  tissues  of  the  back.  In  this  condition  a 
hot  sun  more  readily  burns  or  inflames  the  skin,  while  a  sudden 
cooling  contracts  the  blood  vessels  and  prevents  the  proper  re- 
turn of  the  blood  to  nourish  the  tissues.  In  either  case  sores 
and  swellings  may  result. 

AMien  the  saddle  is  removed  the  back  should  be  promptly 
rubbed  and  massaged  to  dry  it  and  restore  the  circulation. 

452.  If  any  dry  spots  are  noticed  on  the  sweaty  skin  while 
the  blanket  is  being  turned  over,  they  are  inflammations  of  the 
skin,  produced  by  unequal  distribution  of  weight,  and  are  liable 
to  puff  up  later  if  not  attended  to.  Their  location  should  be 
marked  well  and  not  neglected.  When  the  back  is  dry  the 
blanket  is  removed  and  the  back  taken  care  of.  The  spots  re- 
ferred to  are  massaged  vrell  from  front  to  rear,  the  saddle  bed 
bathed  with  clean  water,  dried,  and  let  the  animal  roll  if  he  will. 
Should  small  swellings  appear,  however,  the  blanket  is  kept  in 
place  until  a  soaking  wet  gunny  sack  is  procured.  The  blanket  is 
then  removed  and  the  swelling  vigorously  massaged ;  tlie  wet 
folded  gunny  sack  pack  is  tlien  put  over  the  back  and  secured. 
The  animal  is  not  allowed  to  roll  if  it  can  be  avoided,  and  the 
pack  is  kept  wet  during  the  night.  In  the  majority  of  cases  the 
animal  will  be  ready  for  careful  saddling  in  the  morning. 

453.  Should  a  gall  have  been  produced  the  place  should  be 
bathed  and  disinfected  with  a  creolin  or  carbolic-acid  solution  (1 
ounce  to  the  quart  of  water),  the  spot  protected  from  the  Hies, 
cold  packed  if  necessary,  and  the  animal  led  until  nature  effects 
a  cure.  Close  attention  to  cleanliness,  disinfection,  and  stimula- 
tion of  the  wound  will  hasten  the  process.  A  solution  of  aloes 
or  alum  in  water  (one-half  ounce  of  either  to  a  pint  of  water) 
as  a  stimulant  may  be  used. 

454.  Even  with  very  close  attention  to  saddling,  galls  may  be 
produced  if  the  rider  is  not  a  careful  one. 

Irrespective  of  the  fit  of  the  saddle  and  condition  of  blanket, 
the  things  that  cause  galls  and  "  bunches  "  most  frequently  are 
carelessness  in  balancing  and  securing  the  pack,  a  lounging, 
shifting  seat,  and  a  sloppy  method  of  handling  the  reins,  inat- 
tention to  proper  cinching,  unequal  length  of  stirrups,  neglect 


184  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

of  adjust ment  at  the  halts,  the  riding  of  a  lame  animal .  and  rho 
galloping  of  a  leg-weary  one. 

BITTING. 

455.  The  inside  of  the  lower  jaw  is  often  injured  by  ignorant 
liandling  of  the  curb  rein.  These  injuries  appear  above  the 
bridle  teeth  or  "  tusks  "  and  present  inflamed  places  that  some- 
times exhibit  ulcers.  Quite  often  the  bone  is  splintered.  Less 
frequently  the  under  part  of  the  jaw,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  curb 
groove,  is  bruised  and  perhaps  fractured  more  or  less  com- 
pletely. 

Any  of  these  conditions  may  be  made  manifest  by  the  animal 
'•fighting  the  bit."  "throwing  the  head,"  or  rearing. 

456.  These  injuries  should  be  treated  by  putting  the  animal 
on  a  simflle  at  once  and  placing  it  high  enough  in  the  mouth  to 
avoid  any  pressure  on  the  injured  parts.  If  ulcers  appear,  they 
are  washed  out  frequently  with  a  saturated  .solution  of  boracic 
acid.  When  the  bone  is  splintered  it  is  usually  a  serious 
nuitter  and  requires  the  services  of  a  trained  veterinarian. 


PART  VI. 

MANAGEMEITT  OE  DEAFT  ANIMALS. 


Section  I. — Rules  for  Dri\ters. 

457.  Drivers  of  all  animal-drawn  vehicles  are  prohibited  from 
leaving  their  teams  standing  unheld  or  untied. 

Drivers  must  refrain  from  shouting  or  making  threatening 
noises  or  motions  around  their  teams. 

Always  gather  a  team  before  starting,  changing  direction  or 
changing  gait.  This  is  done  by  tightening  the  reins  and  urging 
the  animals  into  the  bits. 

Keep  a  steady  pressure  on  the  reins ;  never  drive  with  reins 
lying  loosely  on  the  animals'  backs. 

See  to  it  that  the  vehicle  is  well  greased. 

Vehicles  in  column  should  never  be  stopped  when  it  can  pos- 
sibly be  avoided.  The  adjustment  of  the  load  or  the  picking 
up  of  articles  dropped  off  should  be  done  without  stopping,  if  at 
all  possible.  Stopping  an  entire  column  for  any  but  a  serious 
cause  is  inexcusable,  and  is  a  form  of  carelessness  or  willful- 
ness that  should  be  punished. 

Drive  at  a  steady  gait ;  do  not  "  back  and  fill ;  "  gain  lost  dis- 
tance gradually. 

RULES   OF  THE  ROAD. 

458.  Always  be  courteous;  give  plenty  of  room  to  others; 
remember  that  a  smile  or  a  pleasant  laugh  will  do  more  than  a 
grov.l  or  surly  remark. 

When  a  vehicle  is  in  colunm  it  is  necessary  to  follow  in  trace, 
but  be  sure  to  drive  where  It  is  intended,  and  do  not  encroach 
upon  the  road  or  cut  corners. 

185 


186  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

When  alone  always  drive  on  the  right  side  of  the  road,  and 
keep  to  the  right  Avhen  meeting  vehicles. 

On  a  narrow  road  a  loaded  team  has  the  right  of  way,  and  it 
should  be  given  inigriidgingly. 

On  overtaking  a  vehicle  pull  out  to  the  left  and  pass  it  at  a 
steady  pace  without  cracking  the  whip  or  coming  in  too  close. 

"When  followed  by  other  vehicles,  or  when  driving  in  a  place 
where  other  vehicles  are  liable  to  be  following,  always  signal 
before  slackening  the  gait  or  changing  direction.  Signals  are 
made  by  liolding  the  hand  or  whip  vertically  for  slackening  and 
horizontally  for  turning. 

When  approaching  a  railroad  crossing  bring  teams  to  a  walk, 
a  halt  if  necessary;  but  always  look  and  listen. 

Never  halt  upon  a  railroad  track, 

POSITION    OF   THE    DKIVEK. 

459.  The  driver  should  sit  firmly  Imt  comfortably  in  the  seat, 
body  erect  without  stitYness,  and  elbows  close  to  the  sides,  with 
the  point  almost  touching  the  hips. 

He  should  not  lean  forward. 

The  wrist  should  be  well  bent,  as  this  enables  him  to  keep  a 
steady  pressure  on  the  reins. 

Tiie  forearm  should  be  horizontal,  and  the  fingers  from  3  to  5 
inches  from  the  center  of  the  body,  with  the  knuckles  to  the 
front. 

HOLDING   THE    REINS. 

460.  Place  both  reins  in  the  left  hand,  the  left  rein  over  the 
forefinger  and  the  right  rein  under  the  middle  finger.  Thus 
you  liave  two  fingers  between  the  reins.  The  reason  for  this 
is  that  it  giyes  much  more  scope  for  play  of  the  wrist  on  the 
mouths  than  if  you  only  have  one  finger  between  the  reins. 
The  thumb  shoidd  point  straight  to  the  front  and  should  not  be 
pressed  down  on  the  reins.  The  forefinger  will  be  held  well 
out,  pointing  to  the  right  rear.  This  will  keep  the  rein  close 
to  the  knuckle,  and  the  pair  may  be  easily  moved  from  side  to 
side  by  simply  turning  the  bfick  of  the  hand  up  or  down ;  up 
for  left  turn  and  down  for  right  turn. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  187 

The  right  hand  is  known  as  the  whip  hand  and,  in  addition 
to  holding  the  whip,  is  used  to  assist  the  left  hand  in  shorten- 
ing the  reins  by  pulling  them  through  from  loehind  the  rein 
hand. 

HANDLING    THE    TEAM, 

46 i.  Bring  the  pair  to  attention  by  feeling  their  mouths 
gently  and  speak  tu  them.  If  they  do  not  respond,  touch  them 
gently  with  the  whip. 

The  moment  they  start,  drop  the  hand  slightly ;  "  jibbing " 
is  often  caused  by  neglect  of  this  precaution. 

In  all  movements  from  a  halt  each  driver  gathers  both  of  his 
horses  just  before  they  are  to  move;  if  in  march  and  the  gait 
or  direction  is  changed,  both  horses  are  gathered  just  before 
they  change  gait  or  direction.  Care  should  be  taken  that  both 
the  horses  move  off  together  and  change  the  gait  at  the  same 
time. 

In  starting  a  cart  or  wagon  it  is  especially  important  that 
both  the  horses  of  the  team  should  throw  their  weights  into 
the  collars  gradually  but  simultaneously.  Unremitting  atten- 
tion is  required  upon  the  part  of  every  driver  in  order  that 
each  horse  shall  at  all  times  do  its  proper  share  of  the  work. 

By  observing  these  important  rules,  a  team  is  enabled  to  pull 
steadily  together,  and  the  horses  are  not  fatigued  by  jerks, 
which  make  them  balky,  gall  their  shoulders,  and  break  the 
harness. 

TO    START. 

462,  Feel  all  the  animals'  mouths,  and,  if  necessary,  give' 
them  the  word  to  go,  dropping  the  hand  to  them  at  once  until 
the  vehicle  is  fairly  off.  The  wheelers  ought  to  start  the 
wagon,  and  this  can  be  effected  by  touching  them  with  the 
whip  if  they  require  it.  It  is  never  safe  to  start  without  hav- 
ing the  whip  in  the  right  hand  ready  for  immediate  use.  The 
whip  is  to  the  driver  what  the  leg  is  to  the  rider ;  that  is,  it 
keeps  the  team  up  to  their  bits.  As*  soon  as  the  team  is  going 
straight,  take  the  right  hand  off  the  reins,  at  the  same  time 
keeping  it  close  by  ready  for  any  emergency. 


1S8  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

PULLING  ur. 

463.  To  pull  up,  shorten  all  the  four  reins  by  passing  the  left 
hand  up  to  the  right  or  else  by  pulling  all  the  four  reins  through 
from  behind,  as  before  explained  :  then.,  having  the  right  fore- 
finger on  the  left  lead  rein,  the  middle  finger  on  the  left  Avheel. 
and  the  lower  fingers  of  the  right  hand  on  the  right  reins,  pull 
both  hands  l)ack  toward  the  body,  and  if  necessary  lean  back  a 
little. 

Should  the  team  be  getting  the  better  of  you  and  you  find  thai: 
you  can  not  stop  it.  it  will  be  found  a  great  assistance  to  place 
the  right  leg  over  all  the  four  reins,  as  you  may  be  able  to  stop 
them  by  the  extra  power  and  leverage  by  the  position  of  the 
leg.     Of  course,  it  is  understood  the  brake  has  been  applied. 

EULES. 

464.  Always  keep  a  steady  pressure  on  the  reins. 
Never  remove  the  left  hand  from  reins. 

Alter  position  of  bits  if  the  team  pulls  hard. 

Always  take  a  pull  at  the  team  to  steady  it  just  before  you 
arrive  at  the  crest  of  a  hill,  and  begin  to  descend  slowly,  hold- 
ing the  leaders  steady,  and  with  just  enough  traction  to  keep 
their  single  trees  from  hitting  them. 

In  crossing  ruts  and  in  turning  corners  be  careful  that  the 
leaders  are  out  of  draft ;  otherwise  the  pole  may  be  snapped  off 
or  the  wheelers  pulled  down. 

If,  while  going  down  a  hill  and  especially  when  near  the  bottom, 
you  find  a  wheeler  slipping  on  his  hocks,  do  not  try  to  pull  him 
up.  but  drop  the  hand  and  allow  the  team  to  go  a  trifle  faster. 

Section  II. — Caee  of  Deaft  Animals. 

465.  Constant  and  intelligent  supervision  of  adjustment  of 
the  bearing  parts  of  harness,  packs,  and  saddles  is  productive 
of  better  results  than  medication  in  keeping  transportation 
animals  in  serviceable  condition. 

Animals  in  a  command  lose  fle.sh  rapidly  for  the  first  10  days 
of  a  march,  and  during  this  period  the  adjustment  of  all  parts 
of  the  harness,  more  especially  the  collars,  should  be  given  close 
attention. 


MACHINE- GL'N  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  189 

466.  Feeding  .should  be  done  soon  after  reaching  camp,  a  little 
hay  being  offered  first.  Animals  are  watered  before  feeding 
grain  when  possible.  Grain  is  offered  immediately  after  water- 
ing, and  what  remains  of  the  hay  for  thai  day  is  then  placed 
before  the  animal.  The  morning  water  must  of  necessity  be 
governed  l,)y  circumstances.  If  absolutely  sure  of  water  on  the 
road,  say  one  hour  after  breaking  camp,  it  would  be  needless 
waste  of  time  and  energy  to  water  immediately  before  or  after 
the  morning  feed  on  the  line. 

467.  Collars  of  steel,  such  as  those  furnished  to  artillery  com- 
mands, are  preferable  to  leather  for  military  use,  when  prop- 
erly adjusted  and  cleaned.  When  improperly  adjusted  they  are 
inferior  to  the  leather  article.  Steel  collars  are  adjusted  by 
means  of  bolts  and  plates.  Leather  collars  by  means  of  top 
straps  and  hames.  When  these  methods  will  not  produce  the 
desired  results  the  use  of  collar  pads  must  be  resorted  to.  Felt 
collar  pads  are  not  desirable  as  they  soon  become  stiff  and  hard. 

A  collar  should  fit  snugly  to  the  sides  of  the  neck  without 
compressing  it,  and  its  bearing  surface  should  rest  squarely  on 
the  bed  of  muscles  situated  on  the  front  of  the  shoulder.  When 
in  position  there  should  be  a  space  between  its  lower  part  and 
the  windpipe  sufficiently  large  to  comfortably  admit  the  inser- 
tion of  the  open  hand,  back  up,  as  far  as  the  wrist. 

All  collars  should  be  furnished  with  a  neck  plate  of  zinc,  for 
the  protection  of  the  top  of  the  neck  against  rubbing. 

To  prevent  blistering  of  the  top  of  the  neck  on' hot,  sunny 
days,  it  will  be  found  that  a  wet  sponge  or  a  wet  piece  of 
folded  gunny  sack,  properly  secured  to  the  top  of  the  collar  and 
wetted  at  intervals,  is  effective. 

The  bearing  surface  of  steel  collars  and  neck  plates  should 
be  washed  carefully  soon  after  making  camp..  They  should  never 
be  seoured  irifh  sand  or  rubbed  with  an  abrasive  substance,  for 
the  reason  that  the  steel  beneath  the  zinc  platino  may  be  thus 
exposed.  The  exposed  steel  rusts  quickly,  pits  rapidly  from  the 
action  of  the  acid  sweat,  and  acts  as  a  rasp  would  on  the  soft 
tissues  with  which  it  com.es  in  continual  contact. 

The  bearing  surface  of  leather  collars  should  not  be  scraped 
unless  considered  absolutely  necessary  to  remove  accumulated 
dirt  due  to  negligence.  If  scraped,  they  should  be  boned  smooth 
and  then  slightly  oiled.     Leather  collars  may  bo  easily  cleaned 


190  MACHmE-GUN  DKILL  REGULATIONj^,  1&17. 

vrith  a  damp  sponge.  They  should  be  thus  cleaned  each  even- 
ing. A  careful  man  \vill  not  let  his  collars  remain,  on  the 
ground  overnight,  Init  will  hang  them  on  a  wagon  pole  or  put 
them  in  some  safe  place  where  they  will  be  protected  from  the 
rain  and  the  dust  of  the  camp. 

468.  On  arrival  in.  camp  collars  are  left  in  position  for  about 
15  minutes.  Their  weight  on  the  hot.  tender  skin  affords  suffi- 
cient pressure  to  prevent  the  formation  of  swellings  so  often 
observed  after  the  collai-  is  suddenly  removed.  Normal  circula- 
tion will  establish  itself  gradually  under  collar  pressure  alone, 
and  the  skin  of  the  shoulders  and  neck  will  regain  its  tone  and 
elasticity. 

Mter  removal  of  the  collar,  the  shoulder  and  neck  is  bathed 
with  clean  water ;  this  removes  sand  and  dust  that  would  other- 
wise remain  in  the  hair,  where  it  may  not  be  reached  by  the 
horse  brush. 

Salty  water,  or  a  weak  solution  of  vinegar  in  water,  when 
applied  to  the  shoulders  and  neck,  acts  as  a  tonic  to  the  jaded 
skin. 

Animals  v/ith  narrow,  lean  shoulders  should  not  be  placed  in 
the  collar.  For  these,  if  they  must  be  harnessed,  a  breast 
strap  (Dutch  collar)  should  be  used. 

Care  must  be  taken  in  putting  a  collar  on  a  horse  that  the 
mane  hangs  naturally  beneath  the  neck  plate.  .  If  the  collar 
is  a  steel  (me,  care  is  taken  when  snapping  it  in  place  to  see 
that  the  skin  of  the  upper  part  of  neck  is  not  pinched  be- 
tween the  ne<.-k  plate  and  the  collar  itself. 

If  swellings  appear  on  the  shoulders  they  are  massaged  to 
reriiove  them  and  in  addition  a  cold-water  pack  is  applied  dur- 
ing the  night ;  a  wet  sack  properly  adjusted  and  held  in  place 
will  answer  the  purpose.  If  a  gall  appears  it  should  not  be 
greased,  but  washed  with  water  and  soap,  drietl  thoroughly, 
and  a  weak  solution  of  alum  (one-half  ounce  to  a  pint  of 
water)  or  a  solution  of  aloes  in  vrater  (one-half  ounce  to  the 
pint)  applied.  If  the  animal  must  be  worked,  a  chambered 
(cut-out)  pad  is  placed  over  the  spot  to  remove  pressure. 
Greasy  ointments  serve  as  a  trap  for  dust  and  sand,  and  con- 
sequently should  never  be  used. 

469.  The  length  of  traces  must  be  verified  frequently.  The 
chain  links  as  a  guide  in  hitching  can  not  be  depended  on. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  191 

Leather  traces  stretch  considerably  in  wet  weather.  A  differ- 
ence of,  lialf  an  inch  in  the  length  of  traces  will  cause  trouble 
on  the  shoulder  of  the  shorter  side.  It  is  also  liable  to  pro- 
duce lameness  due  to  irritation  of  extensor  muscles.  If  the 
point  of  attachment  of  the  trace  to  the  collar  should  be  too 
high  it  will  cause  a  downward  pull  on  top  of  neck,  with  its 
consequent  irritation.  If  too  low  it  will  cause  the  collar  to 
"  ride,"  and  nearly  all  the  pressure  v/ill  be  on  the  point  of  the 
shoulders  and  on  the  windpipe. 

The  number  of  sore-shouldered  draft  animals  in  a  command 
on  the  march  is  an  excellent  standard  by  which  to  judge  the 
horsemanship  of  the  personnel. 

470.  The  breeching  should  be  fairly  loose ;  otherwise  it  is 
lialile  to  chafe  the  quarters  and  to  interfere  with  the  free  play 
of  the  muscles.  It  should  be  taken  up,  as  the  animals  become 
thin. 

Martingales  should  not  fit  too  snugly,  as  they  are  very  liable 
to  chafe  the  soft,  thin  skin  of  the  under  part  of  the  body. 

471.  Yoke  straps  should  be  adjusted  with  a  view  to  the  height 
of  the  pair.  They  should  never  be  permitted  to  trespass  on 
the  bearing  surface  of  the  collars. 

472.  Backstraps  should  be  so  adjusted  as  not  to  let  the  saddles 
ride  the  withers,  but  at  the  same  time  there  should  not  be 
sufficient  strain  on  them  to  cause  the  crupper  to  irritate  the 
under  part  of  the  tail. 

473.  BcUyhands  and  cinchas  should  never  be  unduly  tiglit- 
ened,  as  they  cause  cinch  sores  near  the  elbow  and  quarter- 
strap  sores  beneath  the  ring  shields. 

When  a  cinch  gall  appears,  the  cause  is  removed,  the  place 
kept  clean,  and  a  solution  of  aloes  or  alum  in  water  applied. 
Either  of  these  will  stimulate  the  gall  and  deter  insects  from 
alighting  on  the  wounds. 

474.  Hearing  reins  should  be  of  such  a  length  that  the  animals 
may  have  free  use  of  the  muscles  of  head  and  neck.  Bearing 
reins  are  not  a  necessity. 

475.  A  driving  bit  sliould  be  smooth  and  jointed.  It  should 
be  so  adjusted  that  it  will  not  lift  the  corners  of  the  mouth. 
If  placed  too  high  in  the  mouth,  the  animal  uses  his  molar 
teeth  to  press  against  it  and  gains  for  himself  the  reputation 
of  a  hard-mouthed  puller. 


192  MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

The  men  sliould  be  taught  to  beware  of  thread  ends  in  collar 
pads  and  of  knots  in  headstalls,  throatlatches.  bell-ybands, 
cinclias.  and  surcingles,  and  to  be  careful  that  buckles  are  not 
turned  toward  the  skin.  These  readily  produce  irritations  and 
abrasions  and  are  plain  evidence  of  negligence  and  carelessness 
on  the  part  of  the  rider  or  driver  as  well  as  loose  supervision 
on  the  part  of  those  superior  in  rank. 

476.  To  keep  his  animals  in  the  collar  and  otf  the  lead  line 
should  be  the  aim  of  each  driver.  This  can  be  accomplished 
with  little  irouble.  barring  accidents,  if  the  harness  is  kept  in 
proper  shape  and  tit  and  necks  and  shoulders  are  kept  clean. 


PART  VII. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 


Section  I. — Tkaxspoktation. 


477.  The  arraugement  for  transportatiou  of  troops  by  com- 
mercial railways  is  a  function  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps. 

To  enable  the  quartermaster  properly  to  estimate  for  cars,  he 
should  be  informed  as  to  the  exact  number  of  men  and  animals 
and  the  amount  of  materiel  and  equipment  to  be  transported 
for  each  separate  company  and  headquarters.  Except  in  thea- 
ters of  actual  operations,  the  quartermaster  must  also  be  given 
such  itemized  lists  of  property  and  \Yeiglits  as  will  enable  him 
to  prepare  bills  of  lading.  To  assist  the  quartermaster,  each 
company  commander  and  each  headquarters  should  furnish  a 
list  of  the  numbers  and  kinds  of  cars  required  for  the  unit. 

478.  Whenever  practicable  sleeping  cars  are  provided  for  the 
personnel  on  journeys  of  24  hours'  or  greater  duration.  Suffi- 
cient cars  are  furnished  to  provide  a  section  for  each  three  men 
and  for  each  two  officers.  In  determining  the  number  of  cars 
allowance  must  be  made  for  employees  of  the  sleeping-car  com- 
panj'  and  of  the  railroad.  These  employees  include  a  porter 
for  each  car,  two  cooks  for  each  tourist  kitchen  car,  a  sleeping- 
car  conductor,  and  a  railroad  agent.  Each  of  these  employees 
utilizes  one  berth. 

479.  Tourist  sleepers  usually  contain  14  or  16  sections  and 
tourist  kitchen  cars  12  sections.  A  standard  sleeper  has  13  or 
14  sections,  including  the  drawing  room  and  stateroom. 

480.  When  day  coaches  nuist  be  utilized  and  the  journey  is 
considerable  a  seat  should  be  provided  for  each  man.  On  this 
basis  a  standard  day  coach  will  carry  about  30  men. 

193 


194  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

481.  The  carts  are  ordinarily  transported  in  box  cars.  40  feet 
long  and  9  feet  wide:  a  car  of  these  dimensions  will  carry  eight 
gun  carts  and  eiglit  annnunition  carts,  leaving  enough  free  space 
to  facilitate  loading  and  unloading. 

482.  Field  and  combat  wagons  are  transported  on  flat  cars, 
three  wagons  to  the  car.  The  kitchen  wagon,  ration  cart,  and 
water  cart  make  one  carload. 

483.  Harness,  officers'  baggage,  and  such  of  the  personal 
equipment  of  the  men  as  are  not  necessary  on  the  journey  are 
carried  in  a  baggage  car  provided  for  the  purpose. 

484.  Box  cars  are  provided  for  forage,  annnunition,  and  other 
property  according  to  the  necessities.  Unless  the  companies  are 
to  detrain  in  the  theater  of  operations,  ammunition  should  be 
boxed  and  carried  in  a  special  car. 

485.  Box  cars  are  usually  40  feet  in  length.  The  interior 
cross  section  is  about  9  by  8  feet.  The  load  capacity  varies 
from  40,000  to  100.000  pounds.  It  is  inadvisable,  however,  to 
load  a  car  to  its  capacity,  and  40,000  pounds  may  be  asstimed  as 
the  load  and  2,400  cubic  feet  as  the  cubical  capacity  of  the 
average  box  car. 

486.  The  weight  limits  the  amount  of  annnunition  and  of  oats 
which  can  be  carried  in  a  single  box  car.  Cubical  capacity  lim- 
its the  amount  of  military  stores  of  other  kinds,  especially  hay. 

One  thousand  two  hundred  pounds,  or  100  rations,  of  oats 
occupy  a  space  of  about  40  cubic  feet:  1,400  pounds,  or  100  ra- 
tions, of  baleil  hay  occupy  a  space  of  about  120  cubic  feet.  When 
access  must  be  had  to  the  forage  during  the  journey,  1.200 
rations  is  a  suitable  load  for  a  forage  car. 

487.  Animals  are  carried  in  stock  cars  or  palace  stock  cars. 
If  palace  stock  cars  are  not  available,  a  box  or  stock  car  should 
be  provided  for  eAch  six  privately  owned  officers'  mounts. 

The  capacity  of  both  the  ordinary  and  the  palace  stock  car 
averages  about  IS  horses  per  car.  The  ordinary  stock  car  will 
carry  about  20  mules. 

488.  The  amount  of  baggage,  forage,  and  rations  to  be  taken 
depends  upon  circumstances  and  should  be  definitely  prescribed 
in  tlie  order  directing  the  movement ;  ordinarily  rations  and 
forage  sufficient  for  three  days  after  the  completion  of  the 
journey  is  ample.  More  than  this  is  generally  mmecessary  and 
causes  delay  and  congestion  in  entraining  and  detraining. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATION^,   1917.  195 

489.  When  movements  from  garrison  or  semipermanent  camps 
are  contemplated,  ample  notice  should,  if  possible,  be  given  so 
that  the  necessary  arrangements  concerning  property  not  per- 
taining to  the  field  equipment  may  be  made.  Not  less  than  48 
hours  should  be  allowed  for  the  orderly  transaction  of  this  busi- 
ness. 

When  sufficient  time  is  not  available  for  these  purposes  the 
security  and  care  of  such  property  as  is  left  behind  devolves 
upon  the  troops  remaining  in  the  garrison  or  camp. 

490.  The  time  required  for  loading  each  train  carrying  ma- 
chine-gun companies  depends  upon  the  facilities  for  loading,  and 
especially  upon  the  amount  of  equipment  and  supplies  to  be  car- 
ried. 

491.  Delays  and  confusion  in  loading  are  chiefly  due  to  lack 
of  advance  preparation  of  a  definite  and  rational  plan  or  to 
failure  to  follow  such  a  plan  during  the  loading.  A  common  mis- 
take is  the  attempt  to  rush  the  loading  by  assigning  cars  so  as 
to  begin  the  loading  of  all  companies  simultaneously  vrithout  ade- 
quate facilities  or  cars  therefor.  In  general,  confusion  will  be 
eliminated  and  time  will  be  saved  by  making  up  each  train 
complete  before  spotting  it  at  the  loading  places.  For  the  stor- 
age of  cars  and  the  making  up  of  trains  ample  switching  facili- 
ties should  be  set  aside.  It  is  especially  important  that  the 
loading  platforms  for  any  one  organization  be  not  widely  sepa- 
rated. The  number  of  trains  which  can  be  loaded  simultane- 
ously thus  depends  upon  the  available  switching  facilities.  As 
under  .a  suitable  plan  similar  cars  for  the  several  organizations 
are  loaded  from  the  same  platforms,  the  heavier  stores  for  each 
organization  may  be  transported  to  the  loading  platforms  before 
the  departure  of  the  preceding  organization.  Care  must  be 
taken  to  avoid  interfering  with  the  loading  and  to  keep  the  stores 
to  be  loaded  on  any  one  train  separate  from  those  going  on 
another. 

492.  Sufficient  tags  should  be  kept  on  hand  to  mark  all  equip- 
ment not  carried  in  the  cars  with  the  men  or  not  otherwise 
readily  identified.  The  loading  of  each  class  of  property  should 
be  under  the  immediate  charge  of  an  officer,  who  should  list  all 
items  going  into  each  separate  car^  noting  on  each  list  the  mark- 
ings and  number  of  the  car. 

I 


196  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

493.  Whenever  practicable  each  company  occupies  one  train 
with  all  of  its  personnel,  animals,  and  materiel  complete.  It  is, 
however,  preferable  to  have  trains  of  moderate  size  with  good 
speed  rather  than  long  trains  with  low  speed. 

494.  The  cars  required  to  move  a  machine-gun  company  are  in 
the  sequence  in  which  the  train  is  arranged,  as  follows : 

Flat  cars 2 

Box  car  for  ammunition,  harness,  forage,  etc 1 

Box  car  for  gun  and  ammunition  carts 2 

Stock  cars 3 

Baggage  car,  or  box  car  with  end  doors 1 

Tourist  sleeping  cars  (61  sections)  (IG  section  cars)-  4 

Total 13 

In  making  request  upon  the  quartermaster  for  transporta- 
tion the  necessary  sleeping-car  section  should  be  specified.  The 
number  of  cars  then  depends  upon  the  type  of  sleeper  furnished. 

495.  Battalion  headquarters  usually  will  accompany  a  com- 
pany, the  following  additional  transportation  being  required  : 

For  a  3-company  l)attalion : 

Flat  cars 1 

Stock  cars 1 

Tourist  sleepers  (16  sections) 1 

Total 3 

For  a  4-company  battalion : 

Flat  cars 1 

Stock  cars 1 

Tourist  sleeper  (20  sections)^ 1 

Total 3 

496.  When  movements  of  large  bodies  of  troops  are  involved, 
ordinary  coaches  or  box  cars  may  frequently  have  to  be  sub- 
stituted for  sleeping  cars. 

1  The  extra  men  can  be  taken  care  of  in  the  surplus  space  in  one  of  the 
company  cars. 


HACHINS-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  197 

For  movements  of  a  few  hours  in  the  theater  of  operations  the 
personnel  may  have  to  ride  on  the  flat  cars.  As  in  such  cases  the 
equipment  is  limited,  the  harness  and  stores  may  be  carried  on 
the  flat  cars  with  the  carts. 

497.  In  preparation  for  the  journey  all  personal  equipment 
and  other  property  needed  en  route  are  kept  separate  from  that 
not  needed. 

All  the  mechanics  are  provided  with  the  heaviest  hammers 
available.  These  hammers,  with  a  supply  of  nails,  are  taken  in 
the  cars  by  the  mechanics. 

The  blanket  roll  of  each  man  is  tagged  and  the  rolls  of  each 
squad  are  tied  into  a  bundle.  These  bundles,  together  with  the 
officers'  baggage,  are  carried  in  the  baggage  car. 

Rations  and  kitchen  equipment  which  will  be  needed  during 
the  journey  or  immediately  upon  arrival  are  placed  under  the 
charge  of  one  of  the  cooks,  who  sees  that  they  are  loaded  in  the 
baggage  car  so  as  to  be  immediately  accessible. 

If  the  animals  will  probably  be  unloaded  during  the  journey, 
each  section  leader  collects  the  feed  bags  belonging  to  his  sec- 
tion and  turns  them  over  to  the  stable  sergeant,  who  makes  a 
memorandum  thereof.  The  stable  sergeant  sees  that  the  feed 
bags,  necessary  grain  measures,  a  few  bandages  and  disinfec- 
tants, and  stable  tools  are  placed  in  the  center  of  the  forage  car 
so  as  to  be  readily  accessible. 

The  men  take  their  packs,  slickers,  overcoats,  canteens,  and 
haversacks  or  saddlebags  with  them  in  the  cars.  Such  ar- 
rangements are  made  as  will  avoid  the  necessity  for  carrying 
these  articles  while  at  work  and  insure  their  being  properly 
guarded  and  Jivaiiable  at  the  proper  time. 

498.  So  far  as  practicable  all  stores,  forage,  etc.,  should  be 
at  the  loading  places  before  the  train  arrives  (491).  Similarly 
each  company,  complete  with  all  its  materiel,  anim.als,  and  per- 
sonnel, except  those  men  needed  as  guards  over  stores,  should 
arrive,  so  that  the  animals  may  be  unharnessed  and  harness  and 
carts  placed  convenient  to  the  loading  places  before  its  train  is 
spotted. 

499.  As  soon  as  the  animals  have  been  unhitched  they  should 
be  taken  to  the  vicinity  of  the  place  at  which  the  harness  is  to 
be  loaded  and  there  unharnessed.  The  two  mules  are  held  by  a 
driver  designated  by  the  section  leader. 


198  2^ACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.  1917. 

When  harness  sacks  are  avaUable  tlio  harness  of  each  animal 
is  packed  in  its  sack,  plainly  marked  (492).  The  horse  equip- 
ment of  officers  and  individually  mounted  men  are  placed  in 
gunny  siicks  or.  if  sacks  are  not  avaihible,  wrapped  in  saddle 
blankets,  plainly  tagged.  The  horse  equipments  of  officers  are 
placed  in  the  baggage  car,  or,  if  a  separate  car  is  provided,  in  the 
car  with  their  mounts.  The  horse  equipment  of  individually 
mounted  men  are  phiced  in  the  car  with  the  harness. 

The  drivers  take  the  animals  to  a  designated  place  and 
secure  them.  If  the  stables  or  permanent  picket  lines  are  avail- 
able, they  should  be  secured  there  and  left  under  the  charge  of 
two  drivers  detailed  as  guards. 

The  animals  are  given  a  feed  of  hay.  which  should  have  been 
withheld  from  them  for  some  hours  before.  AVhenever  prac- 
ticable they  should  be  watered  about  one  hour  before  they  are 
loaded. 

DOO.  All  animals  having  been  unhitched  and  secured,  the  com- 
pany falls  in,  each  man  carrying  his  individual  equipment  or 
saddlebags,  canteen,  and  slicker.  These  articles  are  deposited 
on  the  ground  and  a  guard  placed  over  them.  The  necessary 
details  are  made  and  the  loading  is  started  as  scon  as  the  cars 
have  been  inspected  and  turned  over  to  the  organization. 

501.  Each  train  connuander  should  detail  an  officer  to  accom- 
pany the  quartermaster  in  the  latter's  inspection  of  the  cars, 
made  after  the  train  is  made  up  and  before  it  is  turned  over  to 
the  troops  for  loading. 

Passenger  cars  must  be  clean,  fully  supplied  with  water  and 
ice  and  sufficiently  lighted  and  heated.  Common  defects  are 
lack  of  water,  ice.  and  illumination. 

Stock  cars  must  be  inspected  with  special  care  to  see  that  they 
are  in  good  order  througliout.  Common  defects  are  loose  boards, 
rotten  flooring,  broken  fixtures,  protruding  nails,  and  filthy 
condition.  These  are  sources  of  danger  and  discomfort  to  the 
animals  and  of  loss  to  the  Government.  Such  cars  should  be  re- 
jected. In  time  of  peace  the  commanding  officer  should  not 
hesitate  to  suspend  the  movement  until  proper  cars  have  been 
provided.  In  time  of  war  it  is  usually  necessary  to  be  content 
with  what  can  be  obtained.  Such  repairs  as  are  practicable 
should  be  made,  and  a  report  should  be  forwarded  setting  forth 
the  conditions. ' 


MACHINE-GUN  BRILL  REGITLATION^.   1917.  199 

Baggage,  box,  and  flat  cars  should  also  be  thorouglily  in- 
spected. 

502.  As  soon  as  the  cars  have. been  accepted  they  are  pre- 
pared for  loading.  The  officer  detailed  to  load  the  animals,  ac- 
companied by  the  stable  sergeant  and  one  or  more  of  the  me- 
chanics, makes  a  detailed  inspection  of  the  stock  cars.  All 
projecting  nail  points  are  bent  and  splinters  are  removed.  The 
breast  bars  on  the  doorways  opposite  the  loading  platform  are 
examined,  put  in  place,  and  the  doors  themselves  securely  fas- 
tened. Such  repairs  as  may  be  necessary  are  made  with  the 
material  available.  The  cars  should  be  clean  and  the  floor  cov- 
ered with  at  least  21  inches  of  sand  or  sawdust.  In  perma- 
nent garrison  material  lor  this  purpose  should  be  kept  on  hand. 
The  brake  handles  of  the  flat  cars  should  be  removed,  so  that 
the  carriages  may  be  run  from  one  car  to  another. 

503.  <3rdinarily  a  section  carr  be  usefully  employed  in  loading 
a  box  car.  A  noncommissioned  officer  and  about  six  men  should 
be  inside  the  car  to  stow  the  property.  The  remaining  me« 
pass  the  packages  in. 

504.  Ordinarily  no  attempt  is  made  to  load  more  than  one 
vehicle  car  at  a  time.  Frequently  the  length  of  the  loading 
platform  will  be  such  that  several  of  the  cars  must  be  reached 
by  running  the  carriages  across  other  cars. 

The  vehicles  are  secured  with  2  by  4  inch  timbers,  as  follows : 
Pieces  nailed  to  the  floor  of  the  car  on  both  sides  of  each  wheel 
prevent  transverse  motion ;  in  front  and  rear  of  each  wheel, 
longitudinal  motion ;  over  the  lowest  part  of  the  fellows  and 
nailed  to  the  timbers  which  lie  alongside  the  wheels,  vertical 
motion.  All  these  pieces  can  be  of  the  uniform  length  of  9 
feet. 

505.  The  necessary  timber  and  nails  are  furnished  by  the 
quartermaster.  For  each  car  h)aded  with  ammunition  and  gun 
carts,  432  feet  of  timber  (cut  into  9-foot  lengths)  and  10  pounds 
of  nails  are  required ;  for  cars  loaded  with  fleld  wagons  270 
feet  of  timber  and  8  pounds  of  nails. 

506.  As  each  flat  car  is  loaded  the  mechanics  nail  the  secur- 
ing timbers  in  place.  A  gun  squad  should  be  detailed  to  bring 
the  timbers  and  put  them  in  position  for  nailing. 

In  the  field,  when  suflicient  lumber  can  not  he  obtained, 
chocks   must   be  improvised  ■  from   all   available   material.     In 


200  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917. 

such  cases  additional  security  is  obtained  by  lashing  together 
the  wheels  that  are  placed  tire  to  tire. 

507.  When  ample  time  is  available  it  may  be  desirable  to  re- 
move such  articles  as  pauling,  lanterns,  etc.,  from  the  carts  and 
carry  them  properly  paclied  in  a  ])ox  car  with  other  stores. 

508.  The  animals  should  not  be  loaded  until  the  loading  of 
all  carts  and  stores  has  been  completed.  Whenever  possible 
loading  pens  and  chutes  to  be  found  at  railroad  stations  should 
be  used.  In  any  case  especial  care  must  be  taken  th.it  the  ani- 
mals have  secure  footing  in  passing  into  the  car. 

For  each  car  being  loaded  four  selected  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers, a  mechanic,  and  a  squad  should  be  detailed.  Two  of  the 
noncommissioned  officers  work  inside  the  car.  The  remaining 
noncommissioned  officers  work  at  the  door  of  th.e  car.  Two  of 
the  members  of  the  squad  collect  the  halter  shanks  and  .see  that 
they  are  turned  over  to  the  stable  sergeant  at  the  forage  car. 
The  remaining  men  assist  the  noncommissioned  officers  at  the 
doors.  When  chutes  are  available  all  these  men,  except  the  non- 
commissioned officers,  should  remain  outside  the  runways  until 
they  are  called  for.  When  pens  and  chutes  are  available  the 
animals  are  penned  by  carload  lots.  A  noncommissioned  officer 
and  a  squad  are  assigned  to  work  in  each  loading  pen,  the  re- 
maining men  bring  the  nnimals  from  the  holding  pens  as  soon  as 
the  preceding  lot  has  been  loaded.  As  the  animals  arrive  the 
men  in  the  loading  pen  remove  the  halter  shanks  and  pass  them 
to  the  men  detailed  to  collect  them.  The  gate  to  the  runway  Is 
kept  closed  until  the  gangplank  is  in  place,  the  side  gates  closed 
against  the  car,  and  the  noncommissioned  officers  in  place. 
Everything  being  in  order,  the  gate  is  opened  and  one  of  the  men 
leads"^  the  gentlest  animal  in  the  pen  up  the  runway.  The  re- 
maining men  cause  the  animals  to  follow  as  closely  as  possible. 
This  is  accomplished  without  shouting  or  otherwise  exciting 
them.  Animals  that  hold  back  are  slapped  or  gently  struck 
acro.ss  the  rump  with  a  halter  shank.  The  noncommissioned  offi- 
cio's inside  the  car  place  themselves  near  the  door  and  keep  them 
quiet  by  speaking  to  them.  When  the  first  animal  arrives  one 
of  the  noncommissioned  officers  takes  him  from  the  man  leading 
hii'!  and  leads  him  to  one  end  of  the  car.  After  this  the  noncom- 
missione<l  officers  confine  themselves  to  keeping  the  animals 
quiet  and  preventing  them  from  leaving  the  car.     The  animals 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  201 

are  thus  allowed  to  pack  themselves  in  the  car.  It  is  desirable 
that  as  many  as  practicable  be  placed  in  each  car  not  provided 
with  separate  stalls.  With  animals  not  trained  in  loading  each 
noncommissioned  officer  may  be  assisted  in  the  car  by  two  men 
whose  duty  it  is  to  hold  the  last  animal  received  in  place  across 
the  car. 

The  car  having  been  filled,  the  noncommissioned  officers  in- 
side the  car  first  put  up  the  breast  bar  and  then  leave  the  car. 
The  gangplank  is  swung  back,  the  side  gates  slipped  back,  and 
the  car  door  closed.    The  mechanic  fastens  the  door  securely. 

509.  When  loading  pens  are  not  available  and  the  animals 
must  })e  loaded  from  a  platform  similar  methods  are  used,  ex- 
cept that  all  the  animals  are  led  into  the  car.  The  halter  tie 
ropes  are  taken  off  after  entering  the  car  and  turned  over  to 
the  men  collecting  them,  as  the  men  who  led  the  animals  pass 
out.  In  leaving  the  car  the  men  must  be  careful  to  avoid  inter- 
fering with  animals  just  entering. 

510.  When  permanent  platforms  are  not  available,  platforms 
or  ramps  must  be  improvised. 

For  loading  the  carts  such  platforms  or  ramps  are  preferably 
placed  at  the  end  of  the  cars.  For  animals  the  ramp  should  be 
well  supported,  have  strong  sides,  and  the  bottom  provided  with 
cleats  to  give  a  secure  footing.  By  taking  advantage  of  shal- 
low cuts  and  using  baled  hay,  platforms  may  be  readily  impro- 
vised. 

Much  time  and  labor  may  be  saved  by  carrying  material  for 
ramps  ready  prepared  on  the  cars. 

511.  It  is  not  necessary  to  wait  for  an  engine  each  time  cars 
must  be  spotted  during  loading  or  unloading.  By  uncoupling 
the  cars  and  distributing  20  or  more  men  along  the  sides  of 
those  to  be  moved,  two  or  more  cars  may  be  readily  shifted. 
Care  must  be  taken  to  have  men  ready  to  handle  the  brakes 
and  to  give  signals  in  such  a  way  as  will  cause  all  the  men  to 
work  together. 

512.  The  animals  having  been  loaded,  the  men  fall  in  at  the 
place  where  their  equipments  were  left,  secure  them,  and  are 
marched  to  the  coaches.  The  assignment  of  men  to  particular 
coaches  should  have  been  made  beforehand,  so  that  the  men 
may  enter  without  delay. 


202  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS;   1917. 

513.  So  far  as  practicable  sections  are  kept  together.  In 
each  car  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  occupies  a  seat  next 
the  door  at  one  end  of  the  car  and  the  next  senior,  except  in 
the  officer's  car,  a  seat  next  the  other  door.  These  noncommis- 
sioned officers  preserve  order  and  see  that  no  one  leaves  the 
car  without  authority. 

The  cooks  are  in  the  kitchen  car  or  in  the  car  next  to  the 
baggage  car  used  as  a  kitchen.  The  first  sergeant,  stable  ser- 
geant, supply  sergeant,  company  clerk,  and  mechanics  are  in 
the  car  with  the  officers. 

Before  entering  the  train  the  company  commander  cautions 
the  men  not  to  leave  the  cars  without  specific  orders;  that  com- 
plaints are  to  be  made  to  him  and  not  to  the  train  crew ;  and 
gives  such  other  instructions  as  may  be  necessary. 

The  sleeping-car  conductor  or  the  porters  and  the  train 
conductor  should  be  informed  as  to  the  orders  relative  to  the 
introduction  of  unauthorized  articles  into  the  train,  and  re- 
quested to  impart  this  information  to  their  subordinates. 

514.  The  train  conductor  should  be  requested  to  notify  the 
company  connnander  immediately  before  any  halt  of  10  min- 
ute.-^ or  longer  is  to  occur.  During  such  stops  an  officer,  accom- 
panied by  the  quartermaster  and  stable  sergeants,  the  chief 
meclianic.  and  one  or  more  mechanics,  inspects  the  stock  and 
flat  cars  and  make  any  repairs  which  may  be  necessary  and 
practicable.  When  the  duration  of  the  stop  is  considerable, 
gurirds  should  be  posted  on  the  flat  cars. 

515.  The  animals  should  be  unloaded  once  every  24  hours 
for  exercise,  feeding,  and  watering. 

AVhen  the  journey  is  to  exceed  24  hours,  suitable  arrange- 
ments sliould  be  made  with  the  railroad  authorities  for  the  stop 
lor  feeding.  It  is  desirable  that  the  place  for  unloading  should 
be  selected  several  hours  beforehand,  so  that  the  proper  notice 
may  be  given  to  the  station  agent  and  other  railroad  officials. 
In  order  that  delays  may  not  result  in  its  being  necessary  to  re- 
load the  animals  at  night,  a  station  for  unloading  should  be 
selected  that,  without  unexpected  delays,  will  be  reached  at 
about  noon. 

516.  The  necessary  requirements  for  a  suitable  feeding  sta- 
tion are :  Water  and  a  platform,  or,  preferably,  a  chute  for  tak- 
ing the  animals  out  of  the  cars. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  aEGULATIONS..   1917.  203 

Ample  stock  pens,  dry  footing,  facilities  for  renewing  the  bed- 
dins:  in  the  cars,  etc.,  are  also  desirable. 

517.  Before  reaching  the  feeding  station  the  senior  noncom- 
missioned officer  in  each  car  details  a  guard  to  remain  in  the 
car,  causes  the  drivers  to  get  out  their  grooming  kits,  and  cau- 
tions; the  men  tliat  the  remaining  equipment,  except  pistols,  is 
to  be  left  in  the  car. 

l'l)oii  reaching  the  feeding  station  the  men,  except  the  mess 
sergeant,  cooks,  and  guards,  are  notified  to  leave  the  cars  and 
fall  in  at  a  designated  place.  Rolls  having  been  called,  the 
drivers  are  formed  separately  from  the  other  men. 

518.  Two  gun  squads  are  detailed  to  assist  the  stable  sergeant 
in  preparing  the  forage.  These  men  are  at  once  marched  to 
the  forage  car.  The  stable  sergeant,  upon  reaching  the  forage 
car,  gives  the  halter  tie  ropes  to  one  of  the  detail,  who.  assisted 
by  another  man,  takes  them  to  the  stock  cars  and  distributes 
them  as  they  are  needed.  These  men  are  responsible  for  col- 
lecting the  tie  ropes  and  turning  them  over  to  the  stable  ser- 
geant when  the  animals  are  reloaded. 

The  stable  sergeant  causes  the  remaining  men  of  his  detail 
to  put  one  feed  of  oats  in  each  feed  bag  and  to  distribute  one 
feed  of  hay  at  the  feeding  places. 

The  feed  bags  are  not  taken  to  the  feeding  places  until  the 
animals  have  been  watered,  when  all  the  men  assist  in  this 
distribution.  No  attempt  is  made  to  give  the  animals  their  own 
feed  bags. 

519.  The  supply  sergeant,  and  the  mechanics  not  engaged  in 
unloading  the  animals  proceed,  as  soon  as  the  rolls  have  been 
calleil,  to  the  flat  cars,  where  they  make  such  repairs  as  may 
be  necessary.  Having  completed  these  repairs,  the  mechanics 
begin  on  the  stock  cars  as  soon  as  the  latter  have  been  unloaded. 

As  soon  as  an  officer  is  available,  one  is  detailed  to  inspect  all 
this  work,  to  cause  any  additional  repairs  that  may  be  neces- 
sary to  be  made,  and  to  superintend  the  resanding  of  the  cars. 

Two  squads  for  each  car  to  be  unloaded  and  the  necessary 
mechanics  are  marched  to  the  unloading  place.  Four  selected 
noncommissioned  officers  and  a  mechanic  are  detailed  for  each 
place  or  chute  where  a  car  is  to  be  unloaded.  These  men  re- 
main at  the  same  chute  or  platform  until  all  of  the  cars  there 
have  been  emptied.  The  two  squads  for  each  car  is  sufficient 
to  provide  one  man  for  each  two  animals  to  be  unloaded. 


204  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGTJLATIONS    1917. 

Men  are  held  in  ranks  until  needed. 

An  officer  should  be  in  charge  of  nnloadinc:  each  car. 
•   520.  Two    of   the    selected   noncommissioned    ofhcors    of   tlie 
special  detail-  are  assigned  to  Avork  inside  the  car,  th(^  remaining; 
two  working  outside  the  car  at  the  door.    The  mechanic  removes 
the  fastenings  and  assists  in  opening  the  door. 

The  principal  dithculty  in  unloading  is  to  prevent  the  animals 
from  leaving  the  car  before  the  gangway,  gates,  etc.,  are  in 
place  and  to  avoid  overcrowding  in  the  doorway. 

521.  As  soon  as  the  car  is  in  place  the  door  is  opened  enough 
to  permit  the  noncommissioned  officers  who  work  inside  to 
enter.  These  men  at  once  enter,  leaving  the  breast  bar  in  place, 
and  quiet  the  animals  nearest  the  door  by  speaking  to  and 
caressing  them. 

Everything  being  in  readiness,  the  door  is  completely  opened 
and  the  gangway,  gates,  etc.,  put  in  position  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible. If  a  loading  pen  is  avaihible,  the  men  assigned  to  the  car 
go  into  the  pen  to  catch  the  animals  up  after  they  enter  it.  If 
no  pen  is  available,  the  men  line  themselves  up  on  either  side 
of  the  door,  each  one  taking  an  animal  in  turn  as  he  leaves  the 
doorway.  All  men  being  in  their  places,  the  noncommissioned 
officers  inside  the  car  remove  the  breast  bar.  All  four  of  the 
selected  noncommissioned  officers  endeavor  to  make  the  animals 
leave  the  car  quietly  and  in  single  file. 

522.  As  soon  as  Ihe  animals  of  the  first  lot  have  been  caught 
up  pairs  are  formed  in  column  and  led  around  at  a  slow 
walk.  A  noncommissioned  officer  should  be  designated  to  lead 
the  column  of  this  first  lot.  As  each  succeeding  car  is  un- 
loaded and  the  animals  caught  up  the  extra  men  join  the  rear 
of  the  column. 

523.  If  ample  feeding  lots  are  available  a  separate  lot  should 
be  assigned  each  separate  car.  Effort  is  made  to  keep  together 
the  animals  that  have  been  in  the  same  car  and  to  reload  them 
together.  Men  remain  Mith  the  pairs  when  they  catch  up 
and  do  not  attempt  to  find  their  own  animals,  unless  the  latter 
are  with  the  same  carload  to  which  the  driver  is  assigned.  In 
this  case  a  driver  may  be  alluvred  to  take  his  own  animals  .after 
they  are  tied  up  for  grooming  and  feeding. 

524.  Tlie  object  of  walking  the  animals  and  of  the  subse- 
quent grooming  is  to  remove  the  stiffness  and  swelling  of  the 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  205 

legs  induced  by  the  long  standing  in  the  cars.  For  this  retison 
the  exercise  should  be  continued  for  10  or  15  minutes  after  the 
unloading  of  tlio  last  car  has  been  completed. 

525.  Hay  having  been  distributed  and  the  exercising  com- 
pleted, the  animals  are  properly  secured  and  then  groomed  while 
they  are  eating  hay.  During  the  grooming  particular  attention 
is  paid  to  cleaning  and  hand  rubbing  the  legs  thoroughly.  All 
kicks,  cuts,  and  abrasions  are  reported  to  the  stable  sergeant, 
who  visits  all  the  animals  at  this  time. 

526.  During  the  grooming  a  special  detail  proceeds  to  the 
stock  ca.rs  and  renew  the  sanding,  if  material  therefor  is  avail- 
able. Tools  for  this  purpose  may  frequently  be  had  from  the 
railroad  or  stockyard  authorities,  or  they  may  be  taken  from 
the  carts.  Sometimes  it  may  be  necessary  to  detail  a  certain 
number  of  men  to  draw  water  for  the  animals, 

527.  The  grooming  is  continued  until  the  animals  must  be 
watered,  which  should  be  in  time  to  allov/  them  to  eat  their 
oats  before  it  is  necessary  to  begin  reloading. 

At  the  proper  time  the  officer  in  charge  of  feeding  causes  the 
filled  feed  bags  to  be  taken  and  distributed  after  all  the  ani- 
mals liave  been  watered.  He  then  details  a  squad  to  collect  the 
feed  bags  and  turn  them  over  to  the  stable  sergeant  at  the 
forage  car  after  they  have  been  removed  from  the  animals. 

528.  At  least  tvro  hours  should  be  allowed  for  the  unloading, 
feeding,  and  reloading.  In  all  loading  and  unloading,  particu- 
lar care  must  be  exercised  to  avoid  any  shouting  or  excitement 
on  the  part  of  the  men.  These  are  the  principal  causes  of  ex- 
citement on  the  part  of  horses  or  mules,  which,  in  turn,  is 
the  source  of  most  difficulties  in  handling  the  animals. 

529.  Upon  arrival  at  the  detraining  station  complete  and  early 
Information  as  to  the  facilities  for  unloading  and  other  con- 
ditions is  essential  to  the  orderly  planning  and  conduct  of  the 
detraining.  E^or  this  purpose  each  train  should  be  met  as  it 
arrives  by  an  officer  or  officers  from  preceding  organizations. 

530.  The  detraining  should  -ordinarily  be  so  conducted  as  to 
release  the  cars  as  rapidly  as  possible  and  thus  avoid  conges- 
tion in  the  detraining  station.  Following  this  principlej  the 
men  take  all  of  their  equipment  with  them  upon  leaving  the 
coaches ;  the  stock  cars  are  unloaded  first,  the  flat  cars  next, 
and  finally  the  baggage  cars  and  the  box  cars. 

33325°— 18 S 


206  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  HEGULATIONS,  1917. 

531.  Upon  firrival  the  noncommissioned  officers  cause  the  men 
to  take  their  equiiDment.  but  no  one  leaves  the  cars  except  the 
officers  and  the  first  sergeant  until  ordered  to  do  so.  The  neces- 
sary plan  for  unloading  having  been  made,  the  men  are  ordered 
to  leave  the  cars  and  fall  in  at  a  designated  place.  Rolls  hav- 
ing been  called,  the  mess  sergeant  and  the  cooks  proceed  di- 
rectly to  the  baggage  car  containing  the  kitchen  equipment  and 
the  rations.  The  remainder  of  the  company  is  marched  to  a 
suitable  place  where  the  men  may  leave  their  equipment.  The 
men  having  deposited  their  equipment,  a  gtiard  is  placed,  the 
necessary  details  are  made,  and  the  work  of  unloading  begun. 

532.  ^Vhenever  practicable,  arrangements  are  made  at  once 
for  unloading  the  kitchen  equipment  and  necessary  rations  for 
the  first  meal  and  for  transporting  them  to  a  suitable  place. 
Such  men  as  are  necessary  are  detailed  to  assist  the  mess 
sergeant  and  cooks  in  this  work.  The  animals  are  unloaded 
as  heretofore  described,  but  are  arranged  by  .squads  and  sec- 
tions as  they  are  unloaded  and  are  secured  at  once,  care  being 
exercised  that  they  are  not  tied  to  movable  or  flimsy  struc- 
tures. The  feed  bags  are  not  filled,  but  hay  is  fed  at  once. 
Two  or  more  men  are  set  to  vrork  to  sort  the  feed  bags  out  by 
sections,  and  later,  when  the  animals  are  being  harnessed,  to 
turn  them  over  to  the  section  leader. 

During  the  imloading  of  the  horses  the  qtiartermaster  ser- 
geant, the  mechanics  not  assisting  at  the  stock  cars,  and  one 
gun  squad  proceed  to  the  ilat  cars  and  begin  the  removal  of 
the  chocks  preparatory  to  unloading.  As  the  timbers  are  re- 
moved they  are  taken  to  a  suitable  place,  and  one  man  is  left 
with  them  as  guard  until  they  are  finally  disposed  of. 

533.  The  animals  having  been  unloaded,  secured,  and  given  a 
feed  of  hay.  work  on  unloading  the  carts  and  wagons  is  begun. 
Usually  a  part  of  the  men  may  be  usefully  employed  in  unload- 
ing the  baggage  and  box  cars  at  the  same  time. 

534.  As  the  carts  and  wagons  are  unloaded  they  are  run  to 
a  suitable  place  and  arranged  in  proper  order  in  park  or  column 
convenient  for  hitching  in.  A  guard  is  posted  over  the  park 
as  soon  as  the  vehicle  is  placed. 

535.  Ordinarily  the  company  should  harness,  hitch,  and  clear 
the  vicinity  of  the  station  as  soon  as  the  animals,  vehicles,  and 
harness  have  been  unloaded.     When  the  box  cars  have  not  been 


MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  EEGTJLATIONS,   1917.  207 

completely  unloaded  all  men  not  needed  to  hold  animals  dur- 
in,^'  I  lie  Juu-nessing  may  be  left  at  work  unloading. 

536.  While  the  foregoing  methods  of  loading  and  unloading 
outline  the  principles  \yhich  should  be  foliov.'ed,  the  details  of 
the  plan  adopted  must  be  varied  to  conform  to  the  conditions  of 
eacli  particular  place. 

The  one  essential  is  to  form  a  definite  plan  and  then  to  fol- 
low it  methodically  and  systematically  without  excitement  or 
undue  haste. 

BY   WATEli. 

537.  At  sea,  transportation  of  troops  is  effected  by  the  Army 
transport  service. 

The  necessary  preliminaries  before  embarking,  routine  details 
on  board  Army  transports,  and  methods  of  disembarking  are 
prescribed  in  the  Army  Transport  Service  Regulations,  a  copy 
of  which  will  be  secured  by  the  commander  of  each  organization 
designated  for  oversea  service. 

538.  For  oversea  transportation  all  carts  and  wagons  should 
be  knocked  down.  Harness  and  horse  equipments,  except  such 
as  are  needed  for  use  during  the  trip,  will  be  boxed  and  marked 
to  show  the  section  to  which  they  belong. 

The  men  retain  in  their  possession  their  personal  equipments. 

^Ul  carts  and  wagons  should  be  fully  equipped  before  em- 
barking and  should  be  stored  where  they  will  be  accessible.  For 
expeditions  into  the  theater  of  operations  it  is  obligatory  that 
all  of  the  personnel,  materiel,  and  ammunition  of  a  company  be 
carried  on  the  same  vessel. 

539.  Animals  are  led  aboard  if  docking  facilities  permit, 
otlier\\ise  tliey  are  lightered  to  the  transport  and  hoisted  aboard, 
if  necessary,  by  means  of  slings  or  other  appliances,  with  which 
the  transport  should  be  provided. 

Animals  should  not  be  watered  or  fed  for  several  hours  before 
embarkation. 

If  it  is  necessary  to  disembark  at  a  point  where  there  are  no 
wharves,  suitable  boats  or  lighters  must  be  provided  by  the  trans- 
jwrt  service. 

In  calm  water  the  animals  may  be  lowered  into  the  water  or 
driven  overboard  from  low  ports  and  required  to  s\^im  ashore. 
In  such  case  the  first  overboard  may  be  led  from  small  boats. 


208  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

540.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  transport  service  to  provide  forage 
for  animals  while  on  board  and  for  proper  arrangements  for 
stabling  them. 

Special  methods  for  the  care  and  handling  of  animals  on  ship- 
board are  prescribed  in  the  Army  Transport  Service  Regulations. 

Section  II. — Camps. 

541.  There  are  two  general  classes  of  camps — semipermanent 
camps  and  temporary  camps. 

542.  Semipermanent  camps  are  used  for  troops  in  mobiliza- 
tion, concentration,  or  maneuver  camps,  and  during  such  pauses 
in  operations  as  permit  the  better  care  of  troops. 

543.  Temporary  camps  are  used  on  the  march  or  during 
operations  when  lialts  are  made  only  for  the  night  or  for  a  few 
days  at  most. 

544.  In  large  commands  the  halt  order  should  assign  camp 
sites  to  the  next  smaller  commands,  and  the  commanders  of  the 
latter  should  locate  their  respective  commands  to  the  best 
advantage  on  the  area  assigned  them. 

545.  Even  in  small  commands,  the  commanding  officer,  or  an 
officer  designated,  should  precede  the  column  to  look  over  the 
camping  ground  and  decide  on  the  arrangement  of  the  camp, 
so  that  on  arrival  the  command  may  immediately  occupy  the 
ground  assigned  it.  and  comn^anders  may  be  promptly  informed 
as  to  arrangements  for  water,  fuel,  forage,  and  rations. 

546.  If  the  area  of  the  available  ground  is  sufficient  and 
suitalile,  the  camp  of  the  company  or  battalion  should  conform 
to  Plate  IX  and  the  Plates  A  and  B,  published  in  the  Field 
Service  Regulations.  When  the  camp  site  has  a  restricted,  area, 
intervals  and  distances  are  reduced. 

Under  service  conditions,  camp  sites  that  will  permit  the 
encampment  in  regular  order,  as  indicated  in  the  plates,  will 
not  often  be  available  and  regularity  must  be  sacrificed. 

SEMIPEEMANENT   CAMPS. 

(General.) 

547.  Semipermanent  camps  contemplate  the  use  of  pyramidal 
and  wall  tents,  mess  shelters,  baths,  latrines,  raised  picket  lines 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  209 

on  substantial  posts,  and  corrals  when  practicable.  The  equip- 
ment therefor  is  classed  as  equipment  "  B,"  and  is  not  carried 
on  division  trains,  but  when  required  is  brought  up  by  other' 
transportation. 

548.  The  forms  and  dimensions  of  semipermanent  camps  and 
the  character  and  amount  of  tentage  or  other  shelter  used  vary 
g-reatly  with  the  conditions. 

549.  Lack  of  sufficient  rest  renders  troops  unfit  for  hard  work 
and  diminishes  their  power  of  resisting  disease.  Therefore 
commanders  should  secure  for  the  troops,  whenever  possible, 
their  accustomed  rest.  Every  effort  must  be  made  to  provide 
adequate  shelter  for  both  men  and  animals. 

550.  Men  should  not  be  on  damp  ground.  In  temporary  camps 
and  in  bivouac  they  raise  their  beds,  if  suitable  material,  such 
as  straw,  leaves,  or  boughs,  can  be  obtained,  or  use  their 
ponchos  or  slickers.  In  cold  weather  and  when  fuel  is  plentiful 
the  ground  may  be  warmed  by  lires,  the  men  making  their  beds 
after  raking  away  the  ashes. 

551.  When  troops  are  to  remain  in  camp  for  some  time  all 
underbrush  is  cleared  away  and  the  camp  made  as  comfortable 
as  possible. 

552.  Suitable  tents  or  other  shelter  must  be  provided  for 
workshops  for  mechanics  and  for  kitchens.  Condemned  canvas 
can  be  utilized  for  these  purposes  in  camps  of  a  duration  too 
short  to  justify  suitable  buildings. 

When  the  camp  is  reached  by  rail,  the  timbers  used  in  secur- 
ing the  carriages  on  the  cars  are.,  if  carefully  removed,  very 
convenient  for  such  purposes. 

Animals  constantly  exposed  to  the  sun  in  hot  weather  and  to 
cold  winds,  rain,  or  snow  in  winter  lose  condition  very  rapidly. 

553.  The  detailed  arrangements  of  the  normal  semipermanent 
camps  are  given  in  Plate  IX.  Whenever  practicable  the  width 
of  the  camps  therein  shown  should  be  somevvdiat  extended. 

Tlie  picket  line  should  be  well  drained  by  cutting  ditches  about 
12  feet  on  either  side  of  the  line  and  throwing  the  earth  to  the 
center.  Whenever  practicable  the  ground  should  be  covered 
with  broken  stone,  sand,  or  cinders.  Particular  care  must  be 
taken  to  provide  dry  footing  not  only  on  the  picket  line  but 
around  the  watering  places  in  semipermanent  camps. 


210  ]iIACHINE-G1JN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

554.  Watering  ti'oughs,  shelter  in  cold  weather  and  shade  in 
hot  weather  are  provided  for  the  animals,  if  practicable. 

555.  To  prevent  stampeding  in  camp  it  will  in  most  cases  be 
sufficient  for  the  men  to  go  quietly  among  the  animals  at  the  first 
sign  of  fright  and  speak  to  them.  If  horses  are  stampeded,  men 
should  mount  the  fastest  animals  within  reach,  place  themselves 
in  front  of  the  herd,  and  conduct  it  back  to  camp.  V/ith  old 
horses  the  sounding  of  stable  call  may  prevent  or  stop  a 
stampede. 

556.  One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  with  animal  transporta- 
tion in  campaign  is  to  secure  sufficient  long  forage.  On  this 
account  the  greatest  attention  should  be  given  to  grazing  at 
every  opportunity. 

The  animals  are  either  held  on  the  halter  rope,  picketed  on 
the  lariat,  turned  loose  in  inclosed  pastures,  or  if  there  has 
been  opportunity  for  sufficient  training  they  may  be  herded. 

Special  effort  should  be  made  to  give  them  an  hour  or  two  of 
grazing  in  the  morning  while  the  dew  is  on  tlie  grass  (not 
clover),  especially  if  the  supply  of  hay  at  night  has  been  short, 
and  in  such  cases  they  should  not  be  disturbed  until  the  last 
moment,  time  lost  being  made  up  by  more  rapid  marching. 

Should  protection  from  an  enemy  be  necessary  the  animals 
are  taken  out  to  graze  under  charge  of  an  officer  as  soon  as 
possible  after  camping.  They  are  taken  as  far  as  is  safe,  in 
order  to  keep  the  nearer  grass  for  night.  It  is  occasionally  prac- 
ticable to  arrange  the  camp  so  as  to  use  the  wagons  and  natural 
obstacles  to  inclose  a  space  for  night  grazing. 

THE  SELECTION  OF  CAMP  SITES  IN  THE  FIELD. 

557.  In  campaign,  tactical  necessity  may  leave  a  little  choice 
in  the  selection  of  camp  sites,  but  under  any  conditions  the 
requirements  of  sanitation  should  be  given  every  consideration 
consistent  with  the  tactical  situation. 

558.  Great  care  should  be  exercised  in  selecting  sites.  In 
general  the  following  principles  govern : 

The  site  should  be  convenient  to  an  abundant  supply  of  pure 
water. 

Good  roads  should  lead  to  the  camp.  Interior  communication 
throughout  the  camp  should  be  easy.  A  camp  near  a  main  road 
is  undesirable  on  account  of  dust  and  noise. 


MACHINE-GUN  DP.ILL  HEGULATIONS.   1917.  211 

Wood,  grass,  forage,  and  supplies  should  be  at  hand  or  easily 
obtainable. 

The  ground  should  accommodate  the  command  without  crowd- 
ing and  without  compelling  the  troops  of  one  unit  to  pass 
through  the  camp  of  another. 

The  site  should  be  sufficiently  high  and  rolling  to  drain  off 
storm  water  readily,  and,  if  the  season  be  hot,  to  face  the  breeze. 
In  cold  weather  it  should  preferably  have  a  southern  exposure, 
with  woods  to  break  the  prevailing  winds.  In  warm  weather 
an  eastern  exposure,  with  the  site  moderately  shaded  by  trees, 
is  desirable. 

The  site  should  be  dry.  For  this  reason  porous  soil,  covered 
with  stout  turf  and  underlaid  by  a  sandy  or  gravelly  subsoil,  is 
best.  A  site  on  clay  soil,  or  where  the  ground  water  approaches 
the  surface,  is  damp  and  unhealthful. 

Alluvial  soils,  marshy  ground,  and  ground  near  the  base  of 
hills  or  near  thick  v/oods  or  dense  vegetation  are  undesirable  as 
camp  sites  on  account  of  dampness.  Ravines  and  depressions 
are  likely  to  be  unduly  warm  and  to  have  insufficient  or  imde- 
sirable  air  currents. 

Proximity  to  marshes  or  stagnant  w^ater  is  undesirable  on 
account  of  the  dampness  and  mosquitoes  and  the  diseases  which 
the  latter  transmit.  The  high  banks  of  lakes  or  large  streams 
often  make  desirable  camp  sites. 

Dry  beds  of  streams  should  be  avoided ;  they  are  subject  to 
sudden  freshet. 

The  occupation  of  old  camp  sites  is  dangerous,  since  these  are 
often  permeated  by  elements  of  disease  vrhich  persist  for  consid- 
erable periods.  Camp  sites  nmst  be  changed  promptly  when 
there  is  evidence  of  soil  pollution,  or  when  epidemic  disease 
threatens,  but  the  need  for  frequent  changes  on  this  account  may 
be  a  reflection  on  the  sanitary  administration  of  the  camp. 

A  change  of  camp  site  is  often  desirable  in  order  to  secure  a 
change  of  surroundings  and  to  abandon  areas  which  have  be- 
come dusty  and  cut  up. 

WATEIi    .SUPPLY. 

559.  Immediately  on  making  camp  a  guard  should  be  placed 
over  the  water  supply.     If  the  water  be  obtained  from  a  stream, 


212  MACHINE- GITN  DUILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

places  should  be  designated,  beginning  upstream,  (1)  for  drink- 
ing and  cooking.  (2)  for  watering  animals.  (3)  for  bathing  and 
washing  clothing. 

If  the  stream  be  small,  the  water  supply  may  be  increased  by 
building  a  dam.  Small  springs  may  be  dug  out  and  each  lined 
with  a  gabion,  or  a  barrel  or  box,  with  both  ends  removed,  or 
with  stones,  the  space  between  the  lining  and  the  earth  being 
filled  with  puddled  clay.  A  rim  of  clay  should  be  built  to  keep 
out  surface  drainage.  The  same  method  may  be  used  near 
swamps,  streams,  or  lakes  to  increase  or  clarify  the  water 
supply. 

560.  Water  that  is  not  known  to  be  pure  should  be  boiled  20 
minutes ;  it  should  then  be  cooled  and  aerated  by  being  poured 
repeatedly  from  one  clean  container  to  another,  or  it  may  be 
purified  by  approved  apparatus  supplied  for  the  purpose. 

561.  Arrangements  should  be  made  for  men  to  draw  water 
from  the  authorized  receptacles  by  means  of  a  faucet.  The 
dipping  of  water  from  the  receptacles  ar  the  use  of  a  common 
drinking  cup  sJionld  he  proJiibited. 

562.  On  the  march,  including  camps,  the  daily  requirements 
of  water  may  be  estimated  at  6  gallons  per  man  or  10  gallons 
per  horse,  in  permanent  or'  semipermanent  camps  the  supply 
should  be  sufficient  to  provide  from  25  to  30  gallons  per  man 
and  15  gallons  per  hor>?e  per  day. 

This  supply  should  be  properly  piped  and  delivered  at  con- 
venient places  in  each  organization  camp. 

KITCHEN. 

563.  Camp  kettles  are  himg  on  irons  or  on  a  support  consist- 
ing of  a  green  pole  lying  in  the  crotches  of  two  upright  posts  of 
the  same  character. 

A  narrow  trench  for  the  fire,  about  1  foot  deep,  under  the  pole, 
protects  the  fire  from  the  wind  and  saves  fuel.  A  still  greater 
economy  of  fuel  can  be  effected  by  digging  a  similar  trench  in 
the  direction  of  the  wind  and  slightly  narrower  than  the  diame- 
ter of  the  kettles.  The  kettles  are  then  placed  on  the  trench 
and  the  space  over  ^t  and  between  the  kettles  filled  in  with 
stones,  clay,  etc..  leaving  the  flue  rtmning  beneath  the  kettles. 
The  draft  can  be  improved  by  building  a  chimney  of  stones, 
clay,  etc.,  at  the  leeward  end  of  the  flue. 


MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  SEGXJLATIONS,  1917.  213 

Four  such  trenches  radiating  from  a  common  central  chimney 
will  give  one  flue  for  use  whatever  may  be  the  direction  of  the 
wind. 

A  sliglit  slope  in  the  flue,  from  the  chimney  down,  provides  for 
drainage  and  improves  the  draft. 

564.  The  lack  of  portable  ovens  can  be  met  by  ovens  con- 
structed of  s^one  and  covered  witlf  earth  to  retain  the  heat. 
If  no  stone  is. available,  an  empty  barrel  with  one  head  out  is 
laid  on  its  side  and  covered  with  vv-et  clay  to  a  depth  of  6  or 
more  inches,  and  then  with  a  layer  of  dry  earth  equally  thick. 
A  flue  is  constructed  with  clay  above  the  closed  end  of  the  bar- 
rel, which  is  then  burned  out  with  a  hot  Are.  This  leaves  a 
baked  clay  covering  for  the  oven. 

A  recess  can  be  similarly  constructed  with  boards  or  even 
brushwood,  supported  on  a  horizontal  pole  resting  on  upright 
posts,  covered  and  burnt  out  as  in  the  case  of  the  barrel. 

When  claybanks  are  available,  an  oven  may  be  excavated 
therein  and  used  at  once. 

To  bake  in  such  ovens,  first  heat  them,  and  then  close  flues 
and  ends. 

565.  Food  must  be  protected  from  flies,  dust,  and  sun.  Facili- 
ties must  be  provided  for  cleaning  and  scalding  the  mess  equip- 
ment of  the  men.  Kitchens  and  the  ground  around  them  must 
be  kept  scrupulously  clean. 

566.  Solid  refuse  should  be  promptly  burned,  either  in  the 
kitchen  fire  or  in  an  improvised  crematory. 

567.  In  temporary  camps,  if  the  soil  is  porous,  liquid  refuse 
from  the  kitchens  may  be  strained  through  sacking  into  seepage 
pits  dug  near  the  kitchen.  Boards  or  poles  covered  with  brush 
or  grass  and  a  layer  of  earth  may  be  used  to  prevent  the  access 
of  flies.  The  strainer  should  also  be  protected  from  flies.  Pits 
of  this  kind  in  clay  soil  will  not  operate  successfully.  All  pits 
should  be  filled  with  earth  when  the  camp  is  abandoned. 

DISPOSAL    OF   EXCKETA. 

568.  Immediately  on  arriving  in  camp  sinks  should  be  dug. 
This  is  a  matter  of  fundamental  sanitary  importance,  since  the 
most  serious  epidemics  of  camp  diseases  are  spread  from  human 
excreta. 


214  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

One  sink  is  usually  provided  for  eacli  company,  and  one  for 
the  officers  of  each  battalion.  Those  for  the  men  are  invariably 
located  on  the  side  of  camp  opposite  the  Ivitchens.  All  sinlis 
should  be  so  placed  that  they  can  not  pollute  the  water  supply 
or  camp  site  as  a  result  of  drainage  or  overflow.  To  insure  this, 
their  localities  and  their  distance  from  camp  may  be  varied. 

569.  When  camp  is  made*  for  a  single  night,  shallovv'  trenches, 
12  inches  deep  and^lo  to  18  inches  wide,  which  the  men  may 
straddle,  will  suffice. 

In  camps  of  longer  duration,  and  when  it  is  not  possible  to 
provide  latrine  boxes,  as  for  permanent  camps,  deeper  trenches 
should  be  dug.  These  may  be  used  as  straddle  trendies  or  a 
seat  and  back  rest  provided  from  poles  or  other  available  mate- 
rial. They  should  be  screened  by  brush,  condemned  canvas,  or 
other  material.  "When  open  trenches  are  used,  special  care 
must  be  taken  to  insure  that  all  excreta  is  covered  with  earth, 
lime,  or  ashes  as  soon  as  it  is  deposited. 

570.  In  permanent  or  semipermanent  camps  special  sanitary 
facilities  for  the  disposal  or  disinfection  of  excreta  will  ordi- 
narily be  provided.  When  trenches  r.re  used  in  such  camps  they 
should  be  at  least  G  feet  deep  and  12  feet  long  and  not  more  than 
2  feet  wide.  Seats  are  walled  to  the  ground  and  provided  v/ith 
lids  to  keep  flies  from  reaching  the  deposits;  urinal  troughs 
discharging  into  the  trenches  are  provided.  Each  day  the 
latrine  boxes  are  thoroughly  cleaned,  outside  by  scrubbing,  and 
inside  by  applying  when  necessary  a  coat  of  crude  oil  or  white- 
wash. The  pit  is  burned  out  daily  with  approximately  1  gallon 
of  crude  oil  and  15  pounds  of  straw.  When  filled  to  within 
2  feet  of  the  surface,  such  latrines  are  discarded,  filled  with 
earth,  and  their  position  marked. 

In  permanent  camps  urine  tubs  should  be  placed  in  the  com- 
pany streets  at  nightfall ;  they  are  emptied  after  reveille.  Their 
location  should  be  plainly  marked  and  thoroughly  and  fre- 
quently disinfected. 

DAILY  EOrTI^'E,  INTEEIOK  GUAED.  ETC. 

571.  In  camps  of  some  duration  guard  and  other  duties  fol- 
low closely  the  custom  in  garrison.  Machine-gun  organiza- 
tions provide  guards  for  their  parks,  picket  lines,  and  for  such 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGITLATIONS,  1917.  215 

other  places  within  their  camps  as  may  be  necessary.  These 
are  known  as  interior  guards  and  it  should  ordinarily  be  suffi- 
cient to  furnish  for  each  picket  line  a  double  sentinel  from  the 
or.canization  to  which  the  line  pertains. 

The  guard  is,  when  practicable,  mounted  by  battalion  or  regi- 
ment, the  necessary  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  being 
detailed  by  roster.  The  necessary  sentinels  for  stores,  etc., 
are  also  detailed  by  battalions  or  regimental  roster;  especially 
in  permanent  or  semipermanent  camps  all  members  of  guards 
are  sent  to  join  their  organizations  at  reveille. 

V.'hen  prisoners  are  to  be  guarded  during  the  march,  they  are 
either  turned  over  to  the  organization  commander  or  marched 
v\-ith  and  guarded  by  the  company  to  vv'hich  the  officer  of  the 
day  belongs.  The  protection  of  the  camp  in  campaign  is  pro- 
vided for  by  means  of  outposts  (305). 

The  camp  is  policed  daily  after  breakfast  and  all  refuse 
burned.  Tent  \yalls  are  raised  immediately  after  breakfast 
and  the  bedding  and  clothing  aired  daily,  v.^eather  permitting. 

572.  When  troops  bivouac  for  the  night  the  necessity  for  ex- 
tensive sanitary  precautions  is  not  great ;  however,  shallow  sink 
trenches  are  dug  to  prevent  general  pollution  of  the  vicinity. 
If  the  cooking  be  collective,  shallow  kitchen  sinks  should  be 
dug.  If  the  cooking  be  individual,  the  men  should  be  required 
to  build  their  fires- on  the  leeAvard  Hank  of  the  camp  ov  bivouac. 

Before  marching  the  ground  should  be  thoroughly  policed, 
all  refuse  burned  or  burled,  all  trenches-  filled  in,  and  fires 
extinguished. 

Section  III. — Ceremonies. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

573.  The  order  in  v\-hich  the  troops  of  the  various  arms  are 
arranged  for  ceremonies  is  prescribed  by  Army  Regulations. 

When  forming  for  ceremonies  the  companies  of  the  battalion 
and  the  battalions  of  the  regiment  are  posted  from  right  to  left 
in  line  and  from  head  to  rear  in  column,  in  the  order  of  rank 
of  their  respective  commanders  present  in  the  formation,  the 
senior  on  the  right  or  at  the  head. 


216  TrlACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917. 

The  commander  faces  the  command ;  subordinate  commanders 
face  to  the  front. 

574.  At  the  command  present  arms,  given  by  the  colonel,  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  colonel's  staff  salute;  the  major's 
staff  salute  at  the  major's  command.  Each  staff  returns  to  the 
carry  or  order  when  the  command  order  anus  is  given  by  its 
chief. 

575.  At  the  assembly  for  a  ceremony  companies  are  formed 
on  tiieir  own  parades  and  informally  inspected. 

At  adjutants  eall,  except  for  ceremonies  involving  a  single 
battalion,  each  battalion  is  formed  on  its  own  parade,  reports  are 
received,  and  the  battalion  presented  to  the  major.  At  the  sec- 
ond sounding  of  adjuianfs  eall  the  regiment  is  formed. 

EEVIEWS. 
GENERAL  RULES. 

576.  The  adjutant  posts  men  or  otherwise  marks  the  points 
where  the  column  changes  direction  -in  such  manner  that  its 
Hank  in  passing  will  be  about  12  paces  from  the  reviewing 
officer. 

The  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  usually  opposite  the  center 
of  the  line,  is  indicated  by  a  marker. 

Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade,  and  distinguished  per- 
sonages invited  to  accompany  the  reviewing  officer,  place  them- 
selves on  his  left ;  their  staifs  and  orderlies  place  themselves, 
respectively,  on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  of  the  re- 
viewing officer ;  ail  others  who  accompany  the  revievring  officer 
place  themselves  on  the  left  of  his  staff,  their  orderlies  in  rear. 
A  staff  officer  is  designated  to  escort  distinguished  personages 
and  to  indicate  to  them  their  proper  positions. 

577.  While  riding  around  the  troops,  the  reviewing  officer  may 
direct  his  staff",  flag,  and  orderlies  to  remain  at  the  post  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  or  that  only  his  personal  staff  and  flag  shall 
accompany  him ;  in  either  case  the  commanding  officer  alone 
accompanies  the  reviewing  officer.  If  the  reviewing  officer  is 
accompanied  by  his  entire  staff,  the  staff  officers  of  the  com- 
mander place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  staff  of  the  re- 
viewing officer. 


MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  217 

The  reviewing:  officer  and  others  at  the  reviewing?  stand  salute 
the  color  as  it  passes ;  when  passing  around  the  troops  the  re- 
viewing officer  and  those  accompanying  him  salute  the  color 
when  passing  in  front  of  it. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute  of  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  troops  only.  Those  who  accompany  the  review- 
ing officer  do  not  salute. 

578.  In  passing  in  review,  each  staff  salutes  Avith  its  com- 
mander. 

579.  After  saluting  the  reviewing  officer,  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  troops  turns  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  on  the 
right  of  the  reviewing  offi.cer,  and  returns  saber;  the  menibers 
of  his  staff  accompanying  him  take  post  on  the  right  of  the  re- 
viewing oHicer's  staff  and  return  saber.  When  the  rear  element 
of  his  command  has  ]oassed,  without  changing  his  position,  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  troops  salutes  the  reviev.ing  officer; 
he  and  the  members  of  his  staff  accompanying  him  then  draw 
saber  and  rejoin  his  command.  The  commanding  officer  of 
the  troops  and  the  members  of  his  staff  are  the  only  ones  who 
turn  out  of  the  column.   • 

580.  If  the  person  reviewing  the  command  is  not  mounted, 
the  commanding  officer  and  his  staff,  on  turning  out  of  the 
column  «fter  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  dismount  prepara- 
tory to  taking  post.  In  such  case  the  salute  of  the  command- 
ing officer,  prior  to  rejoining  his  command,  is  made  with  the 
hand  before  remounting. 

581.  WJien  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to 
the  honor,  each  regimental  or  battalion  color  salutes  at  the 
command  present  arms,  given  or  repeated  by  the  major  of  the 
battalion  with  which  it  is  posted ;  and  again  in  passing  in 
review. 

582.  The  l)and  of  an  organization  plays  while  the  reviewing 
officer  is  passing  in  front  of  and  in  rear  of  the  organization. 

Each  band,  immediately  after  passing  the  reviewing  offiicer, 
turns  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in  front  of  and  facing  him, 
continues  to  play  until  its  regiment  has  passed,  then  ceases 
playing  and  follov.'s  in  rear  of  its  regiment ;  the  band  of  the 
following  regiment  commences  to  play  as  soon  as  the  preceding 
band  has  ceased. 


218  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

While  marching  in  review  but  one  band  in  each  brig-ade  pUiys 
at  a  time,  and  but  one  band  at  a  time  when  within  100  paces  of 
the  reviewing  officer. 

583.  In  line,  when  the  regimental  color  salutes,  the  march, 
flourishes,  or  ruffles  are  sounded  by  all  the  field  music. 

584.  The  formation  for  review  may  be  modified  to  suit  the 
ground,  and  the  present  onus  and  the  ride  around  the  line  by 
the  reviewing  officer  may  be  dispensed  with. 

585.  If  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  on  the  left  of  the 
column,  the  troops  march  in  review  with  the  guide  left ;  the 
commanding  officer  and  his  staff  turn  out  of  the  column  to  the 
left,  taking  post  as  prescribed  above,  but  to  the  left  of  tlie 
reviewing  officer ;  in  saluting,  the  captains  give  the  command : 
1.  Eiics,  2.  Left. 

586.  Except  in  the  review  of  a  single  battalion,  the  troops 
pass  in  review  in  quick  time  only. 

587.  In  reviews  of  brigades  or  larger  commands,  each  bat- 
talion, after  the  rear  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  50  paces, 
takes  the  double  time  for  100  yards  in  order  not  to  interfere 
with  the  march  of  the  column  in  rej^r ;  if  necessary,  it  then 
turns  out  of  the  column  and  returns  to  camp  by  the  most  practi- 
cable route ;  the  leading  battalion  of  each  regiment  is  folloAved 
by  the  other  units  of  the  regiment. 

588.  In  a  brigade  or  larger  review  a  regimental  commander 
may  cause  his  regiment  to  stand  at  ease,  rest,  or  staek  arms  and 
fall  out  and  resume  attention,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
ceremony. 

589.  When  an  organization  is  to  be  reviewed  before  an  in- 
spector junior  in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer,  the  command- 
ing officer  receives  the  review  and  is  accompanied  by  the  in- 
spector, who  takes  post  on  his  left. 

IIEVIEW    OF    MACHIXE-GUX    BATTALION. 

590.  The  bati alien  having  been  formed  in  line  or  in  line  of 
sections  :  (If  the  battalion  is  formed  in  line  of  sections,  the  front 
of  the  battalion  may  be  reduced  by  causing  the  section  to  close 
to  10-pace  intervals.  The  command  will  be:  1.  On  right  section, 
to  10  paees,  2.  Close.  Ten  paces  being  the  interval  between 
squads  in  line.)     The  major  faces  to  the  front;  the  reviewing 


MACHINE-GUH  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  219 

officer  moves  a  few  paces  towartl  the  major  and  halts;  the 
ma.ior  turns  about  and  commands :  1.  Present,  2.  Aems,  and 
again  turns  about  and  salutes. 

The  reviewing  oflicer  returns  the  salute;  the  major  turns 
about,  commands:  1.  Order,  2.  Aems,  and  again  turns  to  the 
front. 

The  reviewing  ofRcer  approaches  to  about  six  paces  from  the 
major,  the  latter  salutes,  takes  post  on  his  right,  and  accom- 
panies him  around  the  battalion.  The  band  plays.  The  review- 
ing officer  proceeds  to  the  right  of  the  band,  passes  in  front  of 
the  captains  to  the  left  of  the  line,  and  returns  to  the  right, 
passing  in  rear  of  the  file  closers  and  the  band. 

On  arriving  again  at  the  right  of  the  line,  the  major  salutes, 
halts,  and  when  the  reviewing  officer  and  staff  have  passed 
moves  directly  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  battalion,  faces  it, 
and  commands:  1.  Pass  in  revieii',  2.  Platoons  {squads)  right 
{left)  turn,  3.  March.  4.  Forward,  5.  Maech. 

At  the  first  command  the  band  changes  direction,  if  necessary, 
and  halts. 

At  the  last  command,  given  when  the  band  has  changed  direc- 
tion, the  battalion  moves  off,  the  band  playing;  without  com- 
mand from  the  major,  the  column  changes  direction  at  the 
points  indicated  ;  the  major  takes  his  post  30  paces  in  front  of 
the  band  immediately  after  the  second  change ;  the  band  hav- 
ing passed  the  reviewing  officer,  turns  to  the  left  out  of  the 
column,  takes  post  in  front  of  and  facing  the  reviewing  officer, 
and  remains  there  until  the  review  terminates. 

The  major  and  staff  salute,  turn  the  head  as  in  eyes  right. 
and  look  toward  the  reviev,-ing  officer  when  the  major  is  6 
paces  from  him ;  they  return  to  the  carry  and  turn  the  head 
and  eyes  to  the  front  when  the  major  has  passed  6  paces  beyond 
him. 

AVithout  facing  about,  each  captain  or'special  unit  commander, 
except  the  drum  major,  commands :  1.  Eyes,  in  time  to  add, 
2.  Right,  when  at  6  paces  from  the  reviewing  officer,  and  com- 
mands Feont  when  at  6  paces  beyond  him.  At  the  command 
Eyes  the  company  officers  armed  with  the  saber  execute  the 
first  motion  of  present  saber ;  at  the  command  Right  all  turn 
head  and  eyes  to  the  right,  except  drivers,  the  company  officers 
complete  present  saher,  and  the  noncommissioned  officers  armed 


220  MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  EEGTJLATIONS,   1917. 

with  the  saber  execute  the  first  motion  of  present  saber;  at 
the  command  Feoxt  all  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front,  and 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saher 
resume  the  carry  saber ;  without  arms  in  hand,  the  first  motion 
of  the  hand  salute  is  made  at  the  command  Right,  and  the  sec- 
ond motion  not  made  until  the  command  Feo^tt. 

Noncommissioned  staff  officers,  noncommissioned  officers  in 
command  of  subdivisions,  and  the  drum  major  salute,  turn  the 
head  and  eyes,  return  to  the  front,  resume  the  carry  or  drop 
the  hand  at  the  points  prescribed  for  the  major.  Olucers  and 
dismounted  noncommissioned  officers  in  command  of  subdivi- 
sions with  arms  in  hand  render  the  saber  salute.  Drivers 
charged  with  the  gait,  trace,  and  direction  do  not  execute 
eyes  right. 

If  the  reviewing  officer  is  entitled  to  a  salute  from  the  color 
the  regimental  color  salutes  when  at  6  paces  from  him,  and  is 
raised  when  at  G  paces  beyond  him. 

The  major,  having  saluted,  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  returns  saber  and  remains  there  until  the 
rear  of  the  battalion  has  passed,  then  salutes,  draws  saber,  and 
rejoins  his  battalion.  The  band  ceases  to  play  when  the  column 
has  completed  its  second  change  of  direction  after  passing  the 
reviewing  officer. 

591.  As  part  of  a  regiment  in  a  regimental  review  the  ma- 
chine-gun company  takes  its  prescribed  post  in  line  or  in  line 
of  sections. 

At  the  colonel's  command,  Pass  ix  Review,  the  captain  gives 
the  necessary  command  for  forming  his  company  in  column  of 
squads,  moves  off  in  time  to  follow  the  organization,  preceding  it 
at  proper  distance. 


GEXEUAL    RULES. 

592.  If  dismounted,  the  officer  receiving  the  parade,  and  his 
staff,  stand  at  parade  rest,  with  arms  folded,  while  the  band  is 
sounding  off;  they  resume  attention  with  the  adjutant.  If 
mounted,  they  remain  at  attention. 

593.  At  the  command  Report,  given  by  a  battalion  adjutant, 
the  captains  in  succession  from  the  right,  salute  and  report; 


MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917.  221 

A  (or  other)  company,  present  or  accounted  for;  or,  A  (or 
other)  company  (so  manjO,  officers,  or  enlisted  men  absent; 
and  resume  the  order  saber.  At  the  same  command  given  by 
the  re;?imental  adjutant,  the  majors  similarly  report  their 
battalions. 

MACIIIXE-GUX  BATTALION. 

594.  At  adjutanVs  call  the  battalion  is  formed  in  line  or  in 
line  of  sections,  but  not  presented.  The  major  takes  post  at 
a  convenient  distance  in  front  of  the  center  and  facing  the 
battilion. 

Tie  adjutant,  from  his  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  bat- 
talioi,  commands :  1.  Parade,  2.  Rest  ;  the  battalion  executes 
parale  rest.    The  adjutant  directs  the  band :  Sound  Off. 

Th*  band,  playing  in  quick  time,  passes  in  front  of  the  line  of 
officer  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  back  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
when  it  ceases  playing.  At  evening  parade  when  the  band 
ceases  playing,  retreat  is  sounded  by  the  field  music  and,  fol- 
lowing, the  last  note  and  while  the  flag  is  being  lowered,  the 
band  tays  the  Star-Spangled  Bannee. 

Just  before  the  last  note  of  retreat  the  adjutant  comes  to 
attentiai  and,  as  the  last  note  ends,  commands :  1.  Battalion, 
2.  Attrition.  When  the  band  ceases  playing  he  turns  about 
and  reprts :  Sir,  the  parade  is  formed.  The  major  directs  the 
adjutan:  Receive  the  reports,  sir. 

The  rports  received,  the  adjutant  turns  about  and  reports: 
Sir,  all  o'c  present  or  accounted  for;  or.  Sir,  (so  many)  officers 
or  enlistd  men  are  absent,  including  in  the  list  of  absentees 
those  froi  the  band  and  field  music  reported  to  him  by  the  drum 
major  pnr  to  the  parade. 

The  n^toY  directs:  Publish  the  orders,  sir. 

The  adjtant  turns  about  and  commands :  Attention  to  orders; 
he  then  tads  the  orders,  and  commands:  1.  Officers,  center, 
2.  Makch. 

At  the  Ommand  march  the  captains  carry  saber  and  form 
line,  closin  on  the  center,  facing  to  the  front;  the  adjutant 
turns  aboutand  takes  his  post. 

The  ofRcGp  having  closed  and  faced  to  the  front,  the  senior 
commands  :\.  Forward,  2.  Makch.     The  ofiicers  advance,  the 


222  MACHINE-GXTN  DEILL  EEGULATIOITS,   1917. 

band  playing;  the  captain  of  the  center  or  right  center  com- 
pany is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the  major ;  the  officers  are 
halted  at  6  paces  from  the  major  by  the  senior,  who  commands : 
1.  Officers,  2.  Halt.  They  halt  and  salute,  returning  to  tiie 
carry  saber  ^Yith  the  major.  The  major  then  gives  such  :n- 
structions  as  he  deems  necessary,  and  commands :  1.  Officers, 
post,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march  the  captains  turn  outward  and  tike 
their  posts. 

The  music  ceases  when  all  officers  have  resumed  their  p«sts. 

The  major  then  commands :  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  Sqiads 
right,  3.  March,  and  returns  saber. 

The  battalion  marches  according  to  the  principles  of  re'^iew ; 
when  the  last  company  has  passed,  the  ceremony  is  conclided. 

The  band  continues  to  play  while  the  companies  are  in  narch 
upon  the  parade  ground.  Companies  are  marched  to  their 
respective  parades  by  their  captains. 

When  the  company  officers  have  saluted  the  major,  hi  may 
direct  them  to  form  lino  with  the  .staff,  in  which  case  t^ey  in- 
dividually move  to  the  front,  passing  to  the  right  and  left  of 
the  major  and  staff,  halt  on  the  line  established  by  tb  staff, 
face  about,  and  stand  at  attention.  The  music  cease  when 
the  officers  join  the  staff.  The  major  causes  the  compiuies  to 
pass  in  reviev/  under  the  command  of  their  first  sergants  by 
the  same  command  as  before.  The  company  officer  return 
saber  v.ith  the  major  and  remain  at  attention. 

EEGI^CENTAL  P^UIADE. 

595.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  line  or  in  line  of  msses ;  the 
formation  having  proceeded  up  to,  but  not  including  the  Pre- 
sent, the  parade  proceeds  as  described  for  the  battUon,  with 
the  following  exceptions : 

"  Colonel  "  is  substituted  for  "  major,"  "  regiment  for  "  bat- 
talion," in  the  description,  and  "  battalions  "  for  ''  bctalion  "  in 
the  commands. 

After  publishing  the  orders  the  adjutant  commads :  1.  Offi- 
cers, center.  2.  March. 

The  company  commanders  remain  at  their  pos^  with  their 
companies. 


MACHINE-GUN  DHILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  223 

The  field  and  staff  officers  form  one  line,  closing  on  the  center. 
The  senior  connnands :  1.  Forward,  2.  March. 

The  second  major  is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the  colonel. 

After  being  dismissed  by  the  colonel,  each  major  moves  in- 
dividually to  the  front,  turns  outvcard,  and  followed  by  his 
staff  resumes  his  post  by  the  most  direct  line.  The  colonel 
directs  the  lieutenant  colonel  to  march  the  regiment  in  review; 
the  latter  moves  to  a  point  midway  between  the  colonel  and 
the  regiment  and  marches  the  regiment  in  review  as  prescribed. 
If  the  lieutenant  colonel  is  not  present,  the  colonel  gives  the 
necessary  commands  for  marching  the  regiment  in  review. 

Section  IV. — Inspections. 

DISMOUNTED  INSPECTIONS. 

596.  The  company  being  in  line,  dismounted  (120),  the  ofli- 
cer^  al  carry  saber,  the  captain  causes  the  company  to  open 
ranks  (128). 

597.  The  captain  then  commands:  Peepaee  foPv  Inspection. 
The  captain  returns  saber,  inspects  the  lieutenants,  the  ranks, 

and  the  tile  closers,  beginning  on  the  right  of  each  and  return- 
ing by  tlie  left  and  rear.  Each  man  as  approached  executes 
Inspcctio'i.  Pistol,  and  after  being  passed  by  the  inspector  ex- 
ecutes R(\t'uni,  Pistol.  The  buglers  raise  their  bugles  for  in- 
spection. During  the  inspection  of  the  ranks  the  lieutenants 
face  abou\  and  stand  at  ease;  they  may  be  directed  to  accom- 
pany the  eiptain  or  to  assist  in  the  inspection.  Upon  the  com- 
pletion of  ;he  inspection  the  lieutenants  face  to  the  front  and 
resume  the  attention.  The  captain  causes  the  company  to  close 
ranks  (129). 

598.  Shoitd  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the  lat- 
tei',  after  conmanding  Front,  adds  Rest,  and  faces  to  the  front 
(when  the  irspector  approaches,  the  captain  faces  to  the  left) 
brings  the  company  to  attention,  faces  to  the  front,  and  salutes. 
The  salute  aclnowledged,  the  captain  carries  saber,  faces  to  the 
left,  command?:  Prepare  for  Inspection,  and  again  faces  to 
the  front. 

The  inspectioi  proceeds  as  before ;  the  captain  returns  saber 
and  accompanie;  the  inspector  as  soon  as  the  latter  passes  him. 

599.  At  inspection  of  quarters  the  inspector  is  accompanied  by 
the  captain  and  follov>'ed  by  the  other  officers,  or  by  such  of 


224  MACHUJE-GITN  DRILL  HEGTTLATIONS,  1917. 

them  as  he  may  designate;  the  men,  without  accoiiterments, 
stand  uncovered  near  their  respective  bunks ;  in  camp  they 
stand  covered  without  accouterments.  in  front  of  their  tents'; 
upon  the  approach  of  tlie  inspector  the  first  sergeant  commands : 
Attention,  salutes,  and  leads  the  way  through  the  quarters  or 
camp. 

BATTALION   INSPECTION. 

600.  Battalion  inspection  is  conducted  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  and  by  the  methods  and  means  laid  down  in  Com- 
pany Inspection,  Dismounted. 

MOUNTED   INSPECTIONS. 

601.  Inspections  will  habitually  be  mounted.  Machire-gun 
organizations  carry,  for  inspection  mounted,  every  article  that 
is  prescribed  as  a  part  of  the  regular  equipment  and  for  which 
there  is  a  specially  designated  place  on  the  transportation,  ^he 
signalmen  and  scouts  are  assigned,  three  to  each  gun  sqtad. 

COMPANY   INSPECTION. 

602.  The  company  being  in  line  or  in  close  line,  the  captain 
commands:  1.  In  -front  of  the  carts,  2,  Fall  In.  The  .gun 
squads  fall  in  in  front  of  the  carts,  as  described  in  paragraph 
162.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  open  ranks,  as 
described  in  paragraph  128,  and  aligns  the  company  oi  the  right 
equad. 

The  captain  dismounts  and  turns  his  horse  ove'  to  one  of 
the  buglers.    All  mounted  men  dismount  and  stand  lo  horse. 

The  captain  then  takes  post  5  paces  to  the  front  of  the  right 
of  the  company.  If  the  inspection  is  to  be  conducted  by  him.  he 
faces  to  the  left  and  commands :  Prepaee  fop.  Inspection.  He 
then  passes  down  in  front  of  the  platoon  leade'S,  inspecting 
them,  and  returns  to  the  right  of  the  company  ii  front  of  the 
section  leaders,  inspecting  them. 

The  inspection  of  the  dismounted  men  is  car'ied  on  by  the 
company  commander,  assisted  by  the  platoon  haders,  if  he  so 
desires,  as  in  the  company  dismounted. 

Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  of  the  gun  squads  the  cap- 
tain makes  such  inspection  as  he  deems  necessa'y  of  the  drivers, 


MACEINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  225 

carts,  and  equipment.    If  he  desires  to  inspect  all  the  guns  and 
equipment,  he  gives  the  command :  Izvtspection  Equipment. 

At  this  command  the  gun  squads  secure  the  guns,  tripods,  etc.. 
and  mount  tliem  as  described  in  paragraph  147  10  paces  in  front 
of  their  respective  positions.  The  ammunition  boxes,  tool  boxes, 
water  boxes,  etc.,  are  placed  in  line  as  described  in  paragraph 
147.  The  men  take  position  as  described  in  paragraph  147  and 
remain  at  attention  during  the  inspection.  The  carts,  signal- 
men, and  agents  do  not  move. 

For  this  inspection  the  captain  may  direct  each  platoon  leader 
to  inspect  the  equipment  of  his  platoon.  This  inspection  of 
equipment  should  cover  the  following  points : 

Gun. 

(a)   Front  sight. 

( 1 )   Straight  and  without  lost  motion. 
(6)   Rear  sight. 

(1)  Half  nut  should  hold  slide  in  any  position. 

(2)  Elevating  screw  should  work  freely. 

(3)  Aperture  disk  should  be  straight. 

(4)  Pivot  spring  should  hold  aperture  disk  in  posi- 

tion. 

(5)  Movable  base  without  lost  motion. 

(c)  Muzzle  attachment. 

( 1 )  Front  disk  cap  should  be  clean. 

(2)  Front  disk  should  lit  tightly. 

(3)  Sleeve  should  not  bind. 

(4)  Inspect  locking  pin. 

(.5)   Follower  should  lit  snugly. 

(6)  Barrel  disk  not  loose. 

(d)  Water  jacket,  etc. 

(1)  Inspect  stem. 

(2)  Inspect  water  plug, 

(8)   Front  plug  screw  should  be  in  position. 

(e)  Feed  box. 

(1)  Slide  should  work  freely. 

(2)  Test  all  springs  for  strength. 

(3)  There  should  not  be  dirt  or  friction  in  the  feed 

box. 


16  MACHINE-GITN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

Gnn — Continued. 
(/)  Lock. 

(1)  Test  safety  sear  by  releasing  hand  sear. 

(2)  Test  hand  sear  by  releasing  safety  sear. 

(3)  There  should  not  be  excessive  friction. 

(4)  Test  firing  pin  by  snapping  lock  and  seeing  how 

far  the  point  protrudes  through  the  carrier, 

(5)  Test  gib  and  gib  spring. 
(g)   Rear  cover. 

(1)  Catch  should  hold  securely. 

(2)  Trigger  bar  should  work  smoothly. 

(3)  Brushes  should  be  in  good  condition. 

(4)  Reservoir  should  be  full  of  oil. 

(5)  Test   trigger-lever   spring   for   straightness  and 

strength. 

(6)  The  safety  catch  should  be  tested, 
(/i)   Crosshead  and  crank. 

(1)   Roller    handle    should    be    straight — when    the 
roller  handle  is  on  the  dead  stop  the  tail  of 
the  roller  handle  should  not  touch  tlie  roller. 
(?)   Recoil  spring  and  fusee. 

(1)  Test  the  strength  of  the  recoil  spring. 

(2)  Inspect  the  spring-box  fixings. 

(3)  Inspect  the  spring  box. 
(;■)   Recoil  plates,  etc. 

(1)  These  plates  should  be  straight. 

(2)  The  carrier  supporting  springs  should  be  stiff. 

(3)  The  recoil  plates  should  be  free  from  burrs. 
(7c)   Side  plates. 

(1)  The  side  plates  should  be  straight  and  free  from 

burrs. 

(2)  The  side  cams  should  be  smooth  and  free  from 

burrs. 
(7)   Bottom  plate  slide. 

(1)  The  slide  should  open  and  close  properly. 

(2)  The  bottom  plate  slide  catch  should  hold  the 

slide  when  set. 
(m)   Barrel. 

(1)  The  barrel  should  be  free  from  obstruction  and 

clean. 

(2)  The  bore  should  be  inspected  for  corrosion. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  227 

Gun — Continued. 

(ni)   Barrel — Continued. 

(3)   Tlie  barrel  should  fit  close  up  to  the  trunnion 
block  when  fully  forward. 
(.n)   Tripod. 

(1)  Inspect  trunnion  and  elevating  pins  to  see  that 

they  fit  without  lost  motion. 

(2)  Inspect   the   elevating  mechanism   to   see   that 

there  is  no  lost  motion, 
(o)   These  tests  should  be  applied: 

(1)  Tilt  the  gun  forward  to  .see  that  outer  steam 

tube  is  working. 

(2)  Weigh  recoil  spring.    It  should  be  from  7  pounds 

to  9  pounds  when  the  roller  handle  is  1  inch 
above,  dead  stop.  (Without  muzzle  attach- 
ment, 5  pounds  to  7  pounds.) 

(3)  Inspect    belts    to    see    that    the   points    of    the 

cartridges  are  even  vrith  the  ends  of  the 
brass  strips.  Turn  a  few  cartridges  around 
in  the  belt  to  see  if  they  fit  very  tightly. 

603.  The  company  having  been  .inspected,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  Replace  EquiPxMent.  At  this  command  the  equipment 
is  returned  to  its  original  position,  and  the  men  fall  in  in  front 
of  the  carts. 

604.  While  inspecting  the  company  or  accompanying  the  in- 
spector the  captain  does  not  return  his  saber  while  mounted; 
if  dismounted,  he  returns  saber. 

605.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the  latter 
prepares  the  company  for  inspection  and  awaits  the  arrival  of 
the  in&ijector.  Upon  the  approach  of  the  inspector  the  captain, 
at  his  post,  salutes.  The  inspector  returns  the  salute  and 
informs  him  of  the  character  of  the  inspection  desired  ;  the  cap- 
tain gives  the  necessary  commands,  faces  to  the  front,  and, 
when  inspected,  accompanies  the  inspector. 

BATTALION   INSPECTION. 

(Mounted.) 

606.  The  battalion  is  formed  in  column  of  companies,  each 
company  in  close  line.     On  the  approach  of  the  inspector  the 


S28  ]iIACHINE-<JT]rN  BBILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

major  commands :  Peepaee  for  Inspection,    The  companies  are 
prepared  for  inspection  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  602. 

607.  The  battalion  staff  officers  place  themselves  in  line  with 
1-pace  intervals  about  20  paces  in  front  of  the  coUiran,  opposite 
the  center,  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left ;  the  noncommis- 
sioned staff  form  in  a  similar  manner  3  paces  in  rear  of  the 
staff  officers  ;  the  guard  of  the  standard  marches  to  the  front  and 
takes  post  5  paces  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  line  of  the  non- 
commissioned staff.  The  major  takes  post  in  front  of  the  center 
of  the  column  3  paces  in  front  of  the  staff. 

608.  Field  and  staff  officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  ins-pector 
do  not  take  post  in  front  of  the  column,  but  accompany  him. 

609.  The  inspector  inspects  the  major  and,  accompanied  by 
the  latter,  inspects  the  staff  officers. 

The  major  and  his  staff,  as  soon  as  inspected,  return  saber  and 
accompany  the  inspector.  The  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
return,  saber  when  inspected. 

610.  The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
inspects  the  noncommissioned  staff  and  guard  of  the  standard. 
The  noncomimissioned  staff  and  guard  of  the  standard  may  be 
dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected. 

611.  The  captain  of  each  company  not  undergoing  inspection 
brings  the  men  to  rest.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  com- 
pany the  captain  brings  it  to  attention :  as  soon  as  he  himself 
has  been  inspected  he  gives  the  necessary  com,mands.  returns 
saber,  and  accompanies  the  inspector.  The  inspector  proceeds 
as  in  company  inspection.  At  its  completion  the  captain  causes 
the  company  to  cZo.se  ranks  and  brings  the  company  to  rest.  Upon 
intimation  from  the  inspector,  the  major  may  direct  that  each 
company  in  turn  be  dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected. 

612.  The  battalion  may  be  inspected  in  line.  The  inspection 
is  conducted  according  to  the  same  principles  as  when  formed 
in  column.  The  major  and  his  staff  are  inspected  at  their  posts 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  line;  the  band,  which  remains  at 
its  post  on  the  right,  is  next  inspected ;  then  the  companies  in 
order  from  right  to  left. 

613.  If  the  major  himself  is  the  inspector,  the  inspection  is 
conducted  according  to  the  same  principles. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  229 

INSPECTION  OF  SHELTEE-TENT  CAMPS. 

61-4.  To  inspect  an  organization  in  shelter-tent  camp  the  or- 
ganization is  caused  to  pitch  a  camp,  each  man  displaying  his 
equipment  in  front  of  his  shelter  tent. 

615.  As  soon  as  tlie  equipment  is  disposed  of,  the  men  take 
position,  each  man  facins:  to  the  front  and  standing  at  ease  in 
front  of  his  own  half  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  guy-rope  pin. 
On  the  approach  of  the  inspector,  if  he  be  other  than  the  com- 
pany commander,  the  organization  is  brought  to  attention  and 
aligned  by  the  company  commander. 

BATTALION   OE    COMPANY   MUSTEE. 

616.  Zvluster  is  preceded  by  an  inspection,  and,  when  prac- 
ticable, by  a  review. 

The  adjutant  is  provided  with  the  muster  roll  of  the  field, 
stair,  and  band,  the  surgeon  with  the  hospital  roll ;  each  captain 
with  the  roll  of  his  company.  A  list  of  absentees,  alphabetically 
arranged,  showing  cause  and  place  of  absence,  accompanies  each 
roll. 

617.  Being  in  column  of  companies,  in  close  line,  at  open 
raiilvs.  each  captain,  as  the  mustering  officer  approaches,  com- 
mands :  Attention  to  IMuster. 

The  mustering  officer  or  captain  then  calls  the  names  on  the 
roll ;  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers  Here  and  steps 
1  pace  to  the  front. 

After  muster,  the  mustering  officer,  accompanied  by  the  com- 
pany coumianders  and  such  other  officers  as  he  may  designate, 
verifies  the  presence  of  the  men  reported  in  hospital,  on  guard, 
etc. 

618.  A  company  may  be  mustered  in  the  same  manner  on  its 
own  parade  ground,  the  muster  to  follow  the  company  inspec- 
tion. 

Section  V. — Honors  and  Salutes. 

619.  The  President  of  the  United  States  will  be  received  with 
regimental  standards  or  colors,  officers  and  troops  saluting,  the 
drums  giving  four  ruffles  and  the  bugles  sounding  four  flour- 
ishes.    The  ruffles  and  flourishes  will  be  followed  by  the  na- 


230  MACHINE-GTTN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

tional  anthem,  or,  in  the  absence  of  a  band,  the  field  music  or 
bugles  will  sound  "  To  the  color." 

An  ex-President  and  the  Vice  President  of  tlie  United  States 
will  be  received  with  the  same  honors  as  prescribed  for  the 
President,  except  that  the  flourishes  will  be  followed  by  a 
march  in  lieu  of  the  national  anthem. 

The  President  of  a  foreign  Republic,  a  foreign  sovereign,  or  a 
member  of  a  royal  family  will  be  received  with  the  same 
honors  as  the  President  of  tlie  United  States,  except  that  the 
national  anthem  of  their  country  will  be  played. 

Officers  of  the  following  grades  of  rank  will  be  received  with 
regimental  standards  or  colors,  officers  and  troops  saluting,  and 
field  music  playing,  as  follows:  General,  four  ruffles  and  flour- 
ishes ;  lieutenant  general,  three  ruflles  and  flourishes ;  major 
general,  two  ruffles  and  flourishes;  brigadier  general,  one  ruffle 
and  flourish. 

In  tendering  honors  to  a  general  officer  or  official  of  like  rank, 
the  General's  March  will  be  played  immediately  after  the 
flourishes. 

620.  To  the  members  of  the  Cabinet,  the  Chief  Justice,  the 
President  pro  tempore  of  the  Senate,  the  Speaker  of  the  House 
of  Representatives,  American  or  foreign  ambassadors,  and  gov- 
ernors within  their  respective  States  and  Territories,  the  same 
honors  are  paid  as  to  the  general,  except  that  a  foreign  ambas- 
sador will  be  received  vrith  the  national  anthem  of  his  country 
and  that  the  number  of  guns  fired  as  personal  salute  will  be  as 
prescribed  in  Army  Regulations ;  to  the  Assistant  Secretary  of 
AYar  and  to  American  or  foreign  envoys  or  ministers  the  same 
honors  as  to  the  lieutenant  general ;  to  officers  of  the  Navy  the 
honors  due  to  their  relative  rank ;  to  officers  of  marines  and 
volunteers,  and  militia,  when  in  the  service  of  the  United  States, 
the  honors  due  to  like  grades  in  the  Regular  service ;  to  officers 
of  a  foreign  service  the  honors  due  to  their  rank. 

In  rendering  personal  honors,  vsdien  the  command  "  Present 
arms "  is  given,  officers  and  men  in  uniform  who  are  not  in 
formation  and  are  in  view  and  within  saluting  distance  shall 
salute  and  shall  remain  in  the  position  of  salute  until  the  end 
of  ruffles  and  flourishes,  or,  if  none,  until  "  Order  arms." 

621.  The  national  or  regimental  color  or  standard,  uncased, 
passing  a  guard  or  other  armed  body  will  be  saluted,  the  field 


MACHINE-GUN  DUILL  BEGTJLATIONS    1917.  281 

music  sounding  "  To  the  Color  "  or  "  To  the  Standard."  Officers 
or  enlisted  men  passing  tlie  uncased  color  will  render  the  pre- 
scribed salute;  with  no  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  will  be  the 
hand  salute,  using  the  right  hand,  the  lieaddress  not  to  be 
removed. 

622.  Whenever  the  national  anthem  is  played  at  any  place 
when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  atten- 
tion, facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  when  they  &hall 
face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered,  they  shall  salute 
at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position  of  salute 
until  the  last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform  and  cov- 
ered, they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  hold- 
ing the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  and  so  remain  until 
its  close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  the  headdress  may  be 
held  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  "  To  the  Color "  or  "  To  the 
Standard  "  is  sounded  as  when  the  national  anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band  the  national  anthem  shall  be 
played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required 
played  upon  official  occasions. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during 
the  playing  of  the  national  anthem  of  the  United  States  shall 
be  shown  toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country  when 
played  upon  official  occasions. 

623.  No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  when  on  the  march  or  in 
the  field,  except  that  they  may  be  called  to  attention,  and  no 
salute  is  rendered  when  marching  in  double  time  or  at  the  trot 
or  gallop. 

624.  The  commanding  officer  is  saluted  by  all  commissioned 
officers  in  command  of  troops  or  detachments.  Troops  under 
arms  will  salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

625.  Wlien  making  or  receiving  official  reports  or  on  meet- 
ing out  of  doors  all  officers  will  salute.  Military  courtesy 
requires  the  junior  to  salute  first,  but  when  the  salute  is  intro- 
ductory to  a  report  made  at  a  military  ceremony  or  formation 
to  the  representative  of  a  common  superior — as,  for  example,  to 
the  adjutant,  officer  of  the  day,  etc. — the  officer  making  the 
report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first ;  the  ofiicer  to  whom 


230  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge  by  saluting"  that  he  has 
received  and  understood  the  report. 

626.  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers  and  enlisted 
men  not  in  military  formation,  nor  at  drill,  work,  games,  or 
mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meeting,  passing  near,  or  being 
addressed,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the  enlisted  man  saluting 
first. 

When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  several  enlisted 
men  the  word  "  attention  "  is  .given  by  some  one  who  perceives 
him.  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and  remain  standing  at  attention 
until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  otherwise.  Enlisted 
men  at  meals  stop  eating  and  remain  seated  at  attention. 

An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an  officer, 
faces  toward  him,  stands  at  attention,  and  salutes.  Standing, 
he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  parties  remaiji 
in  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  gi'ound,  such  compliments 
need  not  be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work  do  not  cease 
work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

Before  addressing  an  officer,  an  enlisted  man  makes  the  pre- 
scribed salute  with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is  armed,  or,  if 
unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.  He  also  makes  the  same  salute 
after  receiving  a  reply. 

627.  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in  formation, 
officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  as  follows: 
■\Vith  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed  for  that  arm  (senti- 
nels on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without  arms,  the  right- 
hand  salute. 

In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers  and  enlisted 
men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right-hand  salute. 

Officers  and  enlisted  men  will  render  the  prescribed  salutes  in 
a  military  manner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the  enlisted  man 
saluting  first.  When  several  officers  in  company  are  saluted, 
ail  entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

Except  in  the  field,  under  campaign  or  simulated  campaign 
conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dismounts  before  ad- 
dressing a  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

A  man  in  formation  shall  not  salute  when  directly  addressed, 
]>ur  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest  or  at  ease. 

628.  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  is 
easy.     In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 


MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  233 

When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of  a  body 
of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite  the 
post  of  the  commander. 

In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains  and  street  cars, 
and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  honors  and  personal  sa- 
lutes may  be  omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate  or  apt  to 
disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

629.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color  will 
render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they  will  salute  as  re- 
quired in  paragraph  628 ;  if  in  civilian  dress  and  covered,  they 
will  uncover,  holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder 
v.ith  the  right  hand ;  if  uncovered,  they  will  salute  with  the 
right-hand  salute. 

Sentinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  conform  to  the 
foregoing  principles,  but  salute  by  presenting  arms  wiien  armed 
with  the  rifle.  They  vvill  not  salute  if  it  interferes  with  the 
proper  performance  of  their  duties.  Troops  under  arms  will 
salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

630.  Commanders  of  detachments  or  other  commands  will 
salute  officers  of  grades  higher  than  the  person  commanding 
the  unit  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to  attention  and  then  saluting 
as  required. 

631.  If  the  person  saluted  is  of  a  junior  or  equal  gi-ade,  the 
unit  need  not  be  at  attention  in  the  exchange  of  salutes. 

If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their  command- 
ers will  exchange  salutes,  both  commands  being  at  attention. 

632.  Salutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by  troops 
actually  engaged  in  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  the  field  under 
campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions.  Troops  on  the 
service  of  security  pay  no  compliments  whatever. 

633.  If  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the  field)  and 
armed  with  the  rifle,  or  with  sabers  drav/n,  it  shall  be  brought 
to  "  present  arms  "  or  "  present  sabers  "  before  its  commander 
salutes  in  the  following  cases :  When  the  national  anthem  is 
played,  or  when  "  To  the  Color "  or  "  To  the  Standard "  is 
sounded  during  ceremonies,  or  when  a  person  is  saluted  who  is 
its  immediate  or  higher  commander  or  a  general  officer,  or  when 
the  national  or  regimental  color  is  saluted. 

634.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall  remain  in 


234  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGTJLATIONS,   1817. 

the  position  of  salute  vrhile  the  national  anthem  is  being  played ; 
also  at  retreat  and  during  ceremonies  when  "  To  the  Color " 
is  played  if  no  band  is  present.  If  not  under  arms,  the  orj^ani- 
zations  shall  be  brought  to  attention  at  the  hrst  note  of  the 
national  anthem,  "  To  the  Color,"  or  "  To  the  Standard,"  and 
the  saltite  rendered  by  the  officer  or  noncommLssioned  officer  in 
command,  as  prescribed  in  regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

635.  No  officer  in  civilian  clothes  or  present  informally  in 
uniform  shall  be  saluted  with  guns  or  have  a  guard  paraded  in 
his  honor. 

636.  Guards  shall  not  turn  out  on  Sundays  as  a  matter  of 
compliment  for  officers  of  the  United  States  Army,  Navy,  or 
Marine  Corps. 

637.  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps,  and 
Volunteers,  and  to  officers'  of  the  National  Guard  in  uniform 
as  to  officers  of  their  own  regiment,  corps,  or  arm  of  service. 

Section  YI. — Bugle  Calls, 
warning  calls. 

638.  Fii'st  call,  guard  mounting,  full  dress,  overcoats,  drill, 
stable,  water,  and  boots  and  saddles  precede  the  assembly  by 
sucli  intervals  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

Mess,  church,  and  fatigue,  classed  as  sei'viec  calls,  may  also 
be  used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  for  roll  call  on  foot. 

Guard  mounting  is  the  first  signal  for  guard  mounting. 

Drill  call  is  the  first  signal  for  drill  dismounted. 

Boots  and  saddles  is  the  signal  for  mounted  formations;  for 
mounted  drill,  it  immediately  follows  the  signal  for  drill. 

The  buglers  assemble  at  first  call,  guard  mounting,  and  boots 
and  saddles. 

When  full  dress  or  overcoats  are  to  be  worn,  the  full  dress  or 
overcoat  call  immediately  follows  first  call,  guard  mounting,  or 
boots  and  saddles. 

rOIlMATION    CALLS. 

639.  Assembly. — The  signal  for  the  companies  or  details  to 
form  on  their  company  parade  grounds. 


MACHINE- GTTN  DRILL  KEGULATIONS,   1917.  235 

Adjutant's  caU.—The  signal  for  the  companies  or  guard  de- 
tails to  assemble  on  the  camp  or  garrison  parade  ground;  it 
follows  the  assembly  at  sucli  interval  as  may  be  prescribed  by 
the  commanding  officer.  It  is  also  used  as  a  signal  for  the 
battalions  to  form  regiment,  following  the  first  adjutant's  call 
at  such  interval  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 

To  the  color  is  sounded  when  the  color  salutes. 

ALARM    CALLS. 

640.  Fire  call. — The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  without 
arms,  to  extinguish  a  fire. 

To  arms. — The  signal  for  the  companies  to  form  at  a  desig- 
nated place,  completely  equipped,  as  quickly  as  possible. 

SERVICE   CALLS. 

641.  Taps,  7ness,  sick,  church,  recall,  issue,  officers',  first  ser- 
geants', fatigue,  school,  and  the  general. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striking  tents  and  loading 
wagons  preparatory  to  marching. 

Reveille  precedes  the  assemhly  for  roll  call;  retreat  follows 
the  assemhly,  the  interval  betv\'een  being  only  that  required  for 
formation  and  roll  call. 

Taps  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights ;  it  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  call  to  quarters  by  such  interval  as  is  prescribed  in 
Army  Regulations. 

Assembly,  reveille,  retreat,  adjutant's  call,  to  the  color,  the 
flourishes,  and  the  marches  are  sounded  by  all  the  musicians 
united;  the  other  calls,  as  a  rule,  are  sounded  by  the  musician 
of  the  guard  or  orderly  musician ;  he  may  also  sound  the  as- 
sembly when  the  musicians  are  not  united. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille,  or,  if 
marches  be  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

DRLLL    SIGNALS. 

642.  The  drill  signals  include  both  the  preparatory  com- 
mands and  the  commands  of  execution;  the  last  uote  is  the 
command  of  execution. 


236  MACHINE-GITIT  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

The  drill  signals  are  taught  in  succession,  a  few  at  a  time, 
until  the  officers  and  men  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  them, 
some  drills  being  specially  devoted  to  this  purpose. 

The  memorizing  of  tliese  signals  will  be  facilitated  by  observ- 
ing that  signals  for  all  moveuieuts  to  the  right  are  on  the  ascend- 
ing scale;  that  signals  for  the  correspoudinc.-  movement  to  the 
left  are  corresponding  signals  on  the  descending  scale;  that  the 
changes  of  gait  are  all  upon  the  same  note. 

643.  All  bugle  calls,  with  the  exceptions  noted,  are  prohibited 
in  the  presence  of  the  enemy. 


BUGLE  CALLS 


1.    First  Call. 


Quieh 


I 


«» 


p  *  *  * 


J-^J-i 


Quxclc> 


2.    Guard  Mounting. 


-^m-^ 


Z_^- 


^^— * 


33325°— IS 9 


237 


238  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

3.   Fuu.  Dress. 


I 


Quick 


[±Tn^n=r=H-r-r-hEm^ 


f    1    f      /TS 


^  IF 


f— ^ 


^  8   *  #v#: 


4.    Overcoats. 


I 


^-—^ 


# *- 


■# ^ 


ifczzp: 


^ 


^ 


^ 


5.    Drill. 


i 


QuicZ:. 


::S=«3: 


r^-»T 


r~g^  ^>-ffB 


itz-t 


1^=:^ 


=S=5: 


£^ 


Qnick. 


6.f  STABLEr^ 


>  p^Pftm  —-^ 


^=^ 


H-f-^ 


5^ 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

7a   Water. 
Quiele, 


^^ 


I     r 


Quick. 


8.    Boots  and  Saddles. 
9  ^^ 


i 


^ 


^    ^    0    fi    fi    0    » 


■uj 


Moderate. 


9.    Assembly. 


^ 


*'-0  1 1 — »-\z: 


:ff=iE 


ttt 


i^ 


I  _^ 


ii 


-^•-^_-*- 


:^ia: 


-»---#- 


10.    ADJUTANT'S  Call. 


Quick. 


J=fc!Lai 


^^^^^^3 


S3 


.^ 


-P-^f- 


^^^^^^ 


•*— ^ 


Quick  time. 


11.    To  THE  Color. 


E^t 


-^-!-^- 


-^-^-^P~ 


i=^=^i'^tT 


q=srs: 


-#i#- 


:i^" 


240  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

To  THE  Color— Concluded. 


End. 


-^— ^=^ 


.m ==^ 


-^— #— # — ^ 


^ — I — ^— — I— 


t=t=t 


0=^ 


EaJ  i  I  "^ 


-t—- h 


12.    Fire. 


i 


Q«te^.    /:> 


^Htt:  ^^^^  ^n^.-^t-  i=rsi^ 


i 


^s 


Bepeat  at  wilL 


^ 


j:=j:=f-"±-r^3=qg 


^ 


(IS.^TotArms: 


i^ 


^f^:%. . .  ;r^ 


r-¥-3^^^    -T   f- 


•LL'LuLaUli 


a<  wZZ. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  241 

14.    To  Horse. 


Presto. 


-#-=-*- 


0  \    0  \  ~e: 


-3 r*-^ 


^  -■  x^^g^rfj^F-bhff . 


^  f*  ^  ^  -j 


I 


15.    Reveille. 


Quich 


WT^=^^ — y 


■Ph— ^' 


■F  I    P   .  P- 


"t 


1 


End. 


f^tt=t 


'      >>  |pierr:_^-i---^-L-4 


f  I    y  .  i 


#H— * 


-.P^-^ 


^— ^ 


■^  CJ  '—  CJ 


_j   »  #-hl — l-v*^ 


z).a 


16.    Retreat. 


I 


Moderate. 


2-0  f . . \r3.i=^j..\.,_,^EM=* 


E^ 


-*  i     Li 


tzt 


l=ttt 


?:?=t 


^^^1^^^^ 


^^=^^^S?^^^^ 


242  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 


R  ETR  EAT— ConcZiided. 


^fc:^ 

■--^4^^ 

3ff-g-s- 

— ^-W- 

-1 — 

^ 

fe=t= 

^ri'-h^ 

1     ^  r  - 

-^V- 

^ 

=^r=f 

^=t= 

-^-^- 

_•.  [:    i^  tr 

J — 

H 

E 


^ 


^— -H- 


?i=il: 


;^ 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,  1?17. 
1 7.    Tattoo. 


Quick 


I 


^g 


^^=^ 


U 


Je^^e^ 


-^■  ^  -.-  I  ^ . 


I 


T=^ 


Ei^ 


f*-^ 


^^^^ 


it:iq 


^ 


tiS 


# — 0^-^-0 — #- 


ri^^^ 


£ 


^Mt- 


i=a=t 


3 


•rs  I    !- 


-^j-;_;_-=:arti 


-^tft-^-  - 


-*-^^^3=f-f 


S 


— •'— #^-  J  J  1 1  _  ra  I 


H^-^'.€Usl 


244  KA.CHINE-C1JN  DRILL  REGTJLATIONS,  1917. 

T  ATTOO— Continued. 


»    ff'* 


2«: 


m 


i — r- 


*^ 0 0-^-0-0 


»       *'0   0 


Si 


-^— «-i-#?-*— «-^-*- 


i=t: 


-^LiA. 


F^f- 


fit 


t=t 


■#      # 


i=^^=C 


n^.  ri 


^^^ 


H^t: 


I       I'S    I 


1         0       \0         0*00      00    ![- 


5_-^^ 


-^ 


r^Ti4^ 


p=;ib±i;M^;jM^ 


^=p: 


£^ 


— # 0^^0-0^ 


J-f-t-t 


0*00- 


'->.- 


a^s^^ 


.,-^■.^^1-;: 


-^-'-^-^-^^ 


F^fa=.lfr|:n^^ 


:3^- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEQULATIONS,   1917. 

Tattoo— Concluded. 


245 


I=? 


:ii^ 


^ 


r=l 


4^- 


^- 


5t:=^ 


g 


^       i"r"T 


|z»=  :iff=z^zpi^ipzaqr 


*«c\ 


^^ 


:^=q: 


5^=t^- 


"^ 


g^^=^-U-i=gE^^^W^^^E^ 


=3=5 


— f»» 1&- 


i^ 


246  MACHINE-GTJN  DKILL  HEGTJLATIONS,  1917. 


1 8.    Call  to  Quarters. 


i 


Slow. 


M-M-JJL. 


-f^- 


^ 


/T^    0\    /T> 


-« \- 


T=i^ 


i 


19.    Taps. 


g 


?£ 


;ijJ-J'f  44 


gi^^iT°n^T^J  ■  rair-l 


20.    Mess. 


2    ^    ,^    ^    ^-  .  __ 


* — ^ 


-« — e  0  0  0 


4iiit 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  247 

21.    Sick. 


Quick. 


3    mV^'m   3 


|z==infL||    r  ^=^=^1  ^  ^  ^M^ 


=^ 


a 


•m  3    ^ 


F—^^ 


m^ 


^r^ 


22.    Church. 


Slow.    ^  ^ 


/TN 


B3 


^— ^-^ 


:i« 


:#:)£{=? 


iL^-f!U 


'^m 


-M-*- 


qngi^iz^ 


.|e-^-H=H— J- 


-#-^H 


23.    Recall. 


Moderato. 


24.    Issue. 


Allegro^ 


248  MACHINE-GirN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

25.    OFFICERS'  Call. 


Quidk. 


PH 


6    ,      rrj      >— ^e-^^_> 


^m 


\=t 


m=--f=^=f=f^^R^;^=t^ 


26.    Captains'  Call. 


Quick. 


27.    First  Sergeants'  Call. 

S  _  8 


i 


28.  Fatigue 


fT  f 


-# — P  P  P  P 

-v^ ^ — ^ 


y-T  w- 


^ 


# — ffpp 


^§^ 


-#-H-#- 


^c^ 


-/t-^ 


-f — ?- 


MACHINE- GTTN  DKILL  HEGTJLATIONS,  1917.  249 

29.    School. 


Quick 


^^s 


A—^ 


^ 


30.    The  General. 


Q^^6L 


i 


•     ^^    I    I    I    I 1 — ^b»'-i — 1 — I — h 


P     p  ^-^t-g-A 


jg^dr^zf^ 


BUGLE  SIGNALS. 

31.    Assemble.    MARCH. 
Same  as  Assembly,  No.  9. 


32.   Attention. 


P 


/f\ 


^- — ^- 


^-ii 


N  I     ^ 


i 


33.    Attention  to  Orders. 
Slow.  ,^ 


ti^^^^tJJfn 


34.    Forward.    MARCH. 
Slow.  /-^ 


t:R^*-l-^ 


i 


35.    Halt. 


^i 


^ 


36.    Double  Time.    MARCH. 
Quick  ^ 


250 


MACHINE- GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

37.    To' THE  Rear.    MARCH. 


251 


Slow. 


:&^ 


-0 0 


t=t4 


38.    COMMENCE  Firing. 


i 


Quick. 


4 ^ 


§ 


l^^ 


39.    Cease  Firing. 


Quick. 


252  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGITLATIONS,   1917. 

42.    Route  Order. 
Moderate.  ^^^ 


*giS 


m^m 


43.    Platoons. 


Quick 


i#5EfeM 


44.    Squads  Right  (by  the  right  flank).  MARCH. 
Moderate, 


g^ 


i 


45.    Squads  Left  (by  the  left  flank),  MARCH. 
Moderate. 

JL. 


E^dEJ^^Efe^ 


46.   Column  Right,  MARCH. 


a-^^^^ 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 


253 


47.   Column  Left,  MARCH. 


mow. 


^m 


48.    Right  Turn,  MARCH. 


Moderate* 

8 


49.    LEFT  Turn,  MARCH. 
Moderate.  3 


3  /!\ 


Ep3 


Slmo. 


50.  Right  Oblique. 


^. 


UABCH* 

— a — 


s^~ 


51.    Left  Oblique. 


Slow.  ^ 


MABCH. 


2?: 


132: 


52.    Right  Front  into  Line. 


Moderate. 


IklARCB. 


i 


>— ^  0 


s=tt 


^-«- 


:f^ 


f^JVtf 


^ 


33320"^— IS 10 


264  MACHINE-GUN   DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

53.   Left  Front  into  Line. 


Moderate,         — ^    — . 


54.  On  Right  into  Line. 
Moderate.  /-s  '^ 


aLAJicn. 

42- 


55.    On  Left  into  Line. 


56.   Right  into  Line. 


^    Quick. 


MARCH. 


^-^1^ 


£jsa  m 


i 


Quick. 


^  _g_r  n 


57.    Left  into  Line. 


^M^- 


MARCH. 


F^pjg^i^ 


MISCELLANEOUS  BUGLE  CALLS. 


58.     PRESIDENT'S  MARCH. 


QuicJi  time. 


ff'^ifpf 


m 


^•1^~>.f-?^ 


:JPM^ 


s 


at 


#^^##-ri-<*-.^ 


a: 


£ 


^^^^^^^-^^^^^ 


»55 


266  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

59.   GENERAL'S  March. 

-i« -3- 


Q^^ck  time. 


Ee5 


-#  *  #  <g 


^gr=ff^gS 


p^^ 


^-^— -#: 


-* ^ 


^-#- 


^ 


^^ 


s^ 


60.    Flourishes  for  Review. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  257 

61.   Sound  Off. 
Quick. 


W^ 


tf 


^m 


^  r  r  r  >  r-f 


i 


pas 


Frn  f  'I 


^=a 


62.   ROGUE'S  March. 


Q^ick  time 


Repeat  at  will 


268  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

63.   Funeral  March. 
Very  slov)'. 


fk.'i^  f^f  ff  ^   f  -(^   ^  \(^  -^ 

ip^ft-ft,^^ — ^ 

^-W^  fi  i.    r-:--Hp — 

-1-'  '-i  1 — Ul- 

fet5-fi'-r:r-r  r-4q=^[f  - 

^ri^f;r-p=fj 

^        L.-U-I  ..-I-  -J.        L...    ■  ■ 

-rTii  ! — 4- 

i^zLf^^^-^-i   1  i^  ^yjj 

_;.iv^3_^;4. 

I 


=^-=^^=Et=^=^^ 


F*^P'^ 


I         I      I  i ^1 * 


P 


g~-r-:gr 


-^^—4--^ 


;jt=it 


li^:^ 


dr— ^^^5-5 


^ 


.-^ziir 


^^-^*-#-^#— # 


ZIS^l 


^ 


Repeat  at  will 


I 


QUICKSTEPS. 


Quick. 


64.   Quickstep  No.  I. 


I 


^^ 


i — ^ 


3E3E33EhE3^3E£ 


-^— ^- 


^ 


End. 


^^ 


Fl  i     f    ^'^ 


=it 


A*r^ 


H 


#-!-^ 


:^3:? 


^ 


=:i: 


•-#-#-h#-#- 


:;^:J: 


J    ^  *  /> 


0-0-S-0-0^ 


m^^m 


-! — ^— 


End. 


1^ 


•^=^;l 


-#- 


-0-\ — h 


t- 


I 


:^n\ 


^ — ^^^ 


t=a: 


S 


#4-*- 


^^ 


-I — h*-^ till — I   I    I   ^- 

-! h#  I     \\ — H — I — h  III    !■■'    Hill    \~0 


'.a 


End. 


E5j: 


^-J=Fa= 


:t 


^l^^l^fe^ 


259 


260  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL   REGULATIONS,   1917. 

65.  Quickstep  No.  2. 


2S 


0-0-0-0-0- 


-«— ^-i- 


66.  Quickstep  No.  3. 


f 


GE^^S^EHS 


±4: 


fe 


^j-g-M-^^  m  !_)■ 


-*-*- 


i 


^^m 


.^Lua: 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  261 

67.   Quickstep  No.  4. 


■^-^^ 


^i±l^tat 


-«-^ 


xB 


sife^i^S^ 


'-r^-W^- 


-^ r— .— ^ 


r^-= ^-l^ 


^^ 


^^^l^l^g 


^n^^^^- 


«-^^ 


2f 


-^- 


m^^^^^^^^^^ 


68.  Quickstep  No.  5. 


I  '^^ 


< 


+#-#-#^^^^# —  -I — t- 


'-T-^ 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 
69.   Quickstep  No.  6. 


'^^. 


m 


r-^-^f-f-'\ ^??- 


^_r ^ 


»  I ,  r>: 


^^/ 


-^^- 


-Nsr-a PN, 


>< 1/- 


>. — ^-^--' 


-#-#■ 


1^^ 


_7  J  J  :  -g-g-^ 


70.  Quickstep  No. 


::*=3 


r^ 


_^. 


A^^^^-^- 


-3±^. 


^^4-4- 


•=;L^: 


r-+ T-^ 


^^E^Eg±^^^f±SS| 


^<a 


1—1 r 


-^-^- 


-#-?-^-^- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGUI^ATIONS,   1917. 
71.  Quickstep  No.  8 

F  TRUilPET. 


263 


-^f^t^ 


-^-^-^ 


O  Crook. 


-s-^^- 


■>J__^- 


.#rc «-t ^!?!^ 


>t=: 


Second  time.  End. 


mk^^^ 


-s-?-sd- 


:t^ 


i^^ 


i!z^^i5i 


tf-r~^ 

~1*~"~*T 

~ll *^^ 

^     ^^     ^ 

Z)a  Capo. 

1^    'J 
-fl — 

-^-^ 

-?— ^r — f •■ 

i  *  H  "J 

rt^!     * 

L  :^^-^ 

264 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGULATIONS,   1917. 
72.  Quickstep  No.  9. 

F  Trumpet. 


ifc 


p  ..|     p  I  ^    pi^zg 


»-8-h-V- 


-<g-^  iT  ^ 


C  Crook. 


-^» ^-1-^^ 


iE?^^^ 


i 


iJnd. 


^    !    ^  I^=?=Ph*- 


-h — \^-0 — ^- 


53^ 


^ 


i 


=^^ 


1 


r^ 


-^-4-^ 


:i^ 


^^ 


-5—^ ^-W^T-^- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917.  266 

Quickstep  No.  q- concluded. 


m 


-^^-?- 


■■i^^^m 


^4="-f- 


i=i— p- 


-^-^- 


m 


^m^^. 


t^Eg; 


:^EE=-E5EE^ 


■+-, — } — ^ 


l^~;"^T  -•-*-*-'  feCafd 

Da  Capo. 

f^  _-^— -^=^-^^-^U^ 

— ^ 

266  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 


73.  Quickstep  No.  10. 

Quick.  F  Trumpet. 


:-}*      -T}-*^^  fif — *-  -I   *  I    i-  ■% 

1-8  ■  ^-(-r>^  !    ,'  f-M-M-^ 


C  Crook. 


■1 1 I I 


r^  0  ^ 


-V*f.f 


End. 


$ 


r«^«-f^ 


E^^- 


:f-^ 


I 


-m  *  »  »  0  ^  ^  , 


=^=t=q=^ 


?^-3-^ 


5E^ 


^ — h •—s-s-l — ^-ff-iif 

PART  VIII. 
MANUALS. 


Section  I. — Manual  of  the  Pistol. 

NOMENCLATURE   AND   CAEE. 

644.  The  soldier  is  first  taught  the  nomenclature  of  the  parts 
of  the  pistol  necessary  to  an  understanding  of  its  action  and  use 
the  proper  measures  for  its  care  and  preservation,  as  given  in 
Ordnance  Pamphlet  descriptive  of  the  pistol. 

GENERAL    PRINCIPLES. 

645.  Whenever  men  fall  in  ranks  with  the  automatic  pistol 
the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  will  command : 
1.  Raise,  2.  Pistol,  3.  Withdraw,  4,  Magazine,  5.  Open,  6.  Cham- 
ber, 7.  Close,  8.  Chamber,  9.  Insert,  10.  Magazine,  11.  Return, 
12.  Pistol. 

The  connnander  of  any  company  or  detachment  thereof  is  re- 
sponsible for  giving  the  necessary  commands  to  put  the  pistols 
in  a  safe  condtion. 

646.  The  pistol  with  cartridge  in  chamber  is  habitually  car- 
ried cocked  and  locked,  whether  in  the  hand  or  in  the  holster. 
The  hammer  will  not  be  lowered  while  a  cartridge  is  in  the 
chamber. 

647.  In  campaign,  the  pistol  should  habitually  be  carried  with 
a  magazine  in  the  socket,  loaded  with  seven  ball  cartridges, 
chamber  empty,  hammer  down.  The  extra  magazines  should 
also  be  loaded  with  seven  ball  cartridges  each. 

648.  When  action  seems  imminent,  the  pistol  should  be  loaded 
by  command.  It  may  then  be  returned  by  command  to  the 
holster  till  the  time  for  its  use  arrives. 

267 


268  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1917. 

649.  Recruits  are  first  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and 
firing  without  using  cartridges.  However,  the  automatic  action 
and  the  effect  of  ball  cartridges  in  operating  the  slide  can  not 
be  taught  without  firing  ball  cartridges.  Practice  without  car- 
tridges is  very  necessary  to  acquire  facility  in  the  exact  move- 
ments of  the  manual,  and  in  aiming,  holding,  and  trigger  squeeze. 

To  execute  the  movements  without  cartridges,  first  withdraw 
magazine,  open  chambers,  and  examine  both  pistols  and  maga- 
zines to  assure  that  none  contain  ball  cartridges. 

The  automatic  pistol  must  at  all  times  be  assumed  to  he  loaded 
with  ball  cartridges  until  an  inspection  has  disclosed  that  it  is 
not  so  loaded. 

650.  All  the  movements  in  loading  pistol  should  be  practiced 
without  kxDking  at  it.  In  order  to  do  this  successfully  it  is 
necessary  to  know  exactly  where  the  magazines  are  carried  so 
the  hand  may  find  them  without  fumbling.  Also,  since  the 
projection  at  the  front  of  the  magazine  base  is  on  the  same  side 
as  the  bullets,  and  the  magazine  must  be  inserted  in  the  socket 
with  these  to  the  front,  the  magazine  should  be  carried  in  the 
pocket  with  the  projection  to  the  left  and  should  be  withdrawn 
from  the  pocket  with  the  same  grasp  as  is  prescribed  for  icith- 
draw  magazine. 

651.  This  manual  must  be  practiced  with  all  the  precision 
and  exactness  required  for  the  manual  for  the  rifle.  Accidents 
will  be  reduced  to  a  minimum  and  familarity  with  the  pistol 
gained. 

THE    MANUAL. 

652.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster :  1.  Raise,  2.  Pistol. 

At  the  command  raise,  unbutton  the  flap  of  the  holster  with 
the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back  of  hand  outward.     . 

At  the  command  pistol,  draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster,  re- 
verse it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  with  the  thumb 
and  last  three  fingers;  forefinger  outside  of  the  guard;  barrel 
to  the  rear,  and  inclined  to  the  front  at  an  angle  of  about  30 
degrees ;  hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the 
point  of  the  right  shoulder.  This  is  the  position  of  raise  pistol, 
and  it  may  be  similarly  taken  from  any  position. 

653.  To  withdraw  magazine,  pistol  in  any  position:  1.  With- 
draw, 2.  Magazine. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  269 

At  the  command  magannc,  place  pistol,  barrel  down,  in  left 
hand  and  clasp  barrel  in  full  grip  of  left  hand,  thumb  clasped 
over  barrel  in  front  of  trigger  guard,  butt  of  pistol  up,  barrel 
pointing  to  the  left  front  and  slightly  downward.  With  tip 
of  right  forefinger  press  stud  releasing  magazine,  and  then 
catch  magazine  with  little  finger  under  projection  at  front  of 
magazine  base.  Raise  magazine  about  an  inch,  then  close 
tlr,;mb  and  second  finger  on  sides  of  magazine,  giving  a  secure 
grasp  with  which  it  can  be  withdrawn  from  socket  and  placed 
inside  belt  (in  pocket  of  shirt  or  otherwise  disposed  of  without 
throwing  it  av.-ay).  Ilight  hand  then  grasps  stock,  back  of  hand 
to  the  left. 

654.  To  open  chamber,  'the  pistol  in  any  position :  1.  Open, 
2.  Chamber. 

'  Carry  the  pistol  to  the  left  hand  (if  not  already  there)  barrel 
to  the  left,  frciit  end  of  slide  grasped  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  left  hand ;  right  hand  grasping  stock,  back  of 
hand  up:  right  thumb  under  slide  stop.  Hold  left  hand  steady 
and  push  forward  with  right  hand  till  slide  reaches  end  of 
stroke;  engage  slide  stop,  and  come  to  raise  pistol.  Should 
the  pistol  be  cocked  and  locked,  it  must  be  unlocked,  so  that 
the  slide  can  move. 

655.  To  close  chamber,  being  at  raise  pistol,  chamber  open: 
1.  Close,  2.  Chambee. 

At  the  connnand  eliamher,  release  slide  stop  with  right  thumb 
and  let  hammer  down  gently.  To  let  hammer  down,  pull  dowm- 
ward  with  point  of  right  thumb  till  hammer  presses  against 
grip  safety  and  forces  it  home;  then  while  continuing  this  pres- 
sure on  hammer,  pull  trigger ;  and  while  continuing  pull  on 
trigger  let  the  hammer  down.  While  letting  hammer  down, 
grasp  stock  firmly  ])etween  the  palm  and  last  three  fingers  to 
prevent  pistol   rotating  in  hand. 

656.  To  insert  magazine,  pistol  being  in  any  position,  no 
magazine  in  socket :  1.  Insert,  2.  Magazine. 

Lower  pistol  into  left  hand  as  in  witMraw  magazine,  grasp 
magazine  with  tip  of  right  forefinger  on  projection  at  base  of 
magazine,  withdraw  from  pocket,  and  insert  in  pistol.  To  make 
sure  that  magazine  is  home  strike  base  of  magazine  with  palm 
of  right  hand.  Bring  the  pistol  to  the  position  of  raise  pistol. 
33325°— 18 11 


^70  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGTTLATIONS,  1917. 

657.  To  return  pistol,  being  at  raise  pistol:  1.  Return,  2. 
Pistol. 

Lower  the  pistol  and  raise  tlie  flap  of  the  holster  with  the 
right  thumb ;  insert  the  pistol  in  the  holster  and  push  it  down ; 
button  the  flap  with  the  right  hand.  If  the  pistol  be  loaded 
and  cocked,  the  command,  1.  Lock,  2.  Pistol,  must  precede  the 
command  "  Return." 

658.  To  load,  having  loaded  magazine  in  pistol,  pistol  in  any 
position,  chamber  empty:  1.  Load,  2.  Pistol. 

Place  pistol  in  left  hand,  barrel  down,  butt  of  pistol  up,  barrel 
pointing  to  left  front  and  downward,  slide  grasped  between 
thumb  and  forefinger.  Push  forward  with  right  hand  until  the 
slide  is  fully  open,  then  release  slide,  allowing  it  to  move  for- 
ward, and  load  cartridge  into  chaml^er.  Come  to  raise  pistol. 
If  the  last  shot  in  the  magazine  has  been  fired,  to  reload;  same 
command,  but  execute  witlidraic  magazine,  insert  magazine, 
close  chamher.  As  soon  as  the  pistol  is  loaded  it  will  be  imme- 
diately locked  by  the  commands,  1.  Lock,  2.  Pistol.  Should  the 
command  for  locking  pistol  be  inadvertently  omitted  it  will  be 
locked  without  command. 

659.  To  unload  pistol,  being  in  any  position,  loaded :  Execute 
by  the  commands,  1.  Withdraic.  2.  Magazine.  3.  Open,  4,  Cham- 
EEE,  5.  Close,  6.  Chamber,  7.  Insert,  S.  ^Magazine. 

660.  To  Inspect  pistol,  it  being  in  the  holster:  1.  Inspection, 
2.  Pistol. 

Execute  raise  pistol. 

To  inspect  the  pistol  more  minutely  add,  3.  Withdraic,  4. 
Magazine,  5.  Open,  6.  Chamber. 

To  avoid  accidents,  individual  men  out  of  ranks,  in  barracks, 
or  camp  will  first  witlidraic  magazine,  then  open  chamher,  when- 
ever the  pistol  is  removed  from  the  holster  for  cleaning,  for 
examination,  or  for  any  oth-^r  purpose.  Accidental  discharges 
will  not  occur  if  the  above  rule  is  always  observed,  and  failure 
to  observe  it  must  be  considered  a  military  offense,  whether  or 
not  accident  results. 


661.  Stand  firmly  on  both  feet,  body  perfectly  balanced  and 
erect  and  turned  at  such  an  angle  as  is  most  comfortable  when 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917.  271 

the  arm  is  extended  toward  the  target ;  the  feet  far  enough  apart 
Mahout  S  to  10  inches)  as  to  insure  steadiness;  weiglit  of  hody 
boruc  equally  upon  both  feet;  riglit  arm  fully  extended  but  not 
locked ;  left  arm  hanging  naturally. 

THE  GRIP. 

662.  Grasp  the  stock  as  higii  as  possible  with  the  thumb  and 
last  three  fingers,  the  forefinger  alongside  the  trigger  guard,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock.  The  barrel,  hand,  and  fore- 
arm should  be  as  nearly  in  one  line  as  possible  when  the  weapon 
is  pointed  toward  the  target.  The  grasp  should  not  be  so  tight 
as  to  cause  tremors,  but  should  be  firm  enough  to  avoid  losing 
grip.  The  lower  the  stock  is  grasped  the  greater  will  be  the 
movement  or  jump  of  the  muzzle  caused  by  recoil.  If  the  hand 
be  placed  so  that  the  grasp  is  on  one  side  of  the  stock,  the  recoil 
will  cause  a  rotary  movement  of  the  weapon  toward  the  opposite 
side. 

The  releasing  of  the  sear  causes  a  slight  movement  of  the 
muzzle,  generally  to  the  left.  The  position  and  pressure  of  the 
thumb  along  the  stock  overcomes  much  of  this  movement. 

To  do  uniform  shooting  the  weapon  must  be  held  with  exactly 
the  same  grip  for  each  sliot,  not  only  must  the  hand  grasp  the 
stock  at  th-7  same  point  for  each  shot,  but  the  tension  of  the  grip 
must  be  uniform. 

THE    TKIGGEll    SQUEEZE. 

663.  The  trigger  must  be  squeezed  in  the  same  manner  as  in 
rifie  firing.  The  pressure  of  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger  should 
be  steadily  increased  and  should  be  straight  back,  not  sideways. 
The  pressure  should  continue  to  that  point  beyond  which  the 
slightest  movement  will  release  the  sear.  Then,  when  the  aiu: 
is  true,  the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and  the  pistol  fired. 
When  the  pistol  is  fired  the  greatest  effort  should  be  taken  to 
hold  the  pistol  to  the  mark  as  nearly  as  possible.  This  will  be 
of  great  benefit  in  automatic  firing. 

PCrSITION    AND   AIMING   DRILLS. 

664.  The  squad  is  formed  with  an  interval  of  one  pace  be- 
tween files.     Black  pasters  are  used   as   aiming  points.     The 


272  MACHINE- GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

pasters  are  10  paces  distant  from  the  squad.  The  instructor 
commands,  1.  Raise,  2.  Pistol,  and  cautions  "  Position  and  Aim- 
ing Drill."  The  men  take  the  position  prescribed  in  parata'aph 
661.  At  the  command  :  1.  Squad,  2.  Fike,  slowly  extend  the  arm 
till  it  is  nearlj'  horizontal,  the  pistol  directed  at  a  point  about 
6  inches  below  the  bull's-eye.  At  the  same  time  put  the  fore- 
finger inside  the  trigger  guard  and  gradually  feel  the  trigger. 
Inhale  enough  air  to  comfortably  till  the  lungs  and  gradually 
raise  the  piece  until  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  at  the  point 
of-  aim,  i.  e..  just  below  the  bull's-eye  at  6  o'clock,  \yhile  the 
sights  are  directed  upon  the  mark,  gradually  increase  the  pres- 
sure on  the  trigger  until  it  reaches  that  point  where  the  slightest 
additional  pressure  will  release  the  sear.  Then,  when  the  aim 
is  true,  the  additional  pressure  necessary  to  fire  tlie  piece  is 
applied  so  as  not  to  derange  the  alignment  of  the  sights.  The 
weapon  will  be  held  on  the  mark  for  an  instant  after  the  hammer 
falls  and  the  soldier  will  observe  what  effect,  if  any,  the  squee7.- 
ing  of  the  trigger  has  had  on  his  aim. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  taking  the  proper 
position,  the  exercise  is  conducted  "At  will." 

QUICK    FIKE. 

665.  Being  at  the  7'aisc  pistol,  chamber  and  magazine  empty : 
1.  Quiclc-fire  exercise,  2.  One.  Lower  the  forearm  until  it  is 
nearly  horizontal,  pistol  pointing  at  the  target,  3.  Two.  Thrust 
the  pistol  forward  to  the  position  of  aim.  siiapping  the  pistol 
just  before  the  arm  reaches  its  full  extension.  Then  look 
through  sights  to  verify  the  pointing.  4.  Theee.  Return  to  raise 
pistol  and  cock  the  pistol. 

In  this  exercise  the  soldier  must  keep  his  eyes  fixed  upon 
the  mark.  He  should  constantly  practice  pointing  the  pistol 
until  he  acquires  the  ability  to  direct  it  on  the  mark  in  the 
briefest  interval  of  time  and  practically  without  the  aid  of  the 
sigiits.  In  other  words,  the  pistol  in  this  exercise  is  accurately 
pointed  instead  of  accurately  aimed.  In  night  firing  pointing 
the  pistol  is  the  only  method  that  can  be  used.  After  careful 
practice  in  this  exercise  it  is  surprising  what  good  results  can 
be  obtained  at  night. 

This  exercise  should  then  be  practiced  from  the  position  of 
the  pistol  in  the  holster  instead  of  raise  pistol. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  273 


666.  Boiii,!!  at  raise  pistol,  the  pistol  loaded  and  locked:  To 
fire:  With  the  rii;ht  thumb  release  the  safety  lock,  if  in  the 
locking  position ;  extend  the  arm,  hrini;ing-  the  sights  on  the 
target,  and  press  the  trigger. 

Tlie  energy  of  recoil  causes  the  mechanism  of  tlie  pistol  to 
eject  the  empty  cartridge  case,  load,  and  prepare  the  pistol  for 
the  next  shot.  Pressure  must  be  entirely  relieved  from  the 
trigger  after  each  shot  in  order  that  the  trigger  may  reengage 
the  sear.  At  the  firing  of  the  last  cartridge,  as  the  slide  moves 
to  the  rear,  it  is  automatically  locked  in  the  open  position  by 
the  slide  stop,  thus  calling  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  maga- 
zine is  empty. 

667.  To  reload  after  firing  out  a  magazine:  Remove  the  maga- 
zine, insert  a  filled  one.  and  release  the  slide  stop  with  the  left 
hand. 

668.  To  exercise  the  squad  in  collective  firing,  either  actual 
or   simulated:  1.  At    (stieh  an  object),  2.  Ready,   3.  Squad,  4. 

FlPvE. 

At  the  command  ready  the  pistols  are  cocked  or  the  safety 
hitches  are  released.  At  the  command  fire,  each  man  aims  and 
fires  by  steadily  increasing  the  pressure  of  his  grip.  It  is  im- 
portant that  no  attempt  be  made  to  pull  the  trigger. 

Section   II. — Manual  of  Aems. 

(For  men  armed  with  the  rifle.) 

669.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  use, 
nomenclature,  and  care  of  his  rifie.  When  fair  progress  has 
been  made  in  the  instruction  without  arms,  he  is  taught  the 
manual  of  arms.  Instruction  without  arms  and  that  with  arms 
alternate. 

670.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece : 
First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber   or   the   magazine,    except   when    specifically   ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  car,- 


274  MACHINE-GUN  DEILL  EEGULATIONS,   1917. 

Tied  locked ;  that  is,  with  safety  lock  turned  to  the  "  safe."  At 
all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the  trigger  palled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  pieces  are 
immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2. 
Akms,  3.  Order  {rigid  shouUlcr,  port).  4.  Aems. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

It  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine,  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  on  the  1903  rifle  is  kept  turned  "off," 
except  when  cartridges  are  actually  used.  The  1917  rifle,  is 
not  provided  with  a  cut-olT. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet  exercise, 
on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  piece 
is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  ;it  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Move- 
ment.s  may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  preparatory 
command  with  the  words  at  frail:  as.  I.  At  trail,  foricard.  2. 
M.'UJCii ;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments.  oi)en  and  cl(;se  ranks,  taking 
intervals  or  distances,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the 
ordei*,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume 
the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The 
execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  tini.'  is  held  as  vvdien 
without  arms. 

671.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual 
of  arms : 

First.  In  all  po.sitions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  (center 
of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed)  the  thumb  clasps  the  piece;  the 
sling  is  included  in  tlie  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  "diagonally  across  the 
body."  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm  and  hand  are  the  same 
as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the  manual, 
the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of  the  piece 


MACHINE-GUN   DRILL   REGULATIONS,    1917.  275 

nbont  3  inches  from  the  ^iround,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  left 
haiul  above  and  near  the  right,  steadying  the  piece,  fingers  ex- 
tended and  .joined,  forearm  and  wrist  i^traight  and  inclining 
downward,  all  fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the  piece.  To 
complete  the  order,  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with 
the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side,  and  take 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

Allovring  the  piece  to  drop  througii  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  Tlie  cadence  of  the  motions  is  tiiat  of  quick  time ;  the 
recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to  the 
details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  acquired  as 
they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  pieces.  The  in- 
structor may  require  them  to  count  aloud  in  cadence  with  the 
motions. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements  are, 
for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and  executed 
in  detail :  in  this  case  the  ccmnuand  of  execution  determines  the 
prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  commands  two, 
three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cau- 
tions:  By  the  nurdhers;  all  movements  divided  into  motions  are 
then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions  :  Witliout  the 
numhers;  or  commands  movements  othei>  than  those  in  the 
manual  of  arms. 

Sixtli.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle 
may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 

672.  Position  of  order  arins  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly 
on  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with 
toe  of,  and  touching,  the  right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging 
naturally,  right  hand  holding  the  piece  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers. 

673.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  Akms. 

With  the  I'ight  hand  carry  the  piece  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 


276  MACHTNE-GTTN  DEILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

hand  at  the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body.     (Two)  GrasiD  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

674.  Being  at  order  .arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ApwMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands ;  the  right, 
palm  down,  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the 
balance ;  barrel  up.  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 
junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder ;  riglit  forearm  hori- 
zontal :  left  forearm  resting  against  the  body ;  the  piece  in  a 
vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front. 

675.  Being  at  present  arms :  1.  Port,  2.  Aems. 

Carry  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms. 

676.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  Akms. 

Carry  the  piece  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center 
of  the  body  and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

677.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms :  1.  Order,  2.  Aems. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand ;  lower  and  carry  the  piece  to  the 
right  with  the  left  hand;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.  (Two)  Com- 
plete the  order. 

678.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder.  2.  Aems. 
With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body  :  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt,  em- 
bracing it.  the  lieel  ItetVNoen  the  first  two  fingers.  (Two)  With- 
out changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  piece  on  the 
right  slioulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  4-5 
degrees  from  the  horizontal,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the 
shouhler,  right  elbow  near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a  vertical  plane 
perpendicular  to  the  front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  tip  of 
the  forefinger  touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straight  and 
elbow  down.     (Theee)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

679.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  Aems. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(Tm'o).  (Theee)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from  port 
arms. 

680.  Being  at  port  arms :  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  Aems. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  277 

Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.  (Two),  (Thkee)  As  In 
right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

681.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Po7't,  2.  Akms. 

Press  the  butt  dovvn  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(Two)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

682.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms :  1.  Present,  2.  Akms. 
Execute  port  arms.     (Three)   Execute  present  arms. 

683.  Being  at  present  arms :  1.  Right  shovlder,  2.  iViuis. 
Execute  port  arms.     (Two),  (Three),  (Four)  Execute  right 

shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

684.  Being  at  port  arms :  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  Arms. 

Carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the  left 
shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder ; 
at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel  be- 
tween first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on  the 
stock.     (Two)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Being  at  left  shoulder  arms :  1.  Port,  2.  Arms. 

Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  tlic  stock. 
(Two)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  re- 
grasp  it  with  the  left,  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

Left  shouhler  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order 
right  shoulder  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command 
arms  execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  position 
ordered. 

685.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Parade,  2.  Rest. 

Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear.  left  knee 
slightly  bent ;  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  ceiUer  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  }i:uid  just 
below  the  stacking  swivel,  and  with  the  right  hand  below  and 
against  the  left. 

Being  at  parade  rest :  1.  Squad.  2.  Attention. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  piece  opposite 
the  right  hip. 

686.  I^>eing  at  order  arms :  1.  Trail,  2.  Arms. 

Raise  the  piece,  right  arm  slightly  bent,  and  incline  the  muz- 
zle forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  an  angle  of  about  30  de- 
grees with  the  vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience  to 
others,  the  piece  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle 


278  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATION!,   1917. 

lowered  until  the  piece  is  horizontal ;  a  similar  position  in  the 
left  hand  may  be  used. 

687.  Being  at  trail  arms:  1.  Order.  2.  Arms. 

Lower  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

r.IFLE    SALUTE. 

688.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms :  1.  Rifle,  2.  Salute. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  fore- 
arm horizontal,  palm  of  hand  down,  thumb  and  forefingers 
extended  and  joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece; 
look  toward  the  person  saluted.  (Two)  Drop  left  hand  by  the 
side;  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

With  the  rifle  on  the  left  shoulder,  the  salute  is  rendered  in  a 
corresponding  manner  Avith  the  right  hand. 

689.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms:  1.  Rifle.  2.  Salute. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the 

hand  down,  thumb  and  lingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger 
against  piece  near  the  muzzle;  look  toward  the  per.son  saluted. 
(Two)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  front. 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "  Honors." 

the  dayoxet. 

690.  Being  at  order  arms :  1.  Fix,  2.  Bayonet. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Execute 
parade  rest ;  grasp  the  bayonet  Avith  the  right  hand,  back  of 
hand  toward  the  body;  draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scal)bard  and 
fix  it  on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the  nuizzle;  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  is  carried  on  the  haversack  :  Draw  the  bayonet 
with  the  left  hand  and  fix  it  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

691.  1903  rifle. — Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Unflx.  2.  Bayonet. 
If   the   bayonet    scabbard    is   carried   on    the   belt:    Execute 

parade  rest ;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with  the 
right  hand,  pressing  the  spring  with  the  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand :  raise  the  bayonet  until  the  handle  is  about  12  inches 
above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece;  drop  the  point  to  the  left, 
back  of  the  baud  tov/ard  the  1iody,  and.  glancing  at  the  scab- 
bard,  return   the  bayonet,   the  blade,  passing  between   the  left 


MACHINE-GUN  DKILL  REGULATIONS    1917.  279 

arm  and  the  body ;  regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and 
resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversacl^ :  Take 
the  bayonet  from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to 
tlie  scabbiird  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed 
in  tlie  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece 
returned  to  the  original  position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonets  are  executed  with  promptness  and 
regularity,  but  not  in  cadence. 

1911  rifle. — If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt : 
Execute  parade  rest ;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly 
with  the  right  hand,  pressing  the  spring  with  the  forefinger  of 
the  left  hand  ;  raise  the  bayonet  until  the  handle  is  about  12 
inches  above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece ;  drop  the  point  to  the 
left,  back  of  the  hand  toward  the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the 
scabbard,  return  the  bayonet,  the  blade  passing  between  the 
left  arm  and  the  body ;  regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
and  resume  the  order. 

692.  Charge  Bayonet. — Whether  executed  at  halt  or  in 
motion,  the  bayonet  is  held  toward  the  opponent  as  in  the 
position  of  guard  in  the  Manual  for  Bayonet  Exei*cise. 

Exercises  for  instruction  in  bayonet  combat  are  prescribed  in 
the  Manual  for  Bayonet  Exercise. 

THE  INSPECTION. 

693.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  Akms. 

At  the  second  conniiand  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(Two)  Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of 
the  right  hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back,  and 
glance  at  the  chamber.  Having  found  the  chamber  empty,  or 
having  emptied  it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

694.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order  {right  shoulder, 
port),  2,  Akms. 

1003  rifle. — At  the  preparatory  command  push  the  bolt  for- 
ward, turn  the  handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port 
a^rms.    At  the  command  arms,  complete  the  movement  order(;d. 

1917  rifle. — At  the  preparatory  command  press  the  follower 
down  with  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  then  push  the  bolt  for- 


280  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  HEGULATIONS,   1917. 

ward  just  enough  to  engage  the  follower,  raise  the  fingers  of  the 
left  liand.  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the  handle  down,  pull 
the  trigger,  and  resume  vort  arms.  At  the  command  arms 
complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO  DISMISS   THE   SQUAD. 

695.  Being  at  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ^Vems  ;  3.  Port,  4.  Akms  ; 
5.  Dismissed. 

TO    STACK    and   take   AEMS. 

696.  The  squad  being  in  line  at  a  halt:  Stack  Ar.MS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasp:^  his  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  b;itt  between  his 
feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front 
and  opposite  the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel ;  each  even  number 
of  the  rear  rank  then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to 
his  file  leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right 
hand  and  throws  the  Initt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of  that  of 
his  own  piece  and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval,  the  right 
hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  rais- 
ing the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages  with  that  of  his 
own  piece;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  raises  his  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  carries  it  well  forward.  barr»^l  to  the  front; 
the  left  hand,  guiding  the  stacking  sv.'ivel.  engages  the  lower 
hook  of  the  swivel  of  his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook  of  that 
of  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank ;  he  then  turns  the  barrel 
outvrard  into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces  and 
lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to  the  right  of  and  against  the  toe 
of  his  right  shoe. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by  the 
even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces  he  takes  the  posi- 
tion of  the  soldier. 

697.  The  squad,  being  in  line  behind  the  stacks:  Take  Akms. 
The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of  the 

front  rank :  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  with  his 
right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ;  each  odd  number 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS    1817.  281 

of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  in  the  same  way  with  the  right 
hand,  disengages  it  hy  raising  the  butt  from  the  gi'ound  and 
then,  turning  the  piece  to  the  right,  detaclies  it  from  the  stack ; 
each  even  number  of  the  front  rani-:  disengages  and  detaches  his 
piece  by  turning  it  to  tlie  left,  and  then  passes  the  piece  of  his 
rear-rank  man  to  him  and  all  resume  the  order. 

698.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files.  No.  1 
rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making  and 
breaking  the  stack ;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he  resumes  his 
post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose  pieces. 
Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 

LOADINGS    AND    FIRINGS. 

699.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings  are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank  the  rear  rank  does 
not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading.    Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

700.  Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded  with- 
out command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted. 

701.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting. 
Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but 
may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  unmis- 
takable ;  in  such  case  battle  sight  is  used,  if  no  sight  setting  is 
announced. 

702.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announcement 
need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is  neces- 
sary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming  point 
or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced,  until  a 
change  is  ordered. 

703.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting ;  if  the 


282  MACHINE-GTJN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 

announcement  is  omitted,  tlie  position  is  taken  at  tlie  first  com- 
mand for  firing. 

704.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  accu- 
rate firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

< 

TO  LOAD. 

705.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  With  dummy 
(hlank  or  hall)  cartridges,  2.  Load. 

1903  rifle. — At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or 
skirmisher  faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right, 
about  1  foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness 
and  steadiness  of  the  body ;  raises  or  lowers  the  piece  and  drops 
it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut- 
off up.  With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back, 
takes  a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots,  places 
the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers 
extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine 
floor  plate ;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing 
down  with  the  thumb ;  without  removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the 
bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle;  turns  the  safety  lock  to 
the  "  Safe  "  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each 
rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar  position 
opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front-rank  man,  muzzle 
of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 

lOl":  rifle. — At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or 
skirmisher  faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the 
right,  about  1  foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest 
firmness  and  steadiness  of  the  body ;  raises  or  lowers  the  piece 
and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  stock  and  the  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the 
breast.  With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back, 
takes  a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots,  places 
the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers 
extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine 
fioor  plate ;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing 
down  with  the  thumb ;  without  removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the 
bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle ;  turns  the  safety  lock  to  the 
"  Safe  "  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.     Each 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS,  1917.  283 

rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar  position 
opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front-rank  man,  muzzle 
of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held 
as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if 
kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh ;  if  sitting,  the 
elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.  If  lying  down,  the  left  hand 
steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the 
butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load. 

706.  For  purpose  of  simulated  tiring :  1.  Simulate,  2.  Load. 
Raise  the  bolt  handle  as  in  the  preceding  paragi*aph,  draw  the 

bolt  back  until  the  cocking  piece  engages,  then  close  the  bolt 
and  turn  the  bolt  handle  down.  With  the  1903  rifle  the  cut-off 
remains  "  off." 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  are  used.  Later,  blank 
cartridges  may  be  used. 

707.  Unload. — Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock 
up  and  move  the  bolt  alternately  backward  and  forward  until 
all  the  cartridges  are  ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected 
the  chamber  is  closed  by  pressing  the  follower  down  with  the 
fingers  of  the  left  hand,  to  engage  it  under  the  bolt,  and  then 
thrusting  the  bolt  home.  The  trigger  is  pulled.  The  cartridges 
are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  belt,  and  the 
piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

TO   SET   THE  SIGHT. 

708.  Range.  Eleven  HrNOEED  (Eight-Fifty,  etc.),  or  Battle 
Sight. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.  The  instructor 
explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 

BATTLE   sight. 

709.  Their  sight  corresponds  to  a  sight  setting  of  about  440 
yards  and  is  used  when  there  is  no  time  to  set  the  leaf  sight. 


284  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  IlEGrLATION.j,   1917. 

TO   SUSPEND  FIKING. 

710.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 
repeats  same,  if  necessary,  or  commands :  Suspend  Firing. 

Firin?  stops ;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  position 
of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  rear  sights  un- 
changed. The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aimin.2: 
point,  or  the  place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which 
it  is  expected  to  reappear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease 
firing. 

to   cease  fieing. 

711.  Cease  Firing. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  are  loaded  and  locked  ;  the  sights  are  laid 
down,  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order.  Cease  tiring  is 
u.sed  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of  position  or  to 
steady  the  men. 

712.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

Section  HI. — Care  of  the  Rifle. 

713.  In  order  to  keep  the  rifle  in  good  working  condition,  it 
is  necessary  that  it  be  kept  well  oiled  and  cleaned.  The  rifle 
should  be  inspected  each  day  during  campaign  to  insure  that 
the  mechanism  is  working  properly  and  that  the  cartridges  in 
the  magazine  have  not  become  rusted. 

The  rifle  should  never  be  placed  where  it  can  fall  and  injure 
the  sights ;  it  should  never  be  placed  in  the  bottom  of  a  wagon 
where  the  jolting  will  injure  the  sights. 

It  should  never  be  left  uncovered  during  the  night,  or  in  rainy 
weather  or  when  the  dust  is  blowing,  except  in  case  of  necessity. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  getting  dust  or  mud  in  the  ■ 
mechanism.  Dust  in  the  breech  mechanism  will  cause  this 
mechanism  to  fail  to  function;  the  bolt  will  not  open  and  the 
gun  will  be  useless  to  the  operator. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  286 

A  rag:  sboiild  never  be  put  in  the  nniz;:le  of  a  gun  in  order  to 
keep  out  dampness,  because  a  rag  will  invariably  collect  mois- 
ture, and  the  result  will  be  a  rusty  bore  at  that  point. 

In  a  windy  and  dusty  country,  it  is  a  wise  precaution  to  cut 
the  toe  out  of  a  sock  and  slip  the  sock  over  the  breech  mechanism. 
This  will  keep  out  dust  and  the  sock  can  easily  and  quickly  be 
removed.  In  trenches,  where  mud  is  plentiful,  the  use  of  the 
sock  will  keep  mud  out  of  the  breech  mechanism.  Mud  or  a  rag 
in  the  muzzle  is  very  dangerous,  and  if  the  gun  bo  fired  it  will 
inevitably  result  in  bursting  the  barrel  or  some  part  of  the 
breech  mechanism. 

In  case  of  gas  coming  in  contact  with  the  gun — either  from 
gas  shells  or  a  gas  attack — it  is  imperative  that  the  gun  be 
cleaned  immediately  after  such  attack  and  thorouglily  oiled. 

The  chamber  of  a  gun  is  the  part  that  will  ordinarily  give 
the  most  trouble  in  service.  Dust,  dirt,  sand,  mud.  and  rust  all 
cause  the  chamber  to  grip  the  cartridge  tightly,  and  in  many 
cases  it  will  be  impossible  to  extract  the  shell  from  the  chamber. 
The  chamber  should  be  cleaned  vviienever  the  gun  is  cleaned. 

1.  Never  allow  anything  to  get  in  the  chamber  of  the  rifle. 

2.  Keep  all  cartridges  scrupulously  clean. 

3.  Operate  the  bolt  once  every  day. 

4.  If  sand  is  blowing  while  firing,  put  more  oil  on  the  gun. 

5.  After  firing,  thoroughly  clean  the  gun  every  day  for  10 
days. 

G.  When  the  gun  is  not  being  used,  it  should  be  thoroughly 
cleanetl  and  kept  in  a  case  of  cloth  or  waterproof  material. 

Section  IV. — ^Manual  of  the  Saber. 

714.  1.  Droit',  2.  Saber. 

At  the  command  drair,  unhook  the  saber  with  the  thumb  and 
first  t\vo  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  thumb  on  the  end  of  the  hook, 
fingers  lifting  the  upper  ring;  grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  upper  band,  bring  the  hilt  a  little  forward,  seize 
the  grip  with  the  right  hand,  and  draw  the  blade  6  inches  out 
of  the  scabbard,  pressing  the  scabbard  against  the  thigh  with 
the  left  hand. 

At  the  command  attention  resume  the  order  snhcr  and  the 
arm  to  its  full  extent  to  the  right  front,  at  an  angle  of  about  45 


286  MACHOTE-GXTN  DRILL  REGTTLATIONS,   1917. 

degrees  with  the  horizontal,  the  saber,  edge  down,  in  a  straight 
line  with  the  arm ;  mal^e  a  slight  pause  and  bring  back  of  the 
blade  against  the  shoulder,  edge  to  the  front,  arm  nearly  ex- 
tended, hand  by  the  side,  elbow  back,  third  and  fourth  tingers 
back  of  the  grip ;  at  the  same  time  hook  up  the  scabbard  with 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  thumb  through 
the  upper  ring,  fingers'  supporting  it ;  drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber  dismaiintcd. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  tlie  saber 
unhook  the  scabbard  before  mounting;  when  mounted,  in  the 
first  motion  of  drair  saber  they  reach  with  the  right  hand  over 
the  bridle  hand  and  without  the  aid  of  the  bridle  hand  draw 
the  saber  as  before;  the  right  hand  at  the  c<irry  re5?ts  on  the 
right  thigh. 

On  foot  the  scabbard  is  carried  hooked  up. 

715.  When  publishing  orders,  calling  the  roll,  etc.,  the  saber 
is  held  suspended  from  the  right  wrist  by  the  saber  knot ;  when 
the  saber  knot  is  used  it  is  placed  on  the  wrist  befoi-^  drawing 
saber  and  taken  off  after  returning  saber. 

716.  Being  at  the  order  or  carry:  1,  Present,  2.  Saber  (or 
Arms). 

At  the  command  prcsc7it.  raise  and  carfy  the  saber  to  the 
front,  base  of  the  hilt  as  high  as  the  chin  and  6  inches  in  front 
of  the  neck,  edge  to  the  left,  point  6  inches  farther  to  the  front 
than  the  hilt,  thumb  extended  on  the  left  of  the  grip,  all  fingers 
gra.«;ping  the  grip. 

At  the  conuuand  "labcr,  or  arms,  lower  the  saber,  point  in 
prolongation  of  the  right  foot  and  near  the  ground,  edge  to  the 
left,  hand  by  the  side,  thumb  on  left  of  grip,  arm  extended.  If 
mounted,  the  hand  is  held  behind  the  thigh,  with  the  point  a 
little  to  the  right  and  front  of  the  stirrup. 

In  rendering  honors  with  troops  officers  execute  the  first  mo- 
tion of  the  salute  at  the  command  present,  the  second  motion 
at  the  command  arws:  enlisted  men  with  the  saber  execute  the 
first  motion  at  the  command  arms  and  omit  the  second  motion. 

717.  Being  at  a  carry:  1.  Order,  2.  Saber  (or  Arms). 

Drop  tlie  point  of  the  saber  directly  to  the  fnuit.  point  on  or 
near  the  ground,  edge  down,  thumb  on  back  of  grip. 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  287 

Bein,::;  at  the  present  saber,  should  the  next  command  be  order 
arms  ofTicers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saber 
order  saber;  if  the  command  be  other  than  order  arr)\s,  they 
execute  carry  saber. 

718.  The  saber  is  held  at  the  carry  only  while  giving  com- 
mands, marching  at  attention,  or  changing  position  in  quick  time. 

When  at  the  order  sabers  are  brought  to  the  carry  when  arms 
are  brought  to  any  position  except  the  present  or  parade  rest. 

719.  Being  at  the  order :  1.  Parade,  2.  Bkst. 

Take  the  position  of  parade  rest,  except  that  the  left  hand  is 
uppermost  and  rests  on  the  right  hand,  point  of  saber  on  or  near 
the  ground  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  edge  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  attention  resume  the  order  saber  and  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

720.  In  marching  in  double  time  the  saber  is  carried  diago- 
nally across  the  breast,  edge  to  the  front ;  the  left  hand  steadies 
the  scabbard. 

721.  Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the 
saber,  on  all  duties  under  arms,  draw  and  return  saber  without 
waiting  for  command.  All  commands  to  soldiers  under  arms 
are  given  with  the  saber  drawn. 

722.  Being  at  a  carry :  1.  Return,  2.  Saber. 

At  the  command  return  carry  the  right  hand  opposite  to  and 
6  inches  from  the  left  shoulder,  saber  vertical,  edge  to  the  left ; 
at  the  same  time  unhook  and  lower  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  and  grasp  it  at  the  upper  band. 

At  the  command  saber  drop  the  point  to  the  rear  and  pass 
the  blade  across  and  along  the  left  arm ;  turn  the  head  slightly 
to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the  scabbard,  raise 
the  right  hand,  insert  and  return  the  blade ;  free  the  wrist  from 
the  saber  knot  (if  inserted  in  it),  turn  the  head  to  the  front, 
drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side;  hook  up  the  scabbard  with  the 
left  hand,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saber, 
when  mounted,  return  saber  without  using  the  left  hand;  the 
scabbard  is  hooked  up  on  dismounting. 

723.  At  inspection  enlisted  men  with  the  saber  drawn  execute 
the  first  motion  of  present  saber  and  turn  the  wrist  to  show 
both  sides  of  the  blade,  resuming  the  earry  when  the  inspector 
has  passed. 


288  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  KEGTJLATIONl,   1917. 

Section  V. — Manual  of  Tent  Pitcpiing. 

TO    MAKE    CAMP. 

724.  The  captain  indicates  the  site  for  the  tents,  the  picket 
line,  and  the  parlv.  and  comniands :  Make  Camp.  The  picket 
line  is  then  placed  in  position,  wagons  unloaded,  animals,  carts, 
and  guns  are  cared  for,  after  which  tents  are  pitched. 

SHELTER    TENTS. 

725.  The  shelter  tont  or  temporary  camp  is  used  in  the  field 
when  halts  are  not  to  be  of  snlTicient  duration  to  justify  the 
bringing  up  of  semipermanent  camp  equipage,  or  when  same  is 
not  available.  The\-  will  of  necessity  vary  greatly  in  form, 
dimensions,  and  area  occupied,  and  in  the  means  available  for 
the  improvisation  of  camping  expedients.  The  regulations  and 
plates  prescribed  are  given  as  conforming  to  usual  conditions 
and  should  govern  in  all  instruction  in  the  selection  and  occu- 
pation of  shelter-tent  camp  sites.  In  actual  service  the  dispo- 
sitions in  camp  must  be  adapted  to  the  ground  and  must  be 
made  so  as  to  derive  the  maximum  benefit  from  the  meager 
camp  equipn-ent  carried.  The  camp  will  in  this  latter  instance, 
therefore,  sc  idom  be  ideally  regular.  Whenever  possible,  com- 
panios  should  be  camped  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons.  The 
principal  advantage  accruing  in  camping  in  column  is  the  free- 
dom afforded  for  withdrawing  independent  platoons  from  camps 
when  it  is  desired  to  send  them  on  detached  missions. 

TO   PITCH    SHELTEB  TENTS. 

726.  Being  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons :  Form  for  Shel- 
ter Tents.  Each  section  leader  arranges  for  pairing  odd  men 
in  his  squads  as  far  as  practicable.  If  after  this  has  been  done 
any  man  in  the  section,  including  the  section  leader,  remains 
unpaired,  the  first  sergeant  is  notified.  Having  arranged  pairs 
between  the  men  left  over  in  the  several  sections,  the  first  ser- 
geant reports  the  company  formed,  and,  with  the  company  clerk, 
with  whom  the  first  sergeant  pitches,  takes  his  place  to  the 
right  of  the  headquarter's  detail.     The  first  sergeant  having  re- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  289 

ported,  the  officer  in  charge  causes  the  compauy  to  take  inter- 
vals as  prescribed  in  the  squad  (94).  As  each  man  faces  to 
the  front  he  places  his  pack  and  other  equipment  on  the  ground. 

727.  The  officer  aligns  the  men  and  commands :  Pitch  Tents. 
The  men  open  their  packs  and  take  out  the  shelter  half,  poles 
and  pins ;  the  front-rank  man  places  one  pin  in  the  ground  at 
the  point  where  his  right  heel,  kept  in  position  until  this  time, 
was  planted.  Each  then  spreads  his  shelter  half,  triangle  to 
the  rear,  flat  upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  rear  man's 
half  on  the  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  together. 
Each  front-rank  man  joins  his  pole,  inserts  the  top  in  the  eyes 
of  the  halves,  and  holds  the  pole  upright  beside  the  pin  placed 
in  the  ground  ;  his  rear-rank  man.  using  the  pins  in  front,  pins 
down  the  front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  pins,  stretching 
the  canvas  taut ;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  rope 
and  drives  the  pin  at  such  distance  in  front  of  the  pole  as  to 
hold  the  rope  taut.  Both  then  go  to  the  rear  of  the  tent ;  the 
rear-rank  man  adjusts  the  pole  and  the  front-rank  man  drives 
the  pins.  The  rest  of  the  pins  arc  then  driven  by  both  men, 
the  rear-rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  the  contents 
of  his  pack  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  ease  in  front  of  his  own 
half  on  line  with  the  front  guy-rope  pm. 

The  guy  ropes,  to  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  shelter  tents 
are  pitched,  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

728.  The  guard  pitches  tents  at  its  post.  The  cooks'  tents 
are  usually  pitched  at  the  kitchen. 

DOUBLE    SHELTER    TENTS. 

729.  The  double  shelter  tent  is  formed  by  buttoning  to- 
gether the  square  ends  of  two  single  tents.  Two  complete  tents, 
except  one  pole,  are  used.  Two  guy  ropes  are  used  at  each  end, 
the  guy  pins  being  placed  in  front  of  the  corner  pins. 

The  double  shelter  tents  are  pitched  by  Nos.  1  and  2  front 
and  rear  rank,  and  by  Nos.  3  and  4,  front  and  rear  rank ;  the 
men  falling  in  on  the  left  are  numbered,  counting  off  if  neces- 
sary. 


290  MACHINE-OUN  DRILL  HEGTTLATIONE,   1917. 

The  commands  are  given  as  before,  for  taking  intervals,  and 
the  command :  Pitch  Double  Texts  is  given. 

Only  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  mark  the  line  with 
the  tent  pin. 

All  the  men  spread  their  shelter  halves  on  the  ground  the 
tent  is  to  occupy.  Those  of  the  front  rank  are  placed  with  the 
triangular  ends  to  the  front.  All  four  halves  are  then  buttoned 
together,  first  the  ridges  and  then  the  square  ends.  The  front 
corners  of  the  tent  are  pinned  by  the  front-rank  men,  the  odd 
number  holding  the  poles,  the  even  number  driving  the  pins. 
The  rear-rank  men  similarly  pin  the  rear  corners. 

While  the  odd  numbers  steady  the  poles,  each  even  number 
of  the  front  rank  takes  his  pole  and  enters  the  tent  where, 
assisted  by  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank,  he  adjusts  the 
pole  to  the  center  eyes  of  the  shelter  halves  in  the  following 
order :  First,  the  lower  half  of  the  front  tent ;  second,  the  lower 
half  of  the  rear  tent;  third,  the  upper  half  of  the  front  tent; 
fourth,  the  upper  half  of  the  rear  tent.  The  guy  ropes  are  then 
adjusted. 

SINGLE    SLEEPING   BAG. 

730.  Spread  the  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  at  the  feet, 
button  side  to  the  left ;  fold  the  blanket  once  across  its  short 
dimension  and  lay  it  on  the  poncho,  folded  side  along  the  right 
side  of  the  poncho ;  tie  the  blanket  together  along  the  left  side 
by  means  of  the  tapes  provided ;  fold  the  left  half  of  the 
poncho  over  the  blanket  and  button  it  together  along  the  side 
and  bottom. 

DOinBLE    SLEEPING    BAG. 

731.  Spread  one  poncho  on  the  ground,  button  end  at  the  feet, 
button  side  to  the  left ;  spread  the  blankets  on  top  of  the 
poncho :  tie  the  edges  of  the  blankets  together  with  the  tapes 
provided ;  spread  a  second  poncho  on  top  of  the  blankets,  button 
end  at  the  feet,  button  side  to  the  right ;  button  the  two  ponchos 
together  along  both  sides  and  across  the  end. 

TO   STRIKE   SHELTER  TENTS. 

732.  The  men  standing  in  front  of  their  tents :  Strike  Tents. 
Equipments  are  removed  from  the  tents;  the  tents  are  low- 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917.  291 

ered.   packs   made  up,   equipments  sluiig,   and  the   men   stand 
at  ease  in  the  places  originally  occupied  after  taking  intervals. 

TO    PITCH    HEAVY    TENT  AGE. 

733.  To  pitch  all  types  of  army  tents,  except  shelter  tents: 
INIark  each  line  of  tents  by  driving  a  vrall  pin  at  the  spot  to 
be  occupied  by  the  right  (left)  corner  of  each  tent.  P'or  pyram- 
idal tents  the  interval  1)etween  adjacent  pins  should  be  about 
30  feet,  which  will  give  a  passage  of  2  feet  betw^een  tents.  If 
the  tripod  is  used,  spread  it  on  the  ground  where  the  center 
of  the  tent  is  to  be.  Spread  the  tent  on  the  ground  to  be 
occupied,  door  to  the  front,  and  place  the  right  (left)  front 
wall  loop  over  the  pin.  The  door  (or  doors,  if  more  than  one) 
being  fastened  and  held  together  at  the  bottom;  the  left  (right) 
corner  wall  loop  is  carried  to  the  left  (right)  as  far  as  it  will 
go  and  a  wall  pin  driven  through  it,  the  pin  being  placed  in 
the  line  with  the  right  (left)  corner  pins  already  driven.  At 
the  same  time,  the  rear  corner  wall  loops  are  pulled  to  the  rear 
and  outward,  so  that  the  rear  and  side  walls  of  the  tent  are 
stretched.  Wall  pins  are  then  driven  through  these  loops  di- 
rectly in  rear  of  the  corresponding  front  corner  pins,  making 
a  rectangle.  Unless  the  canvas  be  wet.  a  small  amount  of 
slack  should  be  allowed  before  the  corner  pins  are  driven.  Ac- 
cording to  the  size  of  th.e  tent,  one  or  tv\'o  men,  crawling  under 
the  tent  if  necessary,  lit  each  pole  or  ridge  or  upright  into  the 
ring  or  ridge-pole  holes,  and  such  accessories  as  hood.  fly.  and 
brace  ropes  are  adjusted.  If  a  tripod  be  used,  an  additional 
man  will  go  under  the  tent  to  adjust  it.  The  tent,  steadied  by 
the  remaining  men,  one  at  each  corner  guy  rope,  will  then  be 
raised.  If  the  tent  is  of  the  ward  or  storage  type,  corner  poles 
will  nov/  be  placed  at  the  four  corners.  The  four  corner  guy 
ropes  are  then  placed  over  the  lower  notches  of  the  large  pins 
driven  in  prolongation  of  the  diagonals  at  such  distance  as  to 
hold  the  walls  and  ends  of  the  tent  vertical  and  smooth  when 
the  guy  ropes  are  drawn  taut.  A  wall  pin  is  then  driven 
through  each  remaining  wall  loop,  and  a  large  pin  for  each 
guy  rope  is  driven  in  line  with  the  corner  guy  pins  already 
driven. 


292  MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIOITS,   1917. 

The  guy  ropes  of  the  tent  are  placed  over  the  lower  notches, 
while  the  .sruy  ropes  of  the  fiy  are  placed  over  the  upper  notches 
and  are  then  drawn  taut.  Brace  ropes,  when  used,  are  then 
secured  to  stakes  or  pins  suitably  placed. 

TO    STRIKE   HEAVY   TENTAGE. 

734.  Strike  Tents. — The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except 
those  of  the  four  corner  guy  ropes.  The  pins  are  neatly  piled 
or  placed  in  their  receptacle. 

One  man  holds  each  guy  and  when  the  ground  is  clear  the 
tent  is  lowered  and  folded  or  rolled  and  tied,  the  poles  or  tripod 
and  poles  fastened  together,  and  the  remaining  pins  collected. 

TO  FOLD  TENTS. 

735.  Common,  wall,  hospital,  and  storage  tents. — Spread  the 
tent  tlat  on  the  gi'ound,  folded  at  the  ridge  so  that  bottoms  of 
the  side  walls  are  even,  ends  of  the  tent  forming  triangles  to 
the  right  and  left ;  fold  the  triangular  ends  of  the  tent  in 
toward  the  middle,  making  it  rectangular  in  shape;  fold  the 
top  over  about  9  inches;  fold  the  tent  in  two  by  carrying  the 
top  fold  over  clear  to  the  foot;  fold  again  in  two  from  the  top 
to  the  foot;  throw  all  guys  on  tent  except  the  second  from  each 
end  ;  fold  the  ends  in  so  as  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the 
second  widths  of  canvas;  fold  tlie  left  end  over  to  meet  the 
turned-in  edge  of  the  right  end.  then  fold  the  right  end  over  the 
top.  completing  the  bundle ;  tie  with  the  two  exposed  guys. 

Pyramidal  tent. — The  tent  is  thrown  toward  the  rear,  and  the 
back  wall  and  roof  canvis  pulled  out  smooth.  This  may  be 
most  easily  accomplished  by  leaving  the  rear  corner  wall  pins  in 
the  ground  with  the  wall  loops  attached,  one  man  at  each  rear 
corner  guy.  and  one  holding  the  square  iron  in  a  perpendicular 
position  and  pulling  the  r-anvas  to  its  limit  away  from  the 
former  front  of  the  tent.  This  leaves  the  three  remaining  sides 
of  the  tent  on  top  of  the  rear  side,  with  the  door  side  in  the 
middle. 

Now  carry  the  right  front  corner  over  and  lay  it  on  the  left 
rear  corner.  Pull  all  canvas  smooth,  throw  guys  toward  square 
iron,  and  pull  bottom  edges  even.     Then  take  the  right  front 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  EEGULATIONS.   1917.  293 

corner  and  return  to  the  right,  covering  the  right  rear  corner. 
This  folds  the  right  side  of  the  tent  on  itself,  with  the  crease  in 
the  middle  and  under  the  front  side  of  the  tent. 

Next  carry  the  left  front  corner  to  the  right  and  back  as 
described  above;  this  when  completed  will  leave  the  front  and 
real'  sides  of  the  tent  lying  smooth  and  flat  and  the  two  side 
walls  folded  inward,  each  on  itself. 

Place  the  hood  in  the  square  iron  which  has  been  forced 
downward  toward  the  bottom  of  the  tent,  and  continue  to  fold 
around  the  square  iron  as  a  core,  pressing  all  folds  down  flat 
and  smooth  and  parallel  with  the  bottom  of  the  tent.  If  each 
fold  is  compactly  made  and  the  canvas  kept  smooth,  the  last 
fold  will  exactly  cover  the  lower  edge  of  the  canvas#  Lay  all 
exposed  guys  along  the  folded  canvas  except  the  two  on  the 
center  width,  which  should  be  pulled  out  and  away  from  bottom 
edge  to  their  extreme  length  for  tying.  Now,  beginning  at  one 
end,  fold  tov/ard  the  center  on  the  first  seam  (that  joining  the 
first  and  second  widths)  and  fold  again  toward  the  center  so 
that  the  already  folded  canvas  will  come  to  within  about  3 
inches  of  the  middle  width.  Then  fold  over  to  the  opposite  edge 
of  middle  width  of  canvas.  Then  begin  folding  from  opposite 
end,  folding  the  first  width  in  half ;  then,  making  a  second  fold 
to  come  within  about  4  or  5  inches  of  that  already  folded,  turn 
this  fold  entirely  over  that  already  folded.  Take  the  exposed 
guys  and  draw  them  taut  across  each  other,  turn  bundle  over  on 
the  under  guy,  cross  guys  on  top  of  bundle,  and  draw  tight. 
Turn  bundle  over  on  the  crossed  guys  and  tie  lengthwise. 

AVhen  properly  tied  and  pressed  together  this  will  make  a 
package  11  by  23  by  34  inches,  requiring  about  8,853  cubic  inches 
to  store  or  pack. 

Stencil  the  organization  designation  on  the  lower  half  of  the 
middle  width  of  canvas  in  the  back  wall. 


294 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 


Co't^ a ny  in  L  in  e,    (^i% ^n  tj ) 


?/Ate  I 


■riL 

ESuPScr       tgMStr 


^ 


I  i  I  I  M  I  !  I  I  I  I  I  I  M  I  !  I  I  I  I  I  I  ;  I  M  I  !  I  I  I  !  I  I  I  i  I  I  M  I  I  I  I  I  I  III  Ml  I  I  I  M  !  l-TTri 

aaBaaaaDDncaBBaEEaaaBcaaacDaD  m-rSi  o^ 


Ctnjiany  in  Co/.  o/'S^uodi  fjlifmtdj  P/ate  ^. 

I  f       1        ^  S 


2"  au.r,rtiwi'/»<Wr» 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS,   1917. 


295 


PUt(  g. 


*..- 

«««® 


e<s®a      V5ii>i      *>i!'in     K^fys     <vS>'Vi     ®^®<x>     *-'?^(5) '  ~^A)Vi     «>®®a>     *®«xs>      eS'i'Ti      es®® 

OJ'tHj        CCSCv        O®©?        OOS®        C«(!X5        OdXS-S)        ©Ol*        9«i®®        9C(S»5)        O-D®®        «®S«i        OSO® 
OO        OCi        0<$        03        49        <50        C 9        OO        90        OS        OO        QO 

lcl^©0©ich»Hci©lc]|GlEl|l 

lill'lllilli'fillli^llfi 

_.g     Q     s     a     g     g     a     a     s     E     a     a 


7>yateJt 


:&:  rS 


1  ywn 

J... 

, #!  :1:  :1:  &  :1: 

•  M©     s^A®     oM®     oM®  ©M'5     ©U.®     G.'J,® 

ilAifi     o'Ao     o'A®     gIa;®  o|A;<s     o;Ajo»     o^'© 


•-t'  ©  ©     e9'» 


^     /  ^^-^  ^3    F®  ^ 

i^To    *  ®     coo   e®  0     ce 


29C 


V/Ay  ^poiiSsjo  -/oj  ut  vj 


MACHINE-GUN  DRILL  REGULATIONS.   1917. 


297 


SupSje 

o 


Th.L'<'t. 


O 


O 


Plcte  W 


m    WW 
0    0 


DD 
D[ 

S 


DD      DD 

DD      D[ 


Hc/d 


Tram. 


ICo.CJcrK 

Z  Tvti 


Comiat 


AMMUNIT/OA/  5UPPL  Y 


Plate  W 


»     k      %      i\  i|i      ill      ill      \     ♦      lit      lii      i!i   cws 

O  a  O  O  O  O  S€C.L€AO£f?S 

<D  <D  ©  PLATCCA/LS/KOfRS 
*                                                             rt                                                             ft                            SPAff£  ffU/i'B 

D     OD     a  a     o'D     a     a     aa     a  Bi:LT.^it/.//vGCTAT/of(i> 


AMMi/NlT'Or^  CARTS 


iSPARiGUJI/    D 


J     COrnBATTRMN 
TfiMNUZUZ. 


JAAu.^  dXoiA.  X{>^jJU . 


ITTLE  CONDITION 

Make  Building  Use  Only 


19  4 


